OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION · Nissan North America,Inc. Consumer Affairs Department...

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2021 TITANOWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGWARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passengervehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you tochemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoidbreathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except asnecessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated areaand wear gloves or wash your hands frequently whenservicing your vehicle. For more information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un-derstand the operation and maintenanceof your vehicle so that you may enjoy manymiles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.Please read through this manual beforeoperating your vehicle.A separate Warranty Information Book-let explains details about the warrantiescovering your vehicle. The “Maintenanceand schedules” section of this manualexplains details about maintaining andservicing your vehicle. Additionally, aseparate Customer Care/Lemon LawBooklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-solve any concerns you may have withyour vehicle, and clarify your rights un-der your state's lemon law.A NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or haveany questions, they will be glad to assistyou with the extensive resources availableto them.In addition to factory-installed options,your vehicle may also be equipped withadditional accessories installed prior to de-livery. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which your ve-hicle is equipped. It is important that youfamiliarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con-cerning proper use of such accessoriesprior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-cessory. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for details concerning theparticular accessories with which your ve-hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner's Manual carefully. This will ensurefamiliarity with controls and maintenancerequirements assisting you in the safe op-eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS!Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!• NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.• ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-tures or taking other actions thatcould distract you.

• ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-propriate child restraint systems.Pre-teen children should be seated inthe rear seat (if so equipped).

• ALWAYS provide information aboutthe proper use of vehicle safety fea-tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the be-ginning of the applicable sections/items.As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate 4-wheeldrive models correctly may result in lossof control or a collision. For additionalinformation, see “Driving safety precau-tions” (P. 5-11).

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVINGThis vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passengercar because it has a higher center ofgravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.For additional information, see “On-pavement and off-road driving precau-tions” (P. 5-8), “Avoiding collision androllover” (P. 5-9) and “Driving safetyprecautions” (P. 5-11).

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLEThis vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect its perfor-mance, safety, emissions or durabilityand may even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting frommodifications may not be covered un-der NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that usesthe port during normal driving, for ex-ample remote insurance companymonitoring, remote vehicle diagnos-tics, telematics or engine reprogram-ming, may cause interference or dam-age to vehicle systems. We do notrecommend or endorse the use of anyaftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un-less specifically approved by NISSAN.The vehicle warranty may not coverdamage caused by any aftermarketplug-in device.

This manual includes information for allfeatures and equipment available on thismodel. Features and equipment in your ve-hicle may vary depending on model, trimlevel, options selected, order, date of pro-duction, region or availability. Therefore,you may find information about features orequipment that are not included or in-stalled on your vehicle.All information, specifications and illustra-tions in this manual are those in effect atthe time of printing. NISSAN reserves theright to change specifications, perfor-mance, design or component supplierswithout notice and without obligation.From time to time, NISSAN may update orrevise this manual to provide Owners withthe most accurate information currentlyavailable. Please carefully read and retainwith this manual all revision updates sentto you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-sions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and anyupdates can also be found in the Ownersection of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you havequestions concerning any information in

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual.They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause death or se-rious personal injury. To avoid or re-duce the risk, the procedures must befollowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence ofa hazard that could cause minor ormoderate personal injury or damage toyour vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,the procedures must be followedcarefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not dothis” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in anillustration, it means the arrow points to thefront of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar tothese call attention to an item in theillustration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORYSome vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-teries, may contain perchlorate material.The following advisory is provided: “Per-chlorate Material – special handling mayapply. For additional information, referto www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

© 2020 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.All rights reserved. No part of this Owner'sManual may be reproduced or stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted in anyform, or by any means, electronic, me-chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-erwise, without the prior written permis-sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005

NISSAN CARES . . .Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and yourNISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and serviceneeds.

However, if there is something that yourNISSAN dealer cannot assist you with oryou would like to provide NISSAN directlywith comments or questions, please con-tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-ment using our toll-free number:For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will askfor the following information:– Your name, address, and telephone

number– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on thedriver's side)

– Date of purchase– Current odometer reading– Your NISSAN dealer's name– Your comments or questionsOR

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-tion at:For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003or via e-mail at:[email protected]

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5or via e-mail at:[email protected]

If you prefer, visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofcontents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

1. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (rear out-board seats) (if so equipped) (P. 1-16)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)

3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-11)4. Front seat belts with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder height adjuster(P. 1-16, 1-82)

5. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-53)6. Occupant classification sensors (weight

sensors) (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)7. Front seats (P. 1-2)8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)9. Rear seats (if so equipped) (P. 1-16)10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (if so equipped)(P. 1-28)

11. Top tether strap anchor (if so equipped)(P. 1-28)

Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

NOTE:

Crew Cab model shown, King Cab® modelsimilar.

LII2479

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power windows (P. 2-82)2. Windshield (P. 8-22)3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41)4. Engine hood (P. 3-24)

5. Front view camera (if so equipped)(P. 4-11)

6. Front fog lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system(if so equipped) (P. 2-50)LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)system (if so equipped) (P. 2-51)Front sonar sensors (if so equipped)(P. 5-124)

7. Headlight and turn signal switches(P. 2-44, 2-52)Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system(if so equipped) (P. 2-50)LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)system (if so equipped) (P. 2-51)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-35)Flat tire (P. 6-3)Tire chains (P. 8-42)

9. Mirrors (P. 3-30)Side view camera (if so equipped)(P. 4-11)

10. Door locks (P. 3-4)NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (P. 3-9)


NOTE:

Crew Cab model shown, King Cab® modelsimilar.LII2657

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna (P. 4-42)2. Cargo lamp (P. 2-53)3. Rear sliding window (P. 2-85)

4. Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped)(P. 2-80)

5. Under rail bed lamps (if so equipped)(P. 2-53)

6. Truck box (P. 3-35)Tailgate (P. 3-35)Rearview camera (P. 4-10)

7. Towing (P. 10-33)8. Rear sonar sensors (P. 5-124)9. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)10. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-24)

Fuel-filler door (P. 3-24)Fuel recommendation (P. 10-4)

11. Child safety rear door lock(if so equipped) (P. 3-4)


NOTE:


LII2416

EXTERIOR REAR


1. Interior lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-88)2. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-90)

Console light (if so equipped) (P. 2-89)3. Sun visors (P. 3-29)

4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-30)5. Glove box (P. 2-74)6. Console box (if so equipped) (P. 2-74)

Cup holders (P. 2-77)

7. Spare tire tools location (P. 6-3)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

NOTE:


LII2480

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Vents (P. 4-28)2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-52)

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control*Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System*Vehicle information display controls(P. 2-23)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)Horn (P. 2-53)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-12)Vehicle information display (P. 2-23)

6. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)(P. 5-50)Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches(if so equipped) (P. 5-52)

7. Shift lever (P. 5-18)Tow mode switch (P. 2-63)

8. Audio controls*9. Center display (P. 4-10)10. Climate controls (P. 4-28)11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-53)12. Glove box (P. 2-74)13. Front passenger supplemental knee air

bag (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)14. Front passenger air bag status light

(if so equipped) (P. 1-64)15. Power outlet (P. 2-66)16. Climate control seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)Heated front seat switches(if so equipped) (P. 2-55)

17. Heated steering wheel switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-57)Warning systems switch (P. 2-58)

18. USB ports*19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

LII2656

INSTRUMENT PANEL


20. Parking Aids system switch (P. 2-63)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-59)

21. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)(if so equipped) (P. 2-64)

22. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)(P. 5-113)

23. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13)24. Driver supplemental knee air bag light

(if so equipped) (P. 1-53)25. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-27)26. Parking brake (P. 5-24)27. Hood release (P. 3-24)28. Headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-44)Power inverter switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-62)Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-53)Electronic locking rear differential(E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-61)Hill descent control system switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)

29. Headlight switch (P. 2-44)Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)Instrument brightness controlswitches (P. 2-51)Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)

*Refer to the separate NissanConnect®Owner’s ManualRefer to the page number indicated inparenthesis for operating details.


5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine)(non-XD model)1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-15)2. Fuse box (P. 8-24)3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-21)8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-24)9. Drive belt location (P. 8-19)10. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)11. Battery (P. 8-16)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LDI3292

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine)(XD model)1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-15)2. Fuse box (P. 8-24)3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-21)8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-24)9. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)10. Drive belt location (P. 8-19)11. Battery (P. 8-16)12. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)Refer to the page number indicated inparentheses for operating details.

LDI3293


Warning/Indicatorlight (red)

Name Page

Automatic Trans-mission Parkwarning light (

model)

2-13

or

Brake warninglight

2-14

Charge warninglight

2-15

Electric shift con-trol system warn-ing light

2-15

Warning/Indicatorlight (red)

Name Page

Engine oil pres-sure warning light

2-15

Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL)

2-15

Master warninglight

2-16

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-16

Security indicatorlight

2-16

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-16

Warning/Indicator

light(yellow)

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

2-17

Automatic Emer-gency Braking(AEB) with Pedes-trian Detectionsystem warninglight

2-17

Automatic Trans-mission checkwarning light

2-17

Electronic lockingrear differential(E-Lock) systemON indicator light(if so equipped)

2-18

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS


Warning/Indicator

light(yellow)

Name Page

Front passengerair bag statuslight (if soequipped)

2-18

Hill descent con-trol system ONindicator light (ifso equipped)

2-18

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-18

Malfunction Indi-cator Light (MIL)

2-15

Master warninglight

2-16

Warning/Indicator

light(yellow)

Name Page

Rear AutomaticBraking (RAB)warning light

2-21

Slip indicator light 2-21

Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) OFFindicator light

2-21

Warning/Indicator

light(other)

Name Page

Front fog light in-dicator light (if soequipped) (green)

2-22

Warning/Indicator

light(other)

Name Page

High Beam Assistindicator light(green)

2-22

High beam indi-cator light (blue)

2-22

Side light andheadlight indica-tor light (green)

2-22

TOW mode ONindicator light(green)

2-22

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights (green)

2-22


1 Safety-Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual bench seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3Front manual captain’s chair seatadjustment (if so equipped forpassenger seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Front power captain’s chair seatadjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Front armrests (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Rear armrests (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Head restraints/Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Adjustable head restraint/headrestcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Removable (without Dual HeadRestraint/Headrest Rear SeatInfotainment (RSI) System only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19

Three-point type seat belt withretractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Top tether anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Rear-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32Rear-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using the seat belts —rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40Forward-facing child restraintinstallation using the seat belts —passenger seat and center seat(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . 1-53Precautions on SRS (with NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53Precautions on SRS (without NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag androof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systems . . . . . . 1-79

Driver and passenger supplementalknee air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80Seat belt with pretensioner(s)(front seats and rear outboard seats) . . . . . . . . 1-82Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-83Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . 1-83Repair and replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . 1-84

WARNING

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

• For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back and upright in the seat withboth feet on the floor and adjust theseat properly. For additional infor-mation, see “Precautions on seat beltusage” (P. 1-16).

• After adjustment, gently rock in theseat to make sure it is securelylocked.

• Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls ormake the vehicle move. Unattendedchildren could become involved inserious accidents.

• To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, do notleave children, people who requirethe assistance of others or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. Additionally,the temperature inside a closed ve-hicle on a warm day can quickly be-come high enough to cause a signifi-cant risk of injury or death to peopleand pets.

• Do not adjust the driver’s seat whiledriving so full attention may be givento vehicle operation. The seat maymove suddenly and could cause lossof control of the vehicle.

• The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort.Seat belts are most effective whenthe passenger sits well back andstraight up in the seat. If the seatbackis reclined, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and being injured isincreased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-ally. For additional information about ad-justing the seats, refer to the steps outlinedin this section.

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slidethe seat forward or backward to the de-sired position. Release the lever to lock theseat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever upand lean back. To bring the seatback for-ward, pull the lever up and lean your bodyforward. Release the lever to lock the seat-back in position.The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional informa-tion, see “Precautions on seat belt usage”(P. 1-16). Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicleis stopped and the shift lever is in the P(Park) position.

LRS2559 LRS2560

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Front center bench seatadjustmentThe front center bench seat folds down bypulling on the strap. It does not have ad-justments in between the upright and thefolded down positions. It is either in seatingposition or armrest position.

FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN’S CHAIRSEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equippedfor passenger seat)Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-ally. For additional information about ad-justing the seats, refer to the steps outlinedin this section.

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slidethe seat forward or backward to the de-sired position. Release the lever to lock theseat in position.

LRS2787 LRS2559


RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever upand lean back. To bring the seatback for-ward, pull the lever up and lean your bodyforward. Release the lever to lock the seat-back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional informa-tion, see “Precautions on seat belt usage”(P. 1-16). Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicleis stopped and the shift lever is in the P(Park) position.

LRS2560


FRONT POWER CAPTAIN’S CHAIRSEAT ADJUSTMENT (if soequipped)

Operating tips• The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 secondsthen reactivate the switch.

• Do not operate the power seat switch fora long period of time when the engine isoff. This will discharge the battery.

For additional information, see “Memoryseat(s)” (P. 3-39).

Forward and backwardMoving the switch as shown will slide theseat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch as shown until thedesired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtainproper seat belt fit. For additional informa-tion, see “Precautions on seat belt usage”(P. 1-16). Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicleis stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

LRS2743


Seat lifter (driver's seat)Move the switch as shown to adjust theangle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides ad-justable lower back support to the driver.Push the switch as shown to adjust theseat lumbar area.

FRONT ARMRESTS (if so equipped)To use the center armrest on the frontbench seat, pull on the strap in betweenthe front passenger and center seats andfold it down to the resting position.

LRS2744 LRS2270 LRS0425


REAR ARMRESTS (if so equipped)To use the center armrest on the benchseats, pull on the tab in the center of theseat and fold it down as shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATINGWARNING

• Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area or on the rear seats whenthey are in the fold-down position. Ina collision, people riding in these ar-eas without proper restraints aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.

• Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat belt properly.

• Do not allow more than one personto use the same seat belt.

• Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.– Make sure that the seat path is

clear before moving the seat.– Be careful not to allow hands or

feet to get caught or pinched inthe seat.

• Head restraints/headrests should beadjusted properly as they may pro-vide significant protection againstinjury in an accident. Always replaceand adjust them properly if they havebeen removed for any reason.

• If the head restraints/headrests areremoved for any reason, they shouldbe securely stored to prevent themfrom causing injury to passengers ordamage to the vehicle in case of sud-den braking or an accident.

• When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latchedposition. If they are not completelysecured, passengers may be injuredin an accident or sudden stop.

• Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.

LRS2748


Folding the rear bench seat upTo fold the rear bench seat up for storagecapacity behind the front seats or to re-move the jacking tools from the storagearea:1. Lift the front of the seat cushion up.

2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion to-ward the back of the vehicle until it locksin place.

3. Repeat this process to raise and securethe seat cushion on the other side of thevehicle for maximum storage capacity.

To return the rear bench seat to a seatingposition, pull the latch on the bottom of theseat cushions to release the seat from thelocked position. Make sure to properlypush the seat cushion down into place.

LRS2766 LRS2767 LRS2768


WARNING

• When the vehicle is being used tocarry cargo, properly secure all cargoto help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higherthan the seatbacks. In a sudden stopor collision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

• Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat belt properly.Never ride in the rear seat unless theseat bottom cushions are in place.

• When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latchedposition. If they are not completelysecured, passengers may be injuredin an accident or sudden stop.

Folding the rear bench seat downThe rear bench seat can be tilted forwardto access the child restraint anchor pointlocations.To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strapup O1 and tilt the seatback. The child re-straint anchor points O2 can be accessedbehind the rear bench seatback.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper re-straints could result in serious injury ordeath in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0920


WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplementthe other vehicle safety systems. Theymay provide additional protectionagainst injury in certain rear end colli-sions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly,as specified in this section. Check theadjustment after someone else usesthe seat. Do not attach anything to thehead restraint/headrest stalks, exceptfor Genuine Nissan Accessories specifi-cally tested for use with the vehicle’shead restraint/headrest stalks. Do notremove the head restraint/headrest.Do not use the seat if the headrestraint/headrest has been removed.If the head restraint/headrest was re-moved, reinstall and properly adjustthe head restraint/headrest before anoccupant uses the seating position.Failure to follow these instructions canreduce the effectiveness of the headrestraints/headrests. This may in-crease the risk of serious injury ordeath in a collision.

The illustration shows the seating posi-tions equipped with headrestraints/headrests.� Indicates the seating position isequipped with a head restraint.� Indicates the seating position isequipped with a headrest.+ Indicates the seating position is notequipped with a head restraint or headrest(if applicable).• Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

• Adjustable head restraints/headrestshave multiple notches along the stalk(s) tolock them in a desired adjustment position.

• The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notch tosecure them to the seat frame.

• Proper Adjustment:– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center ofyour ear is approximately level with thecenter of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher thanthe recommended alignment, placethe head restraint/headrest at thehighest position.

LRS2020Front bucket seat

LRS2633Front bench seat

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS


• If the head restraint/headrest has beenremoved, ensure that it is reinstalled andlocked in place before riding in that des-ignated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTRAINT/HEADRESTCOMPONENTS1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2300 LRS2299


REMOVEUse the following procedure to remove thehead restraint/headrest:1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrestfrom the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop-erly in a secure place so it is not loose inthe vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrestraint/headrest before an occupantuses the seating position.

REMOVABLE (without Dual HeadRestraint/Headrest Rear SeatInfotainment (RSI) SYSTEM ONLY)

CAUTION

Do not remove head restraint/headrestfrom vehicles equipped with Dual HeadRestraint/Headrest Rear Seat Infotain-ment (RSI) System. Removal may dam-age the system wiring.

LRS2302 LRS2302


INSTALL1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks

with the holes in the seat. Make sure thatthe head restraint/headrest is facing thecorrect direction. The stalk with thenotch (notches) O1 must be installed inthe hole with the lock knob O2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses theseating position.

ADJUSTFor adjustable head restraint/headrestAdjust the head restraint/headrest so thecenter is level with the center of your ears. Ifyour ear position is still higher than therecommended alignment, place the headrestraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrestMake sure the head restraint/headrest ispositioned so the lock knob is engaged inthe notch before riding in that designatedseating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351


RaiseTo raise the head restraint/headrest, pull itup.Make sure the head restraint/headrest ispositioned so the lock knob is engaged inthe notch before riding in that designatedseating position.

LowerTo lower, push and hold the lock knob andpush the head restraint/headrest down.Make sure the head restraint/headrest ispositioned so the lock knob is engaged inthe notch before riding in that designatedseating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306


PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properlyadjusted and you are sitting upright andwell back in your seat with both feet on thefloor, your chances of being injured or killedin a collision and/or the severity of injurymay be greatly reduced. NISSAN stronglyencourages you and all of your passengersto buckle up every time you drive, even ifyour seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts beworn at all times when a vehicle is beingdriven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING

• Every person who drives or rides inthis vehicle should use a seat belt atall times. Children should be in therear seats and in an appropriaterestraint.

WARNING

• The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do somay reduce the effectiveness of theentire restraint system and increasethe chance or severity of injury in anaccident. Serious injury or death canoccur if the seat belt is not wornproperly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING

• Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck.The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

• Position the lap belt as low and snugas possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOTTHE WAIST. A lap belt worn too highcould increase the risk of internal in-juries in an accident.

• Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-curely fastened to the proper buckle.

• Do not wear the seat belt inside outor twisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

• Do not allow more than one personto use the same seat belt.

• Never carry more people in the ve-hicle than there are seat belts.

• If the seat belt warning light glowscontinuously while the ignition isturned ON with all doors closed andall seat belts fastened, it may indi-cate a malfunction in the system.Have the system checked. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

• No changes should be made to theseat belt system. For example, do notmodify the seat belt, add material, orinstall devices that may change theseat belt routing or tension. Doing somay affect the operation of the seatbelt system. Modifying or tamperingwith the seat belt system may resultin serious personal injury.

• Once seat belt pretensioner(s) haveactivated, they cannot be reused andmust be replaced together with theretractor. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

• All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any colli-sion. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.NISSAN recommends that all seatbelt assemblies in use during a colli-sion be replaced unless the collisionwas minor and the belts show nodamage and continue to operateproperly. Seat belt assemblies not inuse during a collision should also beinspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation isnoted.

• All child restraints and attachinghardware should be inspected afterany collision. Always follow the re-straint manufacturer's inspection in-structions and replacement recom-mendations. The child restraintsshould be replaced if they aredamaged.

SSS0014


SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHTBoth the driver’s and passenger’s frontseats are equipped with a seat belt warn-ing light. The warning light, located on theinstrument panel, will show the status ofthe driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warninglight will not light up if the seat is notoccupied.For additional information, see “Warninglights, indicator lights and audible remind-ers” (P. 2-12).

NOTE:

The rear seats are equipped with a seatbelt warning message in the vehicle in-formation display.For additional information, see “Vehicle in-formation display” (P. 2-23).

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnantwomen use seat belts. The seat belt shouldbe worn snug and always position the lapbelt as low as possible around the hips, notthe waist. Place the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Never runthe lap/shoulder belt over your abdominalarea. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured personsuse seat belts. Check with your doctor forspecific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

• Every person who drives or rides inthis vehicle should use a seat belt atall times.

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and re-ceive neck or other serious injuries.You could also slide under the lap beltand receive serious internal injuries.

• For the most effective protectionwhen the vehicle is in motion, theseat should be upright. Always sitwell back and upright in the seat withboth feet on the floor and adjust theseat belt properly.

LRS0786


• Do not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) mode seat belts. Ifthe seat belt becomes wrappedaround a child’s neck with the ALRmode activated, the child can be se-riously injured or killed if the seat beltretracts and becomes tight. This canoccur even if the vehicle is parked.Unbuckle the seat belt to release thechild. If the seat belt cannot be un-buckled or is already unbuckled, re-lease the child by cutting the seatbelt with a suitable tool (such as aknife or scissors) to release the seatbelt.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, see “Seats” (P. 1-2).

LRS2559Manual front seat shown

(if so equipped)


2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-tor and insert the tongue into the buckleOA until you hear and feel the latchengage.• The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact. Aslow pulling motion permits theseat belt to move and allows yousome freedom of movement in theseat.

• If the seat belt cannot be pulledfrom its fully retracted position,firmly pull the belt and release it.Then smoothly pull the belt out ofthe retractor.

LRS2743Front power captain’s chair seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2674


3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips OB as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack OC . Besure the shoulder belt is routed overyour shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat, front center seat(if so equipped), and the rear seating posi-tions three-point seat belts have twomodes of operation:• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-tend and retract to allow the driver andpassengers some freedom of movementin the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly orduring certain impacts.The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locksthe seat belt for child restraint installation.When the ALR mode is activated, the seatbelt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from thebuckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-turns to the ELR mode after the seat beltfully retracts. For additional information,see “Child restraints” (P. 1-28).The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During nor-mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALRmode should not be activated. If it is ac-tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seatbelt tension. It can also change the op-eration of the front passenger air bag.For additional information, see “Supple-mental Restraint System (SRS)” (P. 1-53).

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-tain that the seatbacks are completelysecured in the latched position. If theyare not completely secured, passen-gers may be injured in an accident orsudden stop.

LRS2675


Unfastening the seat beltsTo unfasten the seat belt, press the buttonon the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati-cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lockseat belt movement by two separatemethods:• When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor• When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seatbelts, check the operation as follows:• Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck, get the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service, or to learn more about seatbelt operation.

Center of rear seatSelecting correct set of seat belts:The rear center seat belt buckle is identifiedby the CENTER mark OA . The rear centerseat belt tongue can be fastened only intothe rear center seat belt buckle.

WRS0139 LRS3308


Shoulder belt height adjustment(front seats)The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best for you. Foradditional information, see “Precautions onseat belt usage” (P. 1-16). To adjust, pull outthe adjustment button O1 and move theshoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-tion O2 , so the belt passes over the centerof the shoulder. The belt should be awayfrom your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder. Release the adjustment but-ton to lock the shoulder belt anchor intoposition.

WARNING

• After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move theshoulder belt anchor up and down tomake sure it is securely fixed inposition.

• The shoulder belt anchor heightshould be adjusted to the positionbest for you. Failure to do so may re-duce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in anaccident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, itis not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extenderthat is compatible with the installed seatbelts is available for purchase. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)of length and may be used for either thedriver or front passenger seating position.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for assistance with purchasing anextender if an extender is required.

WARNING

• Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,made by the same company whichmade the original equipment seatbelts, should be used with NISSANseat belts.

• Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary usecould result in serious personal injuryin the event of an accident.

• Never use seat belt extenders to in-stall child restraints. If the child re-straint is not secured properly, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE• To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution rec-ommended for cleaning upholstery orcarpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allowthe seat belts to dry in the shade. Do notallow the seat belts to retract until theyare completely dry.

• If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul-der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

LRS0242


• Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, suchas buckles, tongues, retractors, flexiblewires and anchors, work properly. If looseparts, deterioration, cuts or other dam-age on the webbing is found, the entireseat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with theseat belts. Most seating positions areequipped with Automatic Locking Re-tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seatbelt becomes wrapped around a child’sneck with the ALR mode activated, thechild can be seriously injured or killed ifthe seat belt retracts and becomestight. This can occur even if the vehicleis parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-lease the child. If the seat belt cannotbe unbuckled or is already unbuckled,release the child by cutting the seatbelt with a suitable tool (such as a knifeor scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protectthem. They need to be properlyrestrained.In addition to the general information inthis manual, child safety information isavailable from many other sources, includ-ing doctors, teachers, government trafficsafety offices, and community organiza-tions. Every child is different, so be sure tolearn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-straint systems:• Rear-facing child restraints• Forward-facing child restraints• Booster seatsThe proper restraint depends on the child'ssize. Generally, infants up to about 1 yearand less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placedin rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for chil-dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-straints and are at least 1 year old. Boosterseats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-tection. The vehicle's seat belts maynot fit them properly. The shoulder beltmay come too close to the face or neck.The lap belt may not fit over their smallhip bones. In an accident, an improp-erly fitting seat belt could cause seriousor fatal injury. Always use appropriatechild restraints.

CHILD SAFETY


All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require the use of approved childrestraints for infants and small children. Foradditional information, see “Child re-straints” (P. 1-28).A child restraint may be secured in the ve-hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-chors and Tethers for CHildren) system orwith the vehicle seat belt. For additionalinformation, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-28).NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rearseat . Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.This is especially important becauseyour vehicle has a supplemental re-straint system (air bag system) for thefront passenger. For additional informa-tion, see “Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem (SRS)” (P. 1-53).

INFANTSInfants up to at least 1 year old should beplaced in a rear-facing child restraint.NISSAN recommends that infants beplaced in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.You should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer's instructions for installation anduse.

SMALL CHILDRENChildren that are over 1 year old and weighat least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in arear-facing child restraint as long as pos-sible up to the height or weight limit of thechild restraint. Children who outgrow theheight or weight limit of the rear-facingchild restraint and are at least 1 year oldshould be secured in a forward-facing childrestraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-facturer’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommen-dations. NISSAN recommends that smallchildren be placed in child restraints thatcomply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose achild restraint that fits your vehicle and al-ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDRENChildren should remain in a forward-facingchild restraint with a harness until theyreach the maximum height or weight limitallowed by the child restraintmanufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weightlimit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommendsthat the child be placed in a commerciallyavailable booster seat to obtain properseat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, thebooster seat should raise the child so thatthe shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the chest and the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder. The shoulder beltshould not cross the neck or face andshould not fall off the shoulder. The lap beltshould lie snugly across the lower hips orupper thighs, not the abdomen. A boosterseat can only be used in seating positionsthat have a three-point type seat belt. Thebooster seat should fit the vehicle seat andhave a label certifying that it complies withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.A booster seat should be used until thechild can pass the seat belt fit test below:• Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?• Is the child able to sit without slouching?• Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on thefloor?


• Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lapbelt low and snug across the hips andshoulder belt across mid-chest andshoulder)?

• Is the child able to use the properly ad-justed head restraint/headrest?

• Will the child be able to stay in position forthe entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques-tions, the child should remain in a boosterseat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may followdifferent guidelines. Check local andstate regulations to confirm your child isusing the correct restraint system beforetraveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in thecargo area. The child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a sudden stop orcollision.

LRS2690


PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result in se-rious injury or death of a child or otherpassengers in a sudden stop or collision:– The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol-low all of the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions for instal-lation and use.

– Infants and children should neverbe held on anyone's lap. Even thestrongest adult cannot resist theforces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around botha child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that childrenare safer when properly re-strained in the rear seat than inthe front seat. If you must install aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, see “Forward-

facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts — passengerseat and center seat” (P. 1-45).

– Even with the NISSAN AdvancedAir Bag System (if so equipped),never install a rear-facing child re-straint in the front seat. An inflat-ing air bag could seriously injureor kill a child. A rear-facing childrestraint must only be used in therear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-straint that will fit the child andvehicle. Some child restraints maynot fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used to at-tach adult seat belts, or otheritems or equipment to the vehicle.Doing so could damage the childrestraint anchorages. The child re-straint will not be properly in-stalled using the damaged an-chorage, and a child could beseriously injured or killed in acollision.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS


– Never use the anchor points foradult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in thefront passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the childrestraint.

– Infants and children should al-ways be placed in an appropriatechild restraint while in the vehicle.

• When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH sys-tem or a seat belt. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose objects can injure oc-cupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seatingsurface and buckles before placing achild in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universalchild restraint anchor system, referred toas the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system. Some child restraintsinclude rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to these an-

chors. For additional information, see“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system” (P. 1-30).If you do not have a LATCH compatiblechild restraint, the vehicle seat belts can beused.Several manufacturers offer child re-straints for infants and children of varioussizes. When selecting any child restraint,keep the following points in mind:• Choose only a restraint with a label certi-

fying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

• Check the child restraint in your vehicle tobe sure it is compatible with the vehicle'sseat and seat belt system.

• If the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in the childrestraint and check the various adjust-ments to be sure the child restraint iscompatible with your child. Choose achild restraint that is designed for yourchild's height and weight. Always followall recommended procedures.

• If the combined weight of the child andchild restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg),you may use either the LATCH anchors orthe seat belt to install the child restraint(not both at the same time).

• If the combined weight of the child andchild restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not thelower anchors) to install the childrestraint.

• Be sure to follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions forinstallation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approvedchild restraint at all times while the ve-hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-quires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to thedesignated anchor point on the vehicle.


LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with special an-chor points that are used with LATCH sys-tem compatible child restraints. This sys-tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIXor ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seatbelt to secure the child restraint unless thecombined weight of the child and child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and child restraintis greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to followthe child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation.The LATCH anchor points are provided toinstall child restraints in the rear outboardseating positions only. Do not attempt toinstall a child restraint in the center positionusing the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position usingthe LATCH lower anchors. The childrestraint will not be securedproperly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower an-chor area. Feel to make sure there

are no obstructions over the an-chors such as seat belt webbing orseat cushion material. The child re-straint will not be secured properly ifthe lower anchors are obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used to attach adult seatbelts, or other items or equipment tothe vehicle. Doing so could damage thechild restraint anchorages. The childrestraint will not be properly installedusing the damaged anchorage, and achild could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

LRS2859LATCH system lower anchor locations


LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located asshown. A label is attached to the seatbackto help you locate the LATCH loweranchors.

Installing child restraint LATCHlower anchor attachmentsLATCH compatible child restraints includetwo rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to two an-chors located at certain seating positionsin your vehicle. With this system, you do nothave to use a vehicle seat belt to secure thechild restraint. Check your child restraint fora label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in theinstructions provided by the child restraintmanufacturer.

LRS3036LATCH lower anchor location

LRS3148LATCH lower anchor point locations

LRS0661LATCH webbing-mounted attachment


When installing a child restraint, carefullyread and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint.

TOP TETHER ANCHOR POINTLOCATIONSAnchor points are located in the followinglocations:• Behind the rear bench seat as shown.• On the back of the passenger and center

seats (King Cab® models if so equipped)as shown.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCHFor additional information, see all Warningsand Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and“Child restraints” (P. 1-28) before installing achild restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

LRS0662LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0393 LRS2879King Cab® models (if so equipped)


to follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint in the rear bench seats usingthe LATCH system:1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.Check to make sure the LATCH attach-ment is properly attached to the loweranchors.

LRS2997Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

LRS2996Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2


3. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your hand to com-press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while tightening the webbing ofthe anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint or try installing by using the

vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision.

For additional information, see all Warningsand Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and“Child restraints” (P. 1-28) before installing achild restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

LRS0673Rear-facing – step 3



the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.

WRS0256Rear-facing – step 1



3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt re-tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraintmode). It reverts to the ELR mode whenthe seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up onthe shoulder belt to remove any slack inthe belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rearwardfirmly in the center of the child restraintto compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on theseat belt.





6. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Tryto tug it forward and check to see if thebelt holds the restraint in place. If therestraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You mayneed to try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types ofvehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior to eachuse. If the seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCHFor additional information, see all Warningsand Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and“Child restraints” (P. 1-28) before installing achild restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint in the rear benchseats using the LATCH system:1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer's instructions.



2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.Check to make sure the LATCH attach-ment is properly attached to the loweranchors.If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap to thetether anchor point. For additional infor-mation, see “Installing top tether strap”(P. 1-40).

Do not install child restraints that requirethe use of a top tether strap in seatingpositions that do not have a top tetheranchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the child re-

straint is removed. For additional infor-mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”(P. 1-11).If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper child re-straint fit, try another seating position ora different child restraint.

LRS2995Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 2

LRS2994Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2


4. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing-mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your knee to com-press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while tightening the webbing ofthe anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according tothe manufacturer's instructions to re-move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the LATCH attachmentpath. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the LATCHattachment as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 6.

LRS0671Forward-facing – step 4

WRS0697Forward-facing – step 6


Installing top tether strapThe child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withthe LATCH lower anchor attachments.First, secure the child restraint with theLATCH lower anchors (rear bench out-boarding seating positions only).

Rear bench seatOUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information, see “Headrestraints/headrests” (P. 1-11) for headrestraint/headrest adjustment, removaland installation information.

2. Position the top tether strap over theseatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-chor point as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according tothe manufacturer’s instructions to re-move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-ing a top tether strap, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

WARNING


FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS — REAR BENCHSEAT

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision.

LRS2769Rear bench seat

�A Anchor points


For additional information, see all Warningsand Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and“Child restraints” (P. 1-28) before installing achild restraint.Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seatbelt in the rear seats:1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position.Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the child re-straint is removed. For additional infor-mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”(P. 1-11).If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper child re-straint fit, try another seating position ora different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap to thetether anchor point (rear seat installa-tion only). For additional information, see“Installing top tether strap” (P. 1-40).




4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt re-tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraintmode). It reverts to ELR mode when theseat belt is fully retracted.





6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the child re-straint with your knee to compress thevehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer's instructions to removeany slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Tryto tug it forward and check to see if theseat belt holds the restraint in place. Ifthe restraint is not secure, tighten theseat belt as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.




Installing top tether strapThe child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withseat belts.First, secure the child restraint with the seatbelt.

Rear bench seatOUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information, see “Headrestraints/headrests” (P. 1-11).

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.



CENTER SEATING POSITION1. Position the top tether strap as shown.




WARNING


LRS2769

�A Anchor points


FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS — PASSENGERSEAT AND CENTER SEAT (if soequipped)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. For additional informa-tion, see “Front passenger air bag andstatus light” (P. 1-64).

For additional information, see all Warningsand Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and“Child restraints” (P. 1-28) before installing achild restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-bined weight of the child and the child re-straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-bined weight of the child and the childrestraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), usethe vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-chors) to install the child restraint. Be sureto follow the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions for installation.Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seatbelt:1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position.Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions.The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the child re-straint is removed. For additional infor-mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”(P. 1-11).If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper child re-straint fit, try another seating position ora different child restraint.


3. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel the latchengage. Be sure to follow the child re-straint manufacturer’s instructions forbelt routing.If the child restraint is equipped with atop tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap to thetether anchor point. For additional infor-mation, see “Installing top tether strap”(P. 1-48).


4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt re-tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraintmode). It reverts to ELR mode when theseat belt is fully retracted.





6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the child re-straint with your knee to compress thevehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer's instructions to removeany slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the childrestraint near the seat belt path. Thechild restraint should not move morethan 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Tryto tug it forward and check to see if theseat belt holds the restraint in place. Ifthe restraint is not secure, tighten theseat belt as necessary, or put the re-straint in another seat and test it again.You may need to try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.





9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in thefront passenger seat, place the ignitionswitch in the ON position. The frontpassenger air bag status light (if soequipped) may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child andthe type of child restraint being used.For additional information, see “Frontpassenger air bag and status light”(P. 1-64).

After the child restraint is removed and theseat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Installing top tether strapThe child restraint top tether strap must beused when installing the child restraint withseat belts.First, secure the child restraint with the seatbelt.

WRS0475Forward-facing — step 10


Bench seatPASSENGER SEATING POSITION1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint/headrestwhen the child restraint is removed. Foradditional information, refer to “Headrestraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap over theseatback.



CENTER SEATING POSITION1. Position the top tether strap over the

seatback.




WARNING


BOOSTER SEATSFor additional information on installing abooster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-structions outlined in this section.

LRS3321

�A Top tether straps

�B Anchor points (if so equipped)


Precautions on booster seatsWARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured or killed in a sudden stop or col-lision greatly increases:– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child's faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under the child'sarm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

Booster seats of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selectingany booster seat, keep the following pointsin mind:• Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca-nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

• Check the booster seat in your vehicle tobe sure it is compatible with the vehicle’sseat and seat belt system.

LRS2479

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

LRS0453


• Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or abovethe center of the child’s ears. For example,if a low back booster seat is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat should be used.

• If the booster seat is compatible withyour vehicle, place the child in the boosterseat and check the various adjustmentsto be sure the booster seat is compatiblewith the child. Always follow all recom-mended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approvedchild restraint at all times while the ve-hicle is being operated.The instructions in this section apply tobooster seat installation in the rear seatsor the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use thelap/shoulder belt in the AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, see all Warningsand Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25), “Childrestraints” (P. 1-28) and “Booster seats”(P. 1-49) before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seatin the rear seat or in the front passengerseat:1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front-facing direction.Always follow the booster seat manu-facturer’s instructions.

LRS0464 WRS0699


3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint/headrest to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestraint/headrest when the boosterseat is removed. For additional infor-mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”(P. 1-11).

LRS0454Front passenger position

LRS0451Rear center position

LRS0452Rear outboard position


If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint/headrest andit is interfering with the proper boosterseat fit, try another seating position or adifferent booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat beltlow and snug on the child’s hips. Be sureto follow the booster seat manufactur-er’s instructions for adjusting the seatbelt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seatbelt toward the retractor to take up ex-tra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt ispositioned across the top, middle por-tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’sinstructions for adjusting the seat beltrouting.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in “Three-point type seat beltwith retractor” (P. 1-19).

7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switchin the ON position. The front passengerair bag status light (if so equipped)may or may not illuminate, depending onthe size of the child and the type ofbooster seat being used. For additionalinformation, see “Front passenger airbag and status light” (P. 1-64).

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (withNISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)(if so equipped)This SRS section contains important infor-mation concerning the following systems:• Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN AdvancedAir Bag System)

• Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag

• Driver and passenger supplemental kneeair bag

• Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seatsand rear outboard seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bagsystemThe NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System canhelp cushion the impact force to the headand chest of the driver and right front pas-senger in certain frontal collisions.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS)


Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag systemThis system can help cushion the impactforce to the chest area of the driver andright front passenger in certain side impactcollisions. The side air bag is designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systemThis system can help cushion the impactforce to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions (if soequipped) in certain side impact or rollovercollisions. In a side impact, the curtain airbags are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover,curtain air bags are designed to inflate andremain inflated for a short time.Driver and passenger supplementalknee air bagsThis system can help cushion the impactforce to the driver’s and front passenger’sknees in certain collisions.

The SRS is designed to supplement thecrash protection provided by the seat beltsand is not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and theoccupant seated a suitable distance awayfrom the steering wheel, instrument paneland door finishers. For additional informa-tion, see “Seat belts” (P. 1-16).The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition.After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.


WARNING

• The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact,rear impact, rollover, or lower sever-ity frontal collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

• The front passenger air bag and pas-senger knee air bag will not inflate ifthe passenger air bag status light islit or if the front passenger seat isunoccupied. For additional informa-tion, see “Front passenger air bagand status light” (P. 1-64).

• The seat belts and the front air bagsare most effective when you are sit-ting well back and upright in the seat.The front air bags inflate with greatforce. Even with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System, if you are un-restrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in anyway, you are at greater risk of injuryor death in a crash. You may also re-ceive serious or fatal injuries fromthe front air bag if you are up againstit when it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far awayas practical from the steering wheelor instrument panel. Always properlyuse the seat belts.

• The driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles are equipped with sen-sors that detect if the seat belts arefastened. The NISSAN Advanced AirBag System monitors the severity ofa collision and inflates the air bags asneeded. Failure to properly wear seatbelts can increase the risk or severityof injury in an accident.

WRS0031


• The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sen-sor (weight sensor) that turns thefront passenger air bag and passen-ger knee air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properlyseated and wearing the seat belt canincrease the risk or severity of injuryin an accident. For additional infor-mation, see “Front passenger air bagand status light” (P. 1-64).

• Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them insidethe steering wheel rim could increasethe risk that they are injured whenthe front air bag inflates.

• The air bag system monitors the se-verity of a collision and then inflatesthe air bags as needed. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

ARS1133


WARNING

• Never let children ride unrestrainedor extend their hands or face out ofthe window. Do not attempt to holdthem in your lap or arms. Some ex-amples of dangerous riding posi-tions are shown in the illustrations.

WARNING

• Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be prop-erly restrained in the rear seat, ifpossible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043


WARNING

• Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat.An inflating air bag could seriouslyinjure or kill a child. A rear-facingchild restraint must only be used inthe rear seat.

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256


WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bags:• The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the eventof a frontal impact, rear impact, orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reducethe risk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

WRS0431Do not lean against doors or windows.

LRS0396Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162Do not lean against doors or windows.


WARNING

• The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain air bags are most effectivewhen you are sitting well back andupright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain air bag inflate with greatforce. Do not allow anyone to placetheir hand, leg or face near the sideair bag on the side of the seatback ofthe front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting inthe front seats or rear outboard seatsto extend their hand out of the win-dow or lean against the door. Someexamples of dangerous riding posi-tions are shown in the previousillustrations.

WARNING

• When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, youmay be seriously injured. Be espe-cially careful with children, whoshould always be properly re-strained. Some examples of danger-ous riding positions are shown in theillustrations.

• Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withside air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159


NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats) (if so equipped)

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bagmodules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Driver and passenger supplement kneeair bags

7. Occupant classification sensor (weightsensor)

8. Occupant classification system controlunit

9. Seat belt buckle switches

10. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats) (passenger’s side shown; driver’sside similar)

11. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag modules (pas-senger’s side shown; driver’s sidesimilar)

12. Satellite sensor (passenger’s sideshown; driver’s side similar)

13. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (rear out-board seats) (passenger's side shown;driver's side similar)

LRS3294


WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, please observe the followingitems.• Do not allow a passenger in the rear

bench seats to push or pull on theseatback pocket.

• Do not place heavy loads heavierthan 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback,head restraint or in the seatbackpocket.

• Do not store luggage behind the seatthat can press into the seatback.

• Do not position the front passengerseat so it contacts the rear benchseats. If the front seat does contactthe rear bench seats, the air bag sys-tem may determine a sensor mal-function has occurred and the frontpassenger air bag status light mayilluminate and the supplemental airbag warning light may flash.

• If a forward-facing child restraint isinstalled in the front passenger seat,do not position the front passengerseat so the child restraint contactsthe instrument panel. If the child re-straint does contact the instrumentpanel, the system may determine theseat as occupied and the passengerair bag and passenger knee air bagmay deploy in a collision. Also thefront passenger air bag status lightmay not illuminate. For additional in-formation, see “Child restraints”(P. 1-28).

• Confirm the operating condition withthe front passenger air bag statuslight.

• If you notice that the front passengerair bag status light is not operatingas described in this section, get theoccupant classification systemchecked. It is recommended that youtake your vehicle to a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

• Until you have confirmed with adealer that your passenger seat oc-cupant classification system is work-ing properly, position the occupantsin the rear seating positions.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System for the driver andfront passenger seats. All of the informa-tion, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The driver supplemental front-impact airbag is located in the center of the steeringwheel. The front passenger supplementalfront-impact air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The frontair bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although theymay inflate if the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of a higherseverity frontal impact. They may not in-flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicledamage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-cation of proper front air bag systemoperation.The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Systemmonitors information from the crash zonesensor and the Air bag Control Unit (ACU).Inflator operation is based on the severityof a collision and seat belt usage for thedriver. For the front passenger, the occu-pant classification sensor is also moni-tored. Based upon the information fromthe sensor, only one front air bag may in-flate in a crash, depending on the crashseverity. Additionally, the front passenger


air bag and passenger knee air bag may beautomatically turned off under some con-ditions, depending on the weight detectedon the front passenger seat and how theseat belt is used. If the front passenger airbag and passenger knee air bag are OFF,the front passenger air bag status light willbe illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied,the light will not be illuminated, but the airbag will be off). For additional information,see “Front passenger air bag and statuslight” (P. 1-64). One front air bag inflatingdoes not indicate improper performanceof the system.If you have any questions about your airbag system, it is recommended that youcontact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If youare considering modification of your ve-hicle due to a disability, you may also con-tact NISSAN. Contact information is con-tained in the front of this Owner's Manual.When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loudnoise may be heard, followed by the re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should betaken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-tion and choking. Those with a history of abreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants.They can help save lives and reduce seri-ous injuries. However, an inflating front airbag may cause facial abrasions or otherinjuries. Front air bags, other than the driv-er’s knee air bag, do not provide restraint tothe lower body.Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seatbelts should be correctly worn and thedriver and front passenger seated uprightas far as practical away from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. The front airbags inflate quickly in order to help protectthe front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can in-crease the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, the front air bagmodule during inflation.The front air bags deflate quickly after acollision.The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.


Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag and frontpassenger supplemental knee air bagis designed to automatically turn OFFunder some conditions. Read this sec-tion carefully to learn how it operates.Proper use of the seat, seat belt andchild restraints is necessary for mosteffective protection. Failure to follow allinstructions in this manual concerningthe use of seats, seat belts and childrestraints can increase the risk or se-verity of injury in an accident.

Status lightThe front passenger seat is equipped withan occupant classification sensor (weightsensor) that turns the front passenger airbag and passenger knee air bag on or offdepending on the weight applied to thefront passenger seat. The status of thefront passenger air bag and passengerknee air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by thefront passenger air bag status lightwhich is located on the instrument panel.After the ignition switch is placed in the"ON" position, the front passenger air bagstatus light on the instrument panel illumi-nates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff or remains illuminated depending onthe front passenger seat occupied status.The light operates as follows:• Unoccupied front passenger's seat: The

light is OFF and the front passengerair bag is OFF and will not inflate in acrash.

• Front passenger seat occupied by asmall adult, child or child restraint as out-lined in this section: The light may ormay not illuminate, depending on the sizeof the occupant or the type of child re-straint being used. When the light isilluminated, the front passenger air bag isOFF and will not inflate in a crash. Foradditional information, see “Front pas-senger air bag and status light” (P. 1-64).

• Occupied front passenger seat and thepassenger meets the conditions as out-lined in this section: The light is OFFto indicate that the front passenger airbag is operational.

In addition to the above, certain objectsplaced on the front passenger seat mayalso cause the light to operate as de-scribed above depending on their weight.For additional information, see “Normal op-eration” (P. 1-66) and “Troubleshooting”(P. 1-66).Front passenger air bagThe front passenger air bag and passen-ger knee air bag are designed to automati-cally turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described be-low in accordance with U.S. regulations. Ifthe front passenger air bag and passenger

WRS0475


knee air bag are OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bagsin your vehicle are not part of this system.The purpose of the regulation is to helpreduce the risk of injury or death from aninflating air bag to certain front passengerseat occupants, such as children, by requir-ing the air bag to be automatically turnedOFF under some conditions. Certain sen-sors are used to meet the requirements.The occupant classification sensor in thisvehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed todetect an occupant and objects on theseat by weight. For example, if a child up tothe approximate size and weight of a oneyear old is properly restrained in the frontpassenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System is designed to turn the frontpassenger air bag and passenger knee airbag OFF. For a properly restrained childwho is larger than the approximate sizeand weight of a one year old, the front pas-senger air bag may or may not be auto-matically turned OFF, depending on thesize of the child and the type of child re-straint being used. After installing the childrestraint and positioning the child, placethe ignition switch in the ON position: if thefront passenger air bag status light is illu-minated, the front passenger air bag and

passenger knee air bag are OFF. If the frontpassenger air bag status light is not illumi-nated, the air bag will inflate in a crash.Front passenger seat adult occupants whoare properly seated and using the seat beltas outlined in this manual should notcause the front passenger air bag to beautomatically turned OFF. For small adultsit may be turned OFF, however if the occu-pant takes his/her weight off the seatcushion (for example, by not sitting upright,by sitting on an edge of the seat, or byotherwise being out of position), this couldcause the sensor to turn the front passen-ger air bag and passenger knee air bagOFF. Always be sure to be seated and wear-ing the seat belt properly for the most ef-fective protection by the seat belt andsupplemental air bag.NISSAN recommends that pre-teens andchildren be properly restrained in a rearseat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-propriate child restraints and boosterseats be properly installed in a rear seat. Ifthis is not possible, the occupant classifica-tion sensor is designed to operate as de-scribed above to turn the front passengerair bag and passenger knee air bag OFF forspecified child restraints as required by theregulations. Failing to properly secure child

restraints and to use the ALR mode mayallow the restraint to tip or move in a colli-sion or sudden stop. This can also result inthe passenger air bag and passenger kneeair bag inflating in a crash instead of beingOFF. For additional information, see “Childrestraints” (P. 1-28).If the front passenger seat is not occupied,the front passenger air bag and passengerknee air bag are designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed onthe seat could result in air bag inflation,because of the object’s weight detected bythe occupant classification sensor. Otherconditions could also result in air bag infla-tion, such as if a child is standing on theseat, or if two children are on the seat, con-trary to the instructions in this manual. Al-ways be sure that you and all vehicle occu-pants are seated and restrained properly.Using the front passenger air bag statuslight, you can monitor when the front pas-senger air bag and passenger knee air bagare automatically turned OFF with the seatoccupied. The light will not illuminate whenthe front passenger seat is unoccupied.If an adult occupant is in the seat but thefront passenger air bag status light is illu-minated (indicating that the front passen-ger air bag and passenger knee air bag are


OFF), it could be that the person is a smalladult, or is not sitting on the seat properlyor not using the seat belt properly.If a child restraint must be used in the frontseat, the front passenger air bag statuslight may or may not be illuminated, de-pending on the size of the child and thetype of child restraint being used. Alwaysmake sure that the child restraint is in-stalled properly, the seat belt is used prop-erly and the occupant is positionedproperly.If necessary, a NISSAN dealer can checksystem operation by using a special tool.Until you have confirmed with a dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, repositionthe occupant or child restraint in a rearseat.The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System andfront passenger air bag status light willtake a few seconds to register a change inthe front passenger seat status. For ex-ample, if a large adult who is sitting in thefront passenger seat exits the vehicle, thefront passenger air bag status light will gofrom OFF to ON for a few seconds and thento OFF. This is normal system operationand does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-ger air bag system, the supplemental airbag warning light , located in the me-ter and gauges area of the instrumentpanel, will blink. Have the system checked. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.Normal operationIn order for the occupant classificationsensor system to classify the front passen-ger based on weight, please follow the pre-cautions and steps outlined below:Precautions• Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) hanging onthe seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

• Make sure that a child restraint or otherobject is not pressing against the rear ofthe seatback.

• Make sure that a rear passenger is notpushing or pulling on the back of the frontpassenger seat.

• Make sure that the front passenger seator seatback is not forced back against anobject on the seat or floor behind it.

• Make sure that there is no object placedunder the front passenger seat.

Steps1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-ing against the seatback, and centeredon the seat cushion with your feet com-fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on yourlap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the“Seat belts” section of this manual.

4. Remain in this position for 30 secondsallowing the system to classify the frontpassenger before the vehicle is put intomotion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checkingthe front passenger air bag status light.


NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classificationsensor system locks the classificationduring driving so it is important that youconfirm that the front passenger is prop-erly classified prior to driving. Also, theoccupant classification sensor systemmay recalculate the weight of the occu-pant when the vehicle comes to a stop(i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so frontpassenger seat occupants should con-tinue to remain seated as outlinedabove.TroubleshootingIf you think the front passenger air bagstatus light is incorrect:1. If the light is ON with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passengerseat:

This may be due to the following condi-tions that may be interfering with theweight sensors:• An object weighing over 2.2 lbs. (1 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the seat-back pocket.

• A child restraint or other object pressingagainst the rear of the seatback.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling onthe back of the front passenger seat.

• Forcing the front seat or seatbackagainst an object on the seat or floor be-hind it.

• An object placed under the front passen-ger seat.

• An object placed between the seat cush-ion and center console or between theseat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to astop when it is safe to do so. Check andcorrect any of the above conditions. Re-start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed duringwhich the front passenger air bag statuslight will remain lit for about 7 secondsinitially.If the light is still ON after this, the vehicleshould be checked as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:• Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag and passen-ger knee air bag are suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a smalladult, then this may be due to the followingconditions that may be interfering with theweight sensors:• Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered onthe seat cushion with his/her feet com-fortably extended to the floor.

• A child restraint or other object pressingagainst the rear of the seatback.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling onthe back of the front passenger seat.

• Forcing the front seat or seatbackagainst an object on the seat or floor be-hind it.

• An object placed under the front passen-ger seat.

• An object placed between the seat cush-ion and center console or between theseat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to astop when it is safe to do so. Check andcorrect any of the above conditions. Re-start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.


NOTE:

A system check will be performed duringwhich the front passenger air bag statuslight will remain lit for about 7 secondsinitially.If the light is still ON after this, the personshould be advised not to ride in the frontpassenger seat and the vehicle should bechecked as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.Other supplemental front-impact airbag precautions

WARNING

• Do not place any objects on thesteering wheel pad or on the instru-ment panel. Also, do not place anyobjects between any occupant andthe steering wheel or instrumentpanel. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause in-jury if the front air bags inflate.

• Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the supplemental air bag system.This is to prevent accidental inflationof the supplemental air bag or dam-age to the supplemental air bagsystem.

• Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle's electrical system,suspension system or front endstructure. This could affect properoperation of the front air bag system.

• Tampering with the front air bag sys-tem may result in serious personalinjury. Tampering includes changesto the steering wheel and the instru-ment panel assembly by placing ma-terial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel orby installing additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

• Removing or modifying the frontpassenger seat may affect the func-tion of the air bag system and resultin serious personal injury.

• Modifying or tampering with thefront passenger seat may result inserious personal injury. For example,do not change the front seats byplacing material on the seat cushionor by installing additional trim mate-rial, such as seat covers, on the seatthat are not specifically designed toassure proper air bag operation. Ad-ditionally, do not stow any objectsunder the front passenger seat or theseat cushion and seatback. Such ob-jects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (weight sensor).

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the seat belt system. This may af-fect the front air bag system. Tam-pering with the seat belt system mayresult in serious personal injury.


• It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on andaround the front air bag. It is also rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for installation of electricalequipment. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring har-nesses* should not be modified ordisconnected. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on the airbag system.

• A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshieldcould affect the function of thesupplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the front airbag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner'sManual.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS (withoutNISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)(if so equipped)This SRS section contains important infor-mation concerning the following systems:• Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag• Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag• Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats

and rear outboard seats)Supplemental front-impact air bagsystemThis system can help cushion the impactforce to the head and chest of the driverand right front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag systemThis system can help cushion the impactforce to the chest area of the driver andright front passenger in certain side impactcollisions. The side air bag is designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systemThis system can help cushion the impactforce to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions in certainside impact or rollover collisions. In a sideimpact, the curtain air bags are designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate and remain inflated fora short time.The SRS is designed to supplement thecrash protection provided by the seat beltsand is not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and theoccupant seated a suitable distance awayfrom the steering wheel, instrument paneland door finishers. For additional informa-tion, see “Seat belts” (P. 1-16).The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition.After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.


WARNING

• The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact,rear impact, rollover, or lower sever-ity frontal collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

• The seat belts and the front air bagsare most effective when you are sit-ting well back and upright in the seat.The front air bags inflate with greatforce. If you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of

position in any way, you are atgreater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive seriousor fatal injuries from the front air bagif you are up against it when it in-flates. Always sit back against theseatback and as far away as practicalfrom the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always properly use theseat belts.

• The driver and front passenger seatbelt buckles are equipped with sen-sors that detect if the seat belts arefastened. The air bag system moni-tors the severity of a collision and in-flates the air bags as needed. Failureto properly wear seat belts can in-crease the risk or severity of injury inan accident.

• Keep hands on the outside of thesteering wheel. Placing them insidethe steering wheel rim could increasethe risk that they are injured whenthe front air bag inflates.

• The air bag system monitors the se-verity of a collision and then inflatesthe air bags as needed. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

WRS0031


WARNING

• Never let children ride unrestrainedor extend their hands or face out ofthe window. Do not attempt to holdthem in your lap or arms. Some ex-amples of dangerous riding posi-tions are shown in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041


WARNING

• Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be prop-erly restrained in the rear seat, ifpossible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044


WARNING

• Even with the air bag system, neverinstall a rear-facing child restraint inthe front seat. An inflating air bagcould seriously injure or kill a child. Arear-facing child restraint must onlybe used in the rear seat.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bags:• The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the eventof a frontal impact, rear impact, orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reducethe risk or severity of injury in variouskinds of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256 WRS0431Do not lean against doors or windows.


WARNING

• The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain air bags are most effectivewhen you are sitting well back andupright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain air bag inflate with greatforce. Do not allow anyone to placetheir hand, leg or face near the sideair bag on the side of the seatback ofthe front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting inthe front seats or rear outboard seatsto extend their hand out of the win-dow or lean against the door. Someexamples of dangerous riding posi-tions are shown in the previousillustrations.

LRS0396Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162Do not lean against doors or windows.


WARNING

• When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, youmay be seriously injured. Be espe-cially careful with children, whoshould always be properly re-strained. Some examples of danger-ous riding positions are shown in theillustrations.

• Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withside air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159


Supplemental air bag system1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bagmodules

5. Crash zone sensor

6. Driver and passenger supplement kneeair bags

7. Seat belt buckle switches

8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (frontseats) (passenger’s side shown; driver’sside similar)

9. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag modules (passen-ger’s side shown; driver’s side similar)

10. Satellite sensors (passenger’s sideshown; driver’s side similar)

11. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (rear out-board seats) (passenger's side shown;driver's side similar)

This vehicle is equipped with supplementalfront air bag system for the driver and rightfront passenger seats. This system is de-signed to meet certification requirementsunder U.S. regulations. It is also permitted inCanada. However, all of the information,cautions and warnings in this manualstill apply and must be followed.

LRS3295


The driver supplemental front-impact airbag is located in the center of the steeringwheel. The front passenger supplementalfront-impact air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. Thesupplemental front air bags are designedto inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,although they may inflate if the forces inanother type of collision are similar tothose of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal colli-sions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is notalways an indication of proper front air bagsystem operation.The supplemental air bag system moni-tors information from the crash zone sen-sor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU) and seatbelt buckle sensors that detect if the seatbelts are fastened. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision andwhether the seat belts are being used. Onlyone front air bag may inflate in a crash,depending on the crash severity andwhether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. This does not indicate improperperformance of the system. If you have anyquestions about the performance of yourair bag system, it is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to obtain informationabout the system.

If you have any questions about your airbag system, it is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to obtain informationabout the system. If you are consideringmodification of your vehicle due to a dis-ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-tact information is contained in the begin-ning of this Owner's Manual.When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loudnoise may be heard, followed by the re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should betaken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-tion and choking. Those with a history of abreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.Front air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the driver and rightfront passenger. They can help save livesand reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facialabrasions or other injuries. Front air bags,other than the driver’s knee air bag, do notprovide restraint to the lower body.Seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as faras practical away from the steering wheelor instrument panel. The front air bags in-flate quickly in order to help protect the

front occupants. Because of this, the forceof the front air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too closeto, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.The front air bags deflate quickly after acollision.The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON position.After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

WARNING

• Do not place any objects on thesteering wheel pad or on the instru-ment panel. Also, do not place anyobjects between any occupant andthe steering wheel or instrumentpanel. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause in-jury if the front air bag inflates.

• Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components willbe hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.


• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the supplemental air bag system.This is to prevent accidental inflationof the supplemental air bag or dam-age to the supplemental air bagsystem.

• Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle’s electrical system,suspension system or front endstructure. This could affect properoperation of the front air bag system.

• If your vehicle has front recoveryhooks as original factory equipmentdo not remove or modify them. If itwas not equipped with front recov-ery hooks do not install them. Eitheraction could affect proper operationof the front air bag system resultingin injury or death.

• Tampering with the front air bag sys-tem may result in serious personalinjury. Tampering includes changesto the steering wheel and the instru-ment panel assembly by placing ma-terial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel orby installing additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the seat belt system. This may af-fect the front air bag system. Tam-pering with the seat belt system mayresult in serious personal injury.

• It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on andaround the front air bag. It is also rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for installation of electricalequipment. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring harness*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the air bagsystem.

• A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshieldcould affect the function of thesupplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the front airbag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.


FRONT SEAT-MOUNTEDSIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIRBAG AND ROOF-MOUNTEDCURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT ANDROLLOVER SUPPLEMENTAL AIRBAG SYSTEMSThe side air bags are located in the outsideof the seatback of the front seats. The cur-tain air bags are located in the side roofrails. All of the information, cautions andwarnings in this manual must be fol-lowed. The side air bags and curtain airbags are designed to inflate in higher se-verity side collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collisionare similar to those of a higher severityimpact. They are designed to inflate on theside where the vehicle is impacted. Theymay not inflate in certain side collisions.Curtain air bags are also designed to inflatein certain types of rollover collisions or nearrollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-ments (for example, during severe off-roading) may cause the curtain air bags toinflate.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not alwaysan indication of proper side air bag andcurtain air bag operation.When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smoke isnot harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as itmay cause irritation and choking. Thosewith a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.Side air bags, along with the use of seatbelts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest of the front occupants. Curtainair bags help to cushion the impact force tothe head of occupants in the front and rearoutboard seating positions. They can helpsave lives and reduce serious injuries. How-

ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain airbag may cause abrasions or other injuries.Side air bags and curtain air bags do notprovide restraint to the lower body.The seat belts should be correctly wornand the driver and front passenger seatedupright as far as practical away from theside air bag. Rear seat passengers shouldbe seated as far away as practical from thedoor finishers and side roof rails. The sideair bags and curtain air bags inflate quicklyin order to help protect the occupants. Be-cause of this, the force of the side air bagand curtain air bag inflating can increasethe risk of injury if the occupant is too closeto, or is against, these air bag modules dur-ing inflation. The side air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.The curtain air bags will remain inflated fora short time.The side air bags and curtain air bagsoperate only when the ignition switch isin the ON position.After placing the ignition switch in theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

LRS2094


WARNING

• Do not place any objects near theseatback of the front seats. Also, donot place any objects (an umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front door fin-isher and the front seat. Such objectsmay become dangerous projectilesand cause injury if a side air baginflates.

• Right after inflation, several side airbag and curtain air bag system com-ponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burnyourself.

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damageto or accidental inflation of the sideair bag and curtain air bag systems.

• Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle's electrical system,suspension system or side panel.This could affect proper operation ofthe curtain air bag systems.

• Tampering with the side air bag sys-tem may result in serious personalinjury. For example, do not changethe front seats by placing materialnear the seatbacks or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

• It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on andaround the side air bag and curtainair bag. It is also recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-tion of electrical equipment. The SRSwiring harnesses* should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthor-ized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be usedon the side air bag or curtain air bagsystems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectorsare yellow or orange for easy identification.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the side air bagand curtain air bag systems and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner's Manual.

DRIVER AND PASSENGERSUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAGThe knee air bag is located in the kneebolster, on the driver’s and passenger’sside. All of the information, cautions andwarnings in this manual apply and mustbe followed. The knee air bag is designedto inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,although it may inflate if the forces in an-other type of collision are similar to those ofa higher severity frontal impact. It may notinflate in certain collisions.

LRS2599Driver’s side


Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not alwaysan indication of proper knee air bagoperation.When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loudnoise may be heard, followed by release ofsmoke. This smoke is not harmful anddoes not indicate a fire. Care should betaken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita-tion and choking. Those with a history of abreathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

The knee air bag helps to cushion the im-pact force on the knees of the driver andpassenger. It can help reduce serious inju-ries. However, an inflating knee air bag maycause abrasions or other injuries. The kneeair bag provides restraint to the lower body.The knee air bag inflates quickly in order tohelp protect the occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the knee air bag inflatingcan increase the risk of injury if the occu-pant is too close to, or is against, this air bagmodule during inflation. The knee air bagwill deflate quickly after the collision is overOR the knee air bag will remain inflated fora short time.The knee air bag operates only when thepower switch is placed in the ONposition.After placing the power switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates. The supplementalair bag warning light will turn off afterabout 7 seconds if the system isoperational.

WARNING

• Do not place any objects between theknee bolster and the driver’s or pas-senger’s seat. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a knee air bag inflates.

• Right after inflation, the knee air bagsystem components will be hot. Donot touch them; you may severelyburn yourself.

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the knee air bag system. This is toprevent damage to or accidental in-flation of the knee air bag system.

• Do not make unauthorized changesto your vehicle's electrical system orsuspension system. This could affectproper operation of the knee air bagsystem.

• Tampering with the knee air bag sys-tem may result in serious personalinjury. For example, do not changethe driver or passenger knee bolsteror install additional trim materialaround the knee air bag.

LRS3244Passenger’s side


• It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on andaround the knee air bag. It is also rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for installation of electricalequipment. The SRS wiring har-nesses* should not be modified ordisconnected. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing de-vices should not be used on the kneeair bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectorsare yellow or orange for easy identification.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the knee airbag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this manual.

SEAT BELT WITH PRETENSIONER(s)(front seats and rear outboardseats)

WARNING

• The pretensioner(s) cannot be re-used after activation. They must bereplaced together with the retractorand buckle as a unit.

• If the vehicle becomes involved in acollision but pretensioner(s) are notactivated, be sure to have the preten-sioner system checked and, if neces-sary, replaced. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

• No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiringof the pretensioner system. This is toprevent damage to or accidental ac-tivation of the pretensioner(s). Tam-pering with the pretensioner systemmay result in serious personal injury.

• It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for work on andaround the pretensioner system. It isalso recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for installation of elec-trical equipment. Unauthorized elec-trical test equipment and probingdevices should not be used on thepretensioner system.

• If you need to dispose of the preten-sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. Incorrect dis-posal procedures could cause per-sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activatewith the supplemental air bag system incertain types of collisions. Working with theseat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) helptighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front and rear out-board seat occupants.The pretensioner(s) are encased within theseat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.These seat belts are used the same way asconventional seat belts.When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indi-cate a fire. Care should be taken not toinhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breath-ing condition should get fresh air promptly.After the pretensioner(s’) activation, loadlimiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces againstthe chest.The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in thepretensioner system. For additional infor-mation, see "Supplemental air bag warning


light" (P. 1-83). If the operation of the supple-mental air bag warning light indicatesthere is a malfunction, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.When selling your vehicle, we request thatyou inform the buyer about the preten-sioner system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner'sManual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLABELSWarning labels about the supplementalfront-impact air bag system are placed inthe vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restrainton a seat protected by an air bag infront of it. If the air bag deploys, it maycause serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLIGHTThe supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates for about 7 seconds andthen turns off. This means the system isoperational.

WRS0885

1. SRS Air bag warning labelsThe warning labels are located on thesurface of the sun visor.

LRS0100


If any of the following conditions occur, thefront air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,knee air bag and pretensioner systemsneed servicing:• The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.• The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.• The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.Under these conditions, the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensionersystems may not operate properly. Theymust be checked and repaired. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys-tems will not operate in an accident. Tohelp avoid injury to yourself or others,have your vehicle checked as soon aspossible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENTPROCEDUREThe front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) aredesigned to inflate on a one-time-only ba-sis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, thesupplemental air bag warning light re-mains illuminated after inflation has oc-curred. These systems should be repairedand/or replaced as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.When maintenance work is required on thevehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,curtain air bags, knee air bags, pretension-er(s) and related parts should be pointedout to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition switch should alwaysbe placed in the LOCK position when work-ing under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

• Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur-tain air bag or knee air bag has in-flated, the air bag module will notfunction again and must be replaced.Additionally, the activated preten-sioner(s) must also be replaced. Theair bag module and pretensioner(s)should be replaced. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. However, theair bag module and pretensioner(s)cannot be repaired.

• The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag and knee air bag systems andthe pretensioner system should beinspected if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

• If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag or pretensioner sys-tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.


• If there is an impact to your vehiclefrom any direction, your OccupantClassification Sensor (OCS) (if soequipped) should be checked toverify it is still functioning correctly. Itis recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service. TheOCS (weight sensor) (if so equipped)should be checked even if no air bagsdeploy as a result of the impact. Fail-ure to verify proper OCS (weight sen-sor) (if so equipped) function may re-sult in an improper air bagdeployment resulting in injury ordeath.


MEMO


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Auxiliary gauges (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Off-road and 4–Wheel Drive (4WD)monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Warning/Indicator lights (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Warning/Indicator lights (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23How to use the vehicle informationdisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Vehicle information display warningsand indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-39Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Rain-sensing auto wiper system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Rear window and/or outside mirror defrosterswitch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system(Type A) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)system (Type B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Climate controlled seat switches(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Heated rear seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-56Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-57Warning systems switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . 2-59

Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-59Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-62Parking Aids system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63Emergency call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . 2-64Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

12v Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66120v outlets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70Rear-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71Console side pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-71Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71Under-seat storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-72Console box storage trays(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73Cell phone storage tray (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-74Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74Center armrest storage (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-75Under front seat storage bin(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76Overhead sunglasses storage(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80Bed liner storage bins (if so equipped) . . . . . . .2-80Cargo hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81C-Channel cargo hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-81

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82Rear power window switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-85

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90Personal Lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90

Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91Programming HomeLink® for Canadiancustomers and gate openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93Operating the HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93

Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-94Reprogramming a single HomeLink®button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94

1. Vents (P. 4-28)2. Turn signal switch (P. 2-52)

Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-41)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio control*Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System*Vehicle information display controls(P. 2-23)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)Horn (P. 2-53)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-12)Vehicle information display (P. 2-23)

6. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)(P. 5-50)Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches(if so equipped) (P. 5-52)

7. Shift lever (P. 5-18)Tow mode switch (P. 2-63)

8. Audio controls*9. Center display (P. 4-10)10. Climate controls (P. 4-28)11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-53)12. Glove box (P. 2-74)13. Front passenger supplemental knee air

bag (if so equipped) (P. 1-53)14. Front passenger air bag status light

(if so equipped) (P. 1-64)15. Power outlet (P. 2-66)16. Climate control seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-54)Heated front seat switches(if so equipped) (P. 2-55)

17. Heated steering wheel switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-57)Warning systems switch (P. 2-58)

18. USB ports*19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

LII2656

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-4 Instruments and controls

20. Parking Aids system switch (P. 2-63)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-59)

21. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)(if so equipped) (P. 2-64)

22. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)(P. 5-113)

23. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13)24. Driver supplemental knee air bag light

(if so equipped) (P. 1-53)25. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-27)26. Parking brake (P. 5-24)27. Hood release (P. 3-24)28. Headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-44)Power inverter switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-62)Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-53)Electronic locking rear differential(E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped)(P. 2-61)Hill descent control system switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-59)

29. Headlight switch (P. 2-44)Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)Instrument brightness controlswitches (P. 2-51)Trip reset switch (P. 2-6)

*Refer to the separate NissanConnect®Owner’s Manual

Refer to the page number indicated inparenthesis for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-5

1. Tachometer2. Warning and indicator lights3. Vehicle information display

OdometerOutside temperature display

4. Speedometer5. Fuel gauge6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETERThis vehicle is equipped with a speedom-eter and odometer. The speedometer islocated on the right side of the meter clus-ter. The odometer is located in the vehicleinformation display to the left of the speed-ometer and can be accessed with the ve-hicle in the ON position.

LIC4125

METERS AND GAUGES


SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates the vehiclespeed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer and the twin trip odometerO1 are displayed in the vehicle informationdisplay when the ignition switch is placedin the ON position.The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.The twin trip odometer records the dis-tance of individual trips.

Changing the displayPush the TRIP RESET switch O2 on the leftside of the instrument panel to change thedisplay as follows:ODO → Trip → Trip → ODOResetting the trip odometerPushing the TRIP RESET switch O2 forabout 2 seconds resets the currently dis-played trip odometer to zero.

LIC2218 LIC2921


TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm). Do not revthe engine into the red zone O1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches thered zone, reduce engine speed. Operat-ing the engine in the red zone maycause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGEThe gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature. The engine coolant tempera-ture is within the normal range O1 whenthe gauge needle points within the zoneshown in the illustration.The engine coolant temperature varieswith the outside air temperature and driv-ing conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tem-perature near the hot (H) end of thenormal range, reduce vehicle speed todecrease temperature. If the gauge isover the normal range, stop the vehicleas soon as safely possible. If the engineis overheated, continued operation ofthe vehicle may seriously damage theengine. For additional information, see“If your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12) forimmediate action required.

LIC3536 LIC2220


FUEL GAUGEThe gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hills.The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.The low fuel warning light comes on whenthe amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler dooris located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

• If the vehicle runs out of fuel, theMalfunction Indicator Light (MIL) maycome on. Refuel as soon as possible.After a few driving trips. the lightshould turn off. If the light remains onafter a few driving trips, have the ve-hicle inspected. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

• For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)”(P. 2-15).

DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)Displays the estimated distance the ve-hicle can be driven before refueling. Thevalue is calculated based on recent fueleconomy, the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank, and the actual fuelconsumption.Changes in driving patterns or conditionscan cause the DTE value to vary. As a result,the value displayed may differ from the ac-tual distance that can be driven.

DTE display will change to “---” when thefuel level in the tank is getting low, prior tothe fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

NOTE:• The DTE value after refill is estimated

based on recent fuel economy andamount of fuel added.

• If a small amount of fuel is added, orthe ignition is on during refueling, thedisplay may not be updated.

• Conditions that affect the fueleconomy will also affect the estimatedDTE value (city/highway driving, idletime, remote start time, terrain, sea-sonal weather, added vehicle weight,added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).

LIC2222


AUXILIARY GAUGES (if soequipped)1. Automatic Transmission fluid tempera-

ture gauge

2. Voltmeter

3. Engine oil pressure gauge

4. Engine oil temperature gauge

Automatic Transmission fluidtemperature gaugeThis gauge indicates the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid.

CAUTION

• This gauge is not designed to indi-cate low automatic transmissionfluid level. Use the dipstick to checkthe fluid level. For additional infor-mation, see “9–speed AutomaticTransmission Fluid (ATF)” (P. 8-13).

• If the gauge indicates automatictransmission fluid temperature overthe normal range, stop the vehicle assoon as safely possible. It is recom-mended that you have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin-ued operation of the vehicle may se-riously damage the transmission.

VoltmeterWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the voltmeter indicates the bat-tery voltage. When the engine is running, itindicates the generator voltage.While cranking the engine, the volts dropbelow the normal range. If the range is notwithin the normal range (11 – 15 volts) whilethe engine is running, it may indicate thatthe charging system is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Engine oil pressure gaugeThe gauge indicates the engine lubricationsystem oil pressure while the engine is run-ning. The bar should be in the middle of thegauge when the engine is running.

CAUTION

• This gauge is not designed to indi-cate low engine oil level. Use the dip-stick to check the oil level. For addi-tional information, see “Engine oil”(P. 8-7).

• If the gauge needle does not movewith the proper amount of engine oil,it is recommended that you have thevehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.Continued vehicle operation in sucha condition could cause serious dam-age to the engine.

Engine oil temperature gaugeThis gauge measures the temperature ofthe engine oil.

LIC4328


OFF-ROAD AND 4–WHEEL DRIVE(4WD) MONITOR (if so equipped)The off-road and 4WD monitor displays thevarious conditions of the vehicle.The Pitch and Roll Gauge (left) indicates theangle of the vehicle position left, right, up ordown. The value will be displayed while thevehicle graphic will rotate to indicate ve-hicle condition: left, right, up or down.

The Tire Angle & 4WD Gauge (right) indi-cates the angle of the tires based on turn-ing of the steering wheel and 4WD status.The graphic image will show the actual ve-hicle tire position while the angle is to bedisplayed above as reference. The 4WD sta-tus is displayed below.

LIC4329


Warning/Indicator light (red) Warning/Indicator light (yellow) Warning/Indicator light (other)

Automatic Transmission Park warninglight ( model)

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

Front fog light indicator light (if soequipped) (green)

or Brake warning light Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) withPedestrian Detection system warning light

High Beam Assist indicator light (green)

Charge warning light Automatic Transmission check warninglight

High beam indicator light (blue)

Electric shift control system warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Side light and headlight indicator light(green)

Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light (if soequipped)

TOW mode ON indicator light (green)

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Hill descent control system ON indicatorlight (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)

Master warning light Low tire pressure warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Security indicator light Master warning light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTSAND AUDIBLE REMINDERS


Warning/Indicator light (red) Warning/Indicator light (yellow) Warning/Indicator light (other)

Supplemental air bag warning light Rear Automatic Braking OFF warning light

Slip indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFindicator light

CHECKING LIGHTSWith all doors closed, apply the parkingbrake, fasten the seat belts and place theignition switch in the ON position withoutstarting the engine. The following lights (ifso equipped) will come on:

, , or , ,The following lights (if so equipped) willcome on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , , ,, ATP ,

If any light does not come on or operate ina way other than described, it may indicatea burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-function. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-played on the vehicle information displaybetween the speedometer and tachom-eter. For additional information, see “Ve-hicle information display” (P. 2-23).

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)For additional information, see “Vehicle in-formation display” (P. 2-23).

Automatic TransmissionPark warning light (model)

WARNING

• If the 4WD mode indicator is off or theATP warning light is on, this indicatesthat the automatic transmission P(Park) position will not function andcould result in the vehicle moving un-expectedly, causing serious personalinjury or property damage. Alwaysset the parking brake. For additionalinformation, see “Using 4–wheeldrive (4WD)” (P. 5-107).


• If the ATP light is on, this indicatesthat the automatic transmission P(Park) position will not function andthe transfer case is in neutral.

• When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illumi-nates and the parking brake is set.Failure to engage the transfer posi-tion in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result inthe vehicle moving unexpectedly, re-sulting in serious personal injury orproperty damage.

• Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4Hor 4LO position again to turn off theATP warning light when the shift le-ver is in the P position and the ATPwarning light is on. (Before shiftingthe 4WD switch into the 4LO position,move the shift lever to the N positiononce, shift the shift lever into P againand make sure the ATP warning lightis off.)

This light indicates that the automatictransmission parking function is not en-gaged. If the transfer control is not securedin any drive position while the shift lever isin the P (Park) position, the transmission willdisengage and the drive wheels will notlock.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parkingbrake and the foot brake systems.Parking brake indicatorWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the park-ing brake is applied.Low brake fluid warning lightWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluidlevel. If the light comes on while the engineis running, with the parking brake not ap-plied, stop the vehicle and perform thefollowing:1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-mation, see “Brake fluid” (P. 8-14).

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

WARNING

• Your brake system may not be work-ing properly if the warning light is on.Driving could be dangerous. If youjudge it to be safe, drive carefully tothe nearest service station for re-pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicletowed because driving it could bedangerous.

• Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brakefluid level may increase your stop-ping distance and braking will re-quire greater pedal effort and pedaltravel.

• If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked. It isrecommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.


Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the charging sys-tem is not functioning properly. Turn theengine off and check the generator belt. Ifthe belt is loose, broken, missing, or if thelight remains on, have the system checked.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION

• Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Do-ing so will bypass the variable volt-age control system (if so equipped)and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely. For additional in-formation, see “Variable voltage con-trol system” (P. 8-19).

• Do not continue driving if the genera-tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Electric shift control systemwarning light

This light illuminates when a malfunctionoccurs in the electric shift control system.When the master warning light illuminates,the chime sounds and the following mes-sage is displayed in the vehicle informationdisplay: “When parked apply parking brake”.When the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-tion, the chime sounds continuously. En-sure the parking brake is appliedHave the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Engine oil pressurewarning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. Ifthe light flickers or comes on during nor-mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,stop the engine immediately, and call aNISSAN dealer or other authorized repairshop.The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level. Foradditional information, see “Engine oil”(P. 8-7).

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady orblinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate a potential emission controlmalfunction.If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 secondswhen the engine is not running, it indicatesthat the vehicle is not ready for an emissioncontrol system inspection/maintenancetest. For additional information, see “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test” (P. 10-59).


OperationThe MIL will come on in one of two ways:• MIL on steady — An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose FuelCap warning appears in the vehicle infor-mation display. If the fuel-filler cap is looseor missing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle. Thelight should turn off after a few drivingtrips. If the light does not turn offafter a few driving trips, have the vehicleinspected. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Youdo not need to have your vehicle towedto the dealer.

• MIL blinking — An engine misfire has beendetected which may damage the emis-sion control system. To reduce or avoidemission control system damage:– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph

(72 km/h).– avoid hard acceleration or

deceleration.– avoid steep uphill grades.– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come onsteady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, reducedfuel economy, and possible damage tothe emission control system.

Master warning light

This light comes on when various vehicleinformation display warnings appear.• Parking brake release warning• Transmission system warning

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fastenyour seat belts. The light illuminates when-ever the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition and remains illuminated until thedriver's seat belt is fastened. At the sametime, the chime sounds for about 6 sec-

onds unless the driver's seat belt is se-curely fastened.The seat belt warning light for the frontpassenger will illuminate if the seat belt isnot fastened when the front passengerseat is occupied. The front passenger seatbelt does not activate until 5 seconds afterthe ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.For additional information, see “Seat belts”(P. 1-16).

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignitionswitch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the secu-rity system equipped on the vehicle isoperational.For additional information, see “Securitysystems” (P. 2-38).

Supplemental air bagwarning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates for about 7 seconds andthen turns off. This means the system isoperational.


If any of the following conditions occur, thefront air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,and pretensioner seat belt systems needservicing:• The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7seconds.

• The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

• The supplemental air bag warning lightdoes not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these services.Unless checked and repaired, the supplemen-tal restraint system (air bag system) and/orthe pretensioner(s) may not function properly.For additional information, see “SupplementalRestraint System (SRS)” (P. 1-53).

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warninglight is on, it could mean that the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bagand/or pretensioner systems will notoperate in an accident. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible. Itis recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS(yellow)For additional information, see “Vehicle in-formation display” (P. 2-23).

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the ABS warning light illuminatesand then turns off. This indicates the ABS isoperational.If the ABS warning light illuminates whilethe engine is running or while driving, itmay indicate the ABS is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lockfunction is turned off. The brake systemthen operates normally but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information,see “Brake system” (P. 5-117).

Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) withPedestrian Detectionsystem warning light

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. It turnsoff after the engine is started.This light illuminates when the AEB withPedestrian Detection system is set to OFFin the vehicle information display.If the light illuminates when the AEB withPedestrian Detection system is on, it mayindicate that the system is unavailable. Foradditional information, see “AutomaticEmergency Braking (AEB) with PedestrianDetection” (P. 5-81).

Automatic Transmissioncheck warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about 2seconds. If the light comes on at any othertime, it may indicate the automatic trans-mission system is not functioning properly.Have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.


Electronic locking reardifferential (E-Lock) systemON indicator light (if soequipped)

This light comes on when the electroniclocking rear differential (E-Lock) systemclutch is fully engaged.The indicator light flashes when the sys-tem is first turned on. When the system fullyengages, the light remains on. If the switchis on and the indicator light continues toflash, the system is not engaged.For additional information, see “Electroniclocking rear differential (E-Lock) systemswitch” (P. 2-61) and “Electronic locking reardifferential (E-Lock) system” (P. 5-114).

Front passenger air bagstatus light (if so equipped)

The front passenger air bag status light willbe lit and the passenger front air bag will beoff depending on how the front passengerseat is being used.For additional information, see “Front pas-senger air bag and status light” (P. 1-64).

Hill descent control systemON indicator light (if soequipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light comes on briefly andthen turns off.The light comes on when the hill descentcontrol system is activated.If the hill descent control switch is on andthe indicator light blinks, the system maybe disabled.You may feel or hear the system working;this is normal.If the indicator light does not come onwhen the hill descent switch is on, the sys-tem may not be functioning properly. Havethe system checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.For additional information, see “Hill descentcontrol system ON indicator light” (P. 2-18)and “Hill descent control system” (P. 5-123).

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-tors the tire pressure of all tires except thespare.The low tire pressure warning light warnsof low tire pressure or indicates that theTPMS is not functioning properly.After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1second and turns off.Low tire pressure warningIf the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illumi-nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”warning also appears in the vehicle in-formation display.When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjustthe tire pressure of all four tires to therecommended COLD tire pressure shownon the Tire and Loading Information la-bel located in the driver's door opening.The low tire pressure warning light doesnot automatically turn off when the tirepressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-flated to the recommended pressure,


the vehicle must be driven at speedsabove 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate theTPMS and turn off the low tire pressurewarning light. Use a tire pressure gaugeto check the tire pressure.The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warningappears each time the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position as long as the lowtire pressure warning light remainsilluminated.For additional information, see “Vehicle in-formation display” (P. 2-23), “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) or (P. 6-3).TPMS malfunctionIf the TPMS is not functioning properly, thelow tire pressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Have thesystem checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warningdoes not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate aTPMS malfunction.For additional information, see “Tire Pres-sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and“Tire pressure” (P. 8-35).

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Thosewho use a pacemaker should contactthe electric medical equipmentmanufacturer for the possible influ-ences before use.

• If the light does not illuminate withthe ignition switch placed in the ONposition, have the vehicle checked assoon as possible. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

• If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehiclespeed, pull off the road to a safe loca-tion and stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Driving with under-inflatedtires may permanently damage thetires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury or death. Check the tirepressure for all four tires. Adjust thetire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure show on the Tireand Loading Information label lo-cated in the driver’s door opening toturn the low tire pressure warninglight off. If the light still illuminateswhile driving after adjusting the tirepressure, a tire may be flat or theTPMS may be malfunctioning. If youhave a flat tire, replace it with a sparetire as soon as possible. If no tire isflat and all tires are properly inflated,have the vehicle checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


• When using a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tirepressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute. The light willremain on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these services.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could af-fect the proper operation of theTPMS.

CAUTION

• The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sureto check the tire pressure regularly.

• If the vehicle is being driven atspeeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),the TPMS may not operate correctly.

• Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the four wheels correctly.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady orblinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate a potential emission controlmalfunction.If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 secondswhen the engine is not running, it indicatesthat the vehicle is not ready for an emissioncontrol system inspection/maintenancetest. For additional information, see “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test” (P. 10-59).OperationThe MIL will come on in one of two ways:• MIL on steady — An emission control sys-

tem malfunction has been detected.Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose FuelCap warning appears in the vehicle infor-mation display. If the fuel-filler cap is looseor missing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle. The lightshould turn off after a few driving trips. Ifthe light does not turn off after a fewdriving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the dealer.

• MIL blinking — An engine misfire has beendetected which may damage the emis-sion control system. To reduce or avoidemission control system damage:– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph

(72 km/h).– avoid hard acceleration or

deceleration.– avoid steep uphill grades.– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.The MIL may stop blinking and come onsteady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation withouthaving the emission control systemchecked and repaired as necessarycould lead to poor driveability, reducedfuel economy, and possible damage tothe emission control system.


Master warning light

This light comes on when various vehicleinformation display warnings appear.• No key warning• Low fuel warning• Low windshield-washer fluid warning• Loose fuel cap warning• Low tire pressure warning• 4WD error (if so equipped)• Front & rear tire size differences (if so

equipped)

Rear Automatic Braking(RAB) system warning light

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. It turnsoff after the engine is started.This light illuminates when the RAB systemis turned off in the vehicle informationdisplay.If the light illuminates when the RAB sys-tem is on, it may indicate that the system isunavailable. For additional information, see“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-76).

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the Ve-hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op-erating, thus alerting the driver to the factthat the road surface is slippery and thevehicle is nearing its traction limits.You may feel or hear the system working;this is normal.The light will blink for a few seconds afterthe VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.The indicator light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in theON position. The light will turn off after ap-proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-erational. If the light does not come onhave the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when theVDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-cates the VDC system is not operating.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine and the system will operatenormally. For additional information, see“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”(P. 5-120).The VDC OFF indicator light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in theON position. The light will turn off afterabout 2 seconds if the system is opera-tional. If the light stays on or comes onalong with the indicator light whileyou are driving, have the VDC systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.While the VDC system is operating, youmight feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-tem working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS(other)For additional information, see “Vehicle in-formation display” (P. 2-23).


Front fog light indicatorlight (green) (if soequipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-nates when the front fog lights are on. Foradditional information, see “Fog lightswitch” (P. 2-52).

High Beam Assist indicatorlight (green)

This indicator light illuminates when theheadlights come on while the headlightswitch is in the AUTO position with the highbeams selected. This indicates that thehigh beam assist is operational.For additional information, see “Headlightswitch” (P. 2-44).

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-light high beams are on and goes out whenthe low beams are selected.The high beam indicator light also comeson when the passing signal is activated.

Side light and headlightindicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator lightilluminates when the side light or headlightposition is selected. For additional informa-tion, see “Headlight switch” (P. 2-44).

TOW mode ON indicatorlight (green)

This light comes on when the tow modefunction is on.

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights (green)

The appropriate light flashes when the turnsignal switch is activated.Both lights flash when the hazard switch isturned on.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a disc brake pad requiresreplacement, it makes a high pitchedscraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as soonas possible if the warning sound is heard.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFFposition, a chime sounds when the driver'sdoor is opened if the headlights or parkinglights are on.Turn the headlight control switch off beforeleaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® doorbuzzerThe Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds ifany one of the following improper opera-tions is found.• The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors.• The Intelligent Key is taken outside the

vehicle when operating the vehicle.When the buzzer sounds, be sure to checkboth the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. Foradditional information, see “NISSAN Intelli-gent Key®” (P. 3-2).


The vehicle information display is locatedto the left of the speedometer. It displayssuch items as:• Vehicle settings• Trip computer information• Drive system warnings and settings (if so

equipped)• Cruise control system information• Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system• Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system• NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation

information• Indicators and warnings

• Tire Pressure information• Traffic Sign Recognition (if so equipped)

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLEINFORMATION DISPLAYThe vehicle information display can benavigated using the ENTER and but-tons located on the steering wheel.1. ENTER — press to select the vehicle infor-

mation menu items. Additionally, use theUP/DOWN function to navigate themenu items

2. — move LEFT/RIGHT to navigatethrough the items in the vehicle infor-mation display

LIC3224 LIC4099

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY


The ENTER button also controls audiofunctions. For additional information, referto the separate NissanConnect® Owner’sManual.

STARTUP DISPLAYWhen the vehicle is placed in the ON or ACC(if so equipped) position, the vehicle infor-mation display may display the followingscreens:• Speed• Off Road• Auxiliary Gauges (if so equipped)• Traffic Sign Recognition (if so equipped)• Driving• Fuel Economy• Audio• Navigation (if so equipped)• Compass (if so equipped)• Driving Aids• Tire Pressures• Warning Confirmation• Settings

Warning Confirmation will only display ifthere are any warnings present. For addi-tional information, see “Vehicle informationdisplay warnings and indicators” (P. 2-32).To control which items display in the ve-hicle information display, see “Settings”(P. 2-24).

SETTINGSThe setting mode allows you to change theinformation displayed in the vehicle infor-mation display:• Driver Assistance• Meter Settings• Vehicle Settings• Towing Settings (if so equipped)• Alerts• Maintenance• Unit• Language• Factory Reset


Driver AssistanceThe driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving and parking aids.Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item ExplanationLane Displays available lane options.

Warning (LDW) Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Lane Departure Warn-ing (LDW)” (P. 5-27).

Blind Spot Displays available blind spot options.Warning (BSW) Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)”

(P. 5-32).Emergency Brake Displays available emergency brake options.

Front Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see “Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-81) and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-91).

Rear Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Automatic Braking(RAB)” (P. 5-76).

Driver Attention Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, see “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)”(P. 5-102).

Traffic Sign Allows use to turn the Speed Limit Sign recognition on or off. For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recognition” (P. 5-24).Parking Aids Displays available parking aids.

Moving Object Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) on or off. For additional information, see “Moving Object Detection(MOD)” (P. 4-23).

CTA Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA)” (P. 5-42).

Sensor Allows the user to turn the sensors on, only the front sensors on, or turn the sensors off.Display Allows user to turn the display on or off in the vehicle information display.Volume Allows user to adjust the volume of warning chimes.Range Allows user to set a specific range for the sensors to engage.


Meter SettingsThe meter settings allow the user to change the settings for the vehicle information display.Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item ExplanationMain Menu Selection Allows user to customize the screens shown in the vehicle information display.

Speed Allows user to turn the speedometer screen on or off in the vehicle information display.Off Road Allows user to turn the off road and 4WD monitor on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional

information, see “Off-Road and 4–Wheel Drive (4WD) Monitor” (P. 2-11).Auxiliary Gauges Allows user to turn the auxiliary gauges on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional informa-

tion, see “Auxiliary gauges” (P. 2-10).Driving Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display.Speed Limit Sign Allows user to turn the speed limit sign screen on or off in the vehicle information display.Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display.Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information,

refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.Navigation Allows user to turn the navigation on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer

to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.Driving Aids Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display.Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display.TPMS Allows user to set tire pressure targets.

ECO Drive Report Allows user to access the ECO drive report.Display Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off.ECO Drive Report Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history.

Welcome Effect Allows user to customize the available welcome effects.Dial Effect Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off.Display Effect Allows user to turn the display effect on or off.


Vehicle SettingsThe vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item ExplanationRear Door Alert Displays the available rear Door Alert options.

Alert and Horn When selected, the alert is displayed; and the horn sounds.Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed.Off When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

Lighting Displays available lighting features of the vehicle.Welcome Light Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp feature on or off.Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.

Turn indicator Displays available turn indicator options.3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass on or off.

Locking Displays available locking options.I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the

door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door ispushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if thedoor unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will beunlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Answer Back. Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off.Auto Unlock Displays available options for the auto door unlock.

Off Doors will have to be manually unlocked.IGN Off Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.Shift P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).


Wipers Displays available wiper options.Rain Sensor Allows user to turn the rain sensor feature on or off. For additional information, see “Wiper and washer

switch” (P. 2-41).Speed Dependent Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off. For additional information, see “Wiper and washer

switch” (P. 2-41).Headlamp On Displays available headlamp on options.

Off Headlights do not activate automatically when the wipers are activated.Wiper Low & High Headlights activate when the wiper stalk is set to either low or high mode.Wiper INT, Low & High Headlights activate when the wiper stalk is set to intermittent, low, or high mode.

Memory Seat (ADP) Displays available memory seat options.Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the driver’s seat

backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After getting intothe vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous setposition. For additional information, see “Memory Seat” (P. 3-39).

Exit Steering Up Allows the user to turn the exit steering up feature on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the steer-ing wheel upward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. After get-ting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the pre-vious position. For additional information, see “Memory Seat” (P. 3-39).

Reverse Tilt Mirror Displays reverse tilt mirror information.


Towing Settings (if so equipped)The towing settings menu allows the user to access the trailer light check.

Menu item ExplanationTrailer light check Allows user to select a mode in which the vehicle will test various lights that could affect a trailer if connected

properly. This feature can also be activated using the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. For additional information, see“NISSAN Intelligent Key®” (P. 3-2) and “Towing a trailer” (P. 10-33).

AlertsThe alarm menu allows the user to set specific alarms for various items on the vehicle.Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item ExplanationTimer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert alarm.Navigation Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.Phone Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off.Mail Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.


MaintenanceThe maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional informa-tion, see “Changing wheels and tires” (P. 8-43). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditionsaffect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does notmean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks.Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage couldoccur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Menu item ExplanationMaintenance Allows user to cycle through various maintenance items and set reminders to perform maintenance at spe-

cific intervals.Oil and Filter Allows user to set an oil and filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Air Filter Allows user to set an air filter reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Tire Allows user to set a tire reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Brake Pad Allows user to set a brake pad reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Brake Fluid Allows user to set a brake fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Battery Allows user to set a battery reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Transmission Fluid Allows user to set a transmission fluid reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Engine Coolant Allows user to set an engine coolant reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Spark Plug Allows user to set a spark plug reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.Other Allows user to set a reminder, other than for the maintenance items listed above, at a specific interval or re-

set the current one.


UnitThe unit menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Menu item ExplanationMileage Displays available mileage display units.Pressure Displays available pressure display units.Temperature Displays available temperature display units.

LanguageThe language menu allows the user to change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display.

Menu item ExplanationLanguage Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Factory ResetThe factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Menu item ExplanationFactory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,

the user can confirm or deny the reset.


VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAYWARNINGS AND INDICATORSThe following messages may appear inyour vehicle information display.

Key Battery Low

This indicator appears when the IntelligentKey battery is running out of power.If this indicator appears, replace the bat-tery with a new one. For additional infor-mation, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-27).

Key ID IncorrectThis warning appears when the ignitionswitch is placed from the OFF position andthe Intelligent Key is not recognized by thesystem. You cannot start the engine withan unregistered key.For additional information, see “NISSAN In-telligent Key®” (P. 3-2).

Key System Error: SeeOwner’s Manual

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this warning appears for a periodof time and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of amalfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-tem. If the warning appears while the en-gine is stopped, it may be impossible tostart the engine.If the warning appears while the engine isrunning, you can drive the vehicle. However,in these cases, have the system checked. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

No Key DetectedThis warning appears when the IntelligentKey is left outside the vehicle with the igni-tion switch in the ON position. Make surethe Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.For additional information, see “NISSAN In-telligent Key®” (P. 3-2).Battery Voltage Low Charge batteryThis warning appears when the battery islow and needs to be charged.

Brightness indicatorThis indicator appears when the vehicleinformation display screen brightness isbeing adjusted.

Door OpenThis warning appears when a door hasbeen opened.

Flat Tire

This warning appears when the low tirepressure warning light in the meter illumi-nates and one or more flat tires are de-tected while driving.FRT & RR tire size difference: SeeOwner’s ManualThis warning may appear if there is a largedifference between the diameters of thefront and rear wheels. Pull off the road in asafe area, with the engine idling. Check thatall the tire sizes are the same, that the tirepressure is correct and that the tires arenot excessively worn. For additional infor-mation, see “Wheels and tires” (P. 8-35).Headlight System Error: See Owner’sManualThis warning appears when the LED head-lights are not functioning properly.If this warning appears, have your systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.


Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-fillercap is not tightened correctly after the ve-hicle has been refueled. For additional in-formation, see “Fuel-filler door” (P. 3-24).

Low Fuel

This warning appears when the fuel level inthe fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soonas it is convenient, preferably before thefuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will bea small reserve of fuel in the tank whenthe fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Low Tire Pressure Error —Info

This warning appears when the low tirepressure warning light in the meter illumi-nates and low tire pressure is detected.Press the ENTER button for informationabout the low tire pressure. For additionalinformation, see “Low tire pressure warninglight” (P. 2-18) and “Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS)” (P. 5-5).

Low Washer FluidThis warning appears when thewindshield-washer fluid is at a low level.Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.For additional information, see“Windshield-washer fluid” (P. 8-15).

Maintenance indicatorsWhen engine oil service is due, one or moreof these icons will appear automatically toremind you. For additional information, see“Engine oil” (P. 8-7).These will also appear when the user-setreminders are met. For additional informa-tion, see “Vehicle information display”(P. 2-23).Power turned off to save the batteryThis warning appears after the ignitionswitch is automatically turned off to savethe battery.Power will turn off to save the batteryThis message appears in the vehicle infor-mation display after a period of time if theignition switch is in the ACC or the ON po-sition and if the vehicle is in P (Park). Foradditional information, see “Push-buttonignition switch positions” (P. 5-14).

Push brake and startbutton to drive

This indicator appears when the shift leveris in the P (Park) position.This indicator means that the engine willstart by pushing the ignition switch withthe brake pedal depressed. You can startthe engine from any position of the ignitionswitch.

Push Ignition to OFFAfter the Push ignition to OFF warning ap-pears, the warning will appear if the ignitionswitch is placed in the ACC position whenthe shift lever is moved to the P (Park)position.To turn off the Push warning, place the ig-nition switch in the ON position and then inthe LOCK position.

Range XX milesThis warning appears to indicate the ap-proximate distance remaining before thefuel reaches 0 (Empty).


Check Rear Seat For All ArticlesWhen the system is enabled, this messageappears when the vehicle comes to a com-plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned fromthe D (Drive) position to P (Park) position,and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes-sage alerts the driver, after a period of time,to check for items in the rear seat after theaudible alert has been provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en-ables it using the vehicle informationdisplay. For additional information, see“How to use the vehicle information dis-play” (P. 2-23).For additional information, see “Rear DoorAlert” (P. 2-65).Rear Door Alert is activatedWhen the system is enabled, this messageappears when the Rear Door Alert systemis active and can remind the driver to checkthe back seat.• Using the steering wheel switch, a driver

can select “Dismiss Message” to clear thedisplay for a period of time. If no selectionis made, this message automaticallyturns off after a period of time.

• Using the steering wheel switch, a drivercan select “Disable Alert” to disable thehorn alert for the remainder of the cur-rent trip.

WARNING

Selecting “Dismiss Message” during astop within a trip temporarily dis-misses the message for that stop with-out turning the system off. Alerts canbe provided for other stops during thetrip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns offthe Rear Door Alert system for the re-mainder of a trip and no audible alertwill be provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en-ables it using the vehicle informationdisplay. For additional information, “Howto use the vehicle information display”(P. 2-23).For additional information, “Rear Door Alert”(P. 2-65).

Rear seat belt reminderThis rear seat belt reminder appears afterstarting the engine.If any of the rear passenger seat belts arenot fastened, the seat belt icon illuminatesin red to show which seat belt is not fas-tened. When a rear passenger’s seat belthas been securely fastened, the color of thecorresponding seat belt icon will change.The warning will automatically turn off af-ter approximately 35 seconds.A chime will sound one time and the rearseat belt warning will appear if a rear pas-senger’s seat belt is unfastened. The chimewill not sound when the vehicle speed ex-ceeds 10 mph (15km/h). The seat belt iconilluminates in red until the correspondingrear passenger’s seat belt is fastened. Thewarning will automatically turn off after ap-proximately 35 seconds.Release Parking BrakeThis warning appears in the message areaof the vehicle information display when theparking brake is set and the vehicle isdriven. Press the brake pedal to release theparking brake.


Reminder: Turn OFFHeadlights

This warning appears when the headlightsare left in the ON position when exiting thevehicle. Place the headlight switch in theOFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-mation, see “Headlight switch” (P. 2-44).

Remote Engine Start ModeThis warning appears in the vehicle infor-mation display when the vehicle has beenstarted using the remote start function. Tostart the vehicle, apply the brake and placethe ignition switch in the ON position.

Shift to ParkThis warning appears when the ignitionswitch is in the ACC or OFF position and theshift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,a chime sounds when the ignition switch isin the ACC or OFF position.If this warning appears, move the shift leverto the P (Park) position and start the engine.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage FuseThis warning may appear if the extendedstorage switch is not pushed in. When thiswarning appears, push in the extendedstorage switch to turn off the warning. Foradditional information, see “Extended stor-age switch” (P. 2-69).

Tire Pressure Low - Add AirThis warning appears when the low tirepressure warning light in the meter illumi-nates and low tire pressure is detected. Thewarning appears each time the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position as longas the low tire pressure warning light re-mains illuminated. If this warning appears,stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-sures of all four tires to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. For additionalinformation, see “Low tire pressure warninglight” (P. 2-18) and “Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS)” (P. 5-5).TPMS Error: See Owner’s ManualThis warning appears when there is an er-ror with your TPMS. If this warning appears,have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

When parked apply parking brakeThis message appears when a malfunc-tion occurs in the electric shift control sys-tem below 3 mph (5 km/h).Have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

4WD Error: See Owner’sManual

This warning appears when the 4-wheeldrive system is not functioning properlywhile the engine is running.

4WD shift indicatorsThese indicators show which 4WD mode isselected. For additional information, see“Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” (P. 5-107).4WD MODE SHIFTINGThis message appears when the vehicle isshifting into 4WD. For additional informa-tion, see “Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)”(P. 5-107).


AT (AutomaticTransmission) CHECK

If the service warning appears while theengine is running, or while driving, it mayindicate that the AT is not functioning prop-erly and may need servicing. Have the sys-tem checked, and if necessary, repairedpromptly. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.AT (Automatic Transmission) Error:See Owner’s ManualIf this message appears while the engine isrunning, or while driving, it may indicatethat the AT is not functioning properly andmay need servicing. Have the systemchecked, and if necessary, repairedpromptly. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.Service ATThis transmission has a high fluid tem-perature protection mode. If the fluid tem-perature becomes too high (for example,climbing steep grades in high tempera-tures with heavy loads, such as when tow-ing a trailer), engine power and, undersome conditions, vehicle speed will be de-creased automatically to reduce thechance of transmission damage. Vehiclespeed can be controlled with the accelera-

tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speedmay be reduced.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-tection mode operation occurs, vehiclespeed may be gradually reduced. Thereduced speed may be lower thanother traffic, which could increase thechance of a collision. Be especiallycareful when driving. If necessary, pullto the side of the road at a safe placeand allow the transmission to return tonormal operation; or have it repaired ifnecessary.

Automatic EmergencyBraking (AEB) withPedestrian Detectionemergency warningindicator

This indicator appears along, with an au-dible warning, when the system detectsthe possibility of a forward collision.For additional information, see “AutomaticEmergency Braking (AEB) with PedestrianDetection” (P. 5-81).

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) indicator

This indicator appears when the BSW andRCTA systems are engaged.For additional information, see “Blind SpotWarning (BSW)” (P. 5-32) and “Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-42).

Cruise control indicator

This indicator shows the cruise control sys-tem status.For additional information, see “Cruise con-trol” (P. 5-50).Currently unavailableThis message may appear when the Intel-ligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is en-gaged. Under the following conditions, theICC system is automatically cancelled:• When the VDC operates.• When a wheel slips.• When the VDC system is turned off.The above system cannot be used in somesituations (VDC operates, wheel slips, andVDC system is off).


Driver Attention Alert —Malfunction

This warning appears when the IntelligentDriver Alertness (I-DA) system is not func-tioning properly. For additional information,see “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)”(P. 5-102).

Driver Attention Alert —Take a Break?

This alert appears when the system hasdetected that the driver may be displayingfatigue or a lack of attention.Forward Driving Aids TemporarilyDisabled Front Sensor Blocked SeeOwner’s ManualThis message appears when the front ra-dar sensor may be obstructed due to:• mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc.• inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)All forward driving aids are temporarily dis-abled until the system detects that thefront radar sensor is no longer obstructed.For additional information, see:• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-81)• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (P. 5-52)

• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) (P. 5-91)

Intelligent Cruise Control(ICC) indicators

These indicators show the IntelligentCruise Control (ICC) system status. The sta-tus is shown by color. For additional infor-mation, see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”(P. 5-52).

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) indicator

This indicator appears when the LDW sys-tem is engaged.For additional information, see “Lane De-parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-27).MalfunctionThis warning appears when one or more ofthe following systems (if so equipped) isnot functioning properly:• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)• Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)• Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

If one or more of these warning appears,have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.Not Available High Camera TempThis message appears when the cameradetects an interior temperature of morethan approximately 104°F (40°C).For additional information, see “AutomaticEmergency Braking (AEB) with PedestrianDetection” (P. 5-81), “Lane Departure Warn-ing (LDW)” (P. 5-27) and “Traffic Sign Recog-nition” (P. 5-24).

Parking SensorThis indicator appears when the sensor isactivated. For additional information, see“Front and rear sonar system” (P. 5-124).

Parking Sensor Error: SeeOwner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an er-ror with the system. For additional informa-tion, see “Front and rear sonar system”(P. 5-124).


Rear Automatic Braking(RAB) indicator

This indicator appears to indicate the sta-tus of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)system. For additional information, see“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-76).

Speed Limit Sign indicator

This message may appear when the TrafficSign Recognition system is engaged.For additional information, see “Traffic SignRecognition” (P. 5-24).System fault See Owner’s ManualThis warning appears if there is a malfunc-tion in one of the following systems:• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW)• Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)For additional information, see “AutomaticEmergency Braking (AEB) with PedestrianDetection” (P. 5-81), “Intelligent Forward Col-lision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-91) and “RearAutomatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-76).

Unavailable Side Radar ObstructionThis message appears when the BlindSpot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA) systems become unavailablebecause a radar blockage is detected. Foradditional information, see “Blind SpotWarning (BSW)” (P. 5-32) and “Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-42).

Vehicle ahead detectionindicator

This indicator appears when the Auto-matic Emergency Braking (AEB) system isengaged and has detected a vehicle.For additional information, see “AutomaticEmergency Braking (AEB) with PedestrianDetection” (P. 5-81).

Your vehicle has two types of securitysystems:• Vehicle security system• NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visualand audible alarm signals if someoneopens the doors or hood when the systemis armed. It is not, however, a motion detec-tion type system that activates when a ve-hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

LIC0359

SECURITY SYSTEMS


The system helps deter vehicle theft butcannot prevent it, nor can it prevent thetheft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-nents in all situations. Always secure yourvehicle even if parking for a brief period.Never leave your keys in the vehicle, andalways lock the vehicle when unattended.Be aware of your surroundings, and park insecure, well-lit areas whenever possible.Many devices offering additional protec-tion, such as component locks, identifica-tion markers, and tracking systems, areavailable at auto supply stores and spe-cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offersuch equipment. Check with your insur-ance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protectionfeatures.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from thevehicle.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with the Intelligent Key ordoor handle request switch.

4. Confirm that the security indicatorlight stays on for about 30 seconds. Thevehicle security system is now pre-armed. The vehicle security system willautomatically shift into the armedphase. The security light begins toflash once every three seconds. If duringthe pre-armed phase one of the follow-ing occurs, the system will not arm:

• Any door is unlocked with the IntelligentKey or door request switch.

• Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ONposition.

• Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willactivate with all the doors, hood andlocked with the ignition switch placedin the LOCK position. When placing theignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-tion, the system will be released.

• The lockable bedside storage com-partment (if so equipped) is not pro-tected by the vehicle security system.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give thefollowing alarm:• The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently but synchronously.

• The alarm automatically turns off after aperiod of time. However, the alarm reacti-vates if the vehicle is tampered withagain.

The alarm is activated by:• opening any door or hood without using

the Intelligent Key (even if the door is un-locked by releasing the door inside lockknob).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by pressing thebutton on the Intelligent Key.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of a registered key.If the engine fails to start using a registeredkey (for example, when interference iscaused by another registered key, an auto-mated toll road device or automatic pay-ment device on the key ring), restart theengine using the following procedures:1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the

ON position for approximately 5seconds.


2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the de-vice (which may have caused the inter-ference) separate from the registeredkey.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSANrecommends placing the registered key ona separate key ring to avoid interferencefrom other devices.FCC Notice:For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's author-ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:This device contains licence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s) that complywith Innovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment Canada’s licence-exemptRSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause interference. (2) This de-vice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

Security indicator lightThe security indicator light blinks wheneverthe ignition switch is placed in the OFF,LOCK or ACC position.This function indicates the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System is operational.If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ismalfunctioning, the light will remain onwhile the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

LIC0474


If the light still remains on and/or theengine will not start, seek service for theNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System assoon as possible. Please bring all regis-tered keys that you have. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

SWITCH OPERATIONWARNING

In freezing temperatures the washersolution may freeze on the windshieldand obscure your vision which maylead to an accident. Warm the wind-shield with the defroster before youwash the windshield.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

• Do not operate the washer if thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir isempty.

LIC3445Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3035Type B (if so equipped)

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH


• Do not fill the windshield-washerfluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at fullstrength. Some methyl alcoholbased windshield-washer fluid con-centrates may permanently stain thegrille if spilled while filling thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluidconcentrates with water to themanufacturer's recommended lev-els before pouring the fluid into thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.Do not use the windshield-washerfluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in-terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper maystop moving to protect its motor. If thisoccurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFFposition and remove the snow or ice thatis on and around the wiper arms. In ap-proximately 1 minute, turn the switch onagain to operate the wiper.The windshield wiper and washer operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

Rotate the end of the lever to operate thewiper at the following speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent opera-tion can be adjusted by turning theknob toward OA (Slower) or OB (Faster).Also, the intermittent operation speedvaries in accordance with the vehiclespeed. (For example, when the vehiclespeed is high, the intermittent opera-tion speed will be faster.)

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speedoperation

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speedoperation

Rotate the lever the opposite direction O4

to have one sweep operation (MIST) of thewiper.Press the button on the end of the lever O5

to operate the washer. The wiper will alsooperate several times.

NOTE:

The Speed Dependent feature may bedisabled. For additional information, see“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23).

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPERSYSTEM (if so equipped)

CAUTION

• Do not touch the rain sensor andaround it when the wiper switch is inthe AUTO position and the ignitionswitch is in the ON position. The wip-ers may operate unexpectedly andcause an injury or may damage awiper.

LIC3446


• The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-tended for use during rain. If theswitch is left in the AUTO position, thewipers may operate unexpectedlywhen dirt, fingerprints, oil film or in-sects are stuck on or around the sen-sor. The wipers may also operatewhen exhaust gas or moisture affectthe rain sensor.

• When the windshield glass is coatedwith water repellent, the speed of therain-sensing auto wipers may behigher even though the amount ofthe rainfall is small.

• Be sure to turn off the rain-sensingauto wiper system when you use acar wash.

• The rain-sensing auto wipers maynot operate if rain does not hit therain sensor even if it is raining.

• Using Genuine NISSAN wiper bladesis recommended for proper opera-tion of the rain-sensing auto wipersystem. For additional information,see “Windshield wiper blades”(P. 8-22).

The rain-sensing auto wiper system canautomatically turn on the wipers and ad-just the wiper speed depending on therainfall and the vehicle speed by using therain sensor located on the upper part ofthe windshield.To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,rotate the lever to the AUTO position O1 .The wiper will sweep once while the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.The rain sensor sensitivity level can be ad-justed by turning the knob toward the frontOB (High) or toward the rear OA (Low).– High — High sensitive operation– Low — Low sensitive operationTo turn the rain-sensing auto wiper systemoff, rotate the lever to the OFF position, orrotate the lever to the LO or HI position.

NOTE:

The rain sensor feature may be disabled.For additional information, see “Vehicleinformation display” (P. 2-23).


REAR WINDOW AND/OR OUTSIDEMIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if soequipped)


To defrost the rear window glass and/oroutside mirrors, start the engine and pushthe rear window/outside mirror defrosterswitch on. The indicator light on the switchwill illuminate. Push the switch again toturn the defroster off.The defroster automatically turns off afterapproximately 15 minutes.

NOTE:

If the rear power window (if so equipped)is open while the defroster switch is on,the rear window defroster will automati-cally shut off. The heated outside mirrors(if so equipped) will remain on. The rearwindow defroster will automatically turnon when the rear power window is fullyclosed if the switch is on.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCHLighting

�1 Rotate the switch to the position,and the front parking, tail, license plate,and instrument panel lights will comeon.

�2 Rotate the switch to the position,and the headlights will come on. Allother lights, except the map lights (if soequipped), will remain on.



HEADLIGHT SWITCH


CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight systemThe autolight system allows the headlightsto be set so they turn on and off automati-cally. The autolight system can:• Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lightsautomatically when it is dark.

• Turn off all the lights when it is light.• Keep all the lights on for a period of time

after you place the ignition switch in theOFF position and all doors are closed.


LIC4331Type C (if so equipped)



NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff can beadjusted. For additional information, see“How to use the vehicle information dis-play” (P. 2-23).To turn on the autolight system:1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position O1 .

2. Place the ignition switch in the ONposition.

3. The autolight system automaticallyturns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position and a door is opened and leftopen, the headlights remain on for a periodof time. If another door is opened while theheadlights are on, then the timer is reset.To turn the autolight system off, turn theswitch to the OFF, , or position.The headlights will turn on automatically attwilight or in rainy weather (when the wind-shield wiper is operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition and one of the doors is openedand this condition is continued, the head-lights remain on for 5 minutes.


LIC4332Type C (if so equipped)


Be sure you do not put anything on topof the autolight sensor O1 located on thetop side of the instrument panel. The au-tolight sensor controls the autolight; if itis covered, the autolight sensor reacts asif it is dark out and the headlights willilluminate. If this occurs while parkedwith the engine off and the ignitionswitch placed in the ON position, yourvehicle's battery could becomedischarged.

Follow me home lighting (if soequipped)The follow me home feature allows you toprovide lighting from the vehicle after theignition switch has been placed in the OFFposition. Pulling the headlight stalk towardyou once will activate the headlights forapproximately 30 seconds. After that pe-riod of time, it will automatically switch off. Itis possible to pull the headlight stalk up tofour times to increase the lighting periodup to 2 minutes.

NOTE:

The follow me home feature can be can-celed by placing the ignition switch inthe ON position.

Headlight beam select�1 To select the high beam function, en-

sure the low beams are on using theheadlight control switch, then push thelever forward. The high beam lightscome on and the blue indicatorlight illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to return to the lowbeam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashesthe headlight high beams on and off.The low beams need not be engagedfor this function.

LIC3487 LIC3060


High Beam AssistThe High Beam Assist system will operatewhen the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap-proximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. Ifan oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle ap-pears in front of your vehicle when theheadlight high beam is on, the headlightwill be switched to the low beamautomatically.

WARNING

• The High Beam Assist system is aconvenience but it is not a substitutefor safe driving operation. The drivershould remain alert at all times, en-sure safe driving practices andswitch the high beams and low beammanually when necessary.

• The high beam or low beam may notswitch automatically under the fol-lowing conditions. Switch the highbeam and low beam manually.– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, wind, etc.).– When a light source similar to a

headlight or tail light is in the vi-cinity of the vehicle.

– When the headlights of the on-coming vehicle or the leading ve-hicle are turned off, when the colorof the light is affected due to for-eign materials on the lights, orwhen the light beam is out ofposition.

– When there is a sudden, continu-ous change in brightness.

– When driving on a road thatpasses over rolling hills, or a roadthat has level differences.

– When driving on a road with manycurves.

– When a sign or mirror-like surfaceis reflecting intense light towardsthe front of the vehicle.

– When the container, etc. beingtowed by a leading vehicle is re-flecting intense light.

– When a headlight on your vehicleis damaged or dirty.

– When the vehicle is leaning at anangle due to a punctured tire, be-ing towed, etc.

• The timing of switching the lowbeam and high beam may changeunder the following situations.– The brightness of the headlights

of the oncoming vehicle or leadingvehicle.

– The movement and direction ofthe oncoming vehicle and theleading vehicle.

– When only one light on the on-coming vehicle or the leading ve-hicle is illuminated.

– When the oncoming vehicle or theleading vehicle is a two-wheeledvehicle.

– Road conditions (incline, curve,the road surface, etc.).

– The number of passengers andthe amount of luggage.


High Beam Assist operationTo activate the High Beam Assist system,turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-sition O1 and then push the wiper andwasher switch forward O2 (high beam po-sition). The High Beam Assist indicator lightin the meter will illuminate while the head-lights are turned on.If the High Beam Assist indicator light doesnot illuminate in the above condition, it mayindicate that the system is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked, it isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

When the vehicle speed lowers to less thanapproximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the head-light uses the low beam.To turn off the High Beam Assist system,turn the headlight switch to the posi-tion or select the low beam position byplacing the lever in the neutral position.

Ambient image sensor maintenanceThe ambient image sensor O1 for the HighBeam Assist system is located in front ofthe inside mirror. To maintain the properoperation of the high beam assist systemand prevent a system malfunction, be sureto observe the following:• Always keep the windshield clean.• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessorynear the ambient image sensor.

• Do not strike or damage the areasaround the ambient image sensor. Donot touch the sensor lens that is locatedon the ambient image sensor.

LIC4324 LIC4333 LSD2712


If the ambient image sensor is damageddue to an accident, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition while the headlight switch is in the

or position, the headlights willturn off after a period of time.After the headlights automatically turn offwith the headlight switch in the or

position, the headlights will illuminateagain if the headlight switch is moved tothe OFF position and then turned to the

or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver featureautomatically turns off the headlightsafter a period of time, you should turnthe headlight switch to the OFF posi-tion when the engine is not running toavoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Manual headlight aiming control(if so equipped)Depending on the number of occupants inthe vehicle and the load it is carrying, theheadlight axis may be higher than desired.If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, theheadlights may directly hit the rearviewmirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-shield of the oncoming vehicle. The lightaxis can be lowered with the operation ofthe switch.The larger the number designated on theswitch, the lower the axis.

When traveling without a heavy load or on aflat road, select position 0.Select the switch position by referring tothe following sample.

Vehicle Load SwitchPosition

Driver only or Driver/frontpassenger 0

Driver/front seatpassenger/rear seat pas-

sengers1

Driver/front seatpassenger/rear seatpassengers/cargo or

driver/cargo/no trailer

2

Fully loaded/no trailer 3

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)The lights in the fog light area automati-cally illuminate at 100% intensity when theengine is started and the parking brakereleased. The Daytime Running Lights(DRL) operate with the headlight switch inthe OFF or AUTO position.

LIC2230


If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.The DRL illuminate when the parking brakeis released. The DRL remain on while theengine is running.It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlightswitch on for interior controls and switchesto illuminate, as those remain off while theswitch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the DRL system is active, taillights on your vehicle are not on. It isnecessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself andothers.

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS(DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if soequipped)The LED portion of the headlights auto-matically illuminates at 100% intensitywhen the engine is started and the parkingbrake released. The LED Daytime RunningLights (LED DRL) operate with the headlightswitch in the OFF or AUTO position. Whenyou turn the headlight switch to the

position for full illumination, the LED lightsswitch from LED DRL to the park function.If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-nate. The LED DRL illuminate when theparking brake is released. The LED DRL re-main on while the engine is running.It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlightswitch ON for interior controls andswitches to illuminate, as those remain offwhile the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active, taillights on your vehicle are not on. It isnecessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself andothers.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLPress the “+” button to increase the bright-ness of instrument panel lights.Press the “-” button to decrease the bright-ness of instrument panel lights.

LIC3176


TURN SIGNAL SWITCHTurn signal�1 Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signal cancelsautomatically.

Lane change signal�2 Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the leverdoes not latch, to signal a lane change.Hold the lever until the lane change iscompleted.

Move the lever up or down until the turnsignal begins to flash, but the lever doesnot latch, and release the lever. The turnsignal will automatically flash three times.Choose the appropriate method to signala lane change based on road and trafficconditions.

NOTE:

The 3 flash pass turn indicator may bedisabled. For additional information, see“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23).

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlightswitch to the position, then push thefog light switch O1 on.To turn the fog lights on with the headlightswitch in the AUTO position, the headlightsmust be on, then push the fog light switchon.To turn the fog lights off, push the fog lightswitch again.The headlights must be on and the lowbeams selected for the fog lights to oper-ate. The fog lights automatically turn offwhen the high beam headlights areselected.

LIC3061 LIC4325

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)


Fog may temporarily form inside the lensof the exterior lights in the rain or in a carwash. A temperature difference betweenthe inside and the outside of the lenscauses fog. This is not a malfunction, iflarge drops of water collect inside the lens,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for servicing.

To sound the horn, push near the horn iconon the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the supplementalfront air bag system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

To turn on the cargo lamp and the underrail bed lamps (if so equipped) push theswitch down to the ON position. The tail-gate lights (if so equipped) will also illumi-nate when the cargo lamp switch is in theON position.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could re-sult in a discharged battery.

LIC2051 LIC0616

HORN CARGO LAMP SWITCH (if soequipped)


WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to usethe climate controlled seats if you orthe occupants cannot monitor seattemperatures or have an inability tofeel pain in those body parts in contactwith the seat. Use of the climate con-trolled seats by such people could re-sult in serious injury.

CAUTION

• The battery could run down if the cli-mate control seat is operated whilethe engine is not running.

• Do not use the climate control seatfor extended periods or when no oneis using the seat.

• Do not put anything on the seatwhich insulates heat, such as a blan-ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-wise, the seat may becomeoverheated.

• Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar objects. This may result indamage to the climate controlledseat.

• Any liquid spilled on the seat shouldbe removed immediately with a drycloth.

• The climate controlled seat has an airfilter. Do not operate the climate con-trolled seat without an air filter. Thismay result in damage to the system.

• When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or anysimilar materials.

• If any malfunctions are found or theclimate controlled seat does not op-erate, turn the switch off and havethe system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service. The climate controlled seat warms up or

cools down the front seat by blowing warmor cool air from under the surface of theseat. The climate control switch is locatedon the center console.The climate controlled seat can be oper-ated as follows:1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob OA to the heat sideO1 or the cool side O2 . The indicator lightOB on the control knob will illuminate.

SIC4334

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATSWITCHES (if so equipped)


3. Adjust the desired amount of air usingthe control knob. The climate controlledseat blower remains on low speed forapproximately 60 seconds after turningthe switch on or selecting the desiredtemperature.

4. When the vehicle's interior is warmed orcooled, or before you leave the vehicle,be sure to turn the control knob to theOff (center) position. The indicator lightOB on the control knob goes off with theswitch in the off (center) position.

To check the air filter for the climate con-trolled seat, it is recommended that youcontact a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to usethe seat heater if you or the occupantscannot monitor elevated seat tem-peratures or have an inability to feelpain in body parts that contact theseat. Use of the seat heater by suchpeople could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

• Do not use the seat heater for ex-tended periods or when no one is us-ing the seat.


• Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar object. This may result indamage to the heater.

• Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately witha dry cloth.


• If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turnthe switch off and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

• The battery could run down if theseat heater is operated while the en-gine is not running.

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if soequipped)


1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,as desired, depending on the tempera-ture. The indicator light in the switch willilluminate.The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on andoff. The indicator light will remain on aslong as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn theswitch off.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to usethe seat heater if you or the occupantscannot monitor elevated seat tem-peratures or have an inability to feelpain in body parts that contact theseat. Use of the seat heater by suchpeople could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

• The battery could run down if theseat heater is operated while the en-gine is not running.

• Do not use the seat heater for ex-tended periods or when no one is us-ing the seat.


• Do not place anything hard or heavyon the seat or pierce it with a pin orsimilar object. This may result indamage to the heater.

• Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately witha dry cloth.


• If any malfunctions are found or theheated seat does not operate, turnthe switch off and have the systemchecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC3037

HEATED REAR SEAT SWITCHES (if soequipped)


The rear seats are warmed by built-in heat-ers. The switches are located on the rear ofthe front center console and can be oper-ated independently of each other.1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,as desired. The indicator light in theswitch will illuminate.The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on andoff. The indicator light will remain on aslong as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn theswitch off.

The heated steering wheel system is de-signed to operate only when the surfacetemperature of the steering wheel is below68°F (20°C).Push the heated steering wheel switch towarm the steering wheel after the enginestarts. The indicator light will come on.If the surface temperature of the steeringwheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system willheat the steering wheel and cycle off andon to maintain a temperature above 68°F(20°C). The indicator light will remain on aslong as the system is on.

LIC3037 LIC4582

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH(if so equipped)


Push the switch again to turn the heatedsteering wheel system off manually. Theindicator light will go off. The switch will turnoff automatically 30 minutes after activa-tion, once this happens the switch will needto be pressed again to restart the cycle.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when theswitch is turned on, the system will notheat the steering wheel. This is not amalfunction.

The warning systems switch is used to turnon and off the following systems that areactivated using the Settings menu in thevehicle information display:• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)When the warning systems switch isturned off, the indicator O1 on the switch isoff. The indicator will also be off if all of thewarning systems are deactivated usingthe settings menu.

The BSW system will turn on the side indi-cator lights, located by the outside mirrors,if the radar sensors detect a vehicle in thedetection zone. If the turn signal is acti-vated in the direction of the detected ve-hicle, a chime sounds twice and the sideindicator light will flash.The LDW system will sound a warning; thesteering wheel will vibrate; and the LDWindicator (orange) will blink to alert thedriver of the vehicle is traveling close toeither the left or the right of a traveling lanewith detectable lane markers.For additional information, see “Blind SpotWarning (BSW)” (P. 5-32) and “Lane Depar-ture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-27).

LIC2225

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH


The vehicle should be driven with the VDCsystem on for most driving conditions.If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, theVDC system reduces the engine output toreduce wheel spin. The engine speed willbe reduced even if the accelerator is de-pressed to the floor. If maximum enginepower is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the VDC system off.To turn off the VDC system, push the VDCOFF switch. The indicator will comeon.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine to turn on the system. For addi-tional information, see “Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) system” (P. 5-120).

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill descentcontrol system to control vehiclespeed when driving on steep down-hill grades. Always drive carefullywhen using the hill descent controlsystem and decelerate the vehiclespeed by depressing the brake pedalif necessary. Be especially carefulwhen driving on frozen, muddy or ex-tremely steep downhill roads. Failureto control vehicle speed may result ina loss of control of the vehicle andpossible serious injury or death.

LIC3344 LIC3447

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH(if so equipped)


• The hill descent control may not con-trol the vehicle speed on a hill underall load or road conditions. Always beprepared to depress the brake pedalto control vehicle speed. Failure to doso may result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control systemoperates continuously for a long time,the temperature of the brake pads mayincrease and the hill descent controlsystem may be temporarily disabled(the indicator light will blink). If the indi-cator light does not come on continu-ously after blinking, stop using thesystem.

The hill descent control system is designedto reduce driver workload when goingdown steep hills. The hill descent controlsystem helps to control vehicle speed sothe driver can concentrate on steering thevehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:• activate the 4H or 4LO switch,• the transmission shift lever must be in

forward or reverse gear,• the hill descent control system switch

must be ON.The vehicle speed must be kept below15 mph (25 km/h).The hill descent control indicator light willcome on when the system is activated.Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while thehill descent control system applies thebrakes to control vehicle speed.You may hear a noise from under the hoodor feel a vibration from the actuator when itis operating. This is normal and indicatesthe hill descent control system is workingproperly.If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-pressed while the hill descent control sys-tem is on, the system will stop operatingtemporarily. As soon as the accelerator orbrake pedal is released, the hill descentcontrol system begins to function again ifthe hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control indicator lightblinks if the switch is on and all conditionsfor system activation are not met or if thesystem becomes disengaged for anyreason.To turn off the hill descent control system,push the switch to the OFF position.For additional information, see “Hill descentcontrol system ON indicator light” (P. 2-18)and “Hill descent control system” (P. 5-123).


The E-Lock system can help provide addedtraction if the vehicle is stuck or becomingstuck.To activate the E-Lock system:• the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO posi-

tion (4-wheel drive vehicles),• the vehicle must be stopped or moving at

4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and• the E-Lock system switch must be

turned ON.

When the E-Lock system switch is turnedON, the indicator light will flash until thesystem engages. However, if all operationconditions listed above are not met or thesystem becomes disengaged, the indica-tor light will continue to flash.The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) systemis disabled and the ABS light illuminateswhen the E-Lock system is on.For additional information, see “Electroniclocking rear differential (E-Lock) system”(P. 5-114) for further explanation and systemlimitations.

WARNING

• Never leave the E-Lock system ONwhen driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehiclemay result in the rear wheels slippingand result in an accident and per-sonal injury. After using the E-Locksystem to free the vehicle, turn thesystem OFF.

• Use the E-lock system only in anemergency when it is not possible tofree a stuck vehicle even using 4LO.Never use the E-Lock system on aslippery road surface such as snowor ice surface. Using the E-Lock sys-tem when driving in these road con-ditions may cause unexpectedmovement of the vehicle during en-gine braking, accelerating or turning,which may result in an accident andserious personal injury.

• Observe the above warnings. Other-wise, loss of normal steering controlmay result. This may result in an ac-cident and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

• After using the E-Lock system, orduring normal driving, turn theswitch OFF to prevent possible dam-age to drivetrain components fromextended use.

• When the E-Lock system is in opera-tion, turning the vehicle becomes dif-ficult. This can be dangerous, espe-cially at high speeds. Doing so coulddamage drivetrain components.

LIC4341

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEMSWITCH (if so equipped)


• Do not operate the E-Lock systemwhen the vehicle is turning or whenone side wheel is rotating. Otherwise,the drivetrain components could bedamaged.

• The E-Lock system operates onlywhen the engine is running.

• In 4H mode, the E-Lock system doesnot operate when the E-Lock systemswitch is turned to the ON position.(The E-Lock system indicator lightwill flash.)

• Avoid quick starts while the E-Locksystem is in operation. Otherwise thedrivetrain components could bedamaged.

• Observe the above cautions. Other-wise, loss of normal steering mayresult.

To use the outlets for devices that requireup to 120v power, the vehicle must be run-ning and the power inverter switch mustbe on.When the vehicle is in the P (Park) position,the 400W and the 150W will automaticallyilluminate. When the vehicle is out of the P(Park) position, only 150W will illuminate.For additional information, see “120v out-lets” (P. 2-67) regarding using devices thatrequire the power inverter switch to beactivated.

CAUTION

• Use power outlets with the enginerunning to avoid discharging the ve-hicle battery.

• Do not attempt to use this whiledriving.

• Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory, doingso could significantly drain the bat-tery of your vehicle.

LIC2075

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if soequipped)


The Parking Aids system switch on the in-strument panel allows the driver to turnthe following systems (if so equipped) onand off. To turn the systems on and off, theignition switch must be in the ON position.• Front and rear sonar system• Moving Object Detection (MOD)• Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)• Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)The indicator light on the switch will illumi-nate when the systems are turned on.

If the indicator light flashes when the Frontand rear sonar system, MOD, RAB, or RCTAsystems are not turned off, it may indicatea malfunction in one or more of these sys-tems (if so equipped).The Front and rear sonar system, MOD,RAB, or RCTA systems will be turned onautomatically under the followingconditions:• When the ignition switch is switched from

the OFF position to the ON position.• When the shift lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position.The automatic turning on function can beturned on and off for these systems in thevehicle information display. For additionalinformation, see “Settings” (P. 2-24).For additional information, see “Front andrear sonar system” (P. 5-124), ”Rear Auto-matic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-76), “Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-42), or “Moving Ob-ject Detection (MOD)” (P. 4-23).

Tow mode should be used when pulling aheavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driv-ing the vehicle in the tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will notcause any damage. However, fueleconomy may be reduced, and thetransmission/engine driving characteris-tics may feel unusual.Push the tow mode switch to activate towmode. The TOW indicator light illuminateswhen tow mode is selected. Push the towmode switch again to turn tow mode off.Tow mode is automatically canceled whenthe ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

LIC3596 LIC3381

PARKING AIDS SYSTEM SWITCH TOW MODE SWITCH


For additional information, see “Tow mode”(P. 10-54).

The Emergency call (SOS) system button isused in combination with aNissanConnect® Services subscription tocall for assistance in case of an emergency.Pushing the button will (with a paid sub-scription) reach a Response Specialist thatwill provide assistance based on the situa-tion described by the vehicle’s occupant.For additional information, or to enroll yourvehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect or call 855–426–6628.

The TBCU on the instrument panel allowsthe driver to adjust the braking force ap-plied to the trailer brakes.For additional information, see “Towing atrailer” (P. 10-33).

LIC3376 LIC3382

EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON(if so equipped)

TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER UNIT(TBCU) (if so equipped)


The Rear Door Alert system functions un-der certain conditions to indicate theremay be an object or passenger in the rearseat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting thevehicle.The Rear Door Alert system is initially dis-abled. The driver can enable the systemusing the vehicle information display. Foradditional information, see “Vehicle infor-mation display warnings and indicators”(P. 2-32).When the system is enabled:• The system is activated when a rear door

is opened and closed within 10 minutes ofthe vehicle being driven. When the driver’door is closed and the system is acti-vated, a visual message appears in thevehicle information display. For additionalinformation, see “Rear Door Alert is acti-vated” (P. 2-34).

• If a rear door is opened and closed butthe vehicle is not driven within approxi-mately 10 minutes, the system will not beactivated. A rear door must be openedand closed and the car driven within 10minutes for the system to activate.

When the Rear Door Alert system is acti-vated and a driver exits the vehicle afterarriving at a destination:• When the driver puts the vehicle in the P

(Park) position, a message appears in thevehicle information display for a driver to“Dismiss Message” or “Disable Alert” ifdesired.

• With the system enabled, when the driverexits the vehicle, an audible alert (hornsound) will occur unless a rear door isopened and closed within a short time todeactivate the alert.

• If the doors are locked before the alert isdeactivated by opening a rear door, thehorn will sound.

• If the audible horn alert occurs, a mes-sage will also appear in the vehicle infor-mation display that states, “Check RearSeat for All Articles”.

WARNING

• If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, noaudible alert will be provided regard-less of rear door open/close status.• There may be times when there is anobject or passenger in the rear seat(s)but the audible alert does not sound.For example, this may occur if rear seatpassengers enter or exit the vehicleduring a trip.• The system does not directly detectobjects or passengers in the rearseat(s). Instead, it can detect when arear door is opened and closed, indicat-ing that there may be something in therear seat(s).

NOTE:

There may be times when the hornsounds but there are no objects or pas-sengers in the rear seat(s).For additional information, see “Rear DoorAlert is activated” (P. 2-34).

REAR DOOR ALERT


12V OUTLETSThe power outlets are for powering electri-cal accessories such as cellulartelephones.The power outlets located on the instru-ment panel, inside the center armrest (if soequipped), and on the back of the centerconsole (if so equipped) are powered onlywhen the ignition switch is placed in theACC or ON position.Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

• The outlet and plug may be hot dur-ing or immediately after use.

• Only certain power outlets are de-signed for use with a cigarette lighterunit. Do not use any other power out-let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for additional information.

• Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

• Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.


• Avoid using power outlets when theair conditioner, headlights, or rearwindow defroster (if so equipped) ison.

• Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

LIC4326Instrument panel

LIC3385Inside center console (if so equipped)

LIC3784Rear center console (if so equipped)

POWER OUTLETS


• Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plugmay overheat or the internal tem-perature fuse may open.

• When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

120V OUTLETS (if so equipped)

LIC0617In truck box (if so equipped)

LIC4322Center console (if so equipped)


120V OUTLET Switch Reset

What is plugged in Shifter In Park Shifter Out of Park Shifter Back In Park Shifter In Park Shifter Out of ParkIndicator Inverter

StatusIndicator Inverter




StatusNo Device but

Switch On 150W and 400W ON 150W ON 150W and 400W ON 150W and 400W ON 150W ON

Device<150W 150W and 400W ON 150W ON 150W and 400W ON 150W and 400W ON 150W ON150W<Device<400W 150W and 400W ON OFF OFF 150W and 400W ON 150W and 400W ON OFF** OFF**

Device>400W OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF** OFF** OFF** OFF**

** OFF means the inverter system cannot be reset until a device is within the specification range of operation. If the device is greater than specified, the inverterwill shut OFF. The operating voltage is between 11.5v and 15v. If the vehicle is not idling, the battery voltage will drop which will cause the inverter to shut downwhen below 11.5v. When the vehicle is in the (P) Park position, it will work at 400W. If the vehicle is in any other shifter position, it will turn off.


Do not use the outlet located in the truckbox with accessories that exceed 120 volt.Do not use double adapters or more thanone electrical accessory. When the dualwall bed liner is installed (if so equipped),the power outlet is still accessible throughthe access door in the bed liner.

CAUTION

• Operation of the 120 volt system withthe ignition in the ON position andthe engine not running (idle) willdrain the battery charge. This couldlead to a dead battery or no startcondition.

• The outlet and plug may be hot dur-ing or immediately after use.


• Do not use double adaptors or morethan one electrical accessory.

• Avoid using power outlets when theair conditioner, headlights or rearwindow defroster is on.

• Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plugmay overheat or the internal tem-perature fuse may open.

• When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water or any otherliquid to contact the outlet.

The extended storage switch is used whenshipping the vehicle. It is located in the fusepanel inside the glove box. To reach it, openthe glove box O1 on the instrument panel,then open the fuse panel cover O2 .If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, ensure the extended storage switch isON by pushing it fully in place, as shown.

LIC3502

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH


FRONT-DOOR POCKETSLIC3266

Pulled positionLIC3268

Pushed positionLIC3397

STORAGE


REAR-DOOR POCKETS CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS (if soequipped)

SEATBACK POCKETSThe seatback pocket(s) may be located onthe back of the driver's and/or passenger’sseat, there may be one or two pocketsequipped. The pockets can be used tostore maps.

LIC3213 LIC2392 LIC0575


WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the driv-er’s and/or front passenger’s NISSANAdvanced Air Bag System (if soequipped), please observe the follow-ing items:• Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatbackpocket or head restraint/headrest.

• Do not place heavy loads heavierthan 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,head restraint/headrest or in theseatback pocket.

UNDER-SEAT STORAGE (if soequipped)To access the storage bin, lift the benchseat toward the rear of the vehicle, then liftthe cover the same direction. The covermay be locked O1 (if so equipped).

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the tray under theseat, cargo in the trays should not ex-ceed 20 lbs. (9.08kg).

To adjust the divider O3 , pull it straight upand reposition it to the desired location,sliding it straight down.Both sides of the storage bin, under therear seat on the driver’s and passenger’ssides, operate similarly. They can be ac-cessed simultaneously or independently ofeach other.Further, to create a flat floor space for stor-age, rather than access the storage bin, liftthe bench seat as before, then lift the tabO2 and rotate the bin cover toward thefront of the vehicle. Use the tab as a leg tosupport the cover as the new floor space.

LIC3407Rear seat (driver’s side shown)

LIC4583


Cargo can be secured to the extendedfloor with bungee cords. Secure the bun-gee cords to the loops in the extendedfloor.

CAUTION

• To avoid damaging the extendedfloor, the weight secured should notexceed 247 lbs. (112 kg).

• To avoid damaging the bungee hookloops, do not exceed 35 lbs. (16 kg) offorce to any given loop.

CAUTION

• To avoid damaging the extendedfloor, the leg of the extended floormust be perpendicular to the floorbefore any weight is applied.

• To avoid damaging the extendedfloor, ensure that the under-seatstorage area is completely stowedbefore lowering the rear seatbottom.

CONSOLE BOX STORAGE TRAYS (ifso equipped)

LIC4098 LIC3406


CELL PHONE STORAGE TRAY (if soequipped)A removable storage tray. located in thecenter console, can be used to store up totwo cell phones.

GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle.Use the master key to lock or unlock theglove box lock. The valet key cannot beused to lock or unlock the glove box lock.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while drivingto help prevent injury in an accident ora sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)WARNING

The center console box should not beused while driving so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

LIC4316 LIC3386 LIC3399


CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if soequipped)To access the center armrest storage area,lower the center armrest and lift the lid.

CAUTION

The center armrest storage should notbe used while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.

LIC3400 LIC0621


UNDER FRONT SEAT STORAGE BIN(if so equipped)To access the storage bin, lift the center ofthe front bench seat toward the front of thevehicle.

CAUTION

• To avoid damaging the tray underthe seat, cargo in the tray should notexceed 20 lbs. (9.08 kg).

• The cushion storage bin should notbe used while driving so full attentionmay be given to vehicle operation.

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSESSTORAGE (if so equipped)To open the sunglasses holder, push andrelease.Only store one pair of sunglasses in theholder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to avoid obstructing thedriver’s view and to help prevent anaccident.

LIC3437Bench seat (center)

LIC3387


CAUTION

• Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

• Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

• Avoid abrupt starting and brakingwhen the cup holder is being used toprevent spilling the drink. If the liquidis hot, it can scald you or yourpassenger.

• Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

LIC3401Front — Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3512Front — Type B (if so equipped)


LIC0622Armrest (if so equipped)

LIC34022nd row (rear of front console)

(if so equipped)

LIC37242nd row (door armrest) (if so equipped)


CAUTION

• Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injurepeople during sudden braking or anaccident.

• Do not use bottle holder for open liq-uid containers.

LIC05562nd row bench (if so equipped)

LIC3396Front bottle holder

LIC3707Rear bottle holder


GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)The grocery hooks allow for standard sizeplastic grocery bags to hang side by side.To access the grocery hooks, fold up therear bench seat. For additional information,see “Folding the rear bench seat up” (P. 1-9).

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than18 lbs. (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

BED LINER STORAGE BINS (if soequipped)To open the bed liner storage bins on thetop of the wheel wells, unlock the bin andlift the lid toward the inside of the truck bed.To close, replace the lid and lock the bin.

To open the bed liner storage bins on thetail gate end of the bed liner, lift the tabaway from the truck bed, pull the lid up andaway from the truck.

LIC3389 LIC3449 LIC3450


CARGO HOOKS (if so equipped)When securing items using cargo hooks,located on the rear door pillars, do not ap-ply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to asingle hook.The cargo hooks that are located on thefloor should have loads less than 110 lbs.(490 N) to a single hook.The cargo hooks can be used to securecargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo with ropesor straps to help prevent it from slid-ing or shifting. Do not place cargohigher than the seatbacks. In a sud-den stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

• Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-cure cargo.

• Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area. It is extremely dangerousto ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-hicle. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be se-riously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

• The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withitems in the cargo area. Secure anyitems in the cargo area. Your childcould be seriously injured or killed ina collision if the top tether strap isdamaged.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a seat belt properly.

C-CHANNEL CARGO HOOKS (if soequipped)The C-Channel cargo hooks, located on theback panel, can be used to secure cargowith ropes or other types of straps.When securing items using C-Channelcargo hooks, located on the back panel, donot apply a load more than 110 lbs. (490 N)to a single hook.

LIC3709 LIC3710


WARNING


• Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-cure cargo.

• Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area. It is extremely dangerousto ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-hicle. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be se-riously injured or killed.


• The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withitems in the cargo area. Secure anyitems in the cargo area. Your childcould be seriously injured or killed ina collision if the top tether strap isdamaged.


POWER WINDOWSWARNING

• Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc., inside the vehiclewhile it is in motion and before clos-ing the windows. Use the windowlock switch to prevent unexpecteduse of the power windows.

• To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and/or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do notleave children, people who requirethe assistance of others or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. Additionally,the temperature inside a closed ve-hicle on a warm day can quickly be-come high enough to cause a signifi-cant risk of injury or death to peopleand pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-nition switch is placed in the ON position orfor a period of time after the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position. If the driver'sor passenger's door is opened during thisperiod of time, the power to the windows iscanceled.

Driver's side power windowswitchThe driver's side control panel is equippedwith switches to open or close the front andrear (if so equipped) passenger windows.

WIC1124

1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger side automatic win-

dow switch4. Right rear passenger window switch (if

so equipped)5. Left rear passenger window switch (if so

equipped)6. Driver side automatic window switch

WINDOWS


To open a window, push the switch andhold it down. To close a window, pull theswitch and hold it up. To stop the openingor closing function at any time, simply re-lease the switch.

Front passenger's power windowswitchThe passenger's window switch operatesonly the corresponding passenger's win-dow. To open the window, push the switchand hold it down O1 . To close the window,pull the switch up O2 .

Rear power window switch (if soequipped)The rear power window switches open orclose only the corresponding windows. Toopen the window, push the switch and holdit down O1 . To close the window, pull theswitch up O2 .

Locking passengers' windowsWhen the window lock switch is depressed,only the driver's side window can beopened or closed. Push it again to cancelthe window lock function.

WIC1125 WIC0261


Automatic operationTo fully open a window equipped with au-tomatic operation, push the windowswitch down to the second detent and re-lease it; it need not be held. The windowautomatically opens all the way. To stopthe window, lift the switch up while the win-dow is opening.To fully close a window equipped with au-tomatic operation, pull the switch up to thesecond detent and release it; it need not beheld. To stop the window, push the switchdown while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be acti-vated when a window is closed by auto-matic operation.Depending on the environment or driv-ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-tion may be activated if an impact orload similar to something being caughtin the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-diately before the closed positionwhich cannot be detected. Make surethat all passengers have their hands,etc., inside the vehicle before closingthe window.

If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, re-placed, or jump started, the power windowauto-reverse function may not operateproperly. Have the power window auto-reverse system re-initialized. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.If the control unit detects somethingcaught in a window equipped with auto-matic operation as it is closing, the windowwill be immediately lowered.

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH(if so equipped)

WARNING

• You must ensure all occupants andobjects are free of the rear windowarea prior to and during operation.Failure to do so may result in injuryand/or damage to the rear windowsystem.

• The rear window is not designed tocarry long items through it.

LIC0410 LIC3448


• Do not place objects through theopened rear window. Do not use therear window as a cargo area pass-through. This may result in damageto the rear window system, or per-sonal injury.

WARNING

• To help avoid risk of injury or deaththrough unintended operation of thevehicle and or its systems, includingentrapment in windows or inadver-tent door lock activation, do notleave children, people who requirethe assistance of others or pets unat-tended in your vehicle. Additionally,the temperature inside a closed ve-hicle on a warm day can quickly be-come high enough to cause a signifi-cant risk of injury or death to peopleand pets.

To open the rear power window, push inand hold the switch.To close the rear power window, pull outand hold the switch.To stop the opening or closing function atany time, simply release the switch.

NOTE:

If the rear power window is opened whilethe defroster switch is on, the rear win-dow defroster (if so equipped) will auto-matically shut off. The heated outsidemirrors (if so equipped) will remain on.The rear window defroster will auto-matically turn on when the rear powerwindow is fully closed if the switch is on.

REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if soequipped)

WARNING

• You must ensure all occupants andobjects are free of the rear windowarea prior to and during operation.Failure to do so may result in injuryand/or damage to the rear windowsystem.

• The rear window is not designed tocarry long items through it.

LIC3488


• Do not place objects through theopened rear window. Do not use therear window as a cargo area pass-through. This may result in damageto the rear window system, or per-sonal injury.

Squeeze the handles of the lever O1 , thenslide the window open O2 .

POWER MOONROOFThe front moonroof is a power moonroof,the rear moonroof is fixed glass. The powermoonroof will only operate when the igni-tion switch is placed in the ON position. Themoonroof is operational for a period oftime, even if the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver's door or thefront passenger's door is opened duringthis period of time, the power to the moon-roof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroofTo fully open or close the moonroof, pushthe switch toward the open O1 or close O2

position and release it; it need not be held.The roof will automatically open or close allthe way. To stop the roof, push the switchonce while it is opening or closing.

Tilting the moonroofTo tilt up, first close the moonroof, thenpush the switch O3 and release it; it neednot be held. To tilt down the moonroof,push the switch to the tilt down positionO2 .

Resetting the moonroof switchIf the moonroof does not operate properly,perform the following procedure to initial-ize the moonroof operation system.1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

repeatedly pushing the moonroofswitch to the close position O2 .

2. Push and hold the moonroof switch tothe close position O2 for approximately15 seconds.

3. Release the switch after the moonroofmoves up, down, then back to the full tiltup position.

LIC4327

MOONROOF (if so equipped)


4. Push and hold the switch to the closeposition O2 .

5. Release the switch after the moonroofcompletes one full cycle from the tilt upposition to the closed position, then tothe open position, and again to the fullyclosed position.

6. Check if the moonroof switch operatesnormally.

If the moonroof does not operate properlyafter performing the procedure above,have your vehicle checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Auto-reverse function (whenclosing or tilting down themoonroof)The auto-reverse function can be acti-vated when the moonroof and sunshadeare closed or tilted down by automatic op-eration when the ignition switch is placedin the ON position or for a period of timeafter the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

Depending on the environment or driv-ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-tion may be activated if an impact orload similar to something being caughtin the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-diately before the closed positionwhich cannot be detected. Make surethat all passengers have their hands,etc., inside the vehicle before closingthe moonroof.

When closingIf the control unit detects somethingcaught in the moonroof and sunshade as itmoves to the front, the moonroof and sun-shade will immediately open backward.When tilting downIf the control unit detects somethingcaught in the moonroof as it tilts down, themoonroof will immediately tilt up.

WARNING

• In an accident you could be thrownfrom the vehicle through an openmoonroof. Always use seat belts andchild restraints.

• Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body outof the moonroof opening while thevehicle is in motion or while themoonroof is closing.

CAUTION

• Remove water drops, snow, ice orsand from the moonroof beforeopening.

• Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.


SunshadeTo open the sunshade:• To fully open the sunshade, push the

switch toward the open position O1 .• To fully open the sunshade and the

moonroof together, push the moonroofswitch toward the open position.

To close the sunshade:• To fully close the sunshade, push the

switch toward the close position O2 .

If the moonroof does not closeHave your moonroof checked and re-paired. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

The interior light has a three-positionswitch and operates regardless of ignitionswitch position.When the switch is in the ON position O1 ,the interior lights illuminate, regardless ofdoor position. The lights will go off after aperiod of time unless the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

LIC4346 LIC0792

INTERIOR LIGHTS


When the switch is in the DOOR or normaloperation position O2 , the interior lights,puddle lights (if so equipped), and cargolight will stay on for a period of time when:• The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a

key or the power door lock switch whileall doors are closed and the ignitionswitch is in the OFF position.

• The driver’s door is opened and thenclosed while the ignition switch is placedin the OFF position.

• The ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer isactivated when:• The driver’s door is locked by the key fob,

a key, or the power door lock switch.• The ignition switch is turned ON.When the switch is in the OFF position O3 ,the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-less of door position. The puddle lights (if soequipped) and cargo light come on whenany front or rear passenger door is opened.The lights will turn off automatically after aperiod of time while doors are open to pre-vent the battery from becomingdischarged.

CAUTION


CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)The console light will turn on whenever theparking lights or headlights are illuminated.The console light brightness can be ad-justed with the illumination brightnesscontrol.

LIC3405


MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)To turn the map lights on, push theswitches. To turn them off, push theswitches again.

CAUTION


PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped)To turn the rear personal lights on, push theswitch. To turn them off, push the switchagain.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-vides a convenient way to consolidate thefunctions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:• Will operate most radio frequency de-

vices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks andsecurity systems.

• Is powered by your vehicle's battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the ve-hicle's battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLink® will retain allprogramming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-ceiver is programmed, retain the originaltransmitter for future programming pro-cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. For additional infor-mation, see “Programming HomeLink®”(P. 2-91).

LIC0790 LIC3907

HOMELINK® UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)


WARNING

• Your vehicle's engine should beturned off while programming theHomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Foradditional information, see “Push-button ignition switch” (P. 5-13). Donot breathe exhaust gases; they con-tain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-gerous. It can cause unconscious-ness or death.

• Do not use the HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standardsbecame effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982.) Agarage door opener which cannotdetect an object in the path of a clos-ing garage door and then automati-cally stop and reverse does not meetcurrent federal safety standards. Us-ing a garage door opener withoutthese features increases the risk ofserious injury or death.

• During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that peopleor objects are clear of the garagedoor, gate, etc., that you areprogramming.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLink®buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition (without starting the engine)when programming HomeLink®. It is alsorecommended that a new battery beplaced in the hand-held transmitter ofthe device being programmed toHomeLink® for quicker programmingand accurate transmission of the radiofrequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-heldtransmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away fromthe HomeLink® surface, keeping theHomeLink® indicator light O1 in view.

LIC2365


2. Using both hands, simultaneously pressand hold the desired HomeLink® buttonand hand-held transmitter button. DONOT release until the HomeLink® indica-tor light O1 flashes slowly and then rap-idly. When the indicator light flashes rap-idly, both buttons may be released. (Therapid flashing indicates successfulprogramming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replaceStep 2 with the cycling procedure notedin “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-dian customers and gate openers”(P. 2-93).3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the indi-cator light.

• If the indicator light O1 is solid/continuous, programming is completeand your device should activate when theHomeLink® button is pressed andreleased.

• If the indicator light O1 blinks rapidly for 2seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps4-6 for a rolling code device. A secondperson may make the following stepseasier. Use a ladder or other device. Donot stand on your vehicle to perform thenext steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garagedoor opener motor in the garage, locatethe “learn” or “smart” button (the nameand color of the button may vary bymanufacturer but it is usually locatednear where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the unit). If there is difficultylocating the button, reference the ga-rage door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”button.

NOTE:Once the button is pressed, you have ap-proximately 30 seconds to initiate thenext step.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly pressand hold the trained HomeLink® buttonfor 2 seconds and release. Repeat the“press/hold/release” sequence up tothree times to complete the trainingprocess. HomeLink® should now acti-vate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLink®buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web siteat: www.homelink.com or call1-800-355-3515.

LIC4095


PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATEOPENERSCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission –which may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal duringtraining. Similar to this Canadian law, someU.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-eout” in the same manner.If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-culties training a gate operator or garagedoor opener by using the “Training” proce-dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage dooropener, etc., unplug the device duringthe “cycling” process to prevent possibledamage to the garage door openercomponents.1. For additional information, see “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” step 1 (P. 2-91).

2. Using both hands, simultaneously pressand hold the desired HomeLink® buttonand the hand-held transmitter button.During training, your hand-held trans-mitter may automatically stop transmit-ting. Continue to press and hold the de-sired HomeLink® button while you pressand re-press (“cycle”) your hand-heldtransmitter every 2 seconds until thefrequency signal has been learned. TheHomeLink® indicator light will flashslowly and then rapidly after severalseconds upon successful training. DONOT release until the HomeLink® indica-tor light flashes slowly and then rapidly.When the indicator light flashes rapidly,both buttons may be released. The rapidflashing indicates successful training.Proceed with “ProgrammingHomeLink®” step 3 (P. 2-91) to complete.If the device was unplugged during theprogramming procedure, remember toplug it back in when programming iscompleted.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, afterit is programmed, can be used to activatethe programmed device. To operate, sim-ply press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-ceiver button. The amber indicator light willilluminate while the signal is beingtransmitted.For convenience, the hand-held transmit-ter of the device may also be used at anytime.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLink® does not quickly learn thehand-held transmitter information:• Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.• Position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from theHomeLink® surface.

• Press and hold both the HomeLink® andhand-held transmitter buttons withoutinterruption.

• Position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitterin that position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLink® is not programmed withinthat time, try holding the transmitter inanother position – keeping the indicatorlight in view at all times.


If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLink®buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONThe following procedure clears the pro-grammed information from both buttons.Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-ever, individual buttons can be repro-grammed. For additional information, see“Reprogramming a single HomeLink® but-ton” (P. 2-94).To clear all programming:1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins toflash in approximately 10 seconds. Donot hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.HomeLink® is now in the programmingmode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with “ProgrammingHomeLink®” - Step 1 (P. 2-91).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINK® BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver button, complete the following:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash af-ter 20 seconds. Without releasing theHomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1 (P. 2-91).

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-ton has now been reprogrammed. Thenew device can be activated by pressingthe HomeLink® button that was just pro-grammed. This procedure will not affectany other programmed HomeLink®buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should changethe codes of any non-rolling code devicethat has been programmed intoHomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual ofeach device or call the manufacturer ordealer of those devices for additionalinformation.When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-versal Transceiver with your new trans-mitter information.FCC Notice:For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.


For Canada:This device contains licence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s) that complywith Innovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment Canada’s licence-exemptRSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause interference.(2) This de-vice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.


MEMO


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6Rear doors (King Cab® models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-8Child safety rear door lock(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-21Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Conditions the Remote Engine Start willnot work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Gasoline fuel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Automatic operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-28

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Card holder (driver’s side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Manual anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Memory Seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40Linking a key fob to a stored memoryposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Your vehicle can only be driven with theIntelligent Keys which are registered toyour vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-ponents and NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem components.Never leave the keys in the vehicle.As many as four Intelligent Keys can beregistered and used with one vehicle. Thenew keys must be registered prior to theuse with the Intelligent Key system andNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of yourvehicle. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service. Since theregistration process requires erasing all

memory in the Intelligent Key componentswhen registering new keys, be sure to takeall Intelligent Keys that you have to theNISSAN dealer.A key number plate is supplied with yourkeys. Record the key number and keep it ina safe place (such as your wallet), not in thevehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forduplicates by using the key number.NISSAN does not record key numbers so itis very important to keep track of your keynumber plate.A key number is only necessary when youhave lost all keys and do not have one toduplicate from. If you still have a key, it canbe duplicated without knowing the keynumber.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the Intelli-gent Key:• Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-nents, to come into contact with wa-ter or salt water. This could affect thesystem function.

• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

LPD3106Type A (if so equipped)

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)

2. Mechanical key

3. Master key

4. Key number plate (one plate)

LPD3605Type B (if so equipped)

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

• Do not strike the Intelligent Keysharply against another object.

• Do not change or modify the Intelli-gent Key.

• Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,immediately wipe until it is com-pletely dry.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area wheretemperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

• Do not attach the Intelligent Key witha key holder that contains a magnet.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipmentand personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of thatIntelligent Key from the vehicle. This mayprevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-mation regarding the erasing procedure, itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer.

Mechanical keyThe Intelligent Key contains the mechani-cal key.To remove the mechanical key, release thelock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.To install the mechanical key, firmly insert itinto the Intelligent Key until the lock knobreturns to the lock position.Use the mechanical key to lock or unlockthe driver's door, tailgate and glove box.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, see “Doors”(P. 3-4), “Tailgate” (P. 3-35) or “Storage”(P. 2-70).

Valet hand-offWhen you have to leave a key with a valet,give them the Intelligent Key itself, keep themechanical key and master key with you toprotect your belongings.To prevent the glove box from beingopened during valet hand-off, follow theprocedures below:1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box and tailgate with themechanical key or master key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key without the me-chanical key to the valet, keep the me-chanical and master key with you.

For additional information, see “Storage”(P. 2-70) and “Tailgate” (P. 3-35).

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYSAdditional or replacement keys:If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-isting key can be duplicated without know-ing the key number. As many as fourNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keyscan be used with one vehicle. You shouldbring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem keys that you have to the NISSANdealer for registration. This is because theregistration process will erase the memoryof all key codes previously registered intothe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-ter the registration process, these compo-nents will only recognize keys coded intothe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemduring registration. Any key that is notgiven to the dealer at the time of registra-tion will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer systemkey, which contains an electrical tran-sponder, to come into contact with wa-ter or salt water. This could affect sys-tem function.

When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors cannot beopened using the inside or outside doorhandles. The doors must be unlocked toopen the doors.

WARNING

• Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seatbelts, this provides greater safety inthe event of an accident by helping toprevent persons from being thrownfrom the vehicle. This also helps keepchildren and others from uninten-tionally opening the doors, and willhelp keep out intruders.

• Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.

DOORS



LOCKING WITH KEYTo lock the door using the mechanical key,turn the key toward the front of the vehicleO1 . This will only lock the door and will notactivate the security system. To arm thesecurity system, press the buttonon the Intelligent Key.To unlock the door using the mechanicalkey, turn the key toward the rear of thevehicle O2 . This will only unlock the corre-sponding door and will not disarm the se-curity system.

For additional information, see “Securitysystems” (P. 2-38).

WPD0311Driver’s side


LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOBTo lock the door without the key, move theinside lock to the lock position O1 , thenclose the door.To unlock the door without the key, movethe inside lock knob to the unlock positionO2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors and the tailgate lock (ifso equipped) without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver's or front passenger'sside) to the lock position O1 . When lockingthe door this way, be certain not to leavethe key inside the vehicle.To unlock all the doors and the tailgate lock(if so equipped) without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver's or front passen-ger's side) to the unlock position O2 .

Lockout protectionWith the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle, ifall doors are locked, then closed, a chimewill sound after the last door is closed andall doors will unlock automatically.These functions help to prevent the Intelli-gent Key from being accidentally lockedinside the vehicle.

LPD2092Inside lock

WPD0381


REAR DOORS (King Cab® models)1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.

2. From the outside, pull the door handleOA toward you.

3. Open the door to the desired position.LPD0278 LPD2591 LPD2592


CAUTION

Be careful when opening and exitingthe driver’s side rear door if the fuel-filler door is open. This may cause dam-age to the driver’s side rear door orfuel-filler door if you open fully andthey make contact.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if soequipped)• All doors lock automatically when the ve-

hicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).• All doors unlock automatically when the

transmission is placed in the P (Park) po-sition or when the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position, depending onthe option selected in the “Vehicle Set-tings” menu.

NOTE:The Auto Door Unlock (if so equipped)feature can be changed using the “Ve-hicle Settings” menu on the vehicle in-formation display. For additional infor-mation, see “Vehicle informationdisplay” (P. 2-23).

LPD2593 LPD2594


CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK(if so equipped)Child safety locks help prevent the reardoors from being opened accidentally, espe-cially when small children are in the vehicle.The child safety lock levers are located onthe edge of the rear doors.When the lever is in the unlock position O1 ,the door can be opened from the outsideor the inside.When the lever is in the LOCK position O2 ,the door can be opened only from theoutside.

WARNING


• The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pressed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and com-munication systems. Do not operatethe Intelligent Key while on an air-plane. Make sure the buttons are notoperated unintentionally when theunit is stored for a flight.

• Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system can operate allthe door locks using the remote controlfunction or pushing the request switch (ifso equipped) on the vehicle without takingthe key out from a pocket or purse. Theoperating environment and/or conditionsmay affect the Intelligent Key systemoperation.Be sure to read the following before usingthe Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is capable of receivingand transmitting radio waves. The Intelli-gent Key system transmits weak radiowaves from various distances. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with theoperation of the Intelligent Key system un-der the following operating conditions:• When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, suchas a TV tower, power station and broad-casting station.

• When in possession of wireless equip-ment, such as a cellular telephone, trans-ceiver, or a CB radio.

• When the Intelligent Key is in contact withor covered by metallic materials.

• When any type of radio wave remote con-trol is used nearby.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personalcomputer.

• When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

LPD3096

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM


In such cases, correct the operating condi-tions before using the Intelligent Key func-tion or use the mechanical key.Although the life of the battery varies de-pending on the operating conditions, thebattery’s life is approximately two years. Ifthe battery is discharged, replace it with anew one.When the Intelligent Key battery is low, anindicator light illuminates with the mes-sage “Warning, Key ID Incorrect” in the ve-hicle information display. When the Intelli-gent Key battery is low, the NISSANIntelligent Key® warning light (if soequipped) will blink. For additional informa-tion, see “Vehicle information display warn-ings and indicators” (P. 2-32).Since the Intelligent Key is capable of re-ceiving radio waves, if the key is left nearequipment which transmits strong radiowaves, such as signals from a TV and per-sonal computer, the battery life may be-come shorter.For additional information, see “Battery re-placement” (P. 8-27).

As many as four Intelligent Keys can beregistered and used with one vehicle. Forinformation about the purchase and use ofadditional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.


OPERATING RANGEThe Intelligent Key functions can only beused when the Intelligent Key is within thespecified operating range from the requestswitch O1 (if so equipped).When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged or strong radio waves are presentnear the operating location, the IntelligentKey operating range becomes narrower,and the Intelligent Key may not functionproperly.The operating range is within 31.50 in (80cm) from each request switch O1 (if soequipped).

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the doorglass or handle, the request switches (if soequipped) may not function.When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-ating range, it is possible for anyone, evensomeone who does not carry the Intelli-gent Key, to push the request switch (if soequipped) to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION• Do not push the door handle request

switch (if so equipped) with the IntelligentKey held in your hand as illustrated. Theclose distance to the door handle willcause the Intelligent Key system to havedifficulty recognizing that the IntelligentKey is outside the vehicle.

• After locking with the door handle re-quest switch (if so equipped), verify thedoors are securely locked by testingthem.

LPD2338 LPD2554


• To prevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft inside the vehicle, make sure youcarry the Intelligent Key with you and thenlock the doors.

• Do not pull the door handle before push-ing the door handle request switch (if soequipped). The door will be unlocked butwill not open. Release the door handleonce and pull it again to open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors withouttaking the Intelligent Key out of your pocketor bag.When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,you can lock or unlock all doors by pushingthe door handle request switch (if soequipped) within the range of operation.

Locking doorsLPD3097 LPD3098


1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition and make sure you carry theIntelligent Key with you.

2. Close the driver’s door and push thedriver’s door request switch (if soequipped) OR close all doors and pushany door request switch (if so equipped)while carrying the Intelligent Key withyou.

3. Push the door handle request switch (ifso equipped) while carrying the Intelli-gent Key with you.

4. All doors and the tailgate lock (if soequipped) will lock.

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice,the outside chirp sounds twice, and thefront and tail lights may turn on for 10seconds.

NOTE:• Request switches (if so equipped) for

all doors can be deactivated when the“I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped)” set-ting is switched to OFF in the VehicleSettings of the vehicle information dis-play. For additional information, see“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-23).

• Doors and the tailgate lock (if soequipped) will lock with the doorhandle request switch (if so equipped)O1 while the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

• Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch (if so equipped)while the driver’s door is open. How-ever, doors lock with the mechanicalkey even if any door is open.

• Doors and the tailgate lock (if soequipped) do not lock with the doorhandle request switch (if so equipped)if the Intelligent Key is inside the ve-hicle. A beep will sound to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key is in-side the vehicle, doors can be lockedwith another Intelligent Key.

WARNING

After locking the doors using the re-quest switch (if so equipped), makesure that the doors have been securelylocked by operating the door handles.Failure to follow these instructions mayresult in inadvertently unlocking thedoors, which may decrease the safetyand security of your vehicle.

CAUTION

• When locking the doors using the re-quest switch (if so equipped), makesure to have the Intelligent Key inyour possession before operatingthe request switch (if so equipped) toprevent the Intelligent Key from be-ing left in the vehicle.

LPD3099


• The request switch (if so equipped) isoperational only when the IntelligentKey has been detected by the Intelli-gent Key system.

Lockout protectionTo prevent the Intelligent Key from beingaccidentally locked in the vehicle, lockoutprotection is equipped with the IntelligentKey system.When any door is open, the doors arelocked, and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors areclosed; a chime will sound and the lock willautomatically unlock.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-gent Key is in the same hand that is op-erating the request switch (if soequipped) to lock the door. Put the Intel-ligent Key in a purse, pocket or yourother hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not func-tion under the following conditions:• When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.• When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.• When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.• When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch (ifso equipped).

3. The door will unlock and the hazard in-dicator lights flash once, the outsidechirp sounds once, and the front and taillights may turn on for 30 seconds.

4. Push the door handle request switch (ifso equipped) again within one minute.

5. The outside chirp will sound once andthe remaining doors and tailgate lock (ifso equipped) will unlock.

LPD3098


NOTE:• If “Selective Unlock” is turned OFF in

the Vehicle Settings, all doors and tail-gate lock (if so equipped) will unlockupon the first request switch (if soequipped) O1 press.

• The request switch (if so equipped) canbe deactivated when the “I-Key DoorLock (if so equipped)” is switched toOFF in the Vehicle Settings of the ve-hicle information display. For addi-tional information, see “Vehicle infor-mation display” (P. 2-23).

If a door handle is pulled while unlockingthe doors, that door may not be unlocked.Returning the door handle to its originalposition will unlock the door. If the doordoes not unlock after returning the doorhandle, push the door handle request (if soequipped) switch to unlock the door.All doors will be locked automatically un-less one of the following operations is per-formed within one minute after pushingthe request switch (if so equipped).• Opening any door.• Pushing the ignition switch.

Using the interior lightsThe interior lights illuminate for a period oftime when a door is unlocked and theroom light switch is in the DOOR position.The lights can be turned off without waitingby performing one of the followingoperations:• Placing the ignition switch in the ON

position.• Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.• Switching the room light switch to the

“OFF” position.For additional information, see “Interiorlights” (P. 2-88).

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can op-erate all door locks using the remote key-less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-mote keyless function can operate at adistance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-hicle. The operating distance dependsupon the conditions around the vehicle.The remote keyless entry function will notfunction under the following conditions:• When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.• When the Intelligent Key battery is

discharged.• When the doors are open or not closed

securely.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intel-ligent Key, be sure not to leave the keyin the vehicle.

LPD3099


Type A (if so equipped)1. (lock) button

2. (unlock) button

3. (panic) button

Type B (if so equipped)1. (remote engine start) button

2. (lock) button

3. (unlock) button

4. (panic) button

Locking doors1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelli-gent Key.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twiceand the horn beeps once.

5. All doors and the tailgate (if so equipped)will be locked.

WARNING

After locking the doors using the Intel-ligent Key, be sure that the doors havebeen securely locked by operating thedoor handles. Failure to follow these in-structions may result in inadvertentlyunlocking the doors, which may de-crease the safety and security of yourvehicle.

Unlocking doors1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key to unlock the driver’s door.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within1 minute to unlock all doors and tailgate(if so equipped).

All doors and tailgate will be locked auto-matically unless one of the following op-erations is performed within 1 minute afterpressing the button:• Opening any doors.

LPD3600 LPD3602


• Pushing the ignition switch.

Using the interior lightsThe interior lights illuminate for a period oftime when a door is unlocked and theroom light switch is in the DOOR position.The lights can be turned off without waitingby performing one of the followingoperations:• Placing the ignition switch in the ON

position.• Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.• Switching the room light switch to the

“OFF” position.For additional information, see “Interiorlights” (P. 2-88).

Opening windowsThe Intelligent Key allows you to simultane-ously open windows equipped with auto-matic operation.To open the windows, press the but-ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3seconds after all doors are unlockedThe door windows will open while pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.The door windows cannot be closed byusing the Intelligent Key.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threat-ened, you may activate the panic alarm tocall attention by pressing and holding the

button on the Intelligent Key for lon-ger than 0.5 seconds.The panic alarm and headlights will stay onfor a period of time.The panic alarm stops when:• It has run for a period of time.• Any button is pressed on the Intelligent

Key.• The request switch (if so equipped) on the

driver or passenger door is pushed andthe Intelligent Key is in range of the doorhandle.

Trailer light check (if so equipped)This functionality allows the customer toconfirm trailer light operation, without theneed of a second person to press the brakepedal or activate each turn signal light. Thetrailer light check can be performed by theIntelligent Key or through the Vehicle Set-tings in the vehicle information display. Foradditional information, see “Vehicle infor-mation display” (P. 2-23).

To activate the trailer light check functionwith your Intelligent Key, perform thefollowing:1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the LOCKbutton.

3. Within 2 seconds, press and hold theLOCK button again for at least 2

seconds, until the horn beeps once andthe park lights turn on.

The following events will occur:• The left turn signal light on the vehicle

and the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.• The right turn signal light on the vehicle

and the trailer will flash for 5 seconds.• The brake lights on the vehicle and the

trailer will turn ON for 5 seconds.


NOTE:If the ignition switch is in the OFF po-sition, the park lights will turn off af-ter the events above occur. If ignitionswitch is in the ON position, lights willstay on for 45 seconds after trailerlight check. If the trailer lights do notwork properly, check the connectionsand bulbs. If the vehicle lights do notturn on, check the bulbs. If the trailerlight check routine fails to start, en-sure the following vehicle conditions:• The vehicle is NOT moving, 0 mph

(0 km/h)• Brake switch is NOT depressed• Left or right flasher is OFF• Trailer light check configuration is NOT

disabled and available in the metertowing settings

• The hazard switch is NOT turned ON• The shift position is fully in P (Park)

position• Vehicle is within Remote Keyless Entry

range

Answer back horn featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can bedeactivated using the Intelligent Key.To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.The hazard warning lights will flash threetimes to confirm that the horn beep fea-ture has been deactivated.To activate: Press and hold the and

buttons for at least 2 seconds oncemore.The hazard warning lights will flash onceand the horn will sound once to confirmthat the horn beep feature has beenreactivated.Deactivating the horn beep feature doesnot silence the horn if the alarm istriggered.

Intelligent Key button operationlightThe light blinks only when you press anybutton on the Intelligent Key. The light illu-mination only signifies that the key fob hastransmitted a signal. You may look and/orlisten to verify that the vehicle has per-formed the intended operation. The num-ber of blinks identifies each registered key(i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) foryour own identification purposes. If thelight does not blink, your battery may betoo weak to communicate to the vehicle. Ifthis occurs, the battery may need to be

LPD2836


replaced. For additional information re-garding the replacement of a battery, see“Battery replacement” (P. 8-27).

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from movingunexpectedly by erroneous operation ofthe Intelligent Key or to help prevent thevehicle from being stolen, a chime or chirpsounds from inside and outside the vehicleand a warning is displayed in the instru-ment panel.When a chime or beep sounds or a warningis displayed, be sure to check the vehicleand the Intelligent Key.For additional information, see “Trouble-shooting guide” (P. 3-20) and “Vehicle infor-mation display” (P. 2-23).


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, thevehicle system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch tostop the engine

The “Shift to Park” warning appears on the ve-hicle information display and the inside warningchime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)position.

When opening the driver's door toget out of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears on the displayand the inside warning chime sounds continu-ously.

The ignition switch is in the ACCposition.

Place the ignition switch in the ONposition or close the driver’s door.

When closing the door after gettingout of the vehicle

The “No Key Detected” warning appears on thevehicle information display, the outside chimesounds three times and the inside warningchime sounds for approximately three seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not detectedinside of the vehicle.

Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition.

The Rear Door Alert warning message appearson the display, the horn sounds three timestwice, or a Check Back Seat For All Articleswarning appears on the display.

The Rear Door Alert is activated.Check the back seat for all articles,press the ENTER button to clear theRear Door Alert warning message.

When closing the door with the in-side lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximatelythree seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the ve-hicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re-quest switch (if so equipped) or the

button on the Intelligent Keyto lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximatelythree seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the ve-hicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch tostart the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears onthe display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.For additional information, see “Bat-tery replacement” (P. 8-27).

The “Key ID Incorrect” warning appears on thevehicle information display .

The Intelligent Key is not detectedinside of the vehicle.

Carry the registered Intelligent Keywith you.


The button will be on the NISSANIntelligent Key® if the vehicle has RemoteEngine Start. This feature allows the engineto start from outside the vehicle.Vehicles with an automatic climate controlsystem will default to either a heating orcooling mode depending on outside andcabin temperatures. For additional infor-mation, see “Remote Engine Start with In-telligent Climate Control” (P. 4-39).Laws in some local communities may re-strict or prohibit the use of Remote EngineStart, or the amount of time a parked ve-hicle engine may idle. For example, somelaws require a person using Remote Engine

Start to have the vehicle in view or mayrestrict idling time except in freezing tem-peratures. Check local regulations for anyrequirements.Other conditions may affect the function ofthe Remote Engine Start feature. For addi-tional information, see “Conditions the Re-mote Engine Start will not work” (P. 3-23).Other conditions can affect the perfor-mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.For additional information, see “NISSAN In-telligent Key® system” (P. 3-9).

REMOTE ENGINE STARTOPERATING RANGE

WARNING


• Do not use Remote Engine Start inclosed spaces such as a garage. Donot breathe exhaust gases; they con-tain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-gerous. It can cause unconscious-ness or death.

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged or other strong radio wavesources are present near the operatinglocation, the Intelligent Key operatingrange becomes narrower, and the Intel-ligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can onlybe used when the Intelligent Key is withinthe specified operating range from thevehicle.The Remote Engine Start operating rangeis approximately 197 ft (60 m) from thevehicle.

LPD2995

REMOTE ENGINE START (if soequipped)


REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLETo use the Remote Engine Start feature tostart the engine perform the following:1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the button to lock all doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold thebutton until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If thevehicle is not within view press and holdthe button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when theengine starts:• The parking lights will turn on and remain

on as long as the engine is running.• The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.• The engine will continue to run for 10 min-

utes. Repeat the steps to extend the timefor an additional 10 minutes. For addi-tional information, see “Extending enginerun time” (P. 3-22).

Press and hold the brake then push thepush-button ignition switch to the ON po-sition before driving. For additional infor-mation, see “Driving the vehicle” (P. 5-18)).

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIMEThe Remote Engine Start feature can beextended one time by performing thesteps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”in this section. Run time will be calculatedas follows:• The first 10 minute run time will start

when the Remote Engine Start function isperformed.

• The second 10 minutes will start immedi-ately when the Remote Engine Startfunction is performed again. For example,if the engine has been running for 5 min-utes, and 10 minutes are added, the en-gine will run for a total of 15 minutes.

• Extending engine run time will count to-wards the two Remote Engine Start limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,or a single Remote Engine Start with anextension, are allowed between ignitioncycles. The ignition switch must be cycledto the ON position and then back to theOFF position before the Remote EngineStart procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINESTARTTo cancel a Remote Engine Start, performone of the following:• Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press until the parking lights turn off.• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.• Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.• The extended engine run time has

expired.• The first 10 minute timer has expired.• The engine hood has been opened.• The shift lever is moved out of park.• The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into

the vehicle.• The ignition switch is pushed without an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle.• The ignition switch is pushed with an In-

telligent Key in the vehicle but the brakepedal is not depressed.


CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINESTART WILL NOT WORKThe Remote Engine Start will not operate ifany of the following conditions are present:• The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.• The hood is not securely closed.• The hazard warning lights are on.• The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait atleast 6 seconds if the engine goes fromrunning to off. This is not applicable whenextending engine run time.

• The button is not pressed and heldfor at least 2 seconds.

• The button is not pressed and heldwithin 5 seconds of pressing the lockbutton.

• The brake is pressed.• The doors are not closed and locked.• The Key System Error Light remains solid

in the vehicle information display.• The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into

the vehicle.• Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single

Remote Engine Start with an extension,have already been used.

• The vehicle is not in P (Park).

• There is a detected registered key alreadyinside of the vehicle.

• The remote start function has beenswitched to the OFF position in VehicleSettings for the vehicle information dis-play. For additional information, see “Ve-hicle information display” (P. 2-23).

The Remote Engine Start Mode (if soequipped) may display a warning or indica-tor in the vehicle information display. Foradditional information, see “Vehicle infor-mation display” (P. 2-23).


1. Pull the hood lock release handle O1 lo-cated below the driver side instrumentpanel. The hood will spring up slightly.

2. Push the lever at the front of the hood tothe side O2 as illustrated with your fin-gertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly andmake sure it locks into place.

WARNING

• Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving.Failure to do so could cause the hoodto fly open and result in an accident.

• If you see steam or smoke comingfrom the engine compartment, toavoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD3094 LPD2593King Cab® models only

HOOD FUEL-FILLER DOOR


CAUTION

Be careful when opening and exitingthe driver’s side rear door if the fuel-filler door is open. This may cause dam-age to the driver’s side rear door orfuel-filler door if you open fully andthey make contact.

GASOLINE FUEL ENGINESWARNING

• Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seri-ously injured if it is misused or mis-handled. Always stop the engine anddo not smoke or allow open flames orsparks near the vehicle whenrefueling.

• Do not attempt to top off the fueltank after the fuel pump nozzleshuts off automatically. Continuedrefueling may cause fuel overflow,resulting in fuel spray and possibly afire.

• Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It hasa built-in safety valve needed forproper operation of the fuel systemand emission control system. An in-correct cap can result in a seriousmalfunction and possible injury. Itcould also cause the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.

• Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyto attempt to start your vehicle.

• Do not fill a portable fuel containeron a truck bed liner, rubber truck bedmat or other insulating material.Static electricity can cause an explo-sion of flammable liquid, vapor orgas in any vehicle or trailer. To reducethe risk of serious injury or deathwhen filling portable fuel containers:– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.– Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

LPD2594King Cab® models only

LPD3100


– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you arefilling it.

– Use only approved portable fuelcontainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

• Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. For additional information,see “Fuel recommendation” (P. 10-4).

• The Loose Fuel Cap warning mes-sage will appear if the fuel-filler capis not properly tightened. It may takea few driving trips for the message tobe displayed. Failure to tighten thefuel-filler cap properly after theLoose Fuel Cap warning message ap-pears may cause the Malfunc-tion Indicator Light (MIL) toilluminate.

• Failure to tighten the fuel-filler capproperly may cause the Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu-minate. If the light illuminatesbecause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a fewdriving trips. If the light does notturn off after a few driving trips, havethe vehicle inspected. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

• For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)”(P. 2-15).

• If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoidpaint damage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise

to remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hookO1 while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until itclicks. The fuel-filler cap is a ratchetingtype.

LPD3101


Loose Fuel Cap warningThe Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in thevehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after thevehicle has been refueled. It may take a fewdriving trips for the message to be dis-played. To turn off the warning, perform thefollowing:1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

previously described as soon aspossible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until a singleclick is heard.

WARNING

• Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving. You could lose controlof your vehicle and cause anaccident.

• Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary forproper steering operation and com-fort. The driver's air bag inflates withgreat force. If you are unrestrained,leaning forward, sitting sideways orout of position in any way, you are atgreater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive seriousor fatal injuries from the air bag if youare up against it when it inflates. Al-ways sit back against the seatbackand as far away as practical from thesteering wheel. Always use the seatbelts.

MANUAL OPERATION (if soequipped)

Tilt and telescopic operationPush the lock lever O1 down:• Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction O2 to the desired position.• Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction O3 to the desiredposition.

Pull the lock lever O1 up firmly to lock thesteering wheel in place.

LPD2985 LPD2597

STEERING WHEEL


AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if soequipped)

Tilt and telescopic operationTo adjust the steering wheel move theswitch O1 in the following directions:• Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction O2 to the desired tilt position.• Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction O3 to the desiredtelescopic position.

CAUTION

For vehicles with Memory Seat: Failureto reset the tilt and telescoping func-tions of the steering wheel, after thevehicle’s battery has been discharged,may prevent the steering wheel posi-tion from being adjusted.

For vehicles with Memory Seat: Both the tiltand telescopic steering operation must bereset after the vehicle’s battery has beendischarged in order to prevent the tilt andtelescopic operation from locking in oneposition. When the battery has been re-charged or replaced, perform the following:• For tilt operation: Adjust the switch O1 so

the steering wheel moves to the highestposition O2 that can be reached.

• For telescopic operation: Adjust theswitch O1 so the steering wheel moves tothe most forward and backward positionO3 that can be reached.

Performing these operations resets therange of the steering wheel’s tilt and tele-scopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if soequipped)The memory seat will make the steeringwheel move up automatically when thedriver's door is opened and the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position. This lets thedriver get into and out of the seat moreeasily. The steering wheel moves back intoposition when the driver's door is closedand the ignition switch is pushed.For additional information, see “Memoryseat” (P. 3-39).

LPD2580


1. To block glare from the front, swingdown O1 the sun visor.

2. To block glare from the side, remove thesun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side O2 .

3. To extend the sun visor, slide O3 in or outas needed.

CAUTION

• Do not store the sun visor before re-turning the extension to its originalposition.

• Do not pull the extension sun visorforcedly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)To access the vanity mirror, pull the sunvisor down and flip open the mirror cover.Some vanity mirrors are illuminated andturn on when the mirror cover is open.

WPD0344

LPD2583

SUN VISORS


CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)To access the card holder, slide card in thecard holder. Do not view information whileoperating the vehicle.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEWMIRROR (if so equipped)Use the night position O1 to reduce glarefrom the headlights of vehicles behind youat night.Use the day position O2 when driving indaylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when nec-essary, because it reduces rear viewclarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The inside mirror is designed so that it au-tomatically dims during night time condi-tions and according to the intensity of theheadlights of the vehicle following you. Theautomatic anti-glare feature is activatedwhen the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

LPD2436 WPD0126 LPD2418Type A (if so equipped)

MIRRORS


NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-sors O1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen-sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivityof the sensors, resulting in improperoperation.The indicator light O2 will illuminate whenthe automatic anti-glare feature isoperating.• To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

the O button. The indicator light willturn off.

• To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressthe | button again. The indicator lightwill turn on.

For additional information on HomeLink®Universal Transceiver operation, see“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” (P. 2-90).

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

• Objects viewed in the outside mirroron the passenger side are closer thanthey appear. Be careful when movingto the right. Using only this mirrorcould cause an accident. Use the in-side mirror or glance over yourshoulder to properly judge distancesto other objects.

• Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-ing. You could lose control of your ve-hicle and cause an accident.

Manual control type (if soequipped)The outside mirrors can be moved in anydirection for a better rear view.


LPD2581


Electric control type (if soequipped)The outside mirror remote control will op-erate only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC or ON position.Rotate the control dial to select the right orleft mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desiredposition by moving the control dial.Return the control dial to the center (neu-tral) position to prevent accidentally mov-ing the mirror.

Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)WARNING

Objects viewed in the convex portion ofthe trailer tow mirror are closer thanthey appear. Be careful when changinglanes or turning. Using only the convexmirror could cause an accident. Use theother mirrors or glance over yourshoulder to properly judge distances toother objects.

Use the outside mirror remote control toadjust the top portion of the trailer towmirror.

The lower portion of the trailer tow mirrorcan be moved manually in any direction fora better rear view.

LPD2606 LPD2474


Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to ex-tend it to the desired position for bettervisibility while towing a trailer.

WARNING

Do not extend or retract mirrors whiledriving. You may lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

CAUTION

Driving in tight spaces with mirrors ex-tended may cause damage to thevehicle.

Manual folding outside mirrors (ifso equipped)Pull the outside mirror toward the door tofold it.

LPD0268 LPD3102Type A (if so equipped)



Power folding outside mirrors (ifso equipped)

CAUTION

Do not manually fold the power foldingmirrors. Manually folding the mirrorscan damage the mirrors.

Push the power folding switch to open orclose the mirrors.If one of the mirrors are manually operatedor bumped, the mirror body can becomeloose at the pivot point. To correct elec-tronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by

pushing the power folding switch until themirrors are in the open position.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if soequipped)The reverse tilt-down feature will turn bothoutside mirror surfaces downward to pro-vide better rear visibility close to the vehiclewhen the mirror control switch is in eitherthe L or R position.The mirrors automatically return to theiroriginal position when you shift out of R(Reverse).The outside mirror surfaces will return totheir original position when one of the fol-lowing conditions has occurred:• The shift lever is moved to any position

other than R (Reverse).• The outside mirror control switch is set to

the neutral or center position.• The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is inthe center position, the mirror surfacewill NOT turn downward when the shiftlever is moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, see “Memoryseat” (P. 3-39).

Automatic anti-glare outsidemirror (if so equipped)The outside mirror will automatically dimduring nighttime conditions to reduce theglare from the headlights of trailing ve-hicles. The automatic anti-glare featureoperates only when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.The automatic anti-glare feature will be onwhen starting the vehicle. The indicatorlight on the automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror will illuminate when the automaticanti-glare feature is operating.To turn off the anti-glare feature, press theO button on the rearview mirror. The indi-cator light will turn off.To turn on the anti-glare feature again,press the | button on the rearview mirror.The indicator light will turn on.For additional information on the auto-matic anti-glare rearview mirror, see “Auto-matic anti-glare rearview mirror (if soequipped)” (P. 3-30).

LPD0417


Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated todefrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-ibility. For additional information, see “Rearwindow and/or outside mirror defrosterswitch” (P. 2-43).

TAILGATEOpening the tailgatePull the tailgate handle upward and lowerthe tailgate. The support cables hold thetailgate open.When closing the tailgate, make sure thelatches are securely locked.Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgatedown, unless equipped with NISSAN'sBed Extender (accessory) or equivalentin the extended position.

For additional information on proper truckbox loading, see “Vehicle loading informa-tion” (P. 10-22).

WARNING

• Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area or on the rear seat (if soequipped) when it is in the folded po-sition. Use of these areas by passen-gers without proper restraints couldresult in serious injury or death in anaccident or sudden stop.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-sion, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured orkilled.



LPD3103

TRUCK BOX


Disconnecting the rear cameraBefore removing the tailgate disconnectthe rear camera by performing the follow-ing:1. Open the tailgate to access the rear

camera connector bracket O1 locatedon the rear sill.

2. Remove the connector bracket O2 fromthe sill by pressing the locking tab in-ward, in the direction shown, while pull-ing the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harnessO3 by pressing inward on the lockingtab, in the direction shown, while pullingthe connectors apart. Hold the connec-tor firmly to prevent the connector in thechassis harness from falling into the sill.

4. Use the supplied chassis plug andbracket and connect them to the chas-sis wiring harness to avoid contamina-tion to the terminals which will lead tomalfunction of the rear camera.

5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove boxand connect it to the tailgate wiring har-ness to avoid contamination which willlead to malfunction of the rear camera.

7. Remove the tailgate. For additional infor-mation, see “Removing the tailgate”(P. 3-37).

LPD3095


Removing the tailgate1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the

rear camera. For additional information,see “Disconnecting the rear camera”(P. 3-36).

2. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION

• The tailgate is heavy. Two peopleshould remove or install it. Be carefulnot to drop it during removal.

• After releasing the support cables,do not let the tailgate rest on thebumper.

3. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.

4. Pull the tailgate out from the left sidehinge.

5. Slide the tailgate out of the right sidehinge.

Installing the tailgate1. Insert the tailgate into the right side

hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angleand insert into the left side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 de-gree angle and attach the tailgate sup-port cables.

4. For vehicles with rear camera: Be surethe tailgate harness is not hanging be-low the tailgate and keep the tailgateopen. For additional information, see“Connecting the rear camera” (P. 3-38).

5. For vehicles without rear camera: Closethe tailgate securely.

LPD3104


Connecting the rear cameraBefore closing the tailgate reconnect therear camera by performing the following:1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the

truck, keep the tailgate open and checkthat the tailgate harness is not hangingbelow the tailgate.

2. Remove the connector bracket O2 fromthe sill by pressing the locking tab in-ward, in the direction shown, while pull-ing the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis plug andbracket from the chassis wiring harnessO3 . Keep the connector and bracket in asafe place such as the glove box.

4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from thetailgate wiring harness. Keep the tail-gate plug in a safe place such as theglove box.

5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness tothe chassis wiring harness.

6. Securely fix the rear camera connectorbracket O1 to the rear sill.

7. Close the tailgate securely.

Locking the TailgateTo unlock the tailgate, turn the key towardthe passenger side of the vehicle O1 . Tolock, turn the key toward the driver side O2 .If your vehicle is equipped with an elec-tronic tailgate, you may use the doorhandle request switch (if so equipped) orI-key to lock or unlock the tailgate. For ad-ditional information please see “NISSAN In-telligent Key® Operation” (P. 3-12).

LPD3095 LPD3128


TIE DOWN HOOKSFor your convenience, tie down hooks areplaced at each corner of the truck box.These may be used to help secure cargoloaded into the truck box.• The weight of the cargo load must be

evenly distributed over the rear axles.• All cargo should be securely fastened

with ropes or straps to prevent it fromshifting or sliding within the vehicle.

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo with ropesor straps to help prevent it from slid-ing or shifting. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

The memory seat system has twofeatures:• Memory storage function• Entry/exit function

LPD3105

MEMORY SEAT (if so equipped)


MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTIONTwo positions for the driver's seat, steeringcolumn, and outside mirrors (if soequipped) can be stored in the MemorySeats. Follow these procedures to set thememory system.1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC posi-

tion (the vehicle should be stopped whilesetting the memory).

2. Adjust the driver's seat, steering column,and outside mirrors (if so equipped) tothe desired positions by manually oper-ating each adjusting switch. For addi-tional information, see “Seats” (P. 1-2),“Steering wheel” (P. 3-27) and “Outsidemirrors” (P. 3-31).

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will come on and stayon for approximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound when the memoryis stored.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in thesame memory switch, the previousmemory position will be overwritten bythe new stored position.

Confirming memory storage• Push the SET switch.• If a memory position has been stored in

the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator lightfor the respective switch will stay on forapproximately 5 seconds.

LINKING A KEY FOB TO A STOREDMEMORY POSITIONEach key fob can be linked to a storedmemory position (memory switch 1 or 2)with the following procedure.1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory storage

function” section for storing the memoryposition.

2. The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will come on. While theindicator light is on for 5 seconds, pressthe button on the key fob. The haz-ard lights will flash twice. The indicatorlight of the linked memory switch willblink and click twice. After the indicatorlight goes off, the key fob is linked to thatmemory setting.

Once it is linked, when the ignition switch isin the OFF position, pressing the but-ton on the key fob will move the driver’sseat, steering wheel and outside mirrors tothe linked memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in thelinked memory switch, then the key fobwill link the new position and overwritesthe previous position.

LPD2302


ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTIONThis system is designed so that the driver'sseat and steering column will automati-cally move when the shift lever is in the P(Park) position. This allows the driver toeasily get in and out of the driver’s seat.The driver’s seat will slide backward andthe steering column will move up:• When the driver’s door is opened with the

ignition switch in the OFF position.• When the ignition switch is changed from

ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open.The driver’s seat and steering wheel willreturn to the previous position:• When the ignition switch is changed from

ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P(Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted orcanceled through the vehicle settings inthe vehicle information display by perform-ing the following:• Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.• Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to

OFF.

Restarting the entry/exit functionIf the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the stored memory positionswill be lost and some of the functions willbe restricted:1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).OR2. Open and close the driver's door more

than two times with the ignition switchin the OFF position.

The entry/exit function should now workproperly.

SYSTEM OPERATIONThe memory seat system will not work orwill stop operating under the followingconditions:• When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph

(7 km/h).• When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the memory seat isoperating.

• When the switch for the driver’s seat andsteering column is pushed while thememory seat is operating.

• When the seat has already been movedto the memorized position.

• When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

• When the shift lever is moved from P(Park) to any other position.

The memory seat system can be adjustedand canceled. It is recommended you visita NISSAN dealer for this service.


4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Difference between predicted andactual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to park with predicted courselines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8How to turn on and off predictedcourse lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-8System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Intelligent Around View Monitor(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Intelligent Around View Monitor systemoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Difference between predicted andactual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16How to park with predicted courselines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Intelligent Around View Monitor systemlimitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Moving Object Detection (MOD)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-25MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Heater and air conditioner (manual)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42USB/iPod® charging port (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 4-42Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) (if so equipped) . . . . 4-43

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44Control description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48

Remote control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50Remote control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51Wireless headphone operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53DVD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54DVD playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56CD operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59CD playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59HDMI/MHL connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60USB/SD card operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Slingplayer® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Miracast® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70Using the mobile application on yourmobile device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70SmartStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-82Compliance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-86iPod®/iPhone® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’sManual that includes the following infor-mation.• NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped)• Navigation system (if so equipped)• Audio system• Apple CarPlay®• Android Auto TM

• Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system• Viewing information• Other settings• Voice recognition• General system information

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’SMANUAL

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the Rear-View Monitor system could result inserious injury or death.

• RearView Monitor is a conveniencefeature and is not a substitute forproper backing. Always turn and lookout the windows and check mirrorsto be sure that it is safe to move be-fore operating the vehicle. Alwaysback up slowly.

• The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in showing large station-ary objects directly behind the ve-hicle, to help avoid damaging thevehicle.

LHA5313

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

• The distance guide line and the ve-hicle width line should be used as areference only when the vehicle is ona level paved surface. The distanceviewed on the monitor is for refer-ence only and may be different thanthe actual distance between the ve-hicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens whencleaning dirt or snow from the front ofthe camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-cally shows a rear view of the vehicle whenthe shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)position. While in R (Reverse), pressing theCAMERA will cycle through guideline op-tions. The radio can still be heard while theRearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-tor system uses a camera located justabove the vehicle’s license plate O1 on thetailgate.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMOPERATIONWith the ignition switch in the ON position,move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESGuiding lines which indicate the vehiclewidth and distances to objects with refer-ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis-played on the monitor.Distance guide linesIndicate distances from the vehicle body.• Red line O1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)• Yellow line O2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)• Green line O3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

LHA5342 LHA5335


Vehicle width guide lines O4

Indicate the vehicle width when backingup.Predicted course lines O5

Indicate the predicted course when back-ing up. The predicted course lines will bedisplayed on the monitor when the shiftlever is in the R (Reverse) position and thesteering wheel is turned. The predictedcourse lines will move depending on howmuch the steering wheel is turned and willnot be displayed while the steering wheel isin the straight-ahead position.The vehicle width guide lines and the widthof the predicted course lines are wider thanthe actual width and course.Center guide lines O6

Indicates the vehicle’s center.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTEDAND ACTUAL DISTANCESThe displayed guidelines and their loca-tions on the ground are for approximatereference only. Objects on uphill or downhillsurfaces or projecting objects will be actu-ally located at distances different fromthose displayed in the monitor relative tothe guidelines (refer to illustrations). Whenin doubt, turn around and view the objectsas you are backing up, or park and exit thevehicle to view the positioning of objectsbehind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphillWhen backing up the vehicle up a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle widthguide lines are shown closer than the ac-tual distance. Note that any object on thehill is further than it appears on themonitor.

LHA5336


Backing up on a steep downhillWhen backing up the vehicle down a hill,the distance guide lines and the vehiclewidth guide lines are shown farther thanthe actual distance. Note that any objecton the hill is closer than it appears on themonitor.

Backing up near a projectingobjectThe vehicle may seem to nearly clear theobject in the display. However, the vehiclemay hit the object if it projects over theactual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projectingobjectThe position OC is shown farther than theposition OB in the display. However, the po-sition OC is actually at the same distance asthe position OA . The vehicle may hit the

LHA5337 LHA5338 LHA5339


object when backing up to the position OA

if the object projects over the actual back-ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTEDCOURSE LINES

WARNING

• If the tires are replaced with differentsized tires, the predicted course linesmay be displayed incorrectly.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,there may be a difference betweenthe predicted course line and the ac-tual course line.

• If the battery is disconnected or be-comes discharged, the predictedcourse lines may be displayed incor-rectly. If this occurs, please performthe following procedures:– Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine isrunning.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight roadfor more than 5 minutes.

• When the steering wheel is turnedwith the ignition switch in the ACCposition, the predicted course linesmay be displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space issafe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayedon the screen OA when the shift lever ismoved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting thesteering wheel so that the predictedcourse lines OB enter the parking spaceOC .

LHA5340 LHA5341


4. Maneuver the steering wheel to makethe vehicle width guide lines OD parallelto the parking space OC while referringto the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the spacecompletely, move the shift lever to the P(Park) position and apply the parkingbrake.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN1. Press the CAMERA button.

2. Touch the “Display Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settingsof the RearView Monitor while the ve-hicle is moving.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFFPREDICTED COURSE LINESTo toggle ON and OFF the predicted courselines while in the P (Park) position:1. Press the CAMERA button.

2. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” keyto turn the feature ON or OFF.

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted courselines or center guide line while in the R (Re-verse) position, press the CAMERA button.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEMLIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor RearView Monitor. Failure to oper-ate the vehicle in accordance withthese system limitations could result inserious injury or death.• The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not showevery object.

LHA3522


• Underneath the bumper and the cor-ner areas of the bumper cannot beviewed on the RearView Monitor be-cause of its monitoring range limita-tion. The system will not show smallobjects below the bumper, and maynot show objects close to the bum-per or on the ground.

• Objects viewed in the RearViewMonitor differ from actual distancebecause a wide-angle lens is used.

• Objects in the RearView Monitor willappear visually opposite comparedto when viewed in the rearview andoutside mirrors.

• Use the displayed lines as a refer-ence. The lines are highly affected bythe number of occupants, fuel level,vehicle position, road conditions androad grade.

• Make sure that the tailgate is se-curely closed when backing up.

• Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled on the tailgate.

• When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causingwater condensation on the lens, amalfunction, fire or an electric shock.

• Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it maymalfunction or cause damage result-ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations anddo not represent a system malfunction:• When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not clearly displayobjects.

• When strong light directly shines on thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly.

• Vertical lines may be seen in objects onthe screen. This is due to strong reflectedlight from the bumper.

• The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight.

• The colors of objects on the RearViewMonitor may differ somewhat from theactual color of objects.

• Objects on the monitor may not be clearin a dark environment.

• There may be a delay when switchingbetween views.

• If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on thecamera, RearView Monitor may not dis-play objects clearly. Clean the camera.

• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipeoff any wax with a clean cloth dampenedwith a diluted mild cleaning agent, thenwipe with a dry cloth.


SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-ner to clean the camera. This willcause discoloration.

• Do not damage the camera as themonitor screen may be adverselyaffected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on thecamera O1 , the RearView Monitor may notdisplay objects clearly. Clean the cameraby wiping it with a cloth dampened with adiluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA5342


1. CAMERA buttonLHA5313

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEWMONITOR (if so equipped)


WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for the proper use of theIntelligent Around View Monitor sys-tem could result in serious injury ordeath.

• The Intelligent Around View Monitoris a convenience feature and is not asubstitute for proper vehicle opera-tion because it has areas where ob-jects cannot be viewed. The four cor-ners of the vehicle in particular, areareas where objects do not alwaysappear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rearviews. Always check your surround-ings to be sure that it is safe to movebefore operating the vehicle. Alwaysoperate the vehicle slowly.

• The driver is always responsible forsafety during parking and othermaneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens whencleaning dirt or snow from the front ofthe camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-tem is designed as an aid to the driver insituations such as slot parking or parallelparking.The monitor displays various views of theposition of the vehicle in a split screen for-mat. Not all views are available at all times.Available views:• Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of thefront of the vehicle.

• Rear ViewAn approximately 150–degree view of therear of the vehicle.

• Bird's-Eye ViewThe surrounding views of the vehiclefrom above.

• Front-Side ViewThe view around and ahead of the frontpassenger's side wheel.

To display the multiple views, the IntelligentAround View Monitor system uses cam-eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-cle’s outside mirrors and one on the tail-gate O1 .

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEWMONITOR SYSTEM OPERATIONWith the ignition switch in the ON position,move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-sition to operate the Intelligent AroundView Monitor.

LHA3909


When the camera is first activated with thebird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon (if soequipped) will flash on the screen. This in-dicates that the sonar system (if soequipped) is activated. For additional infor-mation on the front and rear sonar system(if so equipped), see “Front and rear sonarsystem” (P. 5-124).The screen displayed on the IntelligentAround View Monitor will automatically re-turn to the previous screen 3 minutes afterthe CAMERA button has been pressed withthe shift lever in a position other than the R(Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

• The distance guide lines and the ve-hicle width lines should be used as areference only when the vehicle is ona paved, level surface. The apparentdistance viewed on the monitor maybe different than the actual distancebetween the vehicle and displayedobjects.

• Use the displayed lines and thebird’s-eye view as a reference. Thelines and the bird’s-eye view aregreatly affected by the number of oc-cupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle po-sition, road condition and roadgrade.

• If the tires are replaced with differentsized tires, the predicted course linesand the bird's-eye view may be dis-played incorrectly.

• When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-jects viewed in the monitor are fur-ther than they appear. When drivingthe vehicle down a hill, objectsviewed in the monitor are closer thanthey appear.

• Objects in the rear view will appearvisually opposite compared to whenviewed in the monitor and outsidemirrors.

• Use the mirrors or actually look toproperly judge distances to otherobjects.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,there may be a difference betweenthe predicted course lines and theactual course line.

• The vehicle width and predictedcourse lines are wider than the actualwidth and course.

• The displayed lines will appearslightly off to the right, because therearview camera is not installed inthe rear center of the vehicle.


Front and rear viewGuiding lines that indicate the approximatevehicle width and distance to objects withreference to the vehicle body line OA aredisplayed on the monitor.Distance guide lines:Indicate distances from the vehicle body:• Red line O1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)• Yellow line O2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m)• Green line O3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)• Green line O4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)

(if so equipped)

Vehicle width guide lines O5

Indicate the approximate vehicle widthwhen backing up.Predicted course lines O6

Indicate the predicted course when oper-ating the vehicle. The predicted courselines will be displayed on the monitor whenthe steering wheel is turned. The predictedcourse lines will move depending on howmuch the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel isin the straight-ahead position.Center guide lines O7

Indicates the vehicle’s center.The front view will not be displayed whenthe vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the frontview and the steering wheel turns about90 degrees or less from the straight-ahead position, both the right and leftpredicted course lines O6 are displayed.When the steering wheel turns about 90degrees or more, a line is displayed onlyon the opposite side of the turn.

SAA1840Front view

LHA5343Rear view


Bird’s-eye viewThe bird's-eye view shows the overheadview of the vehicle, which helps confirm thevehicle position and the predicted courseto a parking space.The vehicle icon O1 shows the position ofthe vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-tance between objects viewed in thebird's-eye view may differ somewhat fromthe actual distance to the vehicle.The areas that the cameras cannot coverO2 are indicated in black.

After the ignition switched is placed in theON position, the non-viewable area O2 ishighlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after thebirds-eye view is displayed.In addition, the non-viewable corners aredisplayed in red and will blink for the first 3seconds O3 to remind the driver to becautious.

WARNING

• Objects in the bird's-eye view will ap-pear further than the actual distance.

• Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,may be misaligned or not displayedat the seam of the views.

• Objects that are above the cameracannot be displayed.

• The view of the bird's-eye view maybe misaligned when the camera po-sition alters.

• A line on the ground may be mis-aligned and is not seen as beingstraight at the seam of the views. Themisalignment will increase as theline proceeds away from the vehicle.

Front-side viewGuiding linesGuiding lines that indicate the approximatewidth and the front end of the vehicle aredisplayed on the monitor.The front-of-vehicle line O1 shows the frontpart of the vehicle.The side-of-vehicle line O2 shows the ap-proximate vehicle width including the out-side mirrors.The extensions O3 of both the front O1 andside O2 lines are shown with a green dottedline.

LHA4264 LHA2652


DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTEDAND ACTUAL DISTANCESThe displayed guidelines and their loca-tions on the ground are for approximatereference only. Objects on uphill or downhillsurfaces or projecting objects will be actu-ally located at distances different fromthose displayed in the monitor relative tothe guidelines (refer to illustrations). Whenin doubt, turn around and view the objectsas you are backing up, or park and exit thevehicle to view the positioning of objectsbehind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphillWhen backing up the vehicle up a hill, thedistance guide lines and the vehicle widthguide lines are shown closer than the ac-tual distance. Note that any object on thehill is further than it appears on themonitor.

Backing up on a steep downhillWhen backing up the vehicle down a hill,the distance guide lines and the vehiclewidth guide lines are shown farther thanthe actual distance. Note that any objecton the hill is closer than it appears on themonitor.

LHA5336 LHA5337


Backing up near a projectingobjectThe vehicle may seem to nearly clear theobject in the display. However, the vehiclemay hit the object if it projects over theactual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projectingobjectThe position OC is shown farther than theposition OB in the display. However, the po-sition OC is actually at the same distance asthe position OA . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position OA

if the object projects over the actual back-ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTEDCOURSE LINES

WARNING

• If the tires are replaced with differentsized tires, the predicted course linesmay be displayed incorrectly.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,there may be a difference betweenthe predicted course line and the ac-tual course line.

• If the battery is disconnected or be-comes discharged, the predictedcourse lines may be displayed incor-rectly. If this occurs, please performthe following procedures:– Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine isrunning.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight roadfor more than 5 minutes.

• When the steering wheel is turnedwith the ignition switch in the ACCposition, the predicted course linesmay be displayed incorrectly.

LHA5338 LHA5339


• There is the possibility that when thevehicle mirrors are extended for tow-ing, the mirrors may be shown in thebird's-eye view and front side view.

1. Visually check that the parking space issafe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayedon the screen OA when the shift lever ismoved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting thesteering wheel so that the predictedcourse lines OB enter the parking spaceOC .

LHA5340 LHA5341


4. Maneuver the steering wheel to makethe vehicle width guide lines OD parallelto the parking space OC while referringto the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the spacecompletely, move the shift lever to the P(Park) position and apply the parkingbrake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAYWith the ignition switch in the ON position,press the CAMERA button or move the shiftlever to the R (Reverse) position to operatethe Intelligent Around View Monitor.The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-plays different split screen views depend-ing on the position of the shift lever. Pressthe CAMERA button to switch between theavailable views.If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,the available views are:• Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen• Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive)position, the available views are:• Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen• Front view/front-side view split screenThe display will switch from the IntelligentAround View Monitor screen when:• The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position

and the vehicle speed increases aboveapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

• A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN1. Press the Menu button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Camera” key.

4. Touch the “Display Settings” key.

5. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,“Color”, or “Black Level” key.

6. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”key on the touch-screen display.

LHA5379


NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settingsof the Intelligent Around View Monitorwhile the vehicle is moving. Make surethe parking brake is firmly applied.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEWMONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor Intelligent Around View Monitor.Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-dance with these system limitationscould result in serious injury or death.• Do not use the Intelligent Around

View Monitor with the outside mir-rors in the stored position, and makesure that the tailgate is securelyclosed when operating the vehicleusing the Intelligent Around ViewMonitor.

• The apparent distance between ob-jects viewed on the IntelligentAround View Monitor differs from theactual distance.

• The cameras are installed on thefront grille, the outside mirrors andabove the rear license plate. Do notput anything on the vehicle that cov-ers the cameras.

LHA3807


• When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the cameras. Otherwise, wa-ter may enter the camera unit caus-ing water condensation on the lens, amalfunction, fire or an electric shock.

• Do not strike the cameras. They areprecision instruments. Doing socould cause a malfunction or causedamage resulting in a fire or an elec-tric shock.

There are some areas where the systemwill not show objects and the system doesnot warn of moving objects. When in thefront or rear view display, an object belowthe bumper or on the ground may not beviewed O1 . When in the bird’s-eye view, a tallobject near the seam O2 of the cameraviewing areas will not appear in themonitor.The following are operating limitations anddo not represent a system malfunction:• There may be a delay when switching

between views.• When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not display objectsclearly.

• When strong light directly shines on thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly.

• The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight.

• The colors of objects on the IntelligentAround View Monitor may differ some-what from the actual color of objects.

• Objects on the Intelligent Around ViewMonitor may not be clear and the color ofthe object may differ in a darkenvironment.

• There may be differences in sharpnessbetween each camera view of the bird's-eye view.

• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipeoff any wax with a clean cloth that hasbeen dampened with a diluted mildcleaning agent, then wipe with a drycloth.

System temporarily unavailableWhen the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,there are abnormal conditions in the Intel-ligent Around View Monitor. This will nothinder normal driving operation but it isrecommended that the system be in-spected. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

LHA3591


When the “[X]” icon is displayed on thescreen, the camera image may be receiv-ing temporary electronic disturbancesfrom surrounding devices. This will not hin-der normal driving operation but it is rec-ommended that the system be inspectedif it occurs frequently. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION


• Do not damage the cameras as themonitor screen may be adverselyaffected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any ofthe cameras O1 , the Intelligent AroundView Monitor may not display objectsclearly. Clean the camera by wiping with acloth dampened with a diluted mild clean-ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3592 LHA3909


1. CAMERA buttonLHA5313

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)(if so equipped)


WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the Mov-ing Object Detection system couldresult in serious injury or death.

• The MOD system is not a substitutefor proper vehicle operation and isnot designed to prevent contact withobjects surrounding the vehicle.When maneuvering, always use theoutside mirrors and rearview mirrorand turn and check the surroundingsto ensure it is safe to maneuver.

• The system is deactivated at speedsabove 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-vated at lower speeds.

• The MOD system is not designed todetect surrounding stationaryobjects.

The MOD system can inform the driver ofmoving objects near the vehicle whenbacking out of garages, maneuvering inparking lots and in other such instances.The MOD system detects moving objectsby using image processing technology onthe image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATIONThe MOD system will turn on automaticallyunder the following conditions:• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.• When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and thecamera screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the followingconditions when the camera view isdisplayed:• When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle isstopped, the MOD system detects mov-ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. TheMOD system will not operate if the out-side mirrors are moving in or out, in thestowed position, or if either front door isopened.

LHA4190Front and bird’s-eye views


• When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)position and the vehicle speed is belowapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MODsystem detects moving objects in thefront view.

• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)position and the vehicle speed is belowapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MODsystem detects moving objects in therear view. The MOD system will not oper-ate if the tailgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect movingobjects in the front-side view. The MODicon is not displayed on the screen when inthis view.When the MOD system detects moving ob-jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heardand a yellow frame will be displayed on theview where the objects are detected. Whilethe MOD system continues to detect mov-ing objects, the yellow frame continues tobe displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime is beeping, theMOD system will not chime.In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame O1 isdisplayed on each camera image (front,rear, right, left) depending on where mov-ing objects are detected.The yellow frame O2 is displayed on eachview in the front view and rear view modes.A blue MOD icon O3 is displayed in the viewwhere the MOD system is operative. A grayMOD icon is displayed in the view where theMOD system is not operative.If the MOD system is turned off, the MODicon O3 is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if soequipped)Some vehicles include the option to allowthe MOD system to be turned on or off.To turn the MOD system on or off:1. Press the or button on the

steering wheel and select “Settings” inthe vehicle information display.

2. Using the buttons, select “DriverAssistance” and press the ENTER button.

3. Select “Parking Aids”.

LHA5345Rear and bird’s-eye views

LHA5346Rear and front-side views


4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” usingthe ENTER button.

You can also turn the MOD on or off bypressing the Parking Aids system switch (ifso equipped).

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor MOD. Failure to operate the vehiclein accordance with these system limi-tations could result in serious injury ordeath.• Do not use the MOD system when

towing a trailer. The system may notfunction properly.

• Excessive noise (for example, audiosystem volume or open vehicle win-dow) will interfere with the chimesound, and it may not be heard.

• The MOD system performance will belimited according to environmentalconditions and surrounding objectssuch as:– When there is low contrast be-

tween background and the mov-ing objects.

– When there is a blinking source oflight.

– When strong light such as anothervehicle’s headlight or sunlight ispresent.

– When camera orientation is not inits usual position, such as when amirror is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops orsnow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the movingobjects in the display is notchanged.

• The MOD system might detect flow-ing water droplets on the cameralens, white smoke from the muffler,moving shadows, etc.

• The MOD system may not functionproperly depending on the speed, di-rection, distance or shape of themoving objects.

• If your vehicle sustains damage tothe parts where the camera is in-stalled, leaving it misaligned or bent,the sensing zone may be altered andthe MOD system may not detect ob-jects properly.

• When the temperature is extremelyhigh or low, the screen may not dis-play objects clearly. This is not amalfunction.

NOTE:The blue MOD icon will change to or-ange if one of the following has oc-curred:• When the system is malfunctioning.• When the component temperature

reaches a high level (icon will blink).• When the Rear View camera has de-

tected a blockage (icon will blink).If the icon light continues to illuminateorange, have the MOD system checked. Itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION


• Do not damage the camera as themonitor screen may be adverselyaffected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any ofthe cameras O1 , the MOD system may notoperate properly. Clean the camera by wip-ing with a cloth dampened with a dilutedmild cleaning agent and then wiping with adry cloth.

LHA3909


Adjust air flow direction for the driver's andpassenger's side vents O1 , center vents O2 ,and rear passengers' vents (if so equipped)O3 by moving the vent slide and/or ventassemblies.

WARNING

• The air conditioner cooling functionoperates only when the engine isrunning.

• Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assis-tance of others alone in your vehicle.Pets should also not be left alone.They could accidentally injure them-selves or others through inadvertentoperation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,sunny days, temperatures in a closedvehicle could quickly become highenough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or animals.

• Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

NOTE:• Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditionerunit. Odor can enter the passengercompartment through the vents.

• When parking, set the heater and airconditioner controls to turn off air re-circulation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. This shouldhelp reduce odors inside the vehicle.

LHA3772

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (if so equipped)


CONTROLS1. Fan speed control dial / system

OFF dial / A/C (air conditioning) button

2. Air flow control buttons

3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/Cbutton

4. Air recirculation button

5. Outside mirror (if so equipped) de-froster switch

6. Front windshield defrost button

Fan speed control dialThe fan speed control dial turns thefan on and off and controls fan speed.

Fan speed control dial — OFFmodeSetting the fan speed control dial to theoff position will turn off the fan and the airrecirculation indicator light will turn on. Toget fresh air in fan off mode, press theair recirculation button to turn off the indica-tor. In fan off mode, the mode buttons can beselected to change the air vent distribution(if the air recirculation mode is off).

Air flow control buttonsThe air flow control buttons allow you toselect the air flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets

and foot outlets.— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

LHA4127


Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you toadjust the temperature of the outlet air. Tolower the temperature, turn the dial to theleft. To increase the temperature, turn thedial to the right.

Air recirculation buttonON position (Indicator light on)Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.Press the button to the ON positionwhen:• driving on a dusty road.• to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.• for maximum cooling when using the air

conditioner.OFF position (Indicator light off)If outside air is desired in off mode, pressthe recirculation button until the indicatorturns off.If fogging occurs, press the frontwindshield defrost button.

A/C (air conditioner) buttonStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position andpress the button to turn on the airconditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,press the button again.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

Outside mirror defroster (if soequipped)For additional information, see “Rear win-dow and/or outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch” (P. 2-43).

HEATER OPERATION

HeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air tothe foot outlets. Some air also flows fromthe defrost outlets.1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion for normal heating. The indicatorlight on the button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial tothe desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to thedesired position between the middleand the hot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the sideand center vents.1. Press the button to the off position.

The indicator light on the buttonwill go off.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to thedesired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrostoutlets to defrost/defog the windows.1. Press the defrost/defog button.




• To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan speed control dialto the highest setting and the tempera-ture control to the full HOT position.

• When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passen-ger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance. Under this con-dition, the indicator light on the A/C but-ton indicator will not turn on if the userhad selected the A/C off. Turning off theair conditioning via the A/C button is notallowed In this mode. If the A/C buttonindicator was on when entering thismode, and the A/C button is selected inthis mode, the A/C button indicator willturn off, but the A/C compressor will stillbe automatically enabled. The recircula-tion button indicator will not illuminate ifthe button is pressed in this mode.

Bi-level heatingThe bi-level mode directs warmed air tothe side and center vents and to the frontand rear floor outlets.1. Press the button to the off position.





Heating and defoggingThis mode heats the interior and defogsthe windshield.1. Press the air flow control button.



• When the position is selected, theair conditioner automatically turns on ifthe outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). If the air flow controlbutton is selected for more than 1 minute,the air conditioning system will continueto operate until the fan speed con-trol dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle isshut off, or the A/C button is used to turnoff the compressor even if the air flowcontrol dial is turned to a position otherthan the position. This dehumidi-fies the air which helps defog the wind-shield. Under this condition, the indicatorlight on the A/C button indicator will notturn on if the user had selected A/C off.Turning off the air conditioning via theA/C button is not allowed in this mode. Ifthe A/C button indicator was on whenentering this mode, and the A/C button isselected in this mode, the A/C compres-sor will still be automatically enabled. It isrecommended that mode beturned off for maximum defogging. Therecirculation button can be selected inthis mode to block outside odors. How-ever, for maximum defogging in thismode, it is recommended to turn recircu-lation off when possible.


Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield.This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol dial to the desired position, andpress the button to activate the airconditioner. When the air conditioner is on,cooling and dehumidifying functions areadded to the heater operation.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidifythe air.1. Press the button to the off position.



4. Press the button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to thedesired position between the middleand the cold position.

• For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, press the button tothe on position. Be sure to return theto the off position for normal cooling. Theindicator light on the button will gooff. You may also select MAX A/C for quickcooling.

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidifythe air.1. Press the button to the off position.




4. Press the button on.


Dehumidified defoggingThis mode is used to defog the windowsand dehumidify the air.1. Press the front defroster button.


When the or positions are se-lected, the air conditioner automaticallyturns on if the outside temperature is morethan 36°F (2°C). The air conditioning systemwill continue to operate until the fanspeed control dial is turned to OFF, the airconditioner is turned OFF, or the vehicle isshut off. If a position other than thefront defrost air flow button is selected, theA/C compressor will not turn off even if theuser had selected A/C off prior to enteringdefrost. In front defrost or footdefrost the indicator light on the A/C but-ton will not turn on if the user had selectedA/C off. Turning off the air conditioning viathe A/C button is not allowed in this mode.If the A/C button indicator was on whenentering this mode, and the A/C button isselected in this mode, the A/C button indi-cator will turn off, but the A/C compressorwill still be automatically enabled. This de-humidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to fur-ther improve the defogging performance.3. Turn the temperature control dial to the

desired position.


Operating tips• Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.• After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3

minutes with the windows open to venthot air from the passenger compart-ment. Then, close the windows. This al-lows the air conditioner to cool the inte-rior more quickly.

• The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

• A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe ventilators in hot, humid conditionsas the air is cooled rapidly. This does notindicate a malfunction.

• If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. For additionalinformation, see “If your vehicle over-heats” (P. 6-12).

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button anddial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICKheating, cooling or defrosting. For addi-tional information on heating and cooling,see “Heater and air conditioner (manual)”(P. 4-28). The air recirculation ( ) but-ton should always be in the OFF positionfor heating and defrosting.


LHA4486 LHA4487


LHA4488 LHA4489


LHA4490


1. Front defroster button2. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)/

AUTO button3. Display screen4. Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)/DUAL button5. Fresh air intake button6. Air recirculation button

7. A/C (air conditioner) button8. MODE (manual air flow control) button9. Fan speed control buttons10. ON-OFF button11. Rear window and/or outside

mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch

WARNING

• The air conditioner cooling functionoperates only when the engine isrunning.


• Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the inte-rior air to become stale and the win-dows to fog up.

NOTE:• Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditionerunit. Odor can enter the passengercompartment through the vents.

• When parking, set the heater and airconditioner controls to turn off air re-circulation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. This shouldhelp reduce odors inside the vehicle.

LHA3575

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)


AUTOMATIC OPERATIONCooling or heating (auto)This mode may be normally used all yearround as the system automatically worksto keep a constant temperature. Air flowdistribution and fan speed are also con-trolled automatically.1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left orright to set the desired temperature.Driver and passenger temperatures canbe set independently. Press the DUALbutton to activate dual climate controlfunctions. Turn the passenger's sidetemperature control dial to the left orright to set the desired passenger'stemperature.

• Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

• The temperature of the passenger com-partment will be maintained automati-cally. Air flow distribution, fan speed andA/C on/off are also controlled automati-cally. The A/C button indicator will remainin the last user setting. Under this condi-tion, the indicator light on the A/C buttonindicator will not turn on if the user hadnot selected the A/C button off. Turningoff the air conditioning via the A/C buttonis not allowed in this mode. If the A/Cbutton indicator was on when enteringthis mode, and the A/C button is selectedin this mode, the A/C button indicator willturn off, but the A/C compressor will stillbe automatically enabled. For additionalinformation, see “Air flow control” (P. 4-40).To turn off the compressor, turn off automode, then turn the A/C on then off untilthe A/C button indicator is not lit.

• A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe vents in hot, humid conditions as theair is cooled rapidly. This does not indicatea malfunction.

HeatingThe air conditioner does not activate. Whenyou need to heat only, use this mode.1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to theleft or the right to set the desired tem-perature. Driver and passenger tem-peratures can be set independently.Press the DUAL button to activate dualclimate control functions. Turn the pas-senger’s side temperature control dialto the left or right to set the desiredpassenger’s temperature.

• The temperature of the passenger com-partment will be maintained automati-cally. Air flow distribution and fan speedare also controlled automatically.

• Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwise,the system may not work properly.

• Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting ordefogging1. Press the defroster control button

to turn the system on. The indicator lightin the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left orright to set the desired temperature.

• To quickly remove ice from the outside ofthe windows, press the fan speedcontrol button to the maximum position.


• As soon as possible after the windshieldis clean, press the AUTO button to returnto the auto mode.

• When the control is activated, the airconditioner will automatically be turnedon at outside temperatures above 36°F(2°C). This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Under thiscondition, the indicator light on the A/Cbutton indicator will not turn on if the userhad selected A/C off prior to entering thismode. Turning off the air condition via theA/C button is not allowed in this mode. Ifthe A/C button indicator was on whenentering this mode, and the A/C button isselected in this mode, the A/C compres-sor will still be automatically enabled. Theair recirculation mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to fur-ther improve the defoggingperformance.

Remote Engine Start withIntelligent Climate Control (if soequipped)Vehicles equipped with automatic climatecontrols and Remote Engine Start functionmay go into automatic heating or coolingmode when Remote Engine Start is acti-

vated depending on outside and cabintemperatures. During this period, the cli-mate control display and buttons will beinoperable until the ignition switch isturned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-ing mode, the rear window defroster (if soequipped), heated seat (if so equipped) andheated steering wheel (if so equipped) maybe activated automatically.

Voice Recognition logic (if soequipped)When the climate control system is on, thefront and rear (if so equipped) fan speedsmay be automatically lowered so thatcommands are more easily recognized.Fan speed can be adjusted using the fanspeed decrease and increasebuttons, if desired.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed controlPress the fan speed control buttonsto manually control the fan speed.Press the AUTO button to return to auto-matic control of the fan speed.When adjusting the manual fan from automode, the outlet direction (floor, floor/

defrost, vent, bi-level) will still automaticallychange. To fix the outlet to a manual mode,select the desired air flow location usingthe MODE button.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows you toadjust the temperature of the outlet air. Tolower the temperature, turn the dial to theleft. To increase the temperature, turn thedial to the right. Temperature can be ad-justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side.

Air recirculationPress the air recirculation button torecirculate interior air inside the vehiclewhen:• driving on a dusty road• to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.• for maximum cooling when using the air

conditioning system.Press the AUTO button to return to auto-matic mode.The air recirculation button will not be acti-vated when the air conditioner is inmode.


When the outside temperature exceeds70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system maydefault to air recirculation mode automati-cally to reduce overall power consumption.To exit air recirculation mode, select thefresh air intake button to enter fresh airmode.In Floor/Defrost mode, the recirculationbutton can be selected to block outsideodors. However, for maximum defogging inthis mode, it is recommended to turn recir-culation off when possible.

Fresh air intakePress the fresh air intake button todraw outside air into the passengercompartment.

Automatic intake air controlIn the AUTO mode, the intake air will becontrolled automatically. When the outsidetemperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the airconditioning system may default to air re-circulation mode automatically to reduceoverall power consumption. To exit air re-circulation mode, select the fresh air intakebutton to enter fresh air mode. The air re-circulation indicator will turn off, the freshair indicator will turn on.

To manually control the intake air, press thefresh air intake button. To return to the

automatic control mode if the freshair indicator is illuminated, press and holdthe fresh air intake button for about 2seconds. The fresh air indicator and air re-circulation indicator lights will flash twice,and then the intake air will be controlledautomatically. To return to the automaticcontrol mode if the air recirculationicon is illuminated, press and hold theair recirculation button for about 2 sec-onds. The air recirculation indicatorand fresh air intake indicator lights willflash twice and the intake air will be con-trolled automatically.

A/C (air conditioner) buttonStart the engine, turn the fan speedcontrol buttons to the desired position andpress the button to turn on the airconditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,press the button again.The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow controlPress the MODE button to manually controlair flow and select the air outlet.

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot out-lets.

— Air flows from defroster and footoutlets.

To turn system offPress the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and/or outsidemirror (if so equipped) defrosterswitchFor additional information, see “Rear win-dow and/or outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch” (P. 2-43).


OPERATING TIPSThe sunload sensor (if so equipped) O1 , lo-cated on the top center of the instrumentpanel, helps the system maintain a con-stant temperature. Do not put anything onor around this sensor.

• When the climate system is in automaticoperation and the engine coolant tem-perature and outside air temperature arelow, the air flow outlet may default to de-froster mode for a maximum of 2 min-utes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunc-tion. After the engine coolanttemperature warms up, the air flow outletwill return to foot mode and operation willcontinue normally.

• When the outside and interior cabin tem-peratures are moderate to high, the in-take setting may default to turn off airrecirculation to allow fresh air into thepassenger compartment. You may no-tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-levelmode, or side demist vent outlets for amaximum of 15 seconds. This may occurwhen previous climate setting was sys-tem off. This is not a malfunction. Afterthe initial warm air is expelled, the intakewill return to automatic control, air flowoutlet will return to previous settings, andoperation will continue normally. To exit,press any climate control button.

• Keep the windows closed while the airconditioner is in operation.

• If you feel that the air flow mode you haveselected and the outlets the air is comingout do not match, select the mode.

• When you change the air flow mode, youmay feel air flow from the foot outlets forjust a moment. This is not a malfunction.

LHA4126


The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-signed with the environment in mind.This refrigerant does not harm theearth's ozone layer.Special charging equipment and lubricantis required when servicing your NISSAN airconditioner. Using improper refrigerants orlubricants will cause severe damage toyour air conditioner system. For additionalinformation, see “Air conditioner system re-frigerant and oil recommendations”(P. 10-8).It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer to service your “environmentallyfriendly” air conditioner system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with properequipment.

There is a USB/iPod® charging port locatedin the 2nd row on the back of the centerconsole. This port will charge compatibledevices.

NOTE:

The USB/iPod® charging port will not op-erate the display screen or the Rear SeatInfotainment (RSI) (if so equipped). Onlythe USB connection port located in theconsole box will allow operation of USB/iPod® devices through the audio system.

The antenna cannot be shortened, but canbe removed. When you need to remove theantenna, turn the antenna rodcounterclockwise.To install the antenna rod, turn the antennarod clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION

• Always properly tighten the antennarod during installation or the an-tenna rod may break during vehicleoperation.

• Be sure that the antenna is removedbefore the vehicle enters an auto-matic car wash.

LHA48642nd row

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT (if soequipped)

ANTENNA


WARNING

• It is unlawful in most jurisdictions fora person to drive a motor vehiclewhich is equipped with a televisionmonitor or screen that is visible, di-rectly or indirectly, to the driver whileoperating the vehicle. In the interestof safety, the unit should never beinstalled where it will be directly orindirectly visible, by the operator ofthe motor vehicle.

• If your vehicle is equipped with awireless rear seat audio system orany other wireless infrared device,make sure it is powered off when op-erating the RSI system. If both sys-tems are powered on at the sametime, the two systems may obstructeach other, possibly creating unde-sirable audio interference throughthe wireless headphones.

• For safety reasons when changingdiscs, it is recommended that the ve-hicle is not in motion, and that you donot allow children to unfasten safetybelts to change discs or make anyadjustments to the system. Systemadjustments can be accomplishedusing the remote control, whilesafety belts remain fastened.

• Enjoy your RSI system but rememberthat safety of all passengers remainsthe number one priority. Devices in-stalled in the USB, HDMI, or head-phone jack may protrude and createa potential eye impact hazard for un-belted passengers during a vehicleaccident. To reduce the risk of injury,use only SD cards (hidden on left sideof driver side monitor) or low-profileUSB storage devices.

CAUTION

• Do not touch the inner pins of thejacks on the front panel. Electrostaticdischarge may cause permanentdamage to the device.

• The LCD display screen is not touch-screen. Do not put pressure or addsuction cups on the screen.

• Caution children to avoid touching orscratching the screen, as it may be-come dirty or damaged.

• Be sure to run the vehicle enginewhile using the system. Using thissystem without running the enginecan result in battery drain. To avoidthe risk of battery drain, please re-member to turn off the system whenthe vehicle is not in use.

WELCOMEThank you for purchasing this advancedRear Seat Infotainment (RSI) system withbuilt-in Wi-Fi and DVD player. Before oper-ating this system, read this section thor-oughly and retain it for future reference.

System features• Twin 8-inch Color TFT-LCD Panels with

1024x600 Resolution• Top-load DVD Player (Driver Side Only)• Internal Wi-Fi Network• Bluetooth® 4.1 Audio Streaming• Miracast®/Smart View Capability• SmartStream Content Sharing• USB 2.0 Port, SDXC Card Input• HDMI 1.4 Input with MHL 2.0 Support• Exclusive Slingplayer® Application• 3.5mm Stereo Headphone Output• Front Panel Capacitive Touch Controls

REAR SEAT INFOTAINMENT (RSI)(if so equipped)


• Infrared Wireless Headphones• Full-Function Slimline Remote Control• Monitor Screen Sharing

GETTING STARTEDTurning the monitor on or off1. Press the button on the top of the

monitor or the remote control to turnthe monitor on or off. When in use, thefront panel controls will illuminate.

2. After the monitor has been turned onand is displaying a picture, the up/downviewing angle can be adjusted to opti-mize the picture quality. Press the push-button latch located on the top of themonitor to pivot the screen.

Power up tips1. After the ignition is turned on, there is a

12 second delay before the monitor(power) button is operable.

2. On some vehicles after the ignition isturned off, the system will continue towork for 10 minutes, or until the driver'sdoor is opened.

3. Remember to turn the monitor off andpivot the screen to the locked (latched)position when not in use.

Audio optionsWireless headphonesEach monitor includes a built-in dual chan-nel infrared transmitter for use with wire-less headphones. The wireless head-phones must be used within a line of sightfrom the transmitter as infrared signals, likevisible light, travel only in a straight line.How to use the wireless headphonesWhen placing the headphones on yourhead, make sure to observe the left andright orientation. The headphones must beoriented correctly (facing forward) to re-ceive the audio signal. Press the

(power) button on the headphones,then select channel “A” to listen to monitor

LHA4871


A, or channel “B” to listen to monitor B. Ad-just the audio level using the volume con-trol on each headphone.Wired headphonesThere is a 3.5mm stereo headphone out-put on each monitor which can be usedwith most standard stereo headphones(wired headphones sold separately).Bluetooth® streaming audioTo listen to audio throughout the entire ve-hicle, the system includes the ability tostream audio over a Bluetooth® connec-tion to the vehicle’s stereo system.When monitor A is selected as the sourceto stream from, the audio output to thewireless and wired headphones will be dis-abled (only on monitor A). To use the wire-less or wired headphones with monitor A,you must turn off the Bluetooth® stream-ing feature. To enable/disable Bluetooth®streaming, navigate to the “SETTINGS”menu, or press on the remote controlduring content playback. For additional in-formation, see “Settings” (P. 4-72).

Notes on discs• To keep a disc clean, do not touch its

surface. Handle the disc by its edge.• Keep your discs in their cases or sleeves

when not in use. Also, do not subject discto heat/high temperature. Avoid leavingthem in a parked vehicle or on adashboard/rear tray.

• Do not attach labels, or use discs withsticky ink/residue. The following malfunc-tions may result from using such discs:– Inability to eject a disc due to a label or

sticker peeling off and jamming thedisc mechanism.

– Inability to read audio data correctly(i.e., playback skipping, or no playback)due to heat shrinking of a sticker orlabel causing a disc to warp.

• Before playing, clean the discs with acommercially available cleaning cloth.Wipe each disc from the center out. Donot use solvents such as benzene, thin-ner, commercially available cleaners, orantistatic spray intended for analogdiscs.

• Use only normal, circular discs. If you in-sert irregular, non-round, shaped discsthey may jam in the DVD player or notplay properly.

LHA4873 LHA4874


Region codingDVD players and discs are coded by region.These regional codes must match in orderfor the disc to play. The system is preset tothe region code designated for your areaby the DVD Copy Control Association. Otherregions may not be played in this system.Supported disc typesDVD-Video: DVD contains videoDVD +/- R: DVD contains videoCD-DA: CD contains audioCD-Video: CD contains videoCD-R/RW: CD contains audioUnsupported disc typesSuper Audio CDOptical disc CD-1CD-ROMDVD-ROMDVD-RAMDualDiscDIVXMiniDiscAVCHDHD DVDBlu-rayLoading and playing discsPress the (power) button to turn themonitor on. Insert the disc about halfway

into the disc compartment slot on the driv-er’s side monitor, with the disc’s label facingthe rear of the vehicle. Do NOT insert thedisc at an angle. The disc must be insertedstraight into the player.The disc will load automatically and beginto play. Some discs may start at the rootmenu, where playback must be selected tostart a movie. Depending on the disc andplayback location on the disc, a “ ” iconmay be displayed in the upper-left cornerof the screen indicating that playback isnot possible during certain times.DVD playback will automatically play oneach monitor if there is no content alreadyplaying. You may also select “DVD” from thesource menu to begin DVD playback mode.

Media compatibilityFor a list of compatible media formats forthis system, see “Storage device format-ting” (P. 4-46).• The metadata or file information of some

audio and video files may not be correctlydisplayed.

• It is not possible to play content that is pro-tected by DRM (Digital Rights Management).

• There may be a delay before playbackbegins when using USB flash drives or SDcards with complex folder hierarchies ormany files.

• Some audio, video, and image files may beincompatible with this system due to filecharacteristics, file format, recording soft-ware used, directory structure, and/or thetype of audio/video encoding used.

Storage device formattingThis system is compatible with severaltypes of formatting for USB flash drives andSD cards. Refer to the documentation thatcomes with your storage device for moredetails on how to format.FAT32 - USB and SDHCGood for smaller capacity storage devices,but individual files on the drive must be<4GB. This format is good for music andimages.EX-FAT - USB and SDXCBetter choice for larger capacity storagedevices with files that are >4GB. This formatis better for larger files such as full-lengthmovies.NTFS - USB and SDXCBest choice for very large capacity storagedevices - with no limitations on file size. Thisformat can be used for all file sizes.


Supported FormatsFormat Extension Supported Variations/Codecs

VIDEO

ASF .wmv H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, WMVAVI .avi H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, Xvid, WMV

MP4 .mp4, .m4v H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2Matroska .mkv H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2, WMV

MPEG .mpg, .mpeg, .vob H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2

AUDIO

AAC .m4a, .aacASF .wma WMA, WMA Lossless, WMA Voice, WMA Pro

FLAC .flac FLAC 1.2.1Matroska .mka

MPEG .mp1, .mp2, .mp3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer 1, 2, 3, MPEG-2/2.5 Audio Layer 1, 2, 3OGG .oggWAV .wav

PHOTO

BMP .bmpGIF .gif

JPEG .jpg, .jpegPNG .pngTIFF .tiff, .tif

WebP .webpVideo Profiles Supported:ASF: WMV7, WMV8, WMV9; H.264:Baseline, Main, Extended, High MPEG-2 Part 2:Simple, Main, High;MPEG-4 Part 2:Simple, Advanced Simple Profile, Xvid


CONTROL DESCRIPTION1. SD Card Slot

Play videos, music, and images stored onmost SD cards. The full-size SD card slotis accessible on the left side of the moni-

tor when the screen is in the openposition.

2. EjectPress this button to eject a disc.

3. Screen latchPress the push-button latch located onthe top of the monitor to pivot thescreen. Remember to turn the monitoroff and pivot the screen to the locked(latched) position when not in use.

4. Disc slotPlay DVDs and CDs using standard sizeDVD or CD discs.

5. Power (Monitor A)Press this button to turn the monitor on.Press again to turn the monitor off. Pressand hold for 6 seconds to reset the sys-tem (Monitor A only)Power (Monitor B)Press this button to turn the monitor on.Press again to turn the monitor off.

6. Front panel controlsCapacitive-touch buttons provide userinterface navigation, Select, Back, andHome functions.

7. Monitor screen displayIncludes an 8-inch TFT Liquid Crystal Dis-play with 1024 x 600 resolution.

LHA4875Monitor A (Drivers Side) With DVD


8. HDMI portConnect an external audio/videosource using a full-size HDMI connector.Supports MHL 2.0 playback andcharging.

9. USB 2.0 portPlay videos, music, and images storedon most USB devices. Provides up to 2amps of output to charge most mobiledevices.

10. Headphone output jackConnect wired headphones using a3.5mm stereo connector.

CAUTION

• Do not use any harsh solvents orchemicals when cleaning themonitor.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaners thatmay scratch the screen. Use only alightly dampened lint free cloth towipe the screen if it is dirty.

• The LCD display screen is not touch-screen. Do not put pressure or addsuction cups on the screen.

• Caution children to avoid touching orscratching the screen, as it may be-come dirty or damaged.

• Place the monitor in the fully closedposition when not in use.

LHA4876Monitor B (Passenger’s Side) Without DVD


REMOTE CONTROL OPERATIONBefore useBefore attempting to operate your remotecontrol, turn the remote control face downand remove the battery insulator by pullingthe clear plastic tab away from the remotecontrol.Replacing the battery1. Turn the remote control face down. Use

a coin to turn the battery cover counter-clockwise and remove it.

2. Replace the battery with a CR2032 orequivalent. Make sure that proper polar-ity is observed. The positive (+) side of thebattery should face upwards.

3. Place the cover back into position andturn it clockwise until it locks into place.

The remote control will only operate thisdevice. It is not a universal remote controland will not control other equipment.

WARNING

• Always ensure that the battery is in-serted in the correct direction asshown in the battery compartment.

• When the battery fails to function, re-place it immediately.

• Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren. In case the battery is acci-dentally swallowed, immediatelyconsult a doctor. Also, when dispos-ing of used batteries, please complywith governmental regulations orenvironmental public institutionrules that apply in your country/area.

• Remove the battery if the remotecontrol is not used for a month orlonger.

• Storage in extreme cold can weakenthe battery. Keep the remote controlstored in a cool, dry place.

LHA4877 LHA4878


REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS1. Power

Press this button to turn the monitor on.Press again to turn the monitor off.

2. Monitor APress this button to transmit the remotecontrol codes and functions to operatemonitor A (Driver side).

3. Directional padPress these buttons to increase/decrease the volume or navigate up/down when displaying a menu or file list.

4. HomePress this button to return to the homescreen.

5. BackPress this button to go back to the pre-vious screen.

6. Monitor BPress this button to transmit the remotecontrol codes and functions to operatemonitor B (Passenger side).

7. SelectPress this button to make a selectionwhen displaying a menu or file list.

8. MenuPress this button to open the contextmenu (when available).

NOTE:You must first select the desiredmonitor (press A or B) to control it.Example - Press A, then press Powerto turn monitor A on/off.

LHA4879


WIRELESS HEADPHONEOPERATION

Installing the batteriesBefore attempting to operate the head-phones, install the batteries as describedbelow:1. Use a coin to remove the headphone

battery cover

2. Install two “AAA” batteries into the head-phones. Make sure that proper polarity(+ or -) is observed.

3. Reinstall headphone battery cover.

Headphone operationPress the power button on the head-phones to turn on and off the headphones.The red LED will illuminate when the head-phone is turned on. Set the select switch to“A” or “B” for use with the “A” monitor or “B”monitor respectively. Use the volumethumb wheel to adjust the volume level forthe headphone audio.

NOTE:If the headphones are accidentallyleft on and system is powered off, abattery saver feature will automati-cally turn off the headphones afterapproximately 3 minutes.

LHA4880


CAUTION

• Always ensure that the batteries areinserted with the positive and nega-tive terminals in the correct directionas shown in the batterycompartment.

• Different types of batteries have dif-ferent characteristics. Do not mix dif-ferent types.

• Do not mix old and new batteries.Mixing old and new batteries willshorten battery life and/or causechemical leaks from the oldbatteries.

• When batteries fail to function, re-place them immediately.

• Keep the batteries out of the reach ofchildren. In case the batteries are ac-cidentally swallowed, immediatelyconsult a doctor. Also, when dispos-ing of used batteries, please complywith governmental regulations orenvironmental public institutionrules that apply in your country/area.

• Remove the batteries if the head-phones are not used for a month orlonger.

GENERAL OPERATIONNavigating menusWhen fully powered on, the Home screencan be accessed at any time by pressingthe button on the remote control, orthe button on the monitor.The main menu is located on the far-leftside of the screen and allows users to se-lect a source, change settings, USB fast-charge certain devices, and mirror contentplaying from the opposite monitor.

To the right of the main menu is a previewmenu, which gives a preview of the high-lighted option in the main menu. The pre-view menu options will change with eachselection.Press or to scroll through theoptions in each menu. The current selec-tion is highlighted in the center of the menuwhen scrolling up and down. Press or

when an item is highlighted to selectthe item. Press or to move backone level in the menu.MirrorFor additional information on how to mir-ror content playing from the oppositemonitor, see “Mirroring content” (P. 4-55)and “Using Miracast®” (P. 4-70).Fast-Charge (USB)For additional information, see “Fast-Charge (USB)” (P. 4-61).SettingsFor additional information, see “Settings”(P. 4-72).

LHA4882


SourcesThe following sources can be accessedfrom the main menu:DVDPlay DVD movies and audio CDs usingstandard size DVD or CD discs.HDMIPlay content from an external audio/videosource.USBPlay videos, music, and images stored onmost USB devices.

SD CARDPlay videos, music, and images stored onmost SD cards.Slingplayer®Stream content wirelessly from a Slingbox®(sold separately) to the RSI system. *Re-quires external internet connection.Miracast®Stream content wirelessly from a Miracast-enabled device to the RSI system.SmartStreamStream content wirelessly between mobiledevices and to the RSI system. *Requirescompatible UPnP application to be in-stalled on the mobile device. For additionalinformation, see “SmartStream” (P. 4-71).

NOTE:The top left corner of the screen in-cludes a graphic representation thatshows the navigational path of thecurrent menu. For example: Home >Source > DVD.

DVD OPERATIONVolume controlVolume level can be adjusted by pressing

or any time video is playing, or byselecting the volume icon in the playbackcontrols menu.

LHA4883 LHA4885


NOTE:For hearing protection, there is amaximum volume setting to limit theaudio output of the front panel3.5mm headphone output. Using thedirectional pad on the remote navi-gate to “SETTINGS” then “AUDIO” then“HEADPHONES” to adjust the maxi-mum volume. Once set, the maximumvolume is limited to this setting.

Playing a discInsert a disc into the top slot of monitor Awith the label facing the rear of the vehicle.If the disc is supported and there is nocontent already playing, the disc will auto-matically begin playing.When a disc is inserted, playback will auto-matically begin on both monitors A and B (ifthere is no content already playing). If a discwas previously inserted, using the direc-tional pad on the remote select “SOURCE”,then “DVD” from the Home screen to beginor resume playback.

Some DVDs may start at the root menu,where playback must be selected to start amovie. Use the remote control or frontpanel buttons to navigate through the DVDmenu and begin playback.The system supports DVD parental con-trols that provide the ability to limit contentplayback based on the Motion Picture As-sociation of America (MPAA) ratings. Foradditional information, see “About parentallock” (P 4-78).

Mirroring contentTo mirror the content of the oppositemonitor, using the directional pad on theremote, select “MIRROR” from the HomeScreen. This will allow the identical contentto play on both monitors.

LHA4886


DVD PLAYBACK CONTROLSDuring video playback, press to dis-play the playback controls. Press or

to navigate the controls. Press toselect the highlighted function or option.The playback controls will disappear afterapproximately 5 seconds of no activity.

1. Context MenuPress on the remote to open thecontext menu. The menu options willvary, depending on the source.

2. Progress BarShows elapsed time, total time, andvideo progress bar indicator.

3. VolumeSelect to display the volume level indica-tor. Press or to increase ordecrease the volume.

4. Night ModeSelect to dim the screen and reduce eyestrain during operation at night.

5. PreviousSelect to go to the beginning of thechapter. Select again to go to the previ-ous chapter.

6. RewindSelect to rewind at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16xspeeds. Select to resume playback.

7. StopSelect to stop DVD playback and returnto the menu.

8. Play/PauseSelect once to pause DVD playback. Se-lect again to resume DVD playback.

9. Fast ForwardSelect to fast forward at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16xspeeds. Select to resume playback.

10. NextSelect to go to the next chapter.

LHA4888


11. RepeatSelect once to repeat the entire DVD.Select again to repeat the currentlyplaying chapter one time.

12. EjectSelect to eject the disc.

Context menuPress on the remote to open the con-text menu during DVD playback. The con-text menu provides options to adjust thedisplay settings, audio settings, subtitlesettings, and multicast (on/off). Pressto select or toggle the highlighted item onthe menu. Press to exit the contextmenu.

Display settingsBrightness is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.

Contrast is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Sharpness is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Aspect Ratio is adjustable between Pan &Scan, Letter Box, Widescreen, and Default.

Audio settingsThe Audio settings allow you to set thedefault audio language for DVD playback. Ifthe selected language is included on theDVD, the selected audio will be heard in thatlanguage.Preferred languagePreferred Language is selectable betweenEnglish, French, Spanish, Chinese (Simpli-fied), Chinese (Traditional), Dutch, Portu-guese, Italian, Korean, Russian, Arabic, andDefault. The preferred language must beincluded on DVD in order for it to be dis-played. Refer to the DVD jacket for moreinformation.Language switchLanguage Switch provides the ability to se-lect between various audio streams (lan-guages) included on a DVD. Audio streamsmust be included on the DVD to be heard.

LHA4889


Subtitle settingsThe Subtitle settings allow you to set thedefault subtitle language for DVD playback.If the selected subtitle language is includedon the DVD, the selected subtitle audio willbe displayed during movie playback.Subtitle switchSubtitle Switch (Off/On) allows the subtitlesto be displayed during DVD playback.

Preferred LanguagePreferred Language is selectable betweenEnglish, French, Spanish, Chinese (Simpli-fied), Chinese (Traditional), Dutch, Portu-guese, Italian, Korean, Russian, Arabic, andDefault. The preferred language must beincluded on DVD in order for it to be dis-played. Refer to the DVD jacket for moreinformation.Language SwitchLanguage Switch provides the ability to se-lect between the various subtitles includedon a DVD. Subtitles must be included on theDVD to be seen during DVD playback.

MulticastMulticast (Off/On) provides the ability towatch a DVD over the built-in Wi-Fi networkusing an application installed on a mobiledevice. When turned on, the DVD contentwill be "cast" over the network to allow us-ers with multiple mobile devices to enjoythe same movie. *Requires application tobe installed on the mobile device.

BluetoothSelecting “BLUETOOTH” allows theBluetooth® feature to be turned off/on, au-dio source selection, and lip-sync adjust-ments. For additional information, see“Bluetooth® streaming” (P. 4-77) and “Lip-Sync adjustment” (P. 4-77).

LHA4890


CD OPERATIONCD PLAYBACK CONTROLSDuring audio playback the controls are dis-played at all times.1. Context Menu

Press on the remote to open the

context menu. The menu options willvary, depending on the source.

2. Progress BarShows elapsed time, total time, andprogress bar indicator.



5. PreviousSelect to go to the beginning of the track.Select again to go to the previous track.


7. StopSelect to stop CD playback.

8. Play/PauseSelect once to pause CD playback. Se-lect again to resume CD playback.


10. NextSelect to go to the next track.

11. RepeatSelect once to repeat the entire CD. Se-lect again to repeat the currently play-ing track.

12. EjectSelect to eject the disc.

LHA4891


HDMI/MHL CONNECTIONHDMI connectionDisplay content from an external sourceconnected to the system using the HDMIport located on the front of monitor A. Astandard HDMI cable is required (soldseparately).To access the HDMI source, using the direc-tional pad on the remote, select “SOURCE”from the Home Screen and navigate toHDMI in the menu. When HDMI is high-lighted, a preview of the HDMI input will bedisplayed in the preview screen.Press to return to the source menu.

NOTE:HDMI connected devices are indepen-dent and must be controlled directlyfrom the source device.

MHL connectionThe system also allows mobile devicessupporting Mobile High-Definition Link(MHL) to be connected. An MHL-to-HDMIcable is required (sold separately).Mobile High-Definition Link (MHL) is an in-dustry standard mobile audio/ video inter-face that allows connection of smart-phones, tablets, and other portableconsumer electronics devices to the sys-tem. MHL transports high-quality uncom-pressed audio and video from a mobilesource device to the system and at thesame time provides power to recharge thedevice.

NOTE:

MHL connected devices are independentand must be controlled directly from thesource device.

USB operationInsert a USB device into the USB port lo-cated on the front of monitor A. Using thedirectional pad on the remote, select“SOURCE” from the Home Screen and navi-gate to “USB” in the menu. When USB ishighlighted, music, video and photo iconswill appear in the preview menu to theright. The front panel USB port provides upto 2 amps of output to charge most mobiledevices. Please note this system does notsupport USB data transfer or audio/ videoplayback from mobile devices.

LHA4892 LHA4893


NOTE:When inserting a USB storage devicewith a large library of content, theremay be a delay before the content isaccessible.

Fast-Charge (USB)Fast-Charge allows you to charge certainUSB devices faster than normal. To enable,using the directional pad on the remote,select “FAST-CHARGE” when highlighted inthe main menu. The USB icon will display agreen lightning bolt when active.

NOTE:Enabling the Fast-Charge mode dis-ables the USB port from reading dataor content from USB devices. Whenselecting USB as the source, the Fast-Charge feature is automatically dis-abled.

USB/SD CARD OPERATIONSD card operationInsert a full-size SD card into the SD cardslot located on the left side monitor A. Us-ing the directional pad on the remote, se-lect “SOURCE” from the Home Screen andnavigate to “SD CARD” in the menu. WhenSD Card is highlighted, music, video andphoto icons will appear in the previewmenu to the right.

LHA4894 LHA4899


Basic navigationUSB and SD card are characterized bythree different categories which are videos,music, and photos. Each media type willshow a preview of the available content.After selecting a media type, navigate thecontent, and select the desired file orphoto. When a media item is highlighted,the preview image is enlarged and sur-rounded by a white border. If available, theitem’s metadata (video title, filename, orphoto name) will be displayed in the infor-mation bar at the bottom of the screen.

Context menuPress on the remote while navigatingcontent to open the context menu. Thecontext menu provides options to adjustthe page view, sorting, and searching. Theoptions will vary, depending on the content.Press to select or toggle the high-lighted item on the menu. Press to exitthe context menu.

Page view — music and videosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “PAGE VIEW” to change between Listor Grid. List provides an alphanumeric textlisting of all content, whereas Grid providesan alphanumeric thumbnail graphic viewof the content.

Page view — photosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “PAGE VIEW” to change between Grid,Overview, Slideshow, or Full Screen. Gridprovides a large thumbnail graphic view,whereas Overview provides a smallthumbnail graphic view of the content.Slideshow will play photos in sequence andFull Screen fills the entire screen.

LHA4896


SearchSearch provides an easy way to find andplay content by name. Using the directionalpad on the remote, select “SEARCH” to dis-play the on-screen keyboard. Use the di-rectional pad to navigate the keyboard andenter the first few characters of the file-name. Once the desired file is displayed,press to hide the keyboard. Pressto begin playback.

Sorting — videosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “SORTING” to select between Title,Rating, Year, Filename, or Genre.

Sorting — musicUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “SORTING” to select between Artist,Album, Year, Filename, Song, or Genre.

Sorting — photosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “SORTING” to select between Date orFilename.LHA4897


USB/SD card video playbackcontrolsDuring video playback, press to dis-play the playback controls. Press or

to navigate the controls. Press toselect the highlighted function or option.

The playback controls will disappear afterapproximately 5 seconds of no activity.1. Context Menu

Press on the remote to open thecontext menu. The menu options willvary, depending on the source.

2. Progress BarShows elapsed time, total time andvideo progress bar indicator.



5. PreviousSelect to go to the beginning of thechapter. Select again to go to the previ-ous chapter.


7. StopSelect to stop DVD playback and returnto the menu.

8. Play/PauseSelect once to pause DVD playback. Se-lect again to resume DVD playback.


LHA4898


10. NextSelect to go to the next chapter.

11. RepeatSelect once to repeat the entire DVD.Select again to repeat the currentlyplaying chapter one time.

Playing videosUsing the directional pad on the remote,select “VIDEOS” to navigate the content.When a media item is highlighted in Gridmode, the preview image is enlarged andsurrounded by a white border. The videotitle will be displayed in the information barat the bottom of the screen. Press tobegin playback. When choosing a videothat has previously been started, a "Re-sume" option is available.

Context menuPress on the remote to open the con-text menu during playback. The contextmenu provides options to adjust the dis-play settings, aspect settings, andBluetooth® settings. Press to select ortoggle the highlighted item on the menu.Press to exit the context menu.

Display settingsBrightness is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Contrast is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Sharpness is adjustable between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default.Aspect is adjustable between Preserve,Crop, and Stretch.

Bluetooth® settingsSelecting “BLUETOOTH” allows theBluetooth® feature to be turned off/on, au-dio source selection, and lip-sync adjust-ments. For additional information, see “Lip-Sync adjustment” (P. 4-77).

LHA4899


Playing musicNavigating through a music library is iden-tical to navigating through the video library.The default sorting option for music is Art-ist. Selecting an artist will then sort by Al-bum and will display all available albums bythat artist. There is also an option to PlayALL albums from the selected artist.Select an album to display all songs in thealbum. Press or to navigate thesongs. Press to begin playback.During playback, press to select theNow Playing screen. The Now Playingscreen includes the following controls: Pre-

vious Song, Next Song, Rewind, Fast-Forward, Play/Pause, Shuffle, Repeat, Vol-ume Control, and Night mode.Press to return to the Playlist screen.The audio will continue to play while navi-gating the playlist screen. The system willreturn to the Now Playing screen after ap-proximately 15 seconds of no activity.

Navigating photosTo view photos, using the directional padon the remote navigate to “SOURCE” then“USB” or “SD CARD” then “PHOTOS” from thehome screen. Storage device must be con-nected to display to read media. Use thedirectional pad to highlight the photo thenpress to view.Highlight the vertical arrows on menu toaccess the page selector feature to quicklyscan photos.Press to highlight additional optionsincluding Sorting, Page View, Set As Back-ground, and Search.

LHA4920 LHA4901 LHA4902


Sorting lets you arrange the photos by file-name or date.Page View allows the user to view photos inFullscreen, Grid, Overview, or Slideshow.Set As Background sets the selected photoas the home screen background.Search prompts the user to input a file-name or date to find a photo.

SLINGPLAYER®About Slingplayer®A Slingbox® (sold separately) connects toyour home network and sits between yourcable or set-top box and your TV. Whenaccessed remotely, your Slingbox® slingsyour content to the RSI system. To useSlingplayer®, an external internet connec-tion is required. For additional information,see “Using Wi-Fi” (P. 4-73) to enable ClientMode in the Wi-Fi Settings and allow thesystem to connect to a Wi-Fi hotspot.

Using Slingplayer®Using the directional pad on the remote,select “SOURCE” from the Home Screenand navigate to “SLINGPLAYER” in themenu. The first use of Slingplayer® willprompt you for login credentials. Use theremote control to navigate the on-screenkeyboard and enter the e-mail addressand password associated with your Sling-player® account.

LHA4903


Slingplayer® optionsOnce logged in, the main Slingplayer®menu page is displayed with 3 options:1. Select “DIRECTORY” to watch live televi-

sion from a Slingbox®.

2. Select “SETTINGS” to change the set-tings of the Slingplayer® application.

3. Select “HELP” to display information onhow to properly use the Slingplayer®application.

Connect to a live video streamPress to access the navigationalmenu that will display two sets of MenuControl Bars. The upper Menu Control Bardisplays types of controls. Press toselect the desired type of control. Press

to hide the menus and return to thelive stream.Slingplayer® control options include:• Main• DVR• Directional Pad

• Number• Miscellaneous

LHA4904 LHA4905


Accessing the program guidePress to display the upper and lowerMenu Control Bar for Slingplayer®. By de-fault, the "Main" icon on the upper MenuControl Bar is highlighted, showing the"Main" menu options in the lower MenuControl Bar. Press or to navigateto the lower options and select "GUIDE".This will launch the Program Guide. Oncethe guide has loaded, use the directionalpad and press to select the desiredchannel or program. Press multipletimes or to exit.

Exiting Slingplayer®There are two ways to exit the Slingplayer®application. Press or while on themain screen to return to the main menu.When exiting the application, you will beprompted to confirm: "Are you sure youwant to exit Slingplayer? There will be nodata usage once exited". Select “Yes” to re-turn to the Home Screen or select “No” toreturn to the stream.

Connection qualityThe quality of a mobile network connec-tion, whether it’s Wi-Fi or a mobile hotspotcan vary, due to network conditions. Con-nection speed and bandwidth can fluctu-ate, creating conditions that aren’t optimalfor smooth streaming.

Slingbox® compatibilityThe following legacy Slingbox® devices arenot supported: Slingbox PRO, Slingbox AV,Slingbox TUNER, Slingbox Classic.Visit www.slingbox.com for more informa-tion on Slingbox or where to purchase.LHA4907 LHA4906


MIRACAST®About Miracast®Miracast® is a dedicated wireless connec-tion technology that allows contentstreaming between a mobile device andthe RSI system. The connection is madewithout cables or a network connection. Itprovides the ability to “cast” (display) con-tent, such as images or videos from themobile device to the RSI system. There is noneed for an external internet connectionand the ability to connect is insideMiracast-certified devices.

Using Miracast®Using the directional pad on the remoteselect “SOURCE” from the Home Screenand navigate to “MIRACAST” in the menu."Ready to Connect" will be displayed. En-able Screen Mirroring on the mobile deviceand look for "RSI-Miracast" in the list of pos-sible devices to connect to. Note that Mira-cast® may be labeled differently, depend-ing on the mobile device and its operatingsystem. If Miracast® is not available, look forSmart View or Screen Mirroring in the set-tings menu of your mobile device. Remem-ber to end your Miracast® connectionwhen finished to avoid draining the batteryof your mobile device.This screen must be active to be able toconnect your mobile device to the monitor.Visit www.wi-fi.org for a current list of Mira-cast® certified devices.

USING THE MOBILE APPLICATIONON YOUR MOBILE DEVICEDownload the free ”VOXX-RSI” mobile appli-cation on your mobile device from AppleiTunes or Google Play store. A full version ofthe RSI Owner’s Manual is also includedwithin the mobile application.

WARNING

THIS MOBILE APP IS NOT FOR DRIVERUSETo reduce risk of a crash which can re-sult in death or serious injury, alwaysdrive carefully and in accordance withtraffic laws. The driver should not usethe mobile app while the vehicle is inmotion. Mobile app use may only beexercised by the driver after you havestopped your vehicle in an appropriatelocation permitted by law. The mobileapp is specifically designed to be usedby passengers other than the driver,provided it does not interfere with driv-ing, and does not distract the driver'sattention to the road.

LHA4908


SMARTSTREAMAbout SmartStreamSmartStream is a wireless connectiontechnology that allows content streamingbetween a mobile device and the RSI sys-tem and between mobile devices. Contentis streamed over the built-in Wi-Fi networkusing an application installed on a mobiledevice. There is no need for an externalinternet connection.

Using SmartStreamBefore using the SmartStream feature, acompatible UPnP application is required tobe downloaded and installed on your mo-bile device. To stream content from a mo-bile device, you must first connect it to theRSI network.

Connecting a mobile device tothe RSI network:1. Using the directional pad on the remote,

select “SOURCE” from the Home Screenand then select “SMARTSTREAM” in themenu. A device connection screen will bedisplayed on the monitor.

2. Navigate to the “Wi-Fi” settings menu ofthe mobile device and establish a con-nection to the network named “RSI-WiFi”.

3. When prompted, enter the networkpassword to join the RSI-WiFi network.Select the Show Password check box inthe Wi-Fi Settings menu to display thecurrent password. For additional infor-mation, see “Using Wi-Fi” (P. 4-73).

NOTE:Access Point must be selected to usethe SmartStream feature. For additionalinformation, see “Using Wi-Fi” (P. 4-73).

Streaming content from a mobiledevice:1. Once connected, launch the application,

and select SmartStream on the mobiledevice.

2. Choose the desired monitor to streamto by selecting Monitor A or Monitor B.Note: To stream content from a mobiledevice the monitor must be set toSmartStream in the source menu.

LHA4909 LHA4910


3. Select the desired source content fromthe list of available devices. Content canbe browsed from all devices that areconnected to the RSI Wi-Fi network andhave a compatible UPnP applicationinstalled.

4. After selecting a content source, navi-gate through the folders, and select thedesired file to stream to the monitor.Once the file is selected, it will beginstreaming to the monitor that was se-lected in step 2 above.

5. Playback controls are available from theNow Playing screen in the UPnP applica-tion and from the monitor. Press todisplay the playback controls on themonitor.

NOTE:• Content protected with DRM (Digital

Rights Management) cannot bestreamed using the SmartStreamfeature.

• A wired connection (HDMI or MHL) isrequired to stream protected contentfrom a mobile device to the RSI system.For additional information, see “HDMI/MHL connection” (P. 4-60).

SETTINGSThe following settings can be accessedfrom the main menu:Wi-FiChange the SSID (network name), changethe password of the network, and togglebetween Client Mode or Access Point.Read BackA text-to-speech aid that enables the sys-tem to read text items displayed on thescreen. This feature guides the userthrough operating the RSI system.

DisplayAdjust Brightness, Contrast, and Sharp-ness settings.AudioSelect the monitor to use for Bluetooth®audio streaming and set the maximumvolume level when using wiredheadphones.AdvancedChange the language of the GUI (GraphicUser Interface), reset the RSI system, andupdate the software.CustomizeChange the background image of thehome screen using content from an SDcard or USB storage device.ParentalSet or change the password to limit DVDcontent playback using parental controlbased on the Motion Picture Association ofAmerica (MPAA) ratings.BluetoothControl Bluetooth® audio streaming (On/Off) and select from the available list ofpaired devices.

LHA4911


Using Wi-FiAccess PointAccess Point is used when connectingother mobile devices to the RSI’s built-ininternal network. This mode allows the RSIsystem to connect to devices "inside" thevehicle, using an optional UPnP applicationinstalled on a mobile device.To change the SSID, navigate the keyboardand enter the desired network name. Se-lect Enter when complete. The default SSIDname is RSI-WiFi.

To change the network password, navigatethe keyboard and enter the desired nu-meric password. Select Enter when com-plete. Select the Show Password check boxto display the current password. SelectSave to save the SSID and password.Client ModeClient Mode is used when connecting theRSI system to an external network or to theinternet using a mobile hotspot. This modeallows the RSI system to connect "outside"the vehicle.Enable Client mode by highlighting the Sta-tus switch. The switch will turn green whenon. The RSI system will begin searching foravailable wireless networks and displaythem below. Navigate to the desired net-work and press to select it. Enter thepassword (if necessary) to complete theconnection. The system will automaticallyconnect to the last connected network un-til Client Mode is disabled.

NOTE:Client mode will use data from theexternal Wi-Fi connection. Use withcare as additional data is consumedwhen using mobile device data plans.

Using Read Back*Enable the Read Back feature by highlight-ing the Status switch. The switch will turngreen when on. Highlight the Save buttonand press to enable Read Back. Whenenabled, the RSI system will read the text ofmenu items displayed on the screen, pro-viding audible guidance on how to use thesystem. A blue bar will also appear at thetop of each screen indicating the ReadBack feature is enabled.

LHA4912 LHA4913


Speech VolumeSpeech Volume can be adjusted to matchthe media volume (spoken text volume isthe same volume level as the content be-ing played). To reduce the Speech Volumeto be lower than the volume level contentbeing played, set it to 75%, 50%, or 25% ofthe media volume.Speech RateSpeech Rate can be adjusted betweenNormal, Fast, or Slow. This setting controlshow fast the spoken text is pronounced.*Complies with FCC/Accessibility rule 21stCentury Communications and Video Ac-cessibility Act (CVAA).

Display settingsBrightnessBrightness is a measurement of theamount of light the monitor produces. Fordisplaying movies, a brighter luminancerating is desirable. Select between Low, Me-dium, High, and Default (High).ContrastContrast is a ratio of difference of the moni-tor’s ability to produce bright whites anddark blacks. Select between Low, Medium,High, and Default (High).

SharpnessSharpness is edge contrast that is visiblealong edges of content. Decreasing thesharpness will create a softer image. In-creasing the sharpness will affect the con-trast only along/near edges of the imagewhile leaving smooth areas of the imagealone. Select between Low, Medium, High,and Default (Low).

LHA4914


Audio settingsHeadphonesFor hearing protection, there is a maximumvolume setting to limit the audio output ofthe front panel 3.5mm headphone output.Select the desired maximum volume from0 ~ 100 and select Save to store the value.Bluetooth SourceWhen Bluetooth® is enabled and a connec-tion is established to the vehicle’s stereosystem, choose the monitor to be used asthe source to stream audio from. SelectMonitor A to stream audio from the Driverside monitor or select Monitor B to stream

audio from the Passenger side monitor. Se-lect OK to confirm and store the desiredmonitor.

NOTE:• When monitor A is selected as the

source to stream from, the audio out-put to the wireless and wired head-phones will be disabled (only on moni-tor A).

• To use the wireless or wired head-phones with monitor A, you must turnoff the Bluetooth® streaming feature.For additional information, see“Bluetooth® streaming” (P. 4-77).

Advanced settingsLanguageThe system language used for the GUI(Graphic User Interface) can be changed toany of the following languages English,Spanish, French, Arabic, Simplified Chinese,Traditional Chinese, and Hebrew. Tochange the language, highlight and selectthe current language and a drop-down listwill appear containing the available lan-guages. Choose the desired language andselect Save to display the confirmation dia-log box. Select Yes to confirm and rebootthe RSI system.

LHA4915 LHA4916 LHA4917


ResetA master reset will return the RSI systemsettings to the factory defaults. Any useroptions and customization will be lost andreset back to factory default settings. Toreset the system, select Yes when the dia-log confirmation box appears.UpdateDisplays the current software version infor-mation. Select Update to begin a softwareupdate (reserved for future use).

Customize settingsBackgroundCustomize the RSI system by changing thebackground image of the main menuscreen on each monitor. Select a source toload the image from. Options include USB,SD card, or Local (internal memory).Select a source then navigate the contentand select the new background image.Choose the desired image and display theconfirmation dialog box. Select Yes to con-firm. Press to view the new back-ground image.

NOTE:• Each monitor can have its own back-

ground image.• The Local source stores the 10 most re-

cent background images.• To restore the default background im-

age, perform a factory reset. For addi-tional information, see “Advanced set-tings” (P. 4-75).

LHA4918


Bluetooth® streamingTo access “BLUETOOTH” from the homescreen use the directional pad on the re-mote and navigate to “SETTINGS” then“BLUETOOTH”. Status button indicates if theBluetooth® is enabled when green or dis-abled when red. Highlight and pressto enable or disable Bluetooth®.Once enabled, the RSI will automaticallysearch for available devices in pairingmode. Using the directional pad on the re-mote, select "Device name" then “Connect”to pair. Input the PIN from connecting de-vice (if prompted). Device name will display

"Connected" once paired properly. Select“OK” to confirm changes and close the win-dow. To unpair a Bluetooth® device, selectDevice name then Unpair.If the device is not listed, select RefreshSymbol and the device will appear in Avail-able device list. If device does not appear,double check that the device is in pairingmode (refer to the device’s manual forinstructions).Bluetooth® equipped vehicles can streamaudio from the display through vehicle’ssound system once paired. For additionalinformation, refer to the separateNissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Lip-Sync adjustmentLip-Sync adjustments can be accessed bypressing on the remote, then select-ing “BLUETOOTH”. Highlight the numericalvalue and press . Use the directionalpad to synchronize video and audio play-back due to small delay inherent in someBluetooth® devices. Press to set value.Highlight save and press to exit.To select which Monitor will streamBluetooth®, using the directional pad onthe remote select “SETTINGS: then “AUDIO”then “BLUETOOTH” from the home screen.Highlight “MONITOR A” or “MONITOR B” and

LHA4919 LHA4920


press . Selecting Monitor A or B tostream Bluetooth® can also be achieved bypressing while video is playing.Press then “BLUETOOTH”, then “SE-LECT”. Highlight “MONITOR A”, “OFF”, or“MONITOR B”. Highlight “SAVE” and press

to set configuration and close thewindow.

About parental lockSome DVDs may have a parental ratinglevel assigned to the entire disc or to cer-tain scenes/chapters on the disc. ParentalLock allows the playback limitation level tobe set. This prohibits the playing discs thatare not suitable for children or have alter-native scenes. The rating levels range from1 to 8. They are country dependent, but ingeneral they are defined as follows:

1 KID SAFE:Kids material; recommended children andviewers of all ages.2 G:General Audience; recommended for allages.3 PG:Parental Guidance suggested.4 PG-13:Unsuitable for children under age 13.5/6 PGR/R:Parental Guidance/Restricted content notsuitable for children under the age of 17.7 NC-17:No children under age 17.8 Adult:Mature content; should be viewed only byan adult due to graphic sexual material,violence, or language.Once a rating level is set, DVDs that arerated above that level will not play unless a4-digit password is entered and higher-level rating is chosen.

LHA4921


Changing parental lockTo set the parental lock using the direc-tional pad on the remote, select “SETTINGS”then ‘PARENTAL” from the home screen.Choose password with directional pad andpress to enter, press again toconfirm your password. Once the pass-word is selected, the parental rating menuwill appear to select highest playable DVDrating from 1 – 8.

For example, to set the ratings limit for PGand below, select “RATINGS” then “3” usingthe directional pad and press , basedon the rating levels. For additional informa-tion, see “About parental lock” (P. 4-78).To change password, select “SETTINGS”then “PARENTAL” from the home screen.Enter the current password, select “PASS-WORD” then “MODIFY” to set new password,press once to enter, and select againto confirm. To exit “PARENTAL” menu press

.To remove the parental lock password, se-lect “SETTINGS” then “PARENTAL” from thehome screen. Enter the current password.Select “PASSWORD” then “REMOVE”, press

to enter, and select again to confirm.To exit Parental menu press .

LHA4922


TROUBLESHOOTINGSymptom Remedy

Monitor does not power onVerify the vehicle is in the ON or ACC position.Verify the battery is installed correctly in the remote control.Verify the in-line fuse protection is good. Refer to the RSI system installation instructions for vehicle-specific fuse location.

Monitor front panel controlsflash red For further diagnosis, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

System frozen - will not re-spond

Soft reset the system by pressing and holding the power button on the top of the driver side monitor for 5 seconds.Hard reset the system by turning the ignition off, then back on.

Disc will not play

Insert the disc with label side facing the rear of the vehicle.Check if the disc is defective by trying another disc.Check the type of disc being played. This unit only plays DVD (Single, Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R, DVD+R Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD,CD-R, and CD-RW.The unit and the disc are coded by region. If the region codes don’t match, the DVD can’t be played.

Disc plays, but stops inter-mittently

The disc may be dirty and need cleaning.Condensation may have formed inside the unit. Remove the disc and allow unit to dry out.The disc may be scratched too badly to play.

No pictureCheck that the signal source is connected.Check the menu source setting. Match your monitor mode with the source correctly.

Distorted picture Check the disc for fingerprints and clean with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.

Cannot advance through aDVD movie

You cannot advance through the opening credits and warning information that appears at the beginning of DVDs because thedisc is programmed to prohibit these actions.Some discs may not allow this function. Try another disc.

No sound or distorted sound

Make sure that the external media device is connected properly, and all cables are securely inserted into the appropriate jacks.Verify that the batteries in the headphones are fresh.If you are using the wireless headphones, make sure you turn on the power and select the correct monitor (A or B).Verify the volume is turned up on headphones and the system.Verify nothing is blocking the path between the monitor IR sensor and headphones.When placing the headphones on your head, make sure to observe the Left and Right orientation. The headphones must be ori-ented correctly (facing forward) to receive the audio signal.


Symptom RemedyMonitor feels warm When the monitor is in use for a long period of time, the surface will be warm. This is normal.Player does not respond toall commands during play-back

The DVD may not permit some commands. Refer to the specific instructions included with the DVD for more information.

A Parental Setting messageis displayed, prohibitingmovie playback

Enter the 4-digit Parental Password using the remote and then press . For additional information, see “Changing parentallock” (P. 4-79).

Cannot connect mobile de-vice to the internal RSI Wi-Finetwork

Check to make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on the mobile device.Check to make sure RSI is set to Access Point mode.Check to make sure the correct password is used. For additional information, see “Using Wi-Fi” (P. 4-73).

Cannot connect RSI systemto an external Wi-Fi network

Check to make sure RSI is set to Client Mode. Check to make sure the correct password is used. For additional information, see“Using Wi-Fi” (P. 4-73).

Cannot establish aBluetooth® connection Check to make sure Bluetooth® is enabled on the RSI system. For additional information, see “Bluetooth® streaming” (P. 4-77).

Cannot establish a Miracast®connection to the RSI system

Check to make sure mobile device supports Miracast®. Visit www.wi-fi.org for a current list of Miracast® certified devices.Check to make sure Miracast® is enabled on the mobile device.Select Miracast® source from the RSI main menu.

Cannot play certain files fromUSB or SD cards

Audio/video files embedded with DRM are not compatible.Some USB storage devices and SD cards may not be compatible. Replace the external storage device (USB, SD).Due to ongoing technological advancements, some USB flash drives and SD cards may be incompatible with this system.

Cannot connect to externalSingbox®

Check to make sure RSI is set to Client Mode. For additional information, see “Using Wi-Fi” (P. 4-73).Check network upload speed from your home (or wherever the Singbox® is located).Confirm hotspot or Wi-Fi download speed/connection quality.Check that your Singbox® is properly set up.

Cannot share content from amobile device to the RSI sys-tem

A compatible UPnP app is required to be installed on the mobile device.

Audio/video files embedded with DRM cannot be streamed to the RSI system.Cannot share content be-tween mobile devices usingthe internal Wi-Fi network

Check to make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on the mobile device.

Check to make sure RSI is set to Access Point mode. For additional information, see “Using Wi-Fi” (P. 4-73).


SPECIFICATIONSLCD Backlight Type LED

Display Type 8.0 inch (Diagonal) a-Si TFT Active Matrix, 1024x3(RGB) x 600 resolutionSupported Disc Types DVD (Single, Dual Layer), DVD-R/+R, DVD+R Dual layer, DVD-RW/+RW, CD, CD-R, CD-RWFrequency Response 3.5mm Audio Output: 200Hz ~ 16kHz +/- 6dB

HDMI Support Version 1.4b, HDCP 2.1 CompliantMHL Support Version 2.0, 900mA Maximum Charging Output

Wireless Audio 2-Channel Stereo Headphone Operation, (Typical Infrared Reception/Range: 0.9m; 80°, 1.8m; 50°)

Wi-Fi Network 802.11b/g/n, TX/RX Frequency: 2412 MHz - 2484 MHz, Antenna 1: 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n HT20, 802.11n HT40, MIMO Antenna 1+2:802.11n HT20

Wi-Fi Modulation 802.11b: DSSS (DBPSK / DQPSK / CCK), 802.11g/n: OFDM (BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM)Bluetooth® Support Version 4.1

Bluetooth® BR/EDR TX/RX Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz, Channels: 79, Bluetooth BR (1Mbps): GFSK Modulation, Bluetooth EDR (2Mbps): π/4-DQPSKModulation, Bluetooth EDR (3Mbps): 8-DPSK Modulation

Bluetooth® LE TX/RX Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz, Channels: 40, Carrier Frequency of Each Channel:, (37 hopping + 3 Advertising channel),Type of Modulation: Bluetooth LE: GFSK

USB Support Version 1.1, Version 2.0 High Speed, 10 watt (2 Amp) Maximum Charging OutputSD Card Support SD, SDHC, SDXC


COMPLIANCE INFORMATIONFCC NoticeThis device complies with Part 15 of FCCRules and Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference, including in-terference that may cause undesired op-eration of this device.This transmitter must not be co-located oroperated in conjunction with any other an-tenna or transmitter. The Bluetooth® an-tenna cannot be removed (or replaced) byuser.Alteration or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization may in-validate the user’s right to operate theequipment.This equipment has been tested and foundto comply with the limits for a Class B digi-tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCCRules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful in-terference in a residential installation. Thisequipment generates, uses and can radi-ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-stalled and used in accordance with theinstructions, may cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio communications. However,there is no guarantee that interference willnot occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception, whichcan be determined by turning the equip-ment off and on, the user is encouraged totry to correct the interference by one ormore of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.• Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet on

a circuit different from that to which thereceiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/ TV technician for help.

Bluetooth®The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned by theBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby Voxx Automotive Corporation is under li-cense. Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

DVD Video PlaybackThis item incorporates copy protectiontechnology that is protected by U.S. pat-ents and other intellectual property rightsof Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineeringand disassembly are prohibited.

LHA4926


AACAAC is short for Advanced Audio Codingand refers to an audio compression tech-nology standard used with MPEG-2 andMPEG-4. Several applications can be usedto encode AAC files, but file formats andextensions differ depending on the appli-cation which is used to encode.

FLACCopyright © 2000-2009 Josh CoalsonCopyright © 2011-2013 Xiph.Org FoundationRedistribution and use in source and bi-nary forms, with or without modification,are permitted provided that the followingconditions are met:Redistributions of source code must retainthe above copyright notice, this list of con-ditions and the following disclaimer.Redistributions in binary form must repro-duce the above copyright notice, this list ofconditions and the following disclaimer inthe documentation and/or other materi-als provided with the distribution.Neither the name of the Xiph.org Founda-tion nor the names of its contributors maybe used to endorse or promote productsderived from this software without specificprior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPY-RIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “ASIS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRAN-TIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BELIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN-TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUEN-TIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-ITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTEGOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORYOF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING INANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITYOF SUCH DAMAGE.

MP3Supply of this product only conveys a li-cense for private, non-commercial use anddoes not convey a license nor imply anyright to use this product in any commercial(i.e. revenue generating) real time broad-casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/orany other media), broadcasting/streamingvia internet, intranets and/or other net-

works or in other electronic content distri-bution systems, such as pay-audio oraudio-on-demand applications. An inde-pendent license for such use is required.For details, please visithttp://www.mp3licensing.com.

WMA/WMVWindows Media is either a registered trade-mark or trademark of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and/orother countries. This product includestechnology owned by MicrosoftCorporation and cannot be used or distrib-uted without a license from Microsoft Li-censing, Inc.

SD/SDHC/SDXCSD, SDHC and SDXC Logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of SD-3C LLC inthe United States, other countries or both.


HDMIThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-DefinitionMultimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logoare trademarks or registered trademarksof HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United Statesand other countries.

MHLMHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are trademarks or regis-tered trademarks of MHL, LLC in the UnitedStates and other countries.

Dolby DigitalThis product will down-mix Dolby Digitalsignals internally and the sound will be out-put in stereo. Manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

European Waste Electrical andElectronic Equipment (WEEE)NoticeIn accordance with Directive 2012/19/EU ofthe European Parliament on waste electri-cal and electronic equipment (WEEE):

The symbol above indicates that separatecollection of electrical and electronicequipment is required. When this producthas reached the end of its serviceable life, itcannot be disposed of as unsorted munici-pal waste. It must be collected and treatedseparately. It has been determined by theEuropean Parliament that there are poten-tial negative effects on the environmentand human health as a result of the pres-ence of hazardous substances in electricaland electronic equipment. It is the users‘responsibility to utilize the available collec-tion system to ensure WEEE is properlytreated.

LHA4923 LHA4924 LHA4925


All other trademarks and their respectivelogos cited herein are the property of theirrespective owners.

When installing a CB, ham radio or carphone in your vehicle, be sure to observethe following precautions; otherwise, thenew equipment may adversely affect theengine control system and other electronicparts.

WARNING

• A cellular phone should not be usedfor any purpose while driving so fullattention may be given to vehicle op-eration. Some jurisdictions prohibitthe use of cellular phones whiledriving.

• If you must make a call while yourvehicle is in motion, the hands freecellular phone operational mode (ifso equipped) is highly recom-mended. Exercise extreme caution atall times so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation.

• If you are unable to devote full atten-tion to vehicle operation while talk-ing on the phone, pull off the road toa safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

• Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

• Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electroniccontrol system harnesses. Do notroute the antenna wire next to anyharness.

• Adjust the antenna standing-waveratio as recommended by themanufacturer.

• Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

• For additional information, it is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and“Made for iPad” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed to connectspecifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respec-tively, and has been certified by the devel-oper to meet Apple performance stan-dards. Apple is not responsible for theoperation of this device or its compliancewith safety and regulatory standards.Please note that the use of this accessorywith iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wire-less performance.iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod Nano, iPodshuffle and iPod touch are trademarks ofApple Inc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries. Lightning is a trademark ofApple Inc.

iPod®/IPHONE®


MEMO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Three-way catalyst (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-14Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15NISSAN Intelligent Key® batterydischarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-18Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Automatic transmission (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) . . . 5-24System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Turning the Traffic Sign Recognition(TSR) system on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26System temporarily disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-29LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30System temporarily disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-34BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36System temporarily disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43How to enable/disable the RCTAsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

System temporarily disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Intelligent Cruise Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-52How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . 5-54Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70Conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) withPedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82Turning the AEB with PedestrianDetection system ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemlimitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-85System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-89System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-89

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . . 5-91I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102Intelligent Driver Alertness systemoperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103How to enable/disable the IntelligentDriver Alertness (I-DA) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107Using 4–Wheel Drive (4WD) (if so equipped) . . . . 5-107

Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . 5-108Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114Eco Drive Report (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . 5-119Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-120

Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . 5-123Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . 5-124

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125How to enable/disable the sonarsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-130

WARNING



EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

• Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless car-bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide isdangerous. It can cause uncon-sciousness or death.

• If you suspect that exhaust fumesare entering the vehicle, drive with allwindows fully open, and have the ve-hicle inspected immediately.

• Do not run the engine in closedspaces such as a garage.

• Do not park the vehicle with the en-gine running for any extended lengthof time.

• Keep the rear vent windows, lift-gates, doors and trunk lids (if soequipped) closed while driving, oth-erwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with one ofthese open, follow these precau-tions:1. Open all the windows.2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dialto high to circulate the air.

• If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailerthrough the seal on the liftgate or thebody, follow the manufacturer's rec-ommendation to prevent carbonmonoxide entry into the vehicle.

• The exhaust system and body shouldbe inspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:a. The vehicle is raised for service.b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involv-ing damage to the exhaust sys-tem, underbody, or rear of thevehicle.

NOTE:

If the vehicle engine experiences exces-sive fuel consumption or produces ex-cessive smoke it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

THREE-WAY CATALYST (if soequipped)The three-way catalyst is an emission con-trol device installed in the exhaust system.Exhaust gases in the three-way catalystare burned at high temperatures to helpreduce pollutants.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ANDDRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING

• The exhaust gas and the exhaustsystem are very hot. Keep people,animals or flammable materialsaway from the exhaust systemcomponents.

• Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

• Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriouslyreduce the three-way catalyst's abil-ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

• Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keepdriving if the engine misfires, or if no-ticeable loss of performance or otherunusual operating conditions are de-tected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

• Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damag-ing the three-way catalyst.

• Do not race the engine while warm-ing it up.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle tostart the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel. (If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon as pos-sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-tute for proper tire maintenance, and it isthe driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-rect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to trigger illumi-nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illu-minated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long asthe malfunction exists. When the malfunc-tion indicator is illuminated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, includ-ing the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

Starting and driving 5-5

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-erly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.Additional information:• When using a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS does notmonitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.

• The TPMS will activate only when the ve-hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example,a flat tire while driving).

• The low tire pressure warning light doesnot automatically turn off when the tirepressure is adjusted. After your tires areinflated to the recommended pressure,the vehicle must be driven at speedsabove 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate theTPMS and turn off the low tire pressurewarning light. Use a tire pressure gaugeto check the tire pressure.

• The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warningappears in the vehicle information dis-play when the low tire pressure warninglight is illuminated and low tire pressure isdetected. The “Tire Pressure Low – AddAir” warning turns off when the low tirepressure warning light turns off.

• The “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warningdoes not appear if the low tire pressurewarning light illuminates to indicate aTPMS malfunction.

• Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s opera-tion and the outside temperature. Do notreduce the tire pressure after driving be-cause the tire pressure rises after driving.Low outside temperature can lower thetemperature of the air inside the tirewhich can cause a lower tire inflationpressure. This may cause the low tirepressure warning light to illuminate. If thewarning light illuminates, check the tirepressure for all four tires.

• The Tire and Loading Information label islocated in the driver's door opening.

For additional information, see “Low tirepressure warning light” (P. 2-18) and “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 6-3).

WARNING


• If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid sud-den steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pulloff the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires andincrease the likelihood of tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident andcould result in serious personal in-jury. Check the tire pressure for allfour tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light off. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible. (For additionalinformation, see “Flat tire” (P. 6-3) forchanging a flat tire.)


• When using a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, when aspare tire is mounted or a wheel isreplaced, tire pressure will not be in-dicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warninglight will flash for approximately 1minute. The light will remain on after1 minute. Have your tires replacedand/or TPMS system reset as soon aspossible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.


• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pres-sure sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or anymetal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-dows. This may cause poor reception ofthe signals from the tire pressure sen-sors, and the TPMS will not functionproperly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-porarily interfere with the operation of theTPMS and cause the low tire pressurewarning light to illuminate.Some examples are:• Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.• If a transmitter set to similar frequencies

is being used in or near the vehicle.• If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or nearthe vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light mayilluminate in the following cases:• If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and

tire without TPMS.• If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.• If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operate theequipment.For Canada:This device contains license-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s) that complywith Innovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment Canada’s licence-exemptRSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause interference. (2) This de-vice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.


TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire AlertWARNING

After rotating the tires, do not use theEasy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tirepressure. Instead use a gauge to adjustthe tires to the correct pressure in ac-cordance with Tire and Loading Infor-mation label.

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert providesvisual and audible signals outside the ve-hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-ommended COLD tire pressure.Vehicle set-up1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place theshift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion. Do not start the engine.

Operation1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure isreached, the horn beeps once and thehazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.• If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the hornbeeps and the hazard indicators flashthree times. To correct the pressure,push the core of the valve stem on thetire briefly to release pressure. Whenthe pressure reaches the designatedpressure, the horn beeps once.

• If the hazard indicator does not flashwithin approximately 15 seconds afterstarting to inflate the tire, it indicatesthat the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is notoperating.

• The TPMS will not activate the Easy-FillTire Alert under the followingconditions:– If there is interference from an exter-

nal device or transmitter.– The air pressure from the inflation

device is not sufficient to inflate thetire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS.– There is a malfunction in the horn or

hazard indicators.

– The identification code of the tirepressure sensor is not registered tothe system.

– The battery of the tire pressure sen-sor is low.

• If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not oper-ate due to TPMS interference, movethe vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backwardor forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use atire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other types ofvehicles.They have higher ground clearance thanpassenger cars to make them capable ofperforming in a variety of on-pavementand off-road applications. This gives thema higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-hicles. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allow-ing you to anticipate problems. However,they are not designed for cornering at thesame speeds as conventional 2-WheelDrive vehicles any more than low-slungsports cars are designed to perform satis-factorily under off-road conditions. If at all


possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.As with other vehicles of this type, failure tooperate this vehicle correctly may result inloss of control or vehicle rollover.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.For additional information, see “Drivingsafety precautions” (P. 5-11).

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in lossof control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessivespeed, high speed cornering, or suddensteering maneuvers, because these drivingpractices could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle.As with any vehicle, loss of control couldresult in a collision with other vehicles orobjects or cause the vehicle to roll over,particularly if the loss of control causesthe vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid drivingwhen tired. Never drive when under the in-fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs whichmay cause drowsiness). Always wear yourseat belt as outlined in “Safety – Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system”(P. 1-2), and also instruct your passengers todo so.Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERYWhile driving, the right side or left sidewheels may unintentionally leave the roadsurface. If this occurs, maintain control ofthe vehicle by following the procedure be-low. Please note that this procedure is onlya general guide. The vehicle must be drivenas appropriate based on the conditions ofthe vehicle, road and traffic.1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steeringwheel with both hands and try to hold astraight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-celerator pedal to gradually slow thevehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer thevehicle to follow the road while vehiclespeed is reduced. Do not attempt todrive the vehicle back onto the road sur-face until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turnthe steering wheel until both tires returnto the road surface. When all tires are onthe road surface, steer the vehicle tostay in the appropriate driving lane.• If you decide that it is not safe to return

the vehicle to the road surface basedon vehicle, road or traffic conditions,gradually slow the vehicle to a stop ina safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSSRapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” canoccur if the tire is punctured or is damageddue to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid airpressure loss can also be caused by drivingon under-inflated tires.Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-dling and stability of the vehicle, especiallyat highway speeds.


Help prevent rapid air pressure loss bymaintaining the correct air pressure andvisually inspecting the tires for wear anddamage. For additional information, see“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-35). If a tire rapidlyloses air pressure or “blows-out” while driv-ing, maintain control of the vehicle by fol-lowing the procedure below. Please notethat this procedure is only a general guide.The vehicle must be driven as appropriatebased on the conditions of the vehicle, roadand traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pres-sure. Losing control of the vehicle maycause a collision and result in personalinjury.• The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.• Do not rapidly apply the brakes.• Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.• Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steeringwheel with both hands and try to hold astraight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-celerator pedal to gradually slow thevehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo-cation off the road and away from trafficif possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andcontact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire. For additional infor-mation, see “Changing a flat tire” (P. 6-3).

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-hol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-stream reduces coordination, delaysreaction time and impairs judgement.Driving after drinking alcohol increasesthe likelihood of being involved in anaccident injuring yourself and others.Additionally, if you are injured in an ac-cident, alcohol can increase the sever-ity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-ever, you must choose not to drive underthe influence of alcohol. Every year thou-sands of people are injured or killed inalcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-cal laws vary on what is considered to belegally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and mostpeople underestimate the effects ofalcohol.


Remember, drinking and driving don't mix!That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don'tdrive if your ability to operate your vehicle isimpaired by alcohol, drugs, or some otherphysical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONSYour NISSAN is designed for both normaland off-road use. However, avoid driving indeep water or mud as your NISSAN ismainly designed for leisure use, unlike aconventional off-road vehicle.Remember that 2-Wheel Drive models areless capable than 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)models for rough road driving and extrica-tion when stuck in deep snow or mud, orthe like.Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

• Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

• Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up orstraight down the slopes. Off-roadvehicles can tip over sideways muchmore easily than they can forward orbackward.

• Many hills are too steep for any ve-hicle. If you drive up them, you maystall. If you drive down them, you maynot be able to control your speed. Ifyou drive across them, you may rollover.

• Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

• Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could causean accident.

• If your engine stalls or you cannotmake it to the top of a steep hill,never attempt to turn around. Yourvehicle could tip or roll over. Alwaysback straight down in R (Reverse)gear and apply brakes to control yourspeed.

• Heavy braking going down a hillcould cause your brakes to overheatand fade, resulting in loss of controland an accident. Apply brakes lightlyand use a low gear to control yourspeed.

• Unsecured cargo can be thrownaround when driving over rough ter-rain. Properly secure all cargo so itwill not be thrown forward and causeinjury to you or your passengers.

• Secure heavy loads in the cargo areaas far forward and as low as possible.Do not equip the vehicle with tireslarger than specified in this manual.This could cause your vehicle to rollover.

• Do not grip the inside or spokes ofthe steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could movesuddenly and injure your hands. In-stead drive with your fingers andthumbs on the outside of the rim.

• Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengershave their seat belts fastened.


• Lower your speed when encounter-ing strong crosswinds. With a highercenter of gravity, your NISSAN is moreaffected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

• Do not drive beyond the perfor-mance capability of the tires, evenwith 4WD engaged.

• For 4WD equipped vehicles, do notattempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may resultin drivetrain damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could resultin serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

• Do not attempt to test a 4WDequipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-mometer (such as the dynamom-eters used by some states for emis-sions testing) or similar equipmenteven if the other two wheels areraised off the ground. Make sure youinform test facility personnel thatyour vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamom-eter. Using the wrong test equipmentmay result in drivetrain damage orunexpected vehicle movementwhich could result in serious vehicledamage or personal injury.

• Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

• If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at highspeeds. Your NISSAN 4WD vehicle hasa higher center of gravity than a pas-senger car. The vehicle is not de-signed for cornering at the samespeeds as passenger cars. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly couldresult in loss of control and/or a roll-over accident.

• Always use tires of the same type,size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), and tread patternon all four wheels. Install tire chainson the rear wheels when driving onslippery roads and drive carefully.

• Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water.For additional information, see “Wetbrakes” (P. 5-118).

• Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle andit rolls forward, backward or side-ways, you could be injured.

• Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent mainte-nance may be required. For addi-tional information, see “Maintenanceschedules” (P. 9-7).


WARNING

Do not operate the push-button igni-tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-cept in an emergency. (The engine willstop when the ignition switch is pushedthree consecutive times in quick suc-cession or the ignition switch is pushedand held for more than 2 seconds.) Ifthe engine stops while the vehicle isbeing driven, this could lead to a crashand serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed withoutdepressing the brake pedal, the ignitionswitch position will illuminate as follows:Push center:• Once to change to ACC.• Two times to change to ON.• Three times to return to OFF.The ignition switch will automatically re-turn to the LOCK position when any door iseither opened or closed with the switch inthe OFF position.The ignition lock is designed so that theignition switch position cannot be placedin the OFF position until the shift lever ismoved to the P (Park) position.When the ignition switch cannot be pushedtoward the OFF position, proceed as fol-lows:1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignitionswitch position will change to the ONposition.

3. Push the ignition switch again to theOFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the brake pedal isdepressed.If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,the push-button ignition switch cannotbe moved from the LOCK position.Some indicators and warnings for opera-tion are displayed in the meter. For addi-tional information, see “Vehicle informationdisplay warnings and indicators” (P. 2-32).

LSD2014

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


OPERATING RANGEThe Intelligent Key functions can only beused when the Intelligent Key is within thespecified operating range.When the Intelligent Key battery is almostdischarged or strong radio waves are pres-ent near the operating location, the Intelli-gent Key system’s operating range becomesnarrower and may not function properly.If the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even some-one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,to push the ignition switch to start theengine.

The operating range of the engine startfunction is inside of the vehicle O1 .• The luggage area is not included in the

operating range, but the Intelligent Keymay function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the in-strument panel or inside the glove box,storage bin or door pocket, the IntelligentKey may not function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed near thedoor or window outside the vehicle, theIntelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCHPOSITIONSLOCK (Normal parking position)The ignition switch can only be locked inthis position.The ignition switch will be unlocked when itis pushed to the ACC position while carry-ing the Intelligent Key.The ignition switch will lock when any dooris opened or closed with the ignitionswitched off.

ACC (Accessories)This position activates electrical accesso-ries, such as the radio, when the engine isnot running.ACC has a battery saver feature that willplace the ignition switch in the OFF positionafter a period of time under the followingconditions:• All doors are closed.• The shift lever is in P (Park).• The hazard lamps are off.• The turn signals are off.The battery saver feature will be canceled ifany of the following occur:• Any door is opened.• The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position.• The ignition switch changes position.• The hazard lamps are turned on.

LSD2456


ON (Normal operating position)This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.ON has a battery saver feature that willplace the ignition switch in the OFF posi-tion, if the vehicle is not running, after sometime under the following conditions:• All doors are closed.• The shift lever is in P (Park).• The hazard lamps are off.• The turn signals are off.The battery saver feature will be canceled ifany of the following occur:• Any door is opened.• The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position.• The ignition switch changes position.• The hazard lamps are turned on.• The turn signals are turned on.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-tion switch in the ACC or ON positionwhen the engine is not running for anextended period. This can dischargethe battery.

OFFThe ignition switch is in the OFF positionwhen the engine is turned off using theignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFFTo shut off the engine in an emergencysituation while driving, perform the follow-ing procedure:• Rapidly push the ignition switch three

consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-onds, or

• Push and hold the ignition switch formore than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®BATTERY DISCHARGEIf the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®is discharged, or environmental conditionsinterfere with the Intelligent Key operation,start the engine according to the followingprocedure:1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park)

position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime willsound.)

SSD0860


After step 3 is performed, when the igni-tion switch is pushed without depress-ing the brake pedal, the ignition switchposition will change to the ON position.

4. Push the ignition switch while depress-ing the brake pedal within 10 secondsafter the chime sounds. The engine willstart.

NOTE:• When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position or the engine is startedby the above procedure, the IntelligentKey battery discharge indicator ap-pears in the vehicle information dis-play even when the Intelligent Key isinside the vehicle. This is not a mal-function. To turn off the Intelligent Keybattery discharge indicator, touch theignition switch with the Intelligent Keyagain.

• If the Intelligent Key battery dischargeindicator appears, replace the batteryas soon as possible. For additional in-formation, see “Battery replacement”(P. 8-27).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered key.If the engine fails to start using a registeredkey (for example, when interference iscaused by another registered key, an auto-mated toll road device or automatic pay-ment device on the key ring), restart theengine using the following procedures:1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the de-vice (which may have caused the inter-ference) separate from the registeredkey.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSANrecommends placing the registered key ona separate key ring to avoid interferencefrom other devices.

• Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

• Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid and windshield-washerfluid as frequently as possible, or at leastwhenever you refuel.

• Check that all windows and lights areclean.

• Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

• Check that all doors are closed.• Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.• Adjust inside and outside mirrors.• Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers

to do likewise.• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is placed in theON position. For additional information,see “Warning lights, indicator lights andaudible reminders” (P. 2-12).

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE


1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-tral). P (Park) is recommended.The starter is designed not to operateunless the shift lever is in either P(Park) or N (Neutral).

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion. Depress the brake pedal and pushthe ignition switch to start the engine.To start the engine immediately, pushand release the ignition switch while de-pressing the brake pedal with the igni-tion switch in any position.• If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-starting, depress the acceleratorpedal a little (approximately 1/3 to thefloor) and while holding, crank the en-gine. Release the accelerator pedalwhen the engine starts.

• If the engine is very hard to start be-cause it is flooded, depress the accel-erator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it. Push the ignition switch tothe ON position to start cranking theengine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stopcranking by pushing the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-

erator pedal. Crank the engine withyour foot off the accelerator pedal bydepressing the brake pedal and push-ing the ignition switch to start the en-gine. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start, push the ignition switchto the OFF position and wait 10 secondsbefore cranking again, otherwise thestarter could be damaged.

4. Warm-upAllow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Do not race theengine while warming it up. Drive at amoderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather. In coldweather, keep the engine running for aminimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shut-ting it off. Starting and stopping the en-gine over a short period of time maymake the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift leverto the P (Park) position and push theignition switch to the OFF position.

In preparation for the next engine start, theengine may have a slightly delayed shutoffafter placing the ignition switch in the OFFposition, depending on the drivingconditions.

NOTE:Care should be taken to avoid situa-tions that can lead to potential bat-tery discharge and potential no-startconditions such as:1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is notrunning (phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularlyand/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need tobe charged to maintain battery health.

STARTING THE ENGINE


REMOTE ENGINE START (if soequipped)Vehicles started with the Remote EngineStart require the ignition switch to beplaced in the ON position before the shiftlever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-tion. To place the ignition switch in the ONposition, follow these steps:1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on

you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ONposition.

For additional information, see “NISSAN In-telligent Key®” (P. 3-2).

ENGINE PROTECTION MODEThe engine has an engine protection modeto reduce the chance of damage if thecoolant temperature becomes too high(for example, when climbing steep gradesin high temperatures with heavy loads,such as when towing a trailer). When theengine temperature reaches a certainlevel:• The engine coolant temperature gauge

will move toward the H position.• Engine power may be reduced.• The air conditioning cooling function may

be automatically turned off for a shorttime (the blower will continue to operate).

Engine power and, under some conditions,vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speedcan be controlled with the acceleratorpedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate atthe desired speed. The transmission willdownshift or upshift as it reaches pre-scribed shift points. You can also shiftmanually.As driving conditions change and enginecoolant temperature is reduced, vehiclespeed can be increased using the accel-erator pedal, and the air conditioning cool-ing function will automatically be turnedback on.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) mayalso come on if the engine coolant tem-perature is not reduced or the air condi-tioning cooling function does not turn backon. If only it remains on, you do not need tohave your vehicle towed, but have it in-spected soon. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Foradditional information, see “Malfunction In-dicator Light (MIL)” (P. 2-20).

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-gine power and vehicle speed. The re-duced speed may be lower than othertraffic, which could increase the chanceof a collision. Be especially carefulwhen driving. If the vehicle cannotmaintain a safe driving speed, pull tothe side of the road in a safe area. Allowthe engine to cool and return to normaloperation. For additional information,see “If your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12).

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could causeserious damage to the engine almostimmediately. Such damage is not cov-ered by warranty. Turn off the engine assoon as it is safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)

WARNING

• Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shiftingis completed. Failure to do so couldcause you to lose control and have anaccident.

• Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forwardor reverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R(Reverse) position while the vehicle ismoving forward and P (Park) or D(Drive) position while the vehicle isreversing. This could cause an acci-dent or damage the transmission.

• Except in an emergency, do not shiftto the N (Neutral) position while driv-ing. Coasting with the transmissionin the N (Neutral) position may causeserious damage to the transmission.

• Do not downshift abruptly on slip-pery roads. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your ve-hicle, when stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold the vehicle bydepressing the accelerator pedal. Thefoot brake should be used for thispurpose.

The A/T in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power andsmooth operation.The recommended operating proceduresfor this transmission are shown on the fol-lowing pages. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance and driv-ing enjoyment.

Starting the vehicleWARNING

• Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shiftingis completed. Failure to do so couldcause you to lose control and have anaccident.

• Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forwardor reverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R(Reverse) position while the vehicle ismoving forward and P (Park) or D(Drive) position while the vehicle isreversing. This could cause an acci-dent or damage the transmission.

• Except in an emergency, do not shiftto the N (Neutral) position while driv-ing. Coasting with the transmissionin the N (Neutral) position may causeserious damage to the transmission.

• Do not downshift abruptly on slip-pery roads. This may cause a loss ofcontrol.


CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your ve-hicle, when stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold the vehicle bydepressing the accelerator pedal. Thefoot brake should be used for thispurpose.

1. After starting the engine, fully depressthe foot brake pedal before moving theshift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressedand move the shift lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then graduallystart the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designedso the foot brake pedal MUST be de-pressed before shifting from P (Park) toany drive position while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.The shift lever cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignitionswitch is placed in the LOCK or OFFposition.

ShiftingTo move the shift lever:

: Shift while depressing the brakepedal

: Shift without depressing the brakepedalAfter starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and move the shift lever out ofthe P (Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift le-ver is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unexpect-edly or roll away and result in seriouspersonal injury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF orACC position for any reason while the ve-hicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) posi-tion, the ignition switch cannot be placed inthe LOCK position. Move the shift lever tothe P (Park) position, then the ignitionswitch can be placed in the LOCK position.P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, usethe P (Park) position only when the ve-hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position whenthe vehicle is parked or when starting theengine. Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift lever from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park).

LSD3703


The P (Park) position is automatically en-gaged if you switch off the ignition.Apply the parking brake. When parking on ahill, apply the parking brake first, then movethe shift lever into the P (Park) position.R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, usethe R (Reverse) position only when thevehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before selecting the R (Reverse)position. The brake pedal must be de-pressed to move the shift lever from P(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position toR (Reverse).N (Neutral)Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-gaged. The engine can be started in thisposition. You may shift to N (Neutral) andrestart a stalled engine while the vehicle ismoving.

D (Drive)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

Manual shift modeWhen the manual shift mode switch ispushed while driving, the transmission en-ters the manual shift mode. Shift rangescan be selected manually.In the manual shift mode, the shift range isdisplayed on the position indicator in themeter. After pushing the manual shiftmode switch, the position indicator variesdepending on the gear position and ve-hicle speed.

LSD2457


Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔M8 ↔ M9 ↔ DM9 (Ninth)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔M8 ↔ M9M9 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M8 (Eighth)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7 ↔M8M8 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M7 (Seventh)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6 ↔ M7M7 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.

M6 (Sixth)Use this position for all normal forwarddriving at highway speeds.M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5 ↔ M6M6 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meterM5 (Fifth)For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4 ↔ M5M5 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M4 (Fourth)Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3 ↔ M4M4 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.

M3 (Third)Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2 ↔ M3M3 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M2 (Second)Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:M1 ↔ M2M2 will be displayed on the position indica-tor in the meter.M1 (First)Use this position when climbing steep hillsslowly or driving slowly through deep snow,sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak-ing on steep downhill grades.M1 will be displayed on the position indica-tor on the meter.


• Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower thanM4 range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting upPush the shift switch to the + (up) side.(Shifts to higher range.)When shifting downPush the shift switch to the − (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)• The transmission will automatically

downshift the gears. (For example, if youselect the 3rd range, the transmission willshift down between the 3rd and 1stgears.)

• Pushing the shift switch rapidly will shiftthe ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift modePress and hold the +(UP) button to returnthe transmission to the normal drivingmode.

• In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission may not shift to the selectedgear immediately because of vehiclespeed. The transmission will upshift ordownshift when vehicle speedmatches the programmed transmis-sion shift points. This helps maintaindriving performance and reduces thechance of vehicle damage or loss ofcontrol.

• In the manual shift mode, the trans-mission will not upshift to a highergear than is manually selected. Whenthe vehicle speed decreases, the trans-mission automatically shifts down andshifts to 1st gear before the vehiclecomes to a stop.

Accelerator downshift— in D (Drive) position —For passing or hill climbing, depress theaccelerator pedal to the floor. This shiftsthe transmission down into a lower gear,depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, pleasenote that the transmission will be locked inany of the forward gears according to thecondition.If the vehicle is driven under extremeconditions, such as excessive wheelspinning and subsequent hard braking,the fail-safe system may be activated.This will occur even if all electrical cir-cuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and wait for 3 seconds. Thenplace the ignition switch back in the ONposition. The vehicle should return to itsnormal operating condition. If it does notreturn to its normal operating condition,have the transmission checked and re-paired, if necessary. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.


WARNING

• Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead toan accident.

• Do not release the parking brakefrom outside the vehicle.

• Do not use the shift lever in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fullyengaged.


To engage: Firmly depress the parkingbrake.To release:1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedaland it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-ing light goes out.

The TSR system provides the driver with in-formation about the most recently detectedspeed limit. The system captures the roadsign information with the multi-sensingfront camera unit OA located on the wind-shield in front of the inside rearview mirrorand displays the detected signs in the ve-hicle information display. For vehiclesequipped with a navigation system, thespeed limit displayed is based on a combi-nation of navigation system data and livecamera recognition. TSR information is al-ways displayed at the top of the vehicle in-formation display, and optionally in the maincentral area of the display screen.

LSD2176 LSD3704

PARKING BRAKE TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) (ifso equipped)


WARNING

The TSR system is only intended to be asupport device to help provide thedriver with information. It is not a re-placement for the driver’s attention totraffic conditions or responsibility todrive safely. It cannot prevent acci-dents due to carelessness. It is the driv-er’s responsibility to stay alert anddrive safely at all times.

SYSTEM OPERATIONThe Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) systemdisplays the following types of road signs:

OA Speed sign detected (in Canada)

OB Speed sign detected (in USA)

OC Speed sign detected (no speed limitdetected)

OD “Do not pass” sign detected

LSD4012 LSD3378


CAUTION

• The TSR system is intended as an aidto careful driving. It is the driver’s re-sponsibility to stay alert, drive safely,and observe all road regulations thatcurrently apply, including looking outfor road signs.

• The TSR system may not functionproperly under the followingconditions:– When the road sign is not clearly

visible, for example, due to dam-age or weather conditions.

– When rain, snow or dirt adheres tothe windshield in front of themulti-sensing camera unit.

– When the headlights are notbright, for example, due to dirt onthe lens or if the aiming is not ad-justed properly.

– When strong light enters the cam-era unit. (For example, the light di-rectly shines on the front of thevehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

– When a sudden change in bright-ness occurs. (For example, whenthe vehicle enters or exits a tunnelor under a bridge.)

– If there are deviations in relationto the navigation, for example dueto changes in the road routing.

– When overtaking buses or truckswith speed stickers.

TURNING THE TRAFFIC SIGNRECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM ONAND OFFPerform the following steps to enable ordisable the TSR system.1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.Use the button to select “Driver As-sistance.” Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Traffic Sign” and press the ENTERbutton to turn the system on or off.

LSD4011


SYSTEM TEMPORARILY DISABLEDIf the vehicle is parked in direct sunlightunder high temperature conditions (overapproximately 104°F [40°C]) and thenstarted, the TSR system may be deacti-vated automatically. The “Not AvailableHigh Camera Temp” warning message willappear in the vehicle information display.Action to take:When the interior temperature is reduced,the TSR system will resume operatingautomatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONIf the TSR system malfunctions, it will beturned off automatically and the system“Malfunction” warning message will appearin the vehicle information display.Action to take:If the TSR “Malfunction” message appears,pull off the road at a safe location and stopthe vehicle. Turn the engine off and restartthe engine. If the TSR “Malfunction” mes-sage continues to appear, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe TSR system uses the same multi-sensing front camera unit that is used bythe Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system,located in front of the interior rearview mir-ror. For additional information, see ”Systemmaintenance” (P. 5-31).

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the LDWsystem could result in serious injury ordeath.• This system is only a warning device

to inform the driver of a potential un-intended lane departure. It will notsteer the vehicle or prevent loss ofcontrol. It is the driver’s responsibilityto stay alert, drive safely, keep thevehicle in the traveling lane, and be incontrol of the vehicle at all times.

LSD3704

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)


The LDW system will operate when the ve-hicle is driven at speeds of approximately37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and onlywhen the lane markings are clearly visibleon the road.The LDW system monitors the lane mark-ers on the traveling lane using the cameraunit OA located above the inside mirror.The LDW system warns the driver that thevehicle is beginning to leave the drivinglane with an indicator and a steering wheelvibration. For additional information, see“LDW system operation” (P. 5-28).

LDW SYSTEM OPERATIONThe LDW system provides a lane departurewarning function when the vehicle is driven

at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60km/h) and above and the lane markingsare clear. When the vehicle approaches ei-ther the left or the right side of the traveling

LSD3705


lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and theLDW indicator on the instrument panel willblink to alert the driver.The warning function will stop when thevehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THELDW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the LDW system.

LSD3732


1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-plays in the vehicle information display.Use the button to select “Driver As-sistance.” Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Lane” and press the ENTERbutton.

3. Select “Warning (LDW)” and press the EN-TER button.

4. Push the Warning systems switch toturn the system on or off.

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the LDW system. Failure to followthe warnings and instructions forproper use of the LDW system could re-sult in serious injury or death.• The system will not operate at

speeds below approximately 37 mph(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lanemarkers.

• Do not use the LDW system under thefollowing conditions as it may notfunction properly:– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads,such as on ice or snow.

– When driving on winding or un-even roads.

– When there is a lane closure due toroad repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift ortemporary lane.

– When driving on roads where thelane width is too narrow.

– When driving without normal tireconditions (for example, tire wear,low tire pressure, installation ofspare tire, tire chains, nonstan-dard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped withnon-original brake parts or sus-pension parts.

– When you are towing a trailer orother vehicle.

• The system may not function prop-erly under the following conditions:– On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane mark-ers that are faded or not paintedclearly; yellow painted lane mark-ers; non-standard lane markers;or lane markers covered with wa-ter, dirt, snow, etc.

– On roads where the discontinuedlane markers are still detectable.

– On roads where there are sharpcurves.

– On roads where there are sharplycontrasting objects, such as shad-ows, snow, water, wheel ruts,seams or lines remaining afterroad repairs. (The LDW systemcould detect these items as lanemarkers.)

– On roads where the traveling lanemerges or separates.

– When the vehicle’s traveling direc-tion does not align with the lanemarker.

– When traveling close to the ve-hicle in front of you, which ob-structs the lane camera unit de-tection range.

– When rain, snow, dirt or an objectadheres to the windshield in frontof the lane camera unit.

– When the headlights are notbright due to dirt on the lens or ifthe aiming is not adjustedproperly.


– When strong light enters the lanecamera unit. (For example, thelight directly shines on the front ofthe vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

– When a sudden change in bright-ness occurs. (For example, whenthe vehicle enters or exits a tunnelor under a bridge.)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY DISABLEDIf the vehicle is parked in direct sunlightunder high temperature conditions (overapproximately 104°F [40°C]) and thenstarted, the LDW system may be deacti-vated automatically and the followingmessage will appear in the vehicle infor-mation display: “Not Available High CameraTemp.”When the interior temperature is reduced,the LDW system will resume operatingautomatically.The LDW system is not designed to warnunder the following conditions:• When you operate the lane change signal

and change traveling lanes in the direc-tion of the signal. (The LDW system willbecome operable again approximately 2seconds after the lane change signal isturned off.)

• When the vehicle speed lowers to lessthan approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finishedand the necessary operating conditionsare satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONIf the LDW system malfunctions, it will can-cel automatically and “Malfunction” will ap-pear in the vehicle information display. If “Malfunction” appears in the vehicle infor-mation display, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop the vehicle. Place theshift lever in the P (Park) position and theignition switch in the OFF position and re-start the engine/motor. If “Malfunction”continues to appear in the vehicle informa-tion display, have the system checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe lane camera unit O1 for the LDW sys-tem is located above the inside mirror. Tokeep the proper operation of the LDW sys-tem and prevent a system malfunction, besure to observe the following:• Always keep the windshield clean.• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessorynear the camera unit.

LSD3707


• Do not place reflective materials, such aswhite paper or a mirror, on the instru-ment panel. The reflection of sunlightmay adversely affect the camera unit’scapability of detecting the lane markers.

• Do not strike or damage the areasaround the camera unit. Do not touch thecamera lens or remove the screw locatedon the camera unit. If the camera unit isdamaged due to an accident, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the BSWsystem could result in serious injury ordeath.• The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and isnot designed to prevent contact withvehicles or objects. When changinglanes, always use the side and rearmirrors and turn and look in the di-rection your vehicle will move to en-sure it is safe to change lanes. Neverrely solely on the BSW system.

• Do not use the BSW system whentowing a trailer. The system may notfunction properly.

The BSW system helps alert the driver ofother vehicles in adjacent lanes whenchanging lanes.

The BSW system uses radar sensors O1

installed near the rear bumper to detectother vehicles in an adjacent lane.

LSD2619

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)


The radar sensors can detect vehicles oneither side of your vehicle within the detec-tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-tion zone starts from the outside mirror ofyour vehicle and extends approximately 10ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and ap-proximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA IndicatorBSW SYSTEM OPERATIONThe BSW system operates above approxi-mately 20 mph (32 km/h).

SSD1030Detection zone

LSD3933


If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in thedetection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal isthen activated, the system chimes (twice)and the side BSW/RCTA indicator lightflashes and the BSW/RCTA indicator illumi-nates (yellow) in the vehicle informationdisplay. The side BSW/RCTA indicator lightcontinues to flash until the detected ve-hicle leaves the detection zone.The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-nates for a few seconds when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position.The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-cator light is adjusted automatically de-pending on the brightness of the ambientlight.If a vehicle comes into the detection zoneafter the driver activates the turn signal,then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator lightflashes and no chime sounds. For addi-tional information, see “BSW driving situa-tions” (P. 5-36).

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THEBSW SYSTEM

When the BSW system is enabled in thevehicle information display, the system canbe turned off temporarily by pushing the

LSD3733


warning systems switch. For additional in-formation, see “Warning systems switch”(P. 2-58).Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the BSW system:1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.Use the button to select “Driver As-sistance” and press ENTER.

2. Select “Blind Spot” and press ENTER.

3. Select “Warning (BSW)” and press ENTER.

4. Push the Warning systems switch toturn the system on or off.

NOTE:• When enabling/disabling the system,

the system will retain current settingseven if the engine is restarted.

• When the BSW system is turned on, theBSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the ve-hicle information display illuminates.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONSWARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the BSW system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.• The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.• The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when cer-tain objects are present such as:– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high groundclearance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.– Vehicles remaining in the detec-

tion zone when you acceleratefrom a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacentlane at a speed approximately thesame as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidlyfrom behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through thedetection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehiclesin a row, the vehicles after the firstvehicle may not be detected ifthey are traveling close together.

• The radar sensor’s detection zone isdesigned based on a standard lanewidth. When driving in a wider lane,the radar sensors may not detect ve-hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-ing in a narrow lane, the radar sen-sors may detect vehicles driving twolanes away.

• The radar sensors are designed to ig-nore most stationary objects; how-ever, objects such as guardrails,walls, foliage and parked vehiclesmay occasionally be detected. This isa normal operation condition.

• The following conditions may reducethe ability of the radar to detect othervehicles:– Severe weather– Road spray– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on

the vehicle


• Do not attach stickers (includingtransparent material), install acces-sories or apply additional paint nearthe radar sensors. These conditionsmay reduce the ability of the radar todetect other vehicles.

• Excessive noise (for example, audiosystem volume, open vehicle win-dow) will interfere with the chimesound, and it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

Another vehicle approachingfrom behindIllustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-tection zone from behind in an adjacentlane.

NOTE:• The radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles which are approaching rapidlyfrom behind.

LSD2299Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind


Illustration 2: If the driver activates theturn signal when another vehicle is in thedetection zone, then the system chimes(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight flashes.

NOTE:• The radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles which are approaching rapidlyfrom behind.

• If the driver activates the turn signalbefore a vehicle enters the detectionzone, the side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight will flash but no chime will soundwhen the other vehicle is detected.

Overtaking another vehicleIllustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indica-tor light illuminates if you overtake a ve-hicle and that vehicle stays in the detectionzone for approximately 2 seconds.

LSD2300Illustration 2 – Approaching from

behind

LSD2302Illustration 3 – Overtaking another

vehicle


Illustration 4: If the driver activates theturn signal while another vehicle is in thedetection zone, then the system chimes(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight flashes.

NOTE:• When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehiclemay not be detected if they are travel-ing close together.

• The radar sensors may not detectslower moving vehicles if they arepassed quickly.

• If the driver activates the turn signalbefore a vehicle enters the detectionzone, the side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight will flash but no chime will soundwhen the other vehicle is detected.

Entering from the sideIllustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-tection zone from either side.

LSD2303Illustration 4 – Overtaking another

vehicle

LSD2305Illustration 5 – Entering from the side


Illustration 6: If the driver activates theturn signal while another vehicle is in thedetection zone, then the system chimes(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight flashes.

NOTE:• If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detectionzone, the side BSW/RCTA indicatorlight will flash but no chime will soundwhen the other vehicle is detected.

• The radar sensors may not detect a ve-hicle which is traveling at about thesame speed as your vehicle when it en-ters the detection zone.

LSD2308Illustration 6 – Entering from the side


SYSTEM TEMPORARILY DISABLEDWhen radar blockage is detected, the sys-tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction”warning message will appear and theBSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink OA inthe vehicle information display.

The system is not available until the condi-tions no longer exist.The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-porary ambient conditions such as splash-ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-tion may also be caused by objects such asice, frost or dirt obstructing the radarsensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, theRCTA system (if so equipped) will alsostop working.Action to take:When the above conditions no longer exist,the system will resume automatically.

MalfunctionIf the BSW system malfunctions, it will turnoff automatically. The system malfunctionwarning message with the BSW/RCTA indi-cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in-formation display.

LSD3710


NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, theRCTA system (if so equipped) will alsostop working.Action to take:Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place thevehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-sage continues to appear, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe two radar sensors O1 for the BSW andRCTA systems are located near the rearbumper. Always keep the area near the ra-dar sensors clean.The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-porary ambient conditions such as splash-ing water, mist or fog.The blocked condition may also be causedby objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-structing the radar sensors.Check for and remove objects obstructingthe area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-ent material), install accessories or applyadditional paint near the radar sensors.Do not strike or damage the area aroundthe radar sensors. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer if the area aroundthe radar sensors is damaged due to acollision.

Radio frequency statementFor USAFCC ID: OAYSRR3BThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

LSD2619


FCC WarningChanges or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.For CanadaModel: SRR3–BCanada 310This device contains licence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s) that complywith Innovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment Canada’s licence-exemptRSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause

interference.

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of thedevice.

Radiofrequency radiation exposureinformation:This equipment complies with radiationexposure limits set forth for an uncon-trolled environment. This equipmentshould be installed and operated with

minimum distance of 20 cm between theradiator and your body.Droit applicable: Canada 310L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licencecontenu dans le présent appareil estconforme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sci-ences et Développement économiqueCanada applicables aux appareils radioexempts de licence. L’exploitation est au-torisée aux deux conditions suivantes:1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage;

2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouil-lage radioélectrique subi, même si lebrouillage est susceptible d’en com-promettre le fonctionnement.

Informations sur l'exposition aux rayon-nements radiofréquences:Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-ites d'exposition aux rayonnementsdéfinies pour un environnement nonêtre installé et utilisé avec un minimumde 20 cm decontrôlé. Cet équipementdoit distance entre la source de rayonne-ment et votre corps.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the RCTAsystem could result in serious injury ordeath.• The RCTA system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving proceduresand is not designed to prevent con-tact with vehicles or objects. Whenbacking out of a parking space, al-ways use the side and rear mirrorsand turn and look in the directionyour vehicle will move. Never relysolely on the RCTA system.

• Do not use the RCTA system whentowing a trailer. The system may notfunction properly.

The RCTA system will assist you whenbacking out from a parking space. Whenthe vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-signed to detect other vehicles approach-ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If thesystem detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)


RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

The RCTA system can help alert the driverof an approaching vehicle when the driveris backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) andthe vehicle speed is less than approxi-mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system isoperational.If the radar detects an approaching vehiclefrom the side, the system chimes a sound(single beep) and the side BSW/RCTA indi-cator light on the side of the vehicle is ap-proaching from flashes.

LSD3933


The RCTA system uses radar sensors O1

installed on both sides near the rear bum-per to detect an approaching vehicle.The radar sensors O1 can detect an ap-proaching vehicle from up to approxi-mately 66 ft (20 m) away.

LSD2216 LSD2619


HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THERCTA SYSTEM

When the RCTA system is enabled in thevehicle information display, the system canbe turned off temporarily by pushing theFront and rear sonar system OFF switch.

For additional information, see “ParkingAids system switch” (P. 2-63).Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the RCTA system:1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.Use the button to select “Driver As-sistance” and press ENTER.

2. Select “Parking Aids” and press ENTER.

3. Select “CTA” and press the ENTER buttonto turn system on or off.

4. Push the Parking Aids system switch toturn the system on or off.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system,the system setting will be retained evenif the engine is restarted.

LSD3734


RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the RCTA system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.

• Always check surroundings and turnto check what is behind you beforebacking up. The radar sensors detectapproaching (moving) vehicles. Theradar sensors cannot detect everyobject such as:– Pedestrians, bicycles, motor-

cycles, animals or child-operatedtoy vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speedsgreater than approximately 19mph (30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speedslower than approximately 5 mph(8 km/h)

• The radar sensors may not detectapproaching vehicles in certain situ-ations:– Illustration OA : When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs thebeam of the radar sensor.

– Illustration OB : When the vehicle isparked in an angled parkingspace.

– Illustration OC : When the vehicle isparked on inclined ground.

– Illustration OD : When an ap-proaching vehicle turns into yourvehicle's parking lot aisle.

LSD3195


– Illustration OE : When the angleformed by your vehicle and ap-proaching vehicle is small.

• The following conditions may reducethe ability of the radar to detect othervehicles:– Severe weather– Road spray– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on

the vehicle• Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install acces-sories or apply additional paint nearthe radar sensors. These conditionsmay reduce the ability of the radar todetect other vehicles.

• Excessive noise (e.g., audio systemvolume, open vehicle window) will in-terfere with the chime sound, and itmay not be heard.

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach-ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-site direction (Illustration 2), a chime maynot be sounded by the RCTA system af-ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

LSD2043Illustration 1

LSD2044Illustration 2


SYSTEM TEMPORARILY DISABLEDWhen radar blockage is detected, the sys-tem will be deactivated automatically. The“Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction” warn-

ing message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink OA in thevehicle information display.

The systems are not available until theconditions no longer exist.The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-porary ambient conditions such as splash-ing water, mist or fog.The blocked condition may also be causedby objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-structing the radar sensors.

NOTE:If the BSW system stops working, theRCTA system (if so equipped) will alsostop working.Action to takeWhen the above conditions no longer exist,the system will resume automatically.

MalfunctionWhen the RCTA system malfunctions, it willturn off automatically. The system mal-function warning message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in thevehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, theRCTA system (if so equipped) will alsostop working.

LSD3710


Action to takeStop the vehicle in a safe location, place thevehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-sage continues to appear, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe two radar sensors O1 for the BSW andRCTA systems are located near the rearbumper. Always keep the area near the ra-dar sensors clean.The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-porary ambient conditions such as splash-ing water, mist or fog.The blocked condition may also be causedby objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-structing the radar sensors.Check for and remove objects obstructingthe area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-ent material), install accessories or applyadditional paint near the radar sensors.Do not strike or damage the area aroundthe radar sensors. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer if the area aroundthe radar sensors is damaged due to acollision.

Radio frequency statementFor USAFCC ID: OAYSRR3BThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and


LSD2619


FCC WarningChanges or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.For CanadaModel: SRR3–BCanada 310This device contains licence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s) that complywith Innovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment Canada’s licence-exemptRSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause

interference.

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of thedevice.

Radiofrequency radiation exposureinformation:This equipment complies with radiationexposure limits set forth for an uncon-trolled environment. This equipmentshould be installed and operated with

minimum distance of 20 cm between theradiator and your body.Droit applicable: Canada 310L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licencecontenu dans le présent appareil estconforme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sci-ences et Développement économiqueCanada applicables aux appareils radioexempts de licence. L’exploitation est au-torisée aux deux conditions suivantes:1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage;

2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouil-lage radioélectrique subi, même si lebrouillage est susceptible d’en com-promettre le fonctionnement.

Informations sur l'exposition aux rayon-nements radiofréquences:Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-ites d'exposition aux rayonnementsdéfinies pour un environnement nonêtre installé et utilisé avec un minimumde 20 cm decontrôlé. Cet équipementdoit distance entre la source de rayonne-ment et votre corps.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch• If the cruise control system malfunctions,

it cancels automatically. The (green)indicator illuminates in the vehicle infor-mation display then blinks to warn thedriver.

LSD2464

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)


• If the (green) indicator blinks, pushthe ON/OFF switch off and have the sys-tem checked. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

• The (green) indicator may blinkwhen the ON/OFF switch is pushed ONwhile pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set thecruise control system, use the followingprocedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-ing under the following conditions:• When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.• In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.• On winding or hilly roads.• On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.).• In very windy areas.Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speedbetween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-out keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.To turn on the cruise control, push theON/OFF switch on. The (white) indica-tor in the vehicle information display willilluminate.To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it. The

(green) indicator in the vehicle infor-mation display will illuminate. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehiclemaintains the set speed.• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-ously set speed.

• The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steep hills.If this happens, drive without the cruisecontrol.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods:• Push the CANCEL switch; the indica-

tor in the vehicle information displaygoes out.

• Tap the brake pedal; the indicatorgoes out.

• Push the ON/OFF switch off. Theindicator in the vehicle information dis-play goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can-celed and the indicator in the vehicleinformation display goes out if:• You depress the brake pedal while push-

ing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET switch.The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

• The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph(13 km/h) below the set speed.

• You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, pushand release the COAST/SET switch.

• Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed youdesire, release the switch.

• Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).


To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

• Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slowsto the desired speed.

• Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push andrelease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehiclereturns to the last set cruising speed whenthe vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

OA ON/OFF switchLSD3758

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (if soequipped)


WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the ICC sys-tem could result in serious injury ordeath.• The ICC system is only an aid to assist

the driver and is not a collision warn-ing or avoidance device. It is the driv-er’s responsibility to stay alert, drivesafely, and be in control of the vehicleat all times.

• Always observe posted speed limitsand do not set the speed over them.

• Always drive carefully and atten-tively when using the ICC system.Read and understand the Owner’sManual thoroughly before using theICC system. To avoid serious injury ordeath, do not rely on the system toprevent accidents or to control thevehicle’s speed in emergency situa-tions. Do not use the ICC system ex-cept in appropriate road and trafficconditions.

• In the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode, a warningchime will not sound to warn you ifyou are too close to the vehicleahead. Pay special attention to thedistance between your vehicle andthe vehicle ahead of you or a collisioncould occur.

The ICC system maintains a selected dis-tance from the vehicle in front of you withinthe speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144km/h) up to the set speed. The set speedcan be selected by the driver between 20 to90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).The vehicle travels at a set speed when theroad ahead is clear.The ICC system can be set to one of twocruise control modes:• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode: For maintaining a selected dis-tance between your vehicle and the ve-hicle in front of you up to the preset speed

• Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode: For cruising at a preset speed

Always confirm the setting in the ON/OFFswitch display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode” (P. 5-54).For the conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode, see “Conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-72).


HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISECONTROL MODESelecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance control mode: To choose thevehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode,quickly push and release the ON/OFFswitch OA .

Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode: To choose the con-ventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode, push and hold the ON/OFF switchOA for longer than approximately 1.5 sec-onds. For additional information, see “Con-ventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode” (P. 5-72).

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODEIn the vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode, the ICC system automatically main-tains a selected distance from the vehicletraveling in front of you according to thatvehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or atthe set speed when the road ahead is clear.The ICC system is intended to enhance theoperation of the vehicle when following avehicle traveling in the same lane anddirection.

LSD3759 LSD3712


If the radar sensor O1 detects a slowermoving vehicle ahead, the system will re-duce the vehicle speed so that your vehiclefollows the vehicle in front at the selecteddistance.The system automatically controls thethrottle and applies the brakes (up to ap-proximately 40% of vehicle braking power)if necessary.The detection range of the sensor is ap-proximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE OPERATION

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode is designed to maintain a selecteddistance from the vehicle in front of youand can reduce the speed to match a

LSD3760


slower vehicle ahead. The system will de-celerate the vehicle as necessary and if thevehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicledecelerates to a standstill. However, the ICCsystem can only apply up to 40% of thevehicle’s total braking power.This system should only be used when traf-fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re-main fairly constant or when vehiclespeeds change gradually. If a vehiclemoves into the traveling lane ahead or if avehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,the distance between vehicles may be-come closer because the ICC system can-not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.If this occurs, the ICC system will sound awarning chime and blink the system dis-play to notify the driver to take necessaryaction.The system will cancel and a warningchime will sound if the speed is below ap-proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicleis not detected ahead. The system will alsodisengage when the vehicle goes abovethe maximum set speed.For additional information, see “Approachwarning” (P. 5-62).

The following items are controlled in thevehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:• When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode maintains the speed set bythe driver. The set speed range is be-tween approximately 20 and 90 mph (32and 144 km/h).

• When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,the vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode adjusts the speed to maintain thedistance, selected by the driver, from thevehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comesto a stop, the vehicle decelerates to astandstill within the limitations of the sys-tem. The system will cancel once it judgesa standstill with a warning chime.

• When the vehicle traveling ahead hasmoved out from its lane of travel, thevehicle-to-vehicle distance control modeaccelerates and maintains vehicle speedup to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehiclespeed or warn you when you approachstationary and slow moving vehicles. Youmust pay attention to vehicle operation tomaintain proper distance from vehiclesahead when approaching toll gates or traf-fic congestion.

When driving on the freeway at a set speedand approaching a slower traveling vehicleahead, the ICC system will adjust the speedto maintain the distance, selected by thedriver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicleahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,the ICC system will accelerate and main-tain the speed up to the set speed. Payattention to the driving operation to main-tain control of the vehicle as it acceleratesto the set speed.The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc-curs, you will have to manually control thevehicle speed.

SSD0254


Normally when controlling the distance toa vehicle ahead, this system automaticallyaccelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.Depress the accelerator to properly accel-erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-quired for a lane change. Depress the brakepedal when deceleration is required tomaintain a safe distance to the vehicleahead due to its sudden braking or if avehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-ing the ICC system.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE SWITCHESThe system is operated by the ON/OFFswitch and four control switches, allmounted on the steering wheel.1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasingthe set speed.

2. ACCEL/RES switch:Resumes set speed or increases speedincrementally.

3. COAST/SET switch:Sets desired cruise speed or reducesspeed incrementally.

4. ON/OFF switch:Master switch to activate the system.

5. DISTANCE switch: switch:Changes the vehicle’s followingdistance:• Long• Middle• Short

LSD3713


Vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode display andindicatorsThe display is located between the speed-ometer and tachometer.1. This indicator indicates the ICC system

status depending on a color:• ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi-

cates that the ON/OFF switch is on.• ICC system SET indicator (green): In-

dicates that the cruising speed is set.

• ICC system warning (yellow): Indi-cates that there is a malfunction in theICC system.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:Indicates the set vehicle speed.For Canadian models, the speed is dis-played in km/h.

3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:Indicates whether it detects a vehicle infront of you.

4. Set distance indicator:Displays the selected distance betweenvehicles set with the distance switch. Operating vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control modeTo turn on the cruise control, quickly pushand release the ON/OFF switch OA . The ICCsystem ON indicator (gray), set distance in-dicator and set vehicle speed indicator OB

come on in a standby state for setting.

LSD3297 LSD3761


To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch OC and release it. TheICC system set indicator (green), vehicleahead detection indicator, set distance in-dicator and set vehicle speed indicator OB

will come on. Take your foot off the accel-erator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain theset speed.

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-der the following conditions, the systemcannot be set and the ICC indicators willblink for approximately 2 seconds:• When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and a vehicle ahead is not detected• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or Manual mode• When the parking brake is applied• When the brakes are operated by the

driverWhen the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-der the following conditions, the systemcannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a messagewill pop up:• When the VDC system is off (To use the

ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Pushthe ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICCsystem and reset the ON/OFF switch bypushing the ON/OFF switch again.)For additional information about theVDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Con-trol (VDC) system” (P. 5-120).

• When VDC is operating• When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no lon-ger slipping.)LSD3762 LSD3102


�1 System set display with vehicle ahead

�2 System set display without vehicleahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speedbased on the road conditions. The ICC sys-tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi-lar to standard cruise control, as long as novehicle is detected in the lane ahead. TheICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected aheadWhen a vehicle is detected in the laneahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-ing the brakes to match the speed of aslower vehicle ahead. The system thencontrols the vehicle speed based on thespeed of the vehicle ahead to maintain thedriver selected distance.

NOTE:• The stop lights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICCsystem.

• When the brake operates, a noise maybe heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.The ICC system will also display the setspeed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detectedWhen a vehicle is no longer detectedahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-ates your vehicle to resume the previouslyset vehicle speed. The ICC system thenmaintains the set speed.When a vehicle is no longer detected, thevehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-tion to the set vehicle speed or any time theICC system is in operation, the system con-trols the distance to that vehicle.When a vehicle is no longer detected underapproximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-tem will be canceled.

LSD3301


When passing another vehicle, the setspeed indicator OA will flash when the ve-hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-hicle detect indicator will turn off when thearea ahead of the vehicle is open. When thepedal is released, the vehicle will return tothe previously set speed.Even though your vehicle speed is set in theICC system, you can depress the accelera-tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerateyour vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehiclespeedTo cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing methods:• Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.• Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.• Turn the ON/OFF switch off. The ICC indi-

cators will go out.To reset at a faster cruising speed, useone of the following methods:• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the


• Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.The set vehicle speed will increase by ap-proximately 5 mph (5 km/h).

• Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RESswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will increase by approximately 1mph (1 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following methods:• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

• Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.The set vehicle speed will decrease byapproximately 5 mph (5 km/h).

• Push, then quickly release the COAST/SETswitch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will decrease by approximately 1mph (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push andrelease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehiclewill resume the last set cruising speedwhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32km/h).

LSD3267


How to change the set distanceto the vehicle aheadThe distance to the vehicle ahead can beselected at any time depending on the traf-fic conditions.Each time the distance switch OA ispushed, the set distance will change tolong, middle, short and back to long again,in that sequence.

Distance Approximate distance at60 mph (100 km/h)[ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)2. Middle 150 (45)3. Short 90 (30)

• The distance to the vehicle ahead willchange according to the vehicle speed.The higher the vehicle speed, the longerthe distance.

• The distance setting will remain at thecurrent setting even if the engine isrestarted.

Approach warningIf your vehicle comes closer to the vehicleahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-tem warns the driver with the chime andICC system display. Decelerate by depress-ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-hicle distance if:• The chime sounds.• The vehicle ahead detection indicator

blinks.The warning chime may not sound insome cases when there is a short distancebetween vehicles. Some examples are:• When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance betweenvehicles is not changing.

• When the vehicle ahead is traveling fasterand the distance between vehicles isincreasing.

• When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.The warning chime will not sound when:• The vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.• The accelerator pedal is depressed, over-

riding the system.

LSD3714 LSD2752


NOTE:

The approach warning chime may soundand the system display may blink whenthe ICC sensor detects objects on theside of the vehicle or on the side of theroad. This may cause the ICC system todecelerate or accelerate the vehicle. TheICC sensor may detect these objectswhen the vehicle is driven on windingroads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or whenentering or exiting a curve. In thesecases you will have to manually controlthe proper distance ahead of yourvehicle.Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affectedby vehicle operation (steering maneuver ordriving position in the lane) or traffic or ve-hicle condition (for example, if a vehicle isbeing driven with some damage).

Acceleration when passingWhen the ICC system is engaged above 37mph and following a slower vehicle (belowICC set speed), and the turn signal is acti-vated to the left, the ICC system will auto-matically start to accelerate the vehicle tohelp initiate passing on the left and willbegin to reduce the distance to vehicle di-rectly ahead. Only the left side turn signaloperates this feature. As the driver steers

the vehicle and moves into the passinglane, if no vehicle is detected ahead the ICCsystem will continue to accelerate to theICC system set speed. If another vehicle isdetected ahead, then the vehicle will accel-erate up to the following speed of that ve-hicle. If the vehicle is not steered into theleft lane to pass, the acceleration will stopafter a short time and regain the set follow-ing distance. Acceleration can be stoppedat any point by depressing the brake pedalor the CANCEL switch on the steeringwheel.

WARNING

In order to reduce the risk of a collisionthat may result in serious injury ordeath, please be aware of the following:• This function is only activated with

the left turn signal and will briefly ac-celerate the vehicle even if a lanechange is not initiated. This can in-clude non-passing situations such asleft side exits.

• Ensure that when passing anothervehicle, the adjacent lane is clear be-fore initiating the pass. Suddenchanges in traffic may occur whilepassing — always manually steer orbrake as needed — never solely relyon the system.

System temporarily disabledA chime sounds under the following condi-tions and the control is automatically can-celed:• When the vehicle ahead is not detected

and your vehicle is traveling below thespeed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

• When the system judges the vehicle is ata standstill

• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)position, Manual mode or L (Low) range.

• When the parking brake system is applied• When the VDC system is turned off• When VDC operates• When a wheel slips• When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted


VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the ICC system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.• The ICC system is primarily intended

for use on straight, dry, open roadswith light traffic. It is not advisable touse the ICC system in city traffic orcongested areas.

• The ICC system will not adapt auto-matically to road conditions. Thissystem should be used in evenlyflowing traffic. Do not use the systemon roads with sharp curves, or on icyroads, in heavy rain or in fog.

• As there is a performance limit to thedistance control function, never relysolely on the ICC system. This systemdoes not correct careless, inattentiveor absentminded driving, or over-come poor visibility in rain, fog, orother bad weather. Decelerate thevehicle speed by depressing thebrake pedal, depending on the dis-tance to the vehicle ahead and thesurrounding circumstances in orderto maintain a safe distance betweenvehicles.

• If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,the vehicle decelerates to a standstillwithin the limitations of the system.The system will cancel once it judgesthat the vehicle has come to a stand-still and sound a warning chime. Toprevent the vehicle from moving, thedriver must depress the brake pedal.

• Always pay attention to the opera-tion of the vehicle and be ready tomanually control the proper follow-ing distance. The ICC system may notbe able to maintain the selected dis-tance between vehicles (followingdistance) or selected vehicle speedunder some circumstances.

• The system may not detect the ve-hicle in front of you in certain road orweather conditions. To avoid acci-dents, never use the ICC system un-der the following conditions:– On roads where the traffic is heavy

or there are sharp curves– On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the bumper around the distancesensor

– On steep downhill roads (the ve-hicle may go beyond the set ve-hicle speed and frequent brakingmay result in overheating thebrakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhillroads

– When traffic conditions make itdifficult to keep a proper distancebetween vehicles because of fre-quent acceleration ordeceleration

– Interference by other radarsources


• Do not use the ICC system if you aretowing a trailer. The system may notdetect a vehicle ahead.

• In some road or traffic conditions, avehicle or object can unexpectedlycome into the sensor detection zoneand cause automatic braking. Al-ways stay alert and avoid using theICC system where not recommendedin this warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the follow-ing objects:• Stationary and slow moving vehicles• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane• Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

laneThe sensor generally detects the signalsreturned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore,if the sensor cannot detect the reflectionfrom the vehicle ahead, the ICC systemmay not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in whichthe sensor cannot properly detect a ve-hicle ahead and the system may not oper-ate properly:• When snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.• When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.• When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or cargo area ofyour vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati-cally check the sensor’s operation withinthe limitations of the system.When the sensor is covered with dirt or isobstructed, the system will automaticallybe canceled. If the sensor is covered withice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,etc., the ICC system may not detect them.In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicledistance control mode may not cancel andmay not be able to maintain the selectedfollowing distance from the vehicle ahead.Be sure to check and clean the sensorregularly.

The detection zone of the radar sensor islimited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-tance detection mode to maintain the se-lected distance from the vehicle ahead.A vehicle ahead may move outside of thedetection zone due to its position withinthe same lane of travel. Motorcycles maynot be detected in the same lane ahead ifthey are traveling offset from the centerlineof the lane. A vehicle that is entering thelane ahead may not be detected until thevehicle has completely moved into thelane.If this occurs, the ICC system may warnyou by blinking the system indicator andsounding the chime. The driver mayhave to manually control the proper dis-tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.


SSD0252


When driving on some roads, such as wind-ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roadswhich are under construction, the radarsensor may detect vehicles in a differentlane, or may temporarily not detect a ve-hicle traveling ahead. This may cause theradar system to decelerate or acceleratethe vehicle.The detection of vehicles may also be af-fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warnyou by blinking the system indicator andsounding the chime unexpectedly. Youwill have to manually control the properdistance away from the vehicle travelingahead.

SSD0253


SYSTEM TEMPORARILYUNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which theICC system may be temporarily unavail-able. In these instances, the ICC systemmay not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distancefrom the vehicle ahead.Condition AUnder the following conditions, the ICC sys-tem is automatically canceled. A chime willsound and the system will not be able to beset:• When the VDC system is turned off• When the VDC operates• When a vehicle ahead is not detected and

your vehicle is traveling below the speedof 15 mph (24 km/h)

• When the system judges the vehicle is ata standstill

• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive),Manual mode or L (Low) range

• When the parking brake is applied• When a wheel slips• When the radar signal is temporarily

interruptedAction to takeWhen the conditions listed above are nolonger present, turn the system off usingthe ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back onto use the system.

LSD3763


Condition BWhen there is inclement weather (rain, fog,snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor,the ICC system will automatically be can-celed. The chime will sound and the “For-ward Driving Aids Temporarily DisabledFront Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”warning message will appear in the vehicleinformation display.Action to takeWhen the conditions listed above are nolonger present, the warning message willno longer be available in the vehicle infor-mation display and the system will operatenormally. If the “Forward Driving Aids Tem-porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked SeeOwner’s Manual” warning message contin-ues to be displayed, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.Condition CWhen the radar sensor area of the frontbumper/emblem is covered with mud, dirt,snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the ICC sys-tem will automatically be canceled.

The chime will sound and the “ForwardDriving Aids Temporarily Disabled FrontSensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”warning message will appear in the vehicleinformation display.Action to takeIf the warning message appears, stop thevehicle in a safe place, place the shift leverin the P (Park) position, and turn the engineoff. When the radar signal is temporarilyinterrupted, clean the sensor area of thefront bumper/emblem and restart the en-gine. If the “Forward Driving Aids Temporar-ily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Own-er’s Manual” warning message continuesto be displayed, have the system checked.It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.Condition DWhen driving on roads with limited roadstructures (for example, long bridges, des-erts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),the system may illuminate the systemwarning light and display the ““ForwardDriving Aids Temporarily Disabled FrontSensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”message.

Action to takeWhen the above driving conditions no lon-ger exist, turn the system back on.Condition EWhen the ICC system is not operatingproperly, a chime sounds and the ICC sys-tem warning light (orange) will come on.


Action to takeIf the warning light comes on, park the ve-hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,restart the engine, resume driving and setthe ICC system again.If it is not possible to set the system orthe indicator stays on, it may indicatethat the system is malfunctioning. Al-though the vehicle is still drivable undernormal conditions, have the vehiclechecked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

If the ICC system is temporarily unavail-able, the conventional cruise controlmode may still be used.For instruction on using the ConventionalCruise Control mode see (P. 5-72).

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe sensor for the ICC system O1 is locatedon the front of the vehicle.To keep the ICC system operating properly,be sure to observe the following:• Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper/emblem clean.• Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessorynear the sensor. This could cause failureor malfunction.

LSD3916 LSD3712


• Do not attach metallic objects near thesensor area (brush guard, etc.). This couldcause failure or malfunction.

• Do not alter, remove, or paint the frontbumper. Before customizing or restoringthe front bumper, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statementFCC NoticeUSAFCC ID: OAYARS4BThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules with Industry Canada Licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and


Radio frequency radiation exposureInformation:This equipment complies with FCC and ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 30cm between the radiator and your body.This transmitter must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with anyother antenna or transmitter.FCC NoticeChanges or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.CANADAIC: 4135A-ARS4BThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause

interference,

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme auxCNR d’Industrie Canada applicables auxappareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes:1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. l’utillisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptibled’en compromettre lefonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposureInformation:This equipment complies with FCC and ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment.This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 30cm between the radiator and your body.This transmitter must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with anyother antenna or transmitter.Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-ites d’exposition aux rayonnements ICétablies pour un environnement noncontrôlé. Cet équipement doit être in-stallé et utillisé avec un minimum de 30cm de distance entre la source de rayon-nement et votre corps.


CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)CRUISE CONTROL MODEThis mode allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with-out keeping your foot on the acceleratorpedal.

WARNING

• In the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode, a warningchime does not sound to warn you ifyou are too close to the vehicleahead, as neither the presence of thevehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

• Pay special attention to the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicleahead of you or a collision couldoccur.

• Always confirm the setting in the ICCsystem display.

• Do not use the conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode whendriving under the following condi-tions:– When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

– In heavy traffic or in traffic thatvaries in speed

– On winding or hilly roads– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)– In very windy areas

• Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol switches1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasingthe set speed

2. ACCEL/RES switch:Resumes set speed or increases speedincrementally

3. COAST/SET switch:Sets desired cruise speed or reducesspeed incrementally

4. ON/OFF switch:Master switch to activate the system

LSD3715


Conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode display andindicatorsThe display is located in the vehicle infor-mation display.1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition ofthe ICC system depending on a color.• Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indi-

cates that the ON/OFF switch is on• Cruise control SET indicator (green): In-

dicates that the cruising speed is set

• Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi-cates that there is a malfunction in theICC system

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:This indicator indicates the set vehiclespeed. For Canadian models, the speedis displayed in km/h.

Operating conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control modeTo turn on the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode, push and hold theON/OFF switch OA for longer than about 1.5seconds.When pushing ON/OFF switch on, the con-ventional (fixed speed) cruise control modedisplay and indicators OB are displayed inthe vehicle information display. After youhold ON/OFF switch on for longer thanabout 1.5 seconds, the ICC system displayturns off. The cruise indicator appears. Youcan now set your desired cruising speed.

LSD3106 LSD3764


Pushing the ON/OFF switch again will turnthe system completely off. When the igni-tion switch is placed in the OFF position, thesystem is also automatically turned off.To use the ICC system again, quickly pushand release the ON/OFF switch (vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode) or push andhold it (conventional cruise control mode)again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruisecontrol, make sure to turn the ON/OFFswitch off when not using the ICCsystem. To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET OC switch and release it. (Thecolor of the cruise indicator changes togreen and set vehicle speed indicatorcomes on.) Take your foot off the accelera-tor pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the setspeed.• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-ously set speed.

• The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steep hills.If this happens, manually maintain ve-hicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of thefollowing methods:1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speedindicator will turn off.

3. Turn the ON/OFF switch off. Both thecruise indicator and vehicle speed indi-cator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods:1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the


2. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the desiredspeed, release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, theset speed will increase by about 1 mph(1.6 km/h).

LSD3765


To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods:1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, pushthe COAST/SET switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the setspeed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehiclewill resume the last set cruising speedwhen the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40km/h).

System temporarily disabledA chime sounds under the following conditionsand the control is automatically canceled:

• When the vehicle slows down more than8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed

• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)or manual shift mode

LSD3766


• When the parking brake is applied• When the VDC operates (including the

traction control system)• When a wheel slipsWhen the system is not operating properly,the chime sounds and the color of thecruise indicator will change to orange.Action to takeIf the color of the cruise indicator changesto orange, stop the vehicle in a safe placeand place the shift lever in the P (Park) po-sition. Turn the engine off, restart the en-gine, resume driving, and then perform thesetting again.If it is not possible to set or the indicatorstays on, it may indicate that the systemis malfunctioning. Although the vehicleis still drivable under normal conditions,have the vehicle checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the RABsystem could result in serious injury ordeath.• The RAB system is a supplemental

aid to the driver. It is not a replace-ment for proper driving procedures.Always use the side and rear mirrorsand turn and look in the direction youwill move before and while backingup. Never rely solely on the RAB sys-tem. It is the driver’s responsibility tostay alert, drive safely, and be in con-trol of the vehicle at all times.

• There is a limitation to the RAB sys-tem capability. The RAB system is noteffective in all situations.

• Inclement weather or ultrasonicsources such as an automatic carwash, a truck’s compressed-airbrakes or a pneumatic drill may af-fect the function of the system; thismay include reduced performance ora false activation.

The RAB system can assist the driver whenthe vehicle is backing up and approachingobjects directly behind the vehicle.

The RAB system detects obstacles behindthe vehicle using the parking sensors O1

located on the rear bumper.

NOTE:

You can temporarily cancel the sonarfunction in the vehicle, but the RAB sys-tem will continue to operate. For addi-tional information, see “Front and rearsonar system” (P. 5-124).

LSD3716

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)


RAB SYSTEM OPERATION�1 RAB system warning light and RAB sys-

tem indicator

�2 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (leftside)

�3 Center display

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)position and the vehicle speed is less thanapproximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RABsystem operates.If a risk of a collision with an obstacle isdetected when your vehicle is backing up,the RAB system warning indicator will flashin the vehicle information display, a redframe will appear in the center display (forvehicles with the Intelligent Around ViewMonitor system), and the system will chimethree times. The system will then auto-matically apply the brakes. After the auto-matic brake application, the driver mustdepress the brake pedal to maintain brakepressure.

NOTE:• The brake lights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the RABsystem.

• When the brakes operate, a noise maybe heard. This is not a malfunction.

LSD3717


TURNING THE RAB SYSTEMON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the RABsystem on or off.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-plays in the vehicle information displayand then press the ENTER button. Usethe button to select “Driver Assis-tance.” Then press the ENTER button.

2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press theENTER button.

3. To set the RAB system to on or off, usethe ENTER button to check the box for“Rear.”

4. Push the Parking Aids system switch toturn the system on or off.

When the RAB system is turned off, the RABsystem warning light illuminates.

NOTE:The RAB system will be automaticallyturned on when the engine is re-started.

LSD3736


RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONSWARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the RAB system. Failure to follow thewarnings and instructions for properuse of the RAB system could result inserious injury or death.• When the vehicle approaches an ob-

stacle while the accelerator or brakepedal is depressed, the function maynot operate or the start of operationmay be delayed. The RAB systemmay not operate or may not performsufficiently due to vehicle conditions,driving conditions, the traffic envi-ronment, the weather, road surfaceconditions, etc. Do not wait for thesystem to operate. Operate the brakepedal by yourself as soon asnecessary.

• If it is necessary to override RAB op-eration, strongly press the accelera-tor pedal.

• Always check your surroundings andturn to check what is behind you be-fore and while backing up. The RABsystem detects stationary objectsbehind the vehicle. The RAB systemdoes not detect the following ob-jects:– Moving objects– Low objects– Narrow objects– Wedge-shaped objects– Objects close to the bumper (less

than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])– Objects that suddenly appear– Thin objects such as rope, wire,

chain, etc.• The RAB system may not operate for

the following obstacles:– Obstacles located high off the

ground– Obstacles in a position offset from

your vehicle– Obstacles, such as spongy materi-

als or snow, that have soft outersurfaces and can easily absorb asound wave

• The RAB system may not operate inthe following conditions:– There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc.,

attached to the sonar sensors.– A loud sound is heard in the area

around the vehicle.– The surface of the obstacle is di-

agonal to the rear of the vehicle.• The RAB system may unintentionally

operate in the following conditions:– There is overgrown grass in the

area around the vehicle.– There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll

gate equipment, a narrow tunnel,a parking lot gate) near the side ofthe vehicle.

– There are bumps, protrusions, ormanhole covers on the roadsurface.

– The vehicle drives through adraped flag or a curtain.

– There is an accumulation of snowor ice behind the vehicle.

– An ultrasonic wave source, such asanother vehicle’s sonar, is nearthe vehicle.


• Once the automatic brake controloperates, it does not operate again ifthe vehicle approaches the sameobstacle.

• The automatic brake control can onlyoperate for a short period of time.Therefore, the driver must depressthe brake pedal.

• In the following situations, the RABsystem may not operate properly ormay not function sufficiently:– The vehicle is driven in bad

weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).– The vehicle is driven on a steep

hill.– The vehicle’s posture is changed

(e.g., when driving over a bump).– The vehicle is driven on a slippery

road.– The vehicle is turned sharply by

turning the steering wheel fully.– Snow chains are used.– Wheels or tires other than NISSAN

recommended are used.– The brakes are cold at low ambi-

ent temperatures or immediatelyafter driving has started.

– The braking force becomes poordue to wet brakes after drivingthrough a puddle or washing thevehicle.

• Turn the RAB system off in the follow-ing conditions to prevent the occur-rence of an unexpected accident re-sulting from sudden systemoperation:– The vehicle is towed.– The vehicle is carried on a flatbed

truck.– The vehicle is on the chassis

dynamometer.– The vehicle drives on an uneven

road surface.– The vehicle is towing an object (if

so equipped).– Suspension parts other than

those designated as GenuineNISSAN parts are used. (If the ve-hicle height or the vehicle body in-clination is changed, the systemmay not detect an obstaclecorrectly.)

• Excessive noise (e.g., audio systemvolume, an open vehicle window) willinterfere with the chime sound, and itmay not be heard.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONIf the RAB system malfunctions, it will beturned off automatically, and the RAB sys-tem warning light will illuminate and thewarning message “System fault See Own-er’s Manual” in the vehicle informationdisplay.Action to takeIf the warning light illuminates, park the ve-hicle in a safe location, turn the engine off,and restart the engine. If the warning lightcontinues to illuminate, have the RAB sys-tem checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

If the RAB system cannot be operatedtemporarily, the RAB system warninglight blinks.


SYSTEM MAINTENANCEObserve the following items to ensureproper operation of the system:• Always keep the parking sensors O1

clean.• If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them

off with a soft cloth while being careful tonot damage them.

• Do not subject the area around the park-ing sensors O1 to strong impact. Also, donot remove or disassemble the parkingsensors. If the parking sensors and pe-ripheral areas are deformed in an acci-dent, etc., have the sensors checked. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

• Do not install any stickers (includingtransparent stickers) or accessories onthe parking sensors O1 and their sur-rounding areas. This may cause a mal-function or improper operation.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the AEBwith Pedestrian Detection systemcould result in serious injury or death.• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system is a supplemental aid to thedriver. It is not a replacement for thedriver’s attention to traffic condi-tions or responsibility to drive safely.It cannot prevent accidents due tocarelessness or dangerous drivingtechniques.

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem does not function in all driv-ing, traffic, weather and roadconditions.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemcan assist the driver when there is a risk ofa forward collision with the vehicle ahead inthe traveling lane or with a pedestrianahead in the traveling lane.

LSD3716

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING(AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION


The AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemuses a radar sensor located on the front ofthe vehicle OB to measure the distance tothe vehicle ahead in the same lane. Forpedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De-tection system uses a camera installed be-hind the windshield OA in addition to theradar sensor.

AEB WITH PEDESTRIANDETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emer-gency warning indicator

LSD3719

LSD3726


3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemwarning light

The AEB system operates at speeds aboveapproximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pe-destrian detection function, the systemoperates at speeds between 6 – 37 mph (10– 60 km/h).If a risk of a forward collision is detected,the AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemwill firstly provide the warning to the driverby flashing the vehicle ahead detection in-dicator (yellow) in the vehicle informationdisplay and providing an audible alert. If thedriver applies the brakes quickly and force-fully after the warning, and the AEB withPedestrian Detection system detects thatthere is still the possibility of a forward col-lision, the system will automatically in-crease the braking force.If the driver does not take action, the AEBwith Pedestrian Detection system issuesthe second visual (flashing) (red and white)and audible warning. If the driver releasesthe accelerator pedal, then the system ap-plies partial braking. If the risk of a collisionbecomes imminent, the AEB with Pedes-trian Detection system applies harderbraking automatically.

While the AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem is operating, you may hear thesound of brake operation. This is normaland indicates that the AEB with PedestrianDetection system is operating properly.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on whenany braking is performed by the AEBwith Pedestrian Detection system.Depending on vehicle speed and distanceto the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as wellas driving and roadway conditions, the sys-tem may help the driver avoid a forwardcollision or may help mitigate the conse-quences if a collision should be unavoid-able. If the driver is handling the steeringwheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB withPedestrian Detection system will functionlater or will not function.The automatic braking will cease under thefollowing conditions:• When the steering wheel is turned to

avoid a collision.• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.• When there is no longer a vehicle or a

pedestrian detected ahead.

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-tem has stopped the vehicle, the vehiclewill remain at a standstill for approximately2 seconds before the brakes are released.


TURNING THE AEB WITHPEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEMON/OFF

Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem.



3. Select “Front” and press the ENTER but-ton to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem is turned off, the AEB with Pedes-trian Detection system warning lightilluminates.

NOTE:• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem will be automatically turned onwhen the engine is restarted.

• The I-FCW system is integrated into theAEB with Pedestrian Detection system.There is not a separate selection in thevehicle information display for theI-FCW system. When the AEB system isturned off, the I-FCW system is alsoturned off.

LSD3718


AEB WITH PEDESTRIANDETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem. Failure to operate the vehicle inaccordance with these system limita-tions could result in serious injury ordeath.• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system cannot detect all vehicles orpedestrians under all conditions.

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem does not detect the followingobjects:– Small pedestrians (including

small children), animals andcyclists.

– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us-ing mobile transport such asscooters, child-operated toys, orskateboards.

– Pedestrians who are seated orotherwise not in a full uprightstanding or walking position.

– Oncoming vehicles– Crossing vehicles– Obstacles on the roadside

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem has some performancelimitations.– If a stationary vehicle is in the ve-

hicle’s path, the AEB with Pedes-trian Detection system will notfunction when the vehicle isdriven at speeds over approxi-mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

– For pedestrian detection, the AEBwith Pedestrian Detection systemwill not function when the vehicleis driven at speeds over approxi-mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or belowapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem will not function for pedestri-ans in darkness or in tunnels, even ifthere is street lighting in the area.

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem may not function if the ve-hicle ahead is narrow (for example, amotorcycle).

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem may not function if the speeddifference between the two vehiclesis too small.

• The radar sensor AEB with Pedes-trian Detection system may notfunction properly or detect a vehicleahead in the following conditions:– Poor visibility (conditions such as

rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand-storms, and road spray from othervehicles)

– Driving on a steep downhill slopeor roads with sharp curves.

– Driving on a bumpy road surface,such as an uneven dirt road.

– If dirt, ice, snow or other materialis covering the radar sensor area.

– Interference by other radarsources.

– The camera area of the windshieldis fogged up, or covered with dirt,water drops, ice, snow, etc.

– When you are towing a trailer etc.


– Strong light (for example, sunlightor high beams from oncoming ve-hicles) enters the front camera.Strong light causes the areaaround the pedestrian to be castin a shadow, making it difficult tosee.

– A sudden change in brightnessoccurs. (For example, when thevehicle enters or exits a tunnel or ashaded area or lightning flashes.)

– The poor contrast of a person tothe background, such as havingclothing color or pattern which issimilar to the background.

– The pedestrian’s profile is partiallyobscured or unidentifiable due tothe pedestrian transporting lug-gage, wearing bulky or very loose-fitting clothing or accessories.

• The system performance may de-grade in the following conditions:– The vehicle is driven on a slippery

road.– The vehicle is driven on a slope.– Excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the trunkroom of your vehicle.

• The system is designed to automati-cally check the sensor’s (radar andcamera) functionality, within certainlimitations. The system may not de-tect blockage of sensor areas cov-ered by ice, snow or stickers, for ex-ample. In these cases, the systemmay not be able to warn the driverproperly. Be sure that you check,clean and clear sensor areasregularly.

• In some road and traffic conditions,the AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem may unexpectedly apply par-tial braking. When acceleration isnecessary, depress the acceleratorpedal to override the system.

• Excessive noise will interfere with thewarning chime sound, and the chimemay not be heard.



Condition A:In the following conditions, the AEB withPedestrian Detection system warning lightblinks and the system will be turned offautomatically:• The radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source.• The camera area of the windshield is

misted or frozen.• Strong light is shining from the front.• The cabin temperature is over approxi-

mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.• The camera area of the windshield glass

is continuously covered with dirt, etc.Action to takeWhen the above conditions no longer exist,the AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemwill resume automatically.

NOTE:

When the inside of the windshield on thecamera area is misted or frozen, it willtake a period of time to remove it afterthe A/C turns on. If dirt appears on thisarea, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer.

LSD3727


Condition B:When there is inclement weather (rain, fog,snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor,the AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemwill be canceled, the chime will sound andthe “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Dis-abled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’sManual” warning message will appear inthe vehicle information display.Action to take:When the conditions listed above are nolonger present, the warning message willno longer be available in the vehicle infor-mation display. If the “Forward Driving AidsTemporarily Disabled Front Sensor BlockedSee Owner’s Manual” warning messagecontinues to be displayed, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.Condition C:When the radar sensor of the front bumperis covered with dirt or is obstructed, theAEB with Pedestrian Detection system willautomatically be canceled. The chime willsound and the “Forward Driving Aids Tem-porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See

Owner’s Manual” warning message will ap-pear in the vehicle information display.Action to take:If the warning message appears, stop thevehicle in a safe place, place the shift leverin the P (Park) position, and turn the engineoff. When the radar signal is temporarilyinterrupted, clean the sensor area of thefront bumper and restart the engine. If the“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily DisabledFront Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”warning message continues to be dis-played, have the system checked. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.Condition DWhen driving on roads with limited roadstructures or buildings (for example, longbridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next tolong walls), the system may illuminate thesystem warning light and display the “For-ward Driving Aids Temporarily DisabledFront Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”message.Action to take:When the above driving conditions no lon-ger exist, turn the system back on.

NOTE:If the AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem stops working, the I-FCW sys-tem will also stop working.


SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONIf the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto-matically, a chime will sound, the AEB withPedestrian Detection system warning light(orange) will illuminate and the warningmessage “System fault See Owner’sManual” will appear in the vehicle informa-tion display.

Action to takeIf the warning light (orange) comes on, stopthe vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-ing light continues to illuminate, have theAEB with Pedestrian Detection systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe radar sensor is located on the front ofthe vehicle OB . The camera is located onthe upper side of the windshield OA .To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detectionsystem operating properly, be sure to ob-serve the following:• Always keep the sensor areas of the front

bumper/emblem and windshield clean.• Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensors (e.g., bumper,windshield).

LSD3916 LSD3719


• Do not cover or attach stickers, or installany accessory near the sensors. Thiscould block sensor signals and/or causefailure or malfunction.

• Do not attach metallic objects near theradar sensor (brush guard, etc.). Thiscould cause failure or malfunction.

• Do not place reflective materials, such aswhite paper or a mirror, on the instru-ment panel. The reflection of sunlightmay adversely affect the camera unit'sdetection capability.

• Do not alter, remove or paint the frontbumper. Before customizing or restoringthe front bumper, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statementFCC NoticeUSAFCC ID: OAYARS4BThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules with Industry Canada Licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and


Radiofrequency radiation exposureInformation:This equipment complies with FCC and ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment.This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 30cm between the radiator and your body.This transmitter must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with anyother antenna or transmitter.FCC NoticeChanges or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.CANADAIC: 4135A-ARS4BThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause

interference,


Le présent appareil est conforme auxCNR d’Industrie Canada applicables auxappareils radio exempts de licence.L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes:1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et


Radiofrequency radiation exposureInformation:This equipment complies with FCC and ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment.This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 30cm between the radiator and your body.


This transmitter must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with anyother antenna or transmitter.Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-ites d’exposition aux rayonnements ICétablies pour un environnement noncontrôlé. Cet équipement doit être in-stallé et utillisé avec un minimum de 30cm de distance entre la source de rayon-nement et votre corps.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the I-FCWsystem could result in serious injury ordeath.• The I-FCW system can help warn the

driver before a collision occurs butwill not avoid a collision. It is the driv-er’s responsibility to stay alert, drivesafely and be in control of the vehicleat all times.

The I-FCW system can help alert the driverwhen there is a sudden braking of a secondvehicle traveling in front of the vehicleahead in the same lane. The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor O1

located on the front of the vehicle to mea-sure the distance to the vehicle ahead inthe same lane.

LSD3712

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISIONWARNING (I-FCW)


1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemwarning light

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATIONThe I-FCW system operates at speedsabove approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).If there is a potential risk of a forward colli-sion, the I-FCW system will warn the driverby blinking the vehicle ahead detection in-dicator, and sounding an audible alert.

LSD3728


TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEMON/OFFPerform the following steps to turn theI-FCW system ON or OFF.1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.Use the button to select “Driver As-sistance.” Then press the ENTER button.


3. Select “Front” and press the ENTER but-ton to turn the system on or off.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, theAEB with Pedestrian Detection systemwarning light illuminates.

NOTE:• The I-FCW system will be automatically

turned on when the engine isrestarted.

• The I-FCW system is integrated into theAEB with Pedestrian Detection system.There is not a separate selection in thevehicle information display for theI-FCW system. When the AEB with Pe-destrian Detection system is turnedoff, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

LSD2263


I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONSLSD3718

LSD2312Illustration A


WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the I-FCW system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.• The I-FCW system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

• The radar sensor does not detect thefollowing objects:– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway– Oncoming vehicles– Crossing vehicles

• (Illustration A) The I-FCW systemdoes not function when a vehicleahead is a narrow vehicle, such as amotorcycle.

• The radar sensor may not detect avehicle ahead in the followingconditions:– Snow or heavy rain– When you are towing a trailer etc.– Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor.– Interference by other radar

sources.– Snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles.– Driving in a tunnel

LSD2265Illustration B


– (Illustration B) When the vehicleahead is being towed.

– (Illustration C) When the distanceto the vehicle ahead is too close,the beam of the radar sensor isobstructed.

– (Illustration D) When driving on asteep downhill slope or roads withsharp curves.

• The system is designed to automati-cally check the sensor’s functionality,within certain limitations. The sys-tem may not detect some forms ofobstruction of the sensor area suchas ice, snow, stickers, etc. In thesecases, the system may not be able towarn the driver properly. Be sure thatyou check, clean and clear the sensorarea regularly.

• Excessive noise will interfere with thewarning chime sound, and the chimemay not be heard.


LSD2266Illustration C


LSD2313Illustration D



Condition AWhen the radar sensor picks up interfer-ence from another radar source, making itimpossible to detect a vehicle ahead, theI-FCW system is automatically turned off.The AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemwarning light (orange) will illuminate.Action to takeWhen the above conditions no longer exist,the I-FCW system will resume automatically.Condition BWhen there is inclement weather (rain, fog,snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor,the I-FCW system will automatically becanceled, the chime will sound and the“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily DisabledFront Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”warning message will appear in the vehicleinformation display.Action to take:When the conditions listed above are nolonger present, the warning message willno longer be available in the vehicle infor-mation display. If the “Forward Driving AidsTemporarily Disabled Front Sensor BlockedSee Owner’s Manual” warning messagecontinues to be displayed, have the systemchecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3727


Condition CWhen the radar sensor of the front bumperis covered with dirt or is obstructed, theI-FCW system will automatically be can-celed. The chime will sound and the “For-ward Driving Aids Temporarily DisabledFront Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”warning message will appear in the vehicleinformation display.Action to take:If the warning message appears, stop thevehicle in a safe place, place the shift leverin the P (Park) position, and turn the engineoff. When the radar signal is temporarilyinterrupted, clean the sensor area of thefront bumper and restart the engine. If the“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily DisabledFront Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”warning message continues to be dis-played, have the system checked. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

Condition DWhen driving on roads with limited roadstructures or buildings (for example, longbridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next tolong walls), the system may illuminate thesystem warning light and display the “For-ward Driving Aids Temporarily DisabledFront Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”warning message.Action to take:When the above driving conditions no lon-ger exist, turn the system back on.

NOTE:

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-tem stops working, the I-FCW system willalso stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONIf the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will beturned off automatically, a chime will sound,the AEB with Pedestrian Detection systemwarning light (orange) will illuminate and thewarning message [Malfunction] will appearin the vehicle information display.Action to takeIf the warning light (orange) comes on, stopthe vehicle in a safe location, turn the engineoff and restart the engine. If the warning lightcontinues to illuminate, have the I-FCW sys-tem checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3916


SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe sensor O1 is located on the front of thevehicle.To keep the system operating properly, besure to observe the following:• Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper/emblem clean.• Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.• Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near thesensor area. This could cause failure ormalfunction.

• Do not attach metallic objects near thesensor area (brush guard, etc.). This couldcause failure or malfunction.

• Do not alter, remove or paint the frontbumper. Before customizing or restoringthe front bumper, it is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer.

FCC NoticeUSAFCC ID: OAYARS4BThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules with Industry Canada Licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and


Radiofrequency radiation exposureInformation:This equipment complies with FCC and ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 30cm between the radiator and your body.This transmitter must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with anyother antenna or transmitter.FCC NoticeChanges or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.CANADAIC: 4135A-ARS4BThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause

interference,


Le présent appareil est conforme auxCNR d’Industrie Canada applicables auxappareils radio exempts de licence.

LSD3712


L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes:1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et


Radiofrequency radiation exposureInformation:This equipment complies with FCC and ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment.This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 30cm between the radiator and your body.This transmitter must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with anyother antenna or transmitter.Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-ites d’exposition aux rayonnements ICétablies pour un environnement noncontrôlé. Cet équipement doit être in-stallé et utillisé avec un minimum de 30cm de distance entre la source de rayon-nement et votre corps.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use of the I-DAsystem could result in serious injury ordeath.• The I–DA system is only a warning to

inform the driver of a potential lackof driver attention or drowsiness. Itwill not steer the vehicle or preventloss of control.

• The I–DA system does not detect andprovide an alert of the driver’s lack ofattention or fatigue in everysituation.

• It is the driver’s responsibility to:– stay alert,– drive safely,– keep the vehicle in the traveling

lane,– be in control of the vehicle at all

times,– avoid driving when tired,– avoid distractions (texting, etc.).

The I–DA system helps alert the driver if thesystem detects a lack of attention or driv-ing fatigue.The system monitors driving style andsteering behavior over a period of time,and it detects changes from the normalpattern. If the system detects that driverattention is decreasing over a period oftime, the system uses audible and visualwarnings to suggest that the driver take abreak.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS(I-DA)


INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESSSYSTEM OPERATIONIf the system detects driver fatigue or thatdriver attention is decreasing, the mes-sage “Take a break?” appears in the vehicleinformation display and a chime soundswhen the vehicle is driven at speeds above37 mph (60 km/h).The system continuously monitors driverattention and can provide multiple warn-ings per trip.

The system resets and starts reassessingdriving style and steering behavior whenthe ignition switch is cycled from the ON tothe OFF position and back to the ONposition.

LSD3735


HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THEINTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS(I-DA) SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the I–DA system.


2. Select “Driver Attention” and press theENTER button to turn the system on oroff.

NOTE:The setting will be retained even ifthe engine is restarted.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS(I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the I–DA system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.• The I-DA system may not operate

properly and may not provide analert in the following conditions:– Poor road conditions such as an

uneven road surface or pot holes.– Strong side wind.

LSD3729


– If you have adopted a sporty driv-ing style with higher corneringspeeds or higher rates ofacceleration.

– Frequent lane changes orchanges to vehicle speed.

• The I–DA system will not provide analert in the following conditions:– Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph

(60 km/h).– Short lapses of attention.– Instantaneous distractions such

as dropping an object.

System malfunctionIf the Intelligent Driver Alertness systemmalfunctions, the system warning mes-sage will appear in the vehicle informationdisplay and the function will be stoppedautomatically.

Action to takeStop the vehicle in a safe location, place thevehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engineoff and restart the engine. If the systemwarning message continues to appear,have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

LIC3125


CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to ob-tain maximum engine performanceand ensure the future reliability andeconomy of your new vehicle. Failure tofollow these recommendations mayresult in shortened engine life and re-duced engine performance.

• Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not runthe engine over 4,000 rpm.

• Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

• Avoid quick starts.• Avoid hard braking as much as possible.• Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle orother parts could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel EfficientDriving Tips to help you achieve the mostfuel economy from your vehicle.1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application• Avoid rapid starts and stops.• Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.• Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed• Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.• Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-ber of stops.

• Maintaining a steady speed can mini-mize red light stops and improve fuelefficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at HigherVehicle Speeds• Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool thevehicle due to reduced engine load.

• Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is moreefficient to use A/C to cool the vehicledue to increased aerodynamic drag.

• Recirculating the cool air in the cabinwhen the A/C is on reduces coolingload.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds andDistances• Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where le-gally allowed) can improve fuel effi-ciency due to reduced aerodynamicdrag.

• Maintaining a safe following distancebehind other vehicles reduces unnec-essary braking.

• Safely monitoring traffic to anticipatechanges in speed permits reducedbraking and smooth accelerationchanges.

• Select a gear range suitable to roadconditions.

5. Use Cruise Control• Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady speed.• Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when drivingon flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route• Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save time.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS


7. Avoid Idling• Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 30–60 seconds savesfuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads• Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruisingspeed through the toll and avoid stop-ping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up• Limit idling time to minimize impact to

fuel economy.• Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to ef-fectively circulate the engine oil beforedriving.

• Your vehicle will reach its ideal operat-ing temperature more quickly whiledriving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool• Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade wheneverpossible.

• When entering a hot vehicle, openingthe windows will help to reduce theinside temperature faster, resulting inreduced demand on your A/C system.

• Keep your engine tuned up.• Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.• Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tirewear and lowers fuel economy.

• Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

• For vehicles equipped with , use 4Hor 4L position only when necessary.4-Wheel Drive operation lowers fueleconomy.

• Use the recommended viscosity engineoil. For additional information, see “Engineoil and oil filter recommendations”(P. 10-7).

WARNING

• For 4WD equipped vehicles, do notattempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may resultin drivetrain damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could resultin serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

• Do not attempt to test a 4WDequipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-mometer (such as the dynamom-eters used by some states for emis-sions testing) or similar equipmenteven if the other two wheels areraised off the ground. Make sure youinform test facility personnel thatyour vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamom-eter. Using the wrong test equipmentmay result in drivetrain damage orunexpected vehicle movementwhich could result in serious vehicledamage or personal injury.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if soequipped)


CAUTION

• Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or4LO position on dry hard surfaceroads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in4H or 4LO may cause unnecessarynoise, tire wear and increased fuelconsumption.If the 4WD vehicle information dis-play warning message turns onwhen you are driving on dry hard sur-face roads:– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position, stop the ve-hicle, move the shift lever to the N(Neutral) position with the brakepedal depressed, and shift the4WD shift switch to 2WD.

• If the vehicle information displaywarning message is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURESThe part time 4WD system provides 3 posi-tions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can selectthe desired drive mode according to thedriving conditions.2WD or 4WD shift procedure:


4WD shift switchposition

Wheelsdriven

IndicatorUse conditions 4WD shift procedure4WD shift Transfer 4LO

position2WD

Rearwheels

For driving on dry, paved roads(Economy drive)

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> 4HThe 4WD shift indicator will indicate that thetransfer shift position is engaged.IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT LE-VER TO THE N (NEUTRAL) POSITION IN THIS OP-ERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHENDRIVING STRAIGHT.

4HFourwheels

For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-covered roads

N (Neu-tral)

*1May blink

N (Neutral) disengages the automatictransmission (A/T) mechanical parkinglock, which will allow the vehicle to roll.Do not leave the transfer shift positionin N (Neutral).*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. With the brake pedal depressed, move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.3. With the brake pedal depressed, depress and

turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H.THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BE-TWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESSYOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DE-PRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THESHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL). *3

4LO

Fourwheels

Illuminated For use when maximum power andtraction is required (for example, onsteep grades or rocky, sandy, muddyroads)

*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the 4LO indicator stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed and thetransfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engagecorrectly or stay in the N (Neutral) position.

- If the 4WD vehicle information display warning message illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to the correct operatingcondition.

1. Turn off the engine by placing the ignition switch in the OFF position.

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD vehicle information display warning message turns off. If the warning message in the vehicle information display stays on, have thesystem checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.


3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to the desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be in the ON position and the vehicle's engine must be running for a shift to take place and forthe 4WD shift and 4LO position indicators to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicators will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The

indicator light will also turn on when 4LO is selected. For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-120).


The transfer case 4WD shift switch is usedto select either 2WD or 4WD depending onthe driving conditions. There are threetypes of drive modes available: 2WD, 4H and4LO.The 4WD shift switch electronically controlsthe transfer case operation. Rotate theswitch to move between each mode: 2WD,4H and 4LO.To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicleMUST be stationary, move the shift leverto N (Neutral), and depress the brakepedal. The switch must be pushed andturned to select 4LO.

WARNING

• When parking, apply the parkingbrake before stopping the engineand make sure that the 4WD shift in-dicator is on and the AutomaticTransmission Park (ATP) warninglight goes off. Otherwise, the vehiclecould unexpectedly move even if theA/T is in the P (Park) position.

• The 4LO indicator must stop blinkingand remain illuminated or turn offbefore shifting the transmission intogear. If the shift lever is shifted fromthe N (Neutral) position to any othergear when the 4LO indicator is blink-ing, the vehicle may moveunexpectedly.

CAUTION

• Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

• The 4H position provides greatertraction. Avoid excessive speed, as itwill cause increased fuel consump-tion and higher oil temperatures, andcould damage drivetrain compo-nents. Speeds over 62 mph (100km/h) in 4H is not recommended.

• The 4LO position provides maximumpower and traction. Avoid raising ve-hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-mum speed is approximately 31 mph(50 km/h).

• When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H posi-tion. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn orreversing.

• Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD and 4H) while driving onsteep downhill grades. Use the en-gine brake and low A/T gears (M1 orM2) for engine braking.

• Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD and 4H) with the rearwheels spinning.

• Do not drive on dry hard surfaceroads in the 4H or 4LO position. Driv-ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise andtire wear. NISSAN recommends driv-ing in the 2WD position under theseconditions.

• The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at lowambient temperatures and thetransfer 4LO position indicator mayblink even when the 4WD shift switchis shifted. After driving for a whileyou can change the 4WD transfercase between 4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,• Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.• Drive carefully according to the road sur-

face conditions.


When the vehicle is stuck,• Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.• Place stones or wooden blocks under the

tires to free the vehicle.• Use the Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system (if so equipped). For addi-tional information, see “Electronic lockingrear differential (E-lock) system” (P. 5-114).

• If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock thevehicle back and forth between reverseand drive gears.

• If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, placestones or wooden blocks under the tires.Then try the recovery procedures above.Tire chains may be effective.

CAUTION

• Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

• Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations• Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending ondriving conditions.

• If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the key switch isturned off while in the 4H or 4LO, youmay feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.

• You may hear some noise as the sys-tem shifts or engages. This is notabnormal.

CAUTION

• When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H posi-tion. Do not move the 4WD shiftswitch when making a turn orreversing.

• Do not shift the 4WD shift switchwhile driving on steep downhillgrades. Use the engine brake and lowautomatic transmission gears (M1 orM2) for engine braking.

• Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

• Before placing the 4WD shift switchin the 4H position from 2WD, ensurethe vehicle speed is less than 62 mph(100 km/h). Failure to do so can dam-age the 4WD system.

• Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD2463


4WD shift indicatorThe 4WD shift indicator is located in thevehicle information display.While the engine is running, the 4WD shiftindicator will illuminate the position se-lected by the 4WD shift switch.• The 4WD shift indicator may come on

while shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator will stayon.

• If the 4WD vehicle information displaywarning message comes on, the 4WD in-dicator goes out.

CAUTION

• If the 4WD shift indicator indicationchanges to 2WD when the 4WD shiftswitch is shifted to the 4H position atlow ambient temperatures, the 2WDmode may be being engaged due tomalfunctioning drive system. If theindicator does not return to normaland the 4WD vehicle information dis-play warning message comes on,have the system checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Warning message

Warning message Warning messagecomes on when:Vehicle information

display

4WD Error: See Owner’sManual

There is a malfunctionin the 4–Wheel Drive

system

FRT & RR tire size differ-ence: See Owner’s

Manual

The difference in wheelrotation is large

CAUTION

• If the warning message comes onduring operation or rapidly afterstopping the vehicle for a while, haveyour vehicle checked as soon as pos-sible. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

• Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warn-ing message turns on.

• When the warning message comeson, the 2WD mode may be engagedeven if the 4WD shift switch is in 4H.Be especially careful when driving. Ifcorresponding parts are malfunc-tioning, the 4WD mode will not be en-gaged even if the 4WD shift switch isshifted.

• Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or4LO position on dry hard surfaceroads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in4H or 4LO may cause unnecessarynoise, tire wear and increased fuelconsumption.If the 4WD warning message turns onwhen you are driving on dry hard sur-face roads:– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

LSD2328


– In the 4LO position, stop the ve-hicle, move the automatic trans-mission shift lever to the N (Neu-tral) position with the brake pedaldepressed, and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

• If the warning message is still on af-ter the above operation, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

• The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warn-ing message on.

The E-Lock system can provide additionaltraction and should only be used when avehicle has become or is becoming stuck.This system operates by electronically“locking” the two rear drive wheels to-gether, allowing them to turn at the samespeed. The system is used when it is notpossible to free a stuck vehicle even whenusing the 4LO position (4-Wheel Drivevehicles).When added traction is required, activatethe E-Lock system by pushing the switchon. For additional information, see “Elec-tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-tem switch” (P. 2-61). Once the system fullyengages, the indicator light in the instru-ment panel will remain on. When the sys-tem is activated, both rear wheels will en-gage, providing added traction.The rear wheels may momentarily slip ormove to engage the system, and the sys-tem will only engage up to approximately 4mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, thesystem should be turned off and drivingresumed.The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is dis-abled and the ABS warning light illumi-nates when the E-Lock system is on.

WARNING

• Never leave the E-Lock system onwhen driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehiclemay result in the rear wheels slippingand result in an accident and per-sonal injury. After using the E-Locksystem to free the vehicle, turn thesystem off.

• Use the E-Lock system only in anemergency when it is not possible tofree a stuck vehicle even when using4LO. Never use the E-Lock system ona slippery road surface such as snowor ice surface. Using the E-Lock sys-tem when driving in these road con-ditions may cause unexpectedmovement of the vehicle during en-gine braking, accelerating or turning,which may result in an accident andserious personal injury.

• Observe the above warnings. Other-wise, loss of normal steering controlmay result. This may result in an ac-cident and serious personal injury.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (ifso equipped)


CAUTION

• After using the E-Lock system, orduring normal driving, turn theswitch off to prevent possible dam-age to the drivetrain componentsfrom extended use.

• Avoid quick starts while the E-Locksystem is in operation. Otherwise,the drivetrain components could bedamaged.

• When the E-Lock system is in opera-tion, turning the vehicle becomes dif-ficult. This can be dangerous, espe-cially at high speeds. Doing so coulddamage the drivetrain components.

• Do not operate the E-Lock systemwhen the vehicle is turning or whenone side wheel is rotating. Otherwise,the drivetrain components could bedamaged.

• The E-Lock system operates onlywhen the engine is running.

• In 4H mode, the E-Lock system doesnot operate when the E-Lock systemswitch is turned to the ON position.(The E-Lock system indicator lightwill flash.)

• Observe the above cautions. Other-wise, loss of normal steering controlmay result.

When the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-tion, the ECO management displayappears.

�1 Previous 5 times (History)

�2 Current fuel economy

�3 Best fuel economyThe result of ECO evaluation is displayed 30seconds after the ignition switch is placedin the ON position and the vehicle is drivenat least 1/3 miles (500 meters).

�1 The average fuel economy for the pre-vious 5 times will be displayed.

�2 The average fuel economy since thelast reset will be displayed.

�3 The best fuel economy of the past his-tory will be displayed.

The ECO Drive Report can be set to be ONor OFF.

LSD4103

ECO DRIVE REPORT (if so equipped)


WARNING

• Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags. They mayignite and cause a fire.

• Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park).Failure to do so could cause the ve-hicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in an accident. Makesure the shift lever has been pushedas far forward as it can go and cannotbe moved without depressing thefoot brake pedal.

• Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.

• Do not leave children unattended in-side the vehicle. They could unknow-ingly activate switches or controls ormake the vehicle move. Unattendedchildren could become involved inserious accidents.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rollinginto traffic when parked on an incline, itis a good practice to turn the wheels asillustrated.• HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB OA :

Turn the wheels into the curb and

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


move the vehicle forward until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

• HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB OB :Turn the wheels away from the curband move the vehicle back until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

• HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB OC :Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move awayfrom the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

The power assisted steering uses a hy-draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-sist steering.If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,you will still have control of the vehicle.However, much greater steering effort isneeded, especially in sharp turns and atlow speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe steering will not work. Steering willbe harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hy-draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Using the brakesAvoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will overheat the brakes,wear out the brake pads faster, and reducegas mileage.To help reduce brake wear and to preventthe brakes from overheating, reduce speedand downshift to a lower gear before goingdown a slope or long grade. Overheatedbrakes may reduce braking performanceand could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

• While driving on a slippery surface,be careful when braking, accelerat-ing or downshifting. Abrupt brakingor accelerating could cause thewheels to skid and result in anaccident.

• If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the powerassist for the brakes will not work.Braking will be harder.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet. Asa result, your braking distance will be lon-ger and the vehicle may pull to one sideduring braking.To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brakepedal to heat up the brakes. Do this untilthe brakes return to normal. Avoid drivingthe vehicle at high speeds until the brakesfunction correctly.

Parking brake break-inBreak in the parking brake shoes wheneverthe stopping effect of the parking brake isweakened or whenever the parking brakeshoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,in order to assure the best brakingperformance.This procedure is described in the vehicleservice manual. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)WARNING

• The ABS is a sophisticated device, butit cannot prevent accidents resultingfrom careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. It can help maintain ve-hicle control during braking on slip-pery surfaces. Remember that stop-ping distances on slippery surfaceswill be longer than on normal sur-faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or ifyou are using tire chains. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from the ve-hicle in front of you. Ultimately, thedriver is responsible for safety.

• Tire type and condition may also af-fect braking effectiveness.– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size andtype as specified on the Tire andLoading Information label. For ad-ditional information, see “Tire andLoading Information label”(P. 8-37).

– For additional information, see“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-35)

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheelsdo not lock during hard braking or whenbraking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheeland varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding.By preventing each wheel from locking, thesystem helps the driver maintain steeringcontrol and helps to minimize swervingand spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the systemDepress the brake pedal and hold it down.Depress the brake pedal with firm steadypressure, but do not pump the brakes. TheAnti-lock Braking System will operate toprevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.


Self-test featureThe Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you startthe engine and move the vehicle at a lowspeed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noiseand/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.This is normal and does not indicate a mal-function. If the computer senses a mal-function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-nates the ABS warning light on theinstrument panel. The brake system thenoperates normally, but without anti-lockassistance.If the ABS warning light illuminates duringthe self-test or while driving, have the ve-hicle checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operationThe Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actuatorrapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-sure. This action is similar to pumping thebrakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-tion in the brake pedal and hear a noisefrom under the hood or feel a vibrationfrom the actuator when it is operating. Thisis normal and indicates that the ABS is op-erating properly. However, the pulsationmay indicate that road conditions are haz-ardous and extra care is required whiledriving.

BRAKE ASSISTWhen the force applied to the brake pedalexceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist isactivated generating greater braking forcethan a conventional brake booster evenwith light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assistbraking operation and is not a collisionwarning or avoidance device. It is thedriver’s responsibility to stay alert,drive safely and be in control of the ve-hicle at all times.

• The ABLS system uses automatic brak-ing to transfer power from a slipping drivewheel to the wheel on the same axle withmore traction. The ABLS system appliesbraking to the slipping wheel, which helpsredirect power to the other wheel.

• On 4–Wheel Drive (4WD) models the ABLSsystem operates in both 4H and 4LOmodes. If 4WD mode is engaged, theABLS system operates for both drive ax-les. On 2–Wheel Drive vehicles, the ABLSsystem operates on the drive axle only.

• The ABLS system is always on. In someconditions, the system may automati-cally turn the ABLS system off. If the sys-tem is automatically turned off, normalbrake function will continue. ABLS willfunction even when the Vehicle DynamicControl system is turned off.

• The ABLS system does not operate ifboth wheels on a drive axle are slipping.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)SYSTEM


WARNING

• The ABLS system helps provide in-creased traction, but will not preventaccidents due to abrupt steering op-eration or by careless driving or dan-gerous driving practices. Reduce ve-hicle speed and be especially carefulwhen driving and cornering on slip-pery surfaces. Always drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN approved for your vehicleor are extremely deteriorated, theABLS system may not operate prop-erly. This could adversely affect ve-hicle handling performance, and theslip indicator light may illuminate.

• If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the ABLS sys-tem may not operate properly andthe slip indicator light mayilluminate.

• If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones areused, the ABLS system may not oper-ate properly and the slip indicatorlight may illuminate.

The VDC system uses various sensors tomonitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.Under certain driving conditions, the VDCsystem helps to perform the followingfunctions:• Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so poweris transferred to a non-slipping drivewheel on the same axle.

• Controls brake pressure and engine out-put to reduce drive wheel slip based onvehicle speed (traction control function).

• If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LOthe indicator light will come on andthe VDC system will be turned off. Foradditional information, see “Using4-Wheel Drive (4WD)” (P. 5-107).

• Controls brake pressure at individualwheels and engine output to help thedriver maintain control of the vehicle inthe following conditions:– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increasedsteering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due tocertain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver tomaintain control of the vehicle, but it can-not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-ing situations.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


When the VDC system operates, theindicator light in the instrument panelflashes so note the following:• The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is requiredto help keep the vehicle on the steeredpath.

• You may feel a pulsation in the brakepedal and hear a noise or vibration fromunder the hood. This is normal and indi-cates that the VDC system is workingproperly.

• Adjust your speed and driving to the roadconditions.

For additional information, see “Slip indica-tor light” (P. 2-21) and “Vehicle Dynamic Con-trol (VDC) OFF indicator light” (P. 2-21).If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

indicator light will come on in the in-strument panel. The VDC system auto-matically turns off when these indicatorlight is on.The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off theVDC system. The indicator light illumi-nates to indicate the VDC system is off.When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn offthe system, the VDC system still operatesto prevent one drive wheel from slipping bytransferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The indicator light flashes if thisoccurs. All other VDC functions are off andthe indicator light will not flash.The VDC system is automatically reset toON when the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position then back to the ON position.The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-ture that tests the system each time youstart the engine and move the vehicle for-ward or in reverse at a slow speed. Whenthe self-test occurs, you may hear a clunknoise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and is not an indica-tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

• The VDC system is designed to helpthe driver maintain stability but doesnot prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds orby careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehicle speedand be especially careful when driv-ing and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN recommended for yourvehicle or are extremely deterio-rated, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly. This could adversely af-fect vehicle handling performance,and the indicator light may flashor the indicator light mayilluminate.

• If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-tem may not operate properly andthe indicator light mayilluminate.

• If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the indi-cator light may illuminate.

• When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly and the indicatorlight may flash or the indicatorlight may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.


• When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator light mayflash or the indicator light mayilluminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving ontoa stable surface.

• If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones areused, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly and the indicatorlight may flash or the indicatorlight may illuminate.

• The VDC system is not a substitutefor winter tires or tire chains on asnow covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTIONDuring braking while driving through turns,the system optimizes the distribution offorce to each of the front and rear wheelsdepending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

• The VDC system is designed to helpthe driver maintain stability but doesnot prevent accidents due to abruptsteering operation at high speeds orby careless or dangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehicle speedand be especially careful when driv-ing and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-sion. If suspension parts such asshock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-bilizer bars, bushings and wheels arenot NISSAN recommended for yourvehicle or are extremely deterio-rated, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly. This could adversely af-fect vehicle handling performance,and the indicator light may flashor the indicator light mayilluminate.

• If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-tem may not operate properly andthe indicator light mayilluminate.

• If engine control related parts are notNISSAN recommended or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the indi-cator light may illuminate.

• When driving on extremely inclinedsurfaces such as higher banked cor-ners, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly and the indicatorlight may flash or the indicatorlight may illuminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

• When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the indicator light mayflash or the indicator light mayilluminate. This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine after driving ontoa stable surface.

• If wheels or tires other than theNISSAN recommended ones areused, the VDC system may not oper-ate properly and the indicatorlight may flash or the indicatorlight may illuminate.

• The VDC system is not a substitutefor winter tires or tire chains on asnow covered road.


WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill descentcontrol system to control vehiclespeed when driving on steep down-hill grades. Always drive carefully andattentively when using the hill de-scent control system and deceleratethe vehicle speed by depressing thebrake pedal if necessary. Be espe-cially careful when driving on frozen,muddy or extremely steep downhillroads. Failure to control vehiclespeed may result in a loss of controlof the vehicle and possible seriousinjury or death.

• The hill descent control may not con-trol the vehicle speed on a hill underall load or road conditions. Always beprepared to depress the brake pedalto control vehicle speed. Failure to doso may result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

The hill descent control system can only beactivated when the 4H or 4LO position isengaged.The hill descent control system helpsmaintain vehicle speed when driving under15 mph (25 km/h) on steeper downhillgrades. Hill descent control is useful whenengine braking alone cannot control ve-hicle speed. Hill descent control applies thevehicle brakes to control vehicle speed al-lowing the driver to concentrate on steer-ing while reducing the burden of brake andaccelerator operation.If the hill descent control system ON indica-tor light is blinking, the hill descent controlis engaged; however, the hill descent con-trol will not control the vehicle speed.• Once the system is activated, the indica-

tor light will remain on in the instrumentpanel. For additional information, see “Hilldescent control system ON indicatorlight” (P. 2-18).

• You may hear a noise from under thehood or feel a vibration from the actuatorwhen it is operating. This indicates thatthe hill descent control system is workingproperly.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-pressed while the hill descent control sys-tem is on, the system will stop operatingtemporarily. As soon as the accelerator orbrake pedal is released, the hill descentcontrol system begins to function again ifthe hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.For the best results, when descendingsteep downhill grades, the hill descent con-trol switch should be ON and the shift leverin M1 (First) for engine braking. For addi-tional information, see “Hill descent controlswitch” (P. 2-59).

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM(if so equipped)


WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill start as-sist system to prevent the vehiclefrom moving backward on a hill. Al-ways drive carefully and attentively.Depress the brake pedal when thevehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Beespecially careful when stopped on ahill on frozen or muddy roads. Failureto prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards may result in a loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and possibleserious injury or death.

• The hill start assist system is not de-signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-still on a hill. Depress the brake pedalwhen the vehicle is stopped on asteep hill. Failure to do so may causethe vehicle to roll backwards andmay result in a collision or seriouspersonal injury.

• The hill start assist may not preventthe vehicle from rolling backwardson a hill under all load or road condi-tions. Always be prepared to depressthe brake pedal to prevent the ve-hicle from rolling backwards. Failureto do so may result in a collision orserious personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hillstart assist system automatically keepsthe brakes applied. This helps prevents thevehicle from rolling backward in the time ittakes the driver to release the brake pedaland apply the accelerator when the vehicleis stopped on a hill.Hill start assist will operate automaticallyunder the following conditions:• The shift lever is shifted to a forward or

reverse gear.• The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to rollback and hill start assist will stop operatingcompletely.Hill start assist will not operate when theshift lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P(Park) or on a flat and level road. When the

indicator light illuminates in the meter,the hill start assist system will not operate.

The front and rear sonar system sounds atone to inform the driver of obstacles nearthe bumper.When the “DISPLAY” key is ON, the sonarview will automatically appear in the meter.

LSD3731

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM(if so equipped)


WARNING

• The front and rear sonar system is aconvenience but it is not a substitutefor proper parking.

• The driver is always responsible forsafety during parking and other ma-neuvers. Always look around andcheck that it is safe to do so beforeparking.

• Read and understand the limitationsof the front and rear sonar system ascontained in this section. The colorsof the corner sonar indicator and thedistance guide lines in the front/rearview indicate different distances tothe object.

• Inclement weather or ultrasonicsources such as an automatic carwash, a truck's compressed-airbrakes or a pneumatic drill may af-fect the function of the system; thismay include reduced performance ora false activation.

• This function is designed as an aid tothe driver in detecting large station-ary objects to help avoid damagingthe vehicle.

• The system is not designed to pre-vent contact with small or movingobjects. Always move slowly. Thesystem will not detect small objectsbelow the bumper, and may not de-tect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

• The system may not detect the fol-lowing objects: fluffy objects such assnow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.;thin objects such as rope, wire andchain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to thebumper fascia, leaving it misaligned orbent, the sensing zone may be alteredcausing inaccurate measurement of ob-stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

• Excessive noise (such as audio sys-tem volume or an open vehicle win-dow) will interfere with the tone andit may not be heard.

• Keep the sonar sensors (located onthe bumper fascia) free from snow,ice and large accumulations of dirt.Do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects. If the sensors are covered,the accuracy of the sonar functionwill be diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATIONThe system informs with a visual and au-dible alert of front obstacles when the shiftlever is in the D (Drive) position and bothfront and rear obstacles when the shift le-ver is in the R (Reverse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor RR SensorRange Sound Display Sound Dis-

playP x † x †R o o o oN x † x †D o o x †

o – Display/Beep when detect† – Display on camera viewx – No Display and Beep


The system is deactivated at speeds above6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec-onds when an obstacle is detected by onlythe corner sensor and the distance doesnot change. The tone will stop when theobstacle gets away from the vehicle.When the object is detected, the indicator(green) appears and blinks and the tonesounds intermittently. When the vehiclemoves closer to the object, the color of theindicator turns yellow and the rate of theblinking increases. When the vehicle is veryclose to the object, the indicator stopsblinking and turns red, and the tonesounds continuously.

When the corner of the vehicle movescloser to an object, the corner sonar indi-cator OA appears.

The system indicators OA will appear whenthe vehicle moves closer to an object.

LSD2466 LSD2467


HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THESONAR SYSTEM

The system is automatically activatedwhen the ignition is in the ON position andthe shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the sonar system using the Ve-hicle Information Display:1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.Use the button to select “Driver As-sistance.” Then press ENTER.

2. Select “Parking Aids” and press ENTER.

3. Select “Sensor” and press ENTER to turnthe sonar system on, off, or front only.

Perform the following steps to enable ordisable the sonar system using the Park-ing Aids system switch:1. Push the “Parking Aids system switch”

(the orange light will go out) to turn thesystem off.

2. To turn the system back on, push theswitch (the orange light will illuminate)and the system will be enabled. For ad-ditional information, see “Parking Aidssystem switch” (P. 2-63) and “Vehicle in-formation display” (P. 2-23).

NOTE:The system will automatically be turnedon when the engine is restarted.

LSD3730


SONAR LIMITATIONSWARNING

Listed below are the system limitationsfor the sonar system. Failure to operatethe vehicle in accordance with thesesystem limitations could result in seri-ous injury or death.• The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other ma-neuvers. Always turn and look backbefore backing up. The sonar systemis not a substitute for properprocedures.

• Read and understand the limitationsof the sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather mayaffect the function of the sonar sys-tem; this may include reduced per-formance or a false activation.

• This system is not designed to pre-vent contact with small or movingobjects.

• The system is designed as an aid tothe driver in detecting large station-ary objects to help avoid damagingthe vehicle. The system will not de-tect small objects below the bumper,and may not detect objects close tothe bumper or on the ground.

• The system is deactivated at speedsabove 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-vated at lower speeds.

• Inclement weather or ultrasonicsources such as an automatic carwash, a truck’s compressed-airbrakes or a pneumatic drill may af-fect the function of the system; thismay include reduced performance ora false activation.

• The system is not designed to pre-vent contact with small or movingobjects. Always move slowly. Thesystem will not detect small objectsbelow the bumper or on the ground.

• The system may not detect the fol-lowing objects: fluffy objects such assnow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.;thin objects such as rope, wire andchain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

• The system may not detect objectsat speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) andmay not detect certain angular ormoving objects.

• The system is deactivated at speedsabove 6 mph (10 km/h) and is reacti-vated at lower speeds.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe sonar sensors O1 are located on thefront and rear bumpers. Always keep thearea near the sonar sensors clean.The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem-porary ambient conditions such as splash-ing water, mist or fog.The blocked condition may also be causedby objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-structing the sonar sensors.Check for and remove objects obstructingthe area around the sonar sensors.

LSD2471


Do not attach stickers (including transpar-ent material), install accessories or applyadditional paint near the sonar sensors.Do not strike or damage the area aroundthe sonar sensors. It is recommended thatyou consult a NISSAN dealer if the areaaround the sonar sensors is damaged dueto a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, applyde-icer through the key hole. If the lockbecomes frozen, heat the key before in-serting it into the key hole or use the re-mote keyless entry key fob.

ANTIFREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that thetemperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),check the antifreeze to assure proper win-ter protection. For additional information,see “Engine cooling system” (P. 8-6).

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, thebattery fluid may freeze and damage thebattery. To maintain maximum efficiency,the battery should be checked regularly.For additional information, see “Battery”(P. 8-16).

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATERIf the vehicle is to be left outside withoutantifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-ing the engine block. Refill before operatingthe vehicle. For additional information, see“Changing engine coolant” (P. 8-6).

TIRE EQUIPMENT1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performance ofthese tires will be substantially reducedin snowy and icy conditions. If you oper-ate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all fourwheels. It is recommended that you visita NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,speed rating and availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However,some U.S. states and Canadian prov-inces prohibit their use. Check local,state and provincial laws before install-ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, see “Tire chains” (P. 8-35).

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENTIt is recommended that the following itemsbe carried in the vehicle during winter:• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windowsand wiper blades.

• A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

• A shovel to dig the vehicle out ofsnowdrifts.

• Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

• Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” un-der these conditions. Try to avoiddriving on wet ice until the road issalted or sanded.

• Whatever the condition, drive withcaution. Accelerate and slow downwith care. If accelerating or down-shifting too fast, the drive wheels willlose even more traction.

• Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on drypavement.

• Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

• Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patchof ice is seen ahead, brake beforereaching it. Try not to brake while onthe ice, and avoid any sudden steer-ing maneuvers.

• Do not use the cruise control (if soequipped) on slippery roads.

• Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)Engine block heaters are used to assistwith cold temperature starting.• Engine block heaters should be used

when the outside temperature is 0°F(-17°C) or lower.

• Engine block heaters run continuouslywhile plugged into the correct voltageelectrical outlet.

WARNING

• Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical sys-tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You canbe seriously injured by an electricalshock if you use an ungroundedconnection.

• Disconnect and properly store theengine block heater cord beforestarting the engine. Damage to thecord could result in an electricalshock and can cause serious injury.

• Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-prongedextension cord rated for at least 10 A.Plug the extension cord into aGround Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.Failure to use the proper extensioncord or a grounded outlet can resultin a fire or electrical shock and causeserious personal injury.


To use the engine block heater:1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engineblock heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a GroundFault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must beplugged in for at least 2–4 hours, de-pending on outside temperatures, toproperly warm the engine coolant. Usean appropriate timer to turn the engineblock heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug andproperly store the cord to keep it awayfrom moving parts.

NOTE:When using the engine block heater(if so equipped) on an Applied Vehicle(engine block heater is plugged in):• Vehicle should be parked on a level

surface.Or• If a level surface is not available, the

vehicle should be parked with the frontof the truck lower than the rear (nosedown).

CAUTION

Use of the engine block heater whenparked with the front of the vehiclehigher than the rear (5 degrees ormore) may cause the engine blockheater to become damaged and/orinoperative.


MEMO


6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13Vehicle recovery(freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Push the switch on to warn other driverswhen you must stop or park under emer-gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

• If stopping for an emergency, be sureto move the vehicle well off the road.

• Do not use the hazard warning flash-ers while moving on the highway un-less unusual circumstances forceyou to drive so slowly that your ve-hicle might become a hazard to othertraffic.

• Turn signals do not work when thehazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignitionswitch placed in any position.Some jurisdictions may prohibit the useof the hazard warning flasher switchwhile driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergencysituation while driving, perform the follow-ing procedure:– Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in lessthan 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignitionswitch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-tors tire pressure of all tires except thespare. When the low tire pressure warninglight is lit, and the Tire Pressure Low — AddAir warning appears in the vehicle informa-tion display, one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. If equipped, thesystem also displays pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screenby sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is be-ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMSwill activate and warn you of it by the lowtire pressure warning light. This system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-tional information, see “Warning lights, indi-cator lights and audible reminders” (P. 2-12)and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” (P. 5-5).

WARNING


• If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid sud-den steering maneuvers or abruptbraking, reduce vehicle speed, pulloff the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires andincrease the likelihood of tire failure.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident andcould result in serious personal in-jury. Check the tire pressure for allfour tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If thelight still illuminates while driving af-ter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat or the TPMS may be mal-functioning. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible, If no tire is flat and all tiresare properly inflated, have the ve-hicle checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service

• When using a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tirepressure warning light will flash forapproximately one minute. The lightwill remain on after one minute. Haveyour tires replaced and/or TPMS sys-tem reset as soon as possible. It isrecommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for these services.


• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pres-sure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIREIf you have a flat tire, follow the instructionsbelow:

Stopping the vehicle1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Move the shift lever to P(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic andto signal professional road assistancepersonnel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

• Make sure the parking brake is se-curely applied and the shift lever isshifted into P (Park).

• Never change tires when the vehicleis on a slope, ice or slippery areas.This is hazardous.

• Never change tires if oncoming traf-fic is close to your vehicle. Wait forprofessional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace tire stoppers, supplied with jack, atboth the front and back of the wheel diago-nally opposite the flat tire to prevent thevehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the ve-hicle may move and result in personalinjury.

Getting the spare tire and tools1. Fold up the right rear bench seat. For

additional information, see “Folding therear bench seat up” (P. 1-9).

LCE2142

A. Tire stoppers

B. Flat tire


2. Remove the tire stopper bag OA .

3. Release the straps OB .

4. Collapse the jack to remove it from thestorage location. Loosen the jack withyour fingers until the jack is free.

5. Remove the jack and tool kit.

6. Assemble the pieces of the jack rod. Findthe oval-shaped opening above the li-cense plate, slightly to the left of themiddle (driver’s side). Pass the T-shapedend of the jack rod through the openingand direct it toward the spare tire winch,located directly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as itis designed to be inserted at an angleas shown.

7. Fit the square end of the jack rod into thesquare hole of the wheel nut wrench toform a handle.

8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rodinto the T-shaped opening of the tirewinch. Apply pressure to keep the jackrod engaged in the spare tire winch andturn the jack rod counterclockwise tolower the spare tire.

9. Once the spare tire is completely low-ered, reach under the vehicle, guide theretainer chain through the center of thetire and carefully slide the tire from un-der the rear of the vehicle.

LCE2374 WCE0150 WCE0151


10. Securely store the flat tire beneath thevehicle, from where the full size sparewas removed. To reinstall the wheel, re-move the center cap (if so equipped)and insert the retainer chain throughthe wheel. Be sure the rubber rim cover(if so equipped) is centered on thewheel before lifting. Use the assembledjacking rod to slowly rotate the winchclockwise to raise the wheel to thevehicle.

11. To reinstall the jack and tool kit, reversesteps 1 through 5.

NOTE:

Inspect the rubber rim cover every sixyears and replace as necessary. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION

• Be sure to center the spare tire sus-pending plate on the wheel and thenlift the spare tire.

• Failure to use the rubber rim covermay allow the chain to get stuck inthe wheel nut holes when stowed.

Removing bolt-on wheel caps (ifso equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so couldresult in personal injury.

The wheel cap O1 is only attached with thewheel nuts and is separate from the wheelO2 .

To remove the wheel cap, remove thewheel nuts after the jack is securely sup-porting the vehicle and the tire clears theground.For additional information, see “Jacking upvehicle and removing the damaged tire”(P. 6-6).Take care not to scratch the wheel cap orwheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removingthe damaged tire (all models)

WARNING

• Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle,support it with safety stands.

• Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not usethe jack provided with your vehicleon other vehicles. The jack is de-signed for lifting only your vehicleduring a tire change.

• Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle forjack support.

• Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

LCE2367


• Never use blocks on or under thejack.

• Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may causethe vehicle to move. This is especiallytrue for vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

• Do not allow passengers to stay inthe vehicle while it is on the jack.

• Never run the engine with a wheel(s)off the ground. It may cause the ve-hicle to move.

Always refer to the illustration for the cor-rect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following in-structions.1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheelnut wrench. Do not remove the wheelnuts until the tire is off the ground.

WCE0152


2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head under the arrowstamped on the side of the frame or rearas shown.The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into thejack as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jacklever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicleuntil the tire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-move the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. For additional information, see“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-35).1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on andtighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tightenwheel nuts alternately and evenly in thesequence illustrated (O1 ,O2 ,O3 ,O4 ,O5 ,O6 )until they are tight.

LCE0087

WCE0063


4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with thewheel nut wrench, tighten the wheelnuts securely in the sequence illustrated(O1 ,O2 ,O3 ,O4 ,O5 ,O6 ). Lower the vehiclecompletely.

WARNING

• Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

• Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause thenuts to become loose.

• Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.Wheel nut tightening torque:Non-XD models:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)XD models:

131 ft-lb (177 N·m)The wheel nuts must be kept tightenedto specification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubricationinterval.Adjust tire pressure to the COLDpressure.COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for 3 hours or more or driven lessthan 1 mi. (1.6 km).COLD tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display (if so equipped)of the tire pressure information mayshow higher pressure than the COLD tirepressure after the vehicle has beendriven more than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This isbecause the tire pressure increases asthe tire temperature rises. This does notindicate a system malfunction.5. Securely store the tools and jacking

equipment in the vehicle. For additionalinformation, see the “Getting the sparetire and tools (Crew and King Cab® mod-els)” (P. 6-4).

WARNING

• Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properlysecured after use. Such items can be-come dangerous projectiles in an ac-cident or sudden stop.

• The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. For additional informa-tion, see “Wheels and tires” (P. 8-35).


To start your engine with a booster battery,the instructions and precautions belowmust be followed.

WARNING

• If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resultingin severe injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

• Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames awayfrom the battery.

• Do not allow battery fluid to comeinto contact with eyes, skin, clothingor painted surfaces. Battery fluid is acorrosive sulfuric acid solution whichcan cause severe burns. If the fluidshould come into contact with any-thing, immediately flush the con-tacted area with water.

• Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

• The booster battery must be rated at12 volts. Use of an improperly ratedbattery can damage your vehicle.

• Whenever working on or near a bat-tery, always wear suitable eye pro-tectors (for example, goggles or in-dustrial safety spectacles) andremove rings, metal bands, or anyother jewelry. Do not lean over thebattery when jump starting.

• Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and causeserious injury.

• Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING


WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damageto the charging system and cause per-sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle, position the two vehicles to bringtheir batteries near each other.Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shiftlever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-sary electrical systems (lights, heater, airconditioner, etc.).

3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCKposition.

4. Ensure the vent caps (if so equipped) arelevel and tight.

5. Connect the jumper cables in the se-quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ).

CAUTION

• Always connect positive (+) to posi-tive (+) and negative (−) to bodyground (for example, strut mountingbolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not tothe battery.

• Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the enginecompartment and that the cableclamps do not contact any othermetal.

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicleand let it run for a few minutes.

7. Keep the engine speed of the boostervehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start theengine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engagedfor more than 10 seconds. If the enginedoes not start right away, place the ig-nition switch in the OFF position andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

8. After starting the engine, carefully dis-connect the negative cable and thenthe positive cable.

LCE2223


Do not attempt to start the engine bypushing.

CAUTION

• Automatic transmission models can-not be push-started or tow-started.Attempting to do so may causetransmission damage.

• Three way catalyst equipped modelsshould not be started by pushingsince the three way catalyst may bedamaged.

• Never try to start the vehicle by tow-ing it; when the engine starts, the for-ward surge could cause the vehicle tocollide with the tow vehicle.

WARNING

• Do not continue to drive if your ve-hicle overheats. Doing so could causeengine damage or a vehicle fire.

• To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap while the engine is stillhot. When the radiator or coolant res-ervoir cap is removed, pressurizedhot water will spurt out, possiblycausing serious injury.

• Do not open the hood if steam iscoming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated byan extremely high temperature gaugereading), or if you feel a lack of enginepower, detect abnormal noise, etc. take thefollowing steps:1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park).Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air condi-tioner temperature control to maximumhot and fan control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused byclimbing a long hill on a hot day, run theengine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500rpm) until the temperature gauge indi-cation returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the ra-diator before opening the hood. If steamor coolant is escaping, turn off the en-gine. Do not open the hood further untilno steam or coolant can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from theengine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fanis running. The radiator hoses and radia-tor should not leak water. If coolant isleaking, the water pump belt is missingor loose, or the cooling fan does not run,stop the engine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into con-tact with, or get caught in, engine beltsor the engine cooling fan. The enginecooling fan can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check thecoolant level in the engine coolant reser-voir tank with the engine running. Addcoolant to the engine coolant reservoirtank if necessary. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictionaland local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipmentcould damage your vehicle. Towing in-structions are available from a NISSANdealer. Local service operators are gener-ally familiar with the applicable laws andprocedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damageto your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It isadvisable to have the service operatorcarefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

• Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

• Never get under your vehicle after ithas been lifted by a tow truck.

• If your vehicle has front recoveryhooks as original factory equipment,do not remove or modify them. If itwas not equipped with front recov-ery hooks, do not install them. Eitheraction could affect proper operationof the front air bag system resultingin injury or death.

CAUTION

• When towing, make sure that thetransmission, axles, steering systemand powertrain are in working condi-tion. Use dollies or flatbed if any ofthe listed systems are not working.

• Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For additional information about towingyour vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle(RV), see "Flat towing for 2-Wheel Drive(2WD) vehicle" (P. 10-55) or "Flat towing for4-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicle" (P. 10-55).

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends towing your vehiclebased upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-tional information, refer to the diagrams inthis section to ensure that your vehicle isproperly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) modelswith automatic transmissionNISSAN recommends that towing dolliesbe used when towing your vehicle or placethe vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models equipped withan automatic transmission with any ofthe wheels on the ground as this maycause serious and expensive damageto the transfer case and transmission.

NOTE:

If the battery is completely drained thetransmission will not manually shift toother positions.

LCE2141


Two-Wheel Drive models withautomatic transmissionNISSAN recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (rear) wheels off theground or place the vehicle on a flatbedtruck as illustrated.

CAUTION

• Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive dam-age to the transmission. If it is neces-sary to tow the vehicle with the frontwheels raised always use towing dol-lies under the rear wheels.

• When towing automatic transmis-sion models with the front wheels onthe ground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in theOFF position and secure the steer-ing wheel in a straight-ahead po-sition with a rope or similar de-vice. Never secure the steeringwheel by placing the ignitionswitch in the LOCK position. Thismay cause damage to the lockmechanism (for models with asteering lock mechanism).

NOTE:

If the battery is completely drained thetransmission will not manually shift toother positions.When towing long distances or speeds inexcess of 50 mph (80 km/h), remove thepropeller shaft before towing to preventdamage to the transmission. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer foradditional information.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing astuck vehicle)There are two options to recover a stuckvehicle: pulling and rocking. For additionalinformation regarding these options,please refer to the following sections.

LCE2311


Pulling a stuck vehicleWARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-sonal injury or death when recovering astuck vehicle:• Contact a professional towing ser-

vice to recover the vehicle if you haveany questions regarding the recov-ery procedure.

• Attach recovery devices only to mainstructural members of the vehicle orthe recovery hooks (if so equipped).

• Do not use the vehicle tie-downs totow or free a stuck vehicle.

• Only use devices specifically de-signed for vehicle recovery and fol-low the manufacturer's instructions.

• Always pull the recovery devicestraight out from the front of the ve-hicle. Never pull at an angle.

• Route recovery devices so they donot touch any part of the vehicle ex-cept the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,etc., use a tow strap or other device de-signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-ways follow the manufacturer's instruc-tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicleWARNING

• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.• Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explodeand result in serious injury. Parts ofyour vehicle could also overheat andbe damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,etc., use the following procedure:1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Activate the Electronic Locking Rear Dif-ferential (E-Lock) system (if soequipped). For additional information,see “Electronic Locking Rear Differential(E-Lock) system” (P. 2-61)

3. Make sure the area in front and behindthe vehicle is clear of obstructions.

4. Turn the steering wheel right and left toclear an area around the front tires.

5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward andbackward.• Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive).• Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.• Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive).

• Do not spin the tires above 34 mph (55km/h) or above 12 mph (20 km/h) if theE–Lock system (if so equipped) isengaged.

6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing ser-vice to remove the vehicle.


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Environmental factors influence therate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

In order to maintain the appearance ofyour vehicle, it is important to take propercare of it.To protect the paint surfaces, wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:• After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.• After driving on coastal roads.• When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles orbugs get on the paint surface.

• When dust or mud builds up on thesurface.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.When it is necessary to park outside, park ina shady area or protect the vehicle with abody cover.Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-face when putting on or removing thebody cover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plentyof water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap orgeneral purpose dishwashing liquid mixedwith clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

• Do not concentrate water spray di-rectly on the sonar sensors (if soequipped) on the bumper as this willresult in damage to the sensors. Donot use pressure washers capable ofspraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use ofhigh-pressure washers over 1,200 psi(8,274 kPa) can result in damage to orremoval of paint or graphics. Avoidusing a high-pressure washer closerthan 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle.Always use a wide-angle nozzle only,keep the nozzle moving and do notconcentrate the water spray on anyone area.

• Do not use car washes that use acidin the detergent. Some car washes,especially brushless ones, use someacid for cleaning. The acid may reactwith some plastic vehicle compo-nents, causing them to crack. Thiscould affect their appearance, andalso could cause them not to func-tion properly. Always check with yourcar wash to confirm that acid is notused.

• Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical de-tergents, gasoline or solvents.

• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot,as the surface may becomewater-spotted.

• Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty ofclean water.Inside edges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.Take care that the drain holes in the loweredge of the door are open. Spray waterunder the body and in the wheel wells toloosen the dirt and wash away road salt.A damp chamois can be used to dry thevehicle to avoid water spots.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surfaceand helps retain new vehicle appearance.Polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-ered appearance before re-applying wax.A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosingthe proper product.• Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions suppliedwith the wax.

• Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as possiblefrom the surface of the paint to avoid last-ing damage or staining. Special cleaningproducts are available at a NISSAN dealeror any automotive accessory store. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for these products.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, itis necessary to clean the underbody regu-larly in order to prevent dirt and salt frombuilding up and causing the acceleration ofcorrosion on the underbody and suspen-sion. Before the winter period and again inthe spring, the underseal must be checkedand, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASSUse glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-mal for glass to become coated with a filmafter the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easilyremove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,abrasive cleaners or chlorine-baseddisinfectant cleaners. They could dam-age the electrical conductors, radio an-tenna elements or rear window de-froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if soequipped)Wash the wheels regularly with a spongedampened in a mild soap solution, espe-cially during winter months in areas whereroad salt is used. If not removed, road saltcan discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:• Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

• Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same asambient temperature.

• Do not use chrome cleaner on anywheel. Doing so can damage thechrome-like coating on the wheel.

• Rinse the wheel to completely re-move the cleaner within 15 minutesafter the cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-3

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with anon-abrasive chrome polish to maintainthe finish.

CAUTION

Do not use chrome cleaner on anywheel. Doing so can damage thechrome-like coating on the wheel.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use oftire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply acoating to the tires to help reduce discolor-ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-ing and form a compound. This compoundmay come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:• Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easilythan with an oil-based tire dressing.

• Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

• Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tiretread/grooves.

• Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressingmanufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats using avacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipethe vinyl and leather surfaces (if soequipped) with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe cleanwith a dry, soft cloth.Regular care and cleaning is required inorder to maintain the appearance of theleather (if so equipped).Before using any fabric protector, read themanufacturer's recommendations. Somefabric protectors contain chemicals thatmay stain or bleach the seat material.Use a cloth dampened only with water toclean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifi-cation sensor (if so equipped). This canalso affect the operation of the air bagsystem and result in serious personalinjury.

CLEANING INTERIOR


CAUTION

• Never use benzine, thinner or anysimilar material.

• Small dirt particles can be abrasiveand damaging to leather surfacesand should be removed promptly. Donot use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,detergents or ammonia-basedcleaners as they may damage theleather's natural finish.

• Never use fabric protectors unlessrecommended by the manufacturer.

• Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERSMost air fresheners use a solvent thatcould affect the vehicle interior. If you usean air freshener, take the followingprecautions:• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they con-tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the airfreshener in a location that allows it tohang free and not contact an interiorsurface.

• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause im-mediate damage and discolorationwhen spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-er's instructions before using the airfresheners.

POWER MOONROOF (if soequipped)The sunshade is made from a tricotmaterial.

CAUTION

To help prevent damaging the moon-roof while cleaning:• Do not rub the material with a cloth.

Doing so can damage the surface ofthe material or cause a stain tospread.

• Never use benzine, thinner or anysimilar chemical to clean the sun-shade. This may discolor the moon-roof and damage the surface.

• Clean water based stains by pattingthe surface with a clean soft clothdampened in warm water. Press aclean dry cloth onto the surface toremove as much dampness as pos-sible and then let air dry.

• Clean oil based stains by patting thesurface with a clean soft cloth damp-ened in warm water. Press a clean drycloth onto the surface to remove asmuch dampness as possible andthen let air dry.


FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interferencethat may result in a collision, injury ordeath:• NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver frontposition or install them upside downor backwards.

• Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,or equivalent floor mats, that arespecifically designed for use in yourvehicle model and model year.

• Properly position the mats in thefloorwell using the floor mat posi-tioning hook. For additional informa-tion, see "Floor mat installation"(P. 7-6).

• Make sure the floor mat does not in-terfere with pedal operation.

• Periodically check the floor mats tomake sure they are properlyinstalled.

• After cleaning the vehicle interior,check the floor mats to make surethey are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats canextend the life of your vehicle carpet andmake it easier to clean the interior. Matsshould be maintained with regular clean-ing and replaced if they become exces-sively worn.

Floor mat installationYour vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-sitioning hook(s). The number and shape ofthe floor mat positioning hooks for eachseating position varies depending on thevehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,follow the installation instructions providedwith the mat and the following:1. With the ignition switch in the OFF posi-

tion, the shift lever in P (Park) positionand with the parking brake fully applied,position the floor mat in the floorwell sothat the floor mat grommet holes arealigned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into thehook(s) and ensure that the floor mat isproperly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-fere with pedal operation. With the igni-tion switch still in the OFF position, theshift lever in the P (Park) position andwith the parking brake applied, fully ap-ply and release all pedals. The floor matmust not interfere with pedal operationor prevent the pedal from returning toits normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for details about installing the floormats in your vehicle.

LPD2417


The illustration shows the location of thefloor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mildsoap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely in the shade before using them. Foradditional information, see “Seat belt main-tenance” (P. 1-24).

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up inthe retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seatbelts, since these materials may se-verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSIONMost vehicle corrosion is caused by:• The accumulation of moisture-retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,cavities, and other areas.

• Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

MoistureAccumulation of sand, dirt and water onthe vehicle body underside can acceleratecorrosion. Wet floor coverings will not drycompletely inside the vehicle and shouldbe removed for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidityCorrosion will be accelerated in areas ofhigh relative humidity, especially those ar-eas where the temperatures stay abovefreezing and where atmospheric pollutionexists and road salt is used.

LAI2088Positioning hooks

CORROSION PROTECTION


TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate ofcorrosion to those parts which are not wellventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt inthe air in coastal areas, or heavy road saltuse accelerates the corrosion process.Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep

the vehicle clean.• Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.• Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumulation.• Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash withwater as soon as possible.

CAUTION

• NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compart-ment by washing it out with a hose.Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaneror broom.

• Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic com-ponents inside the vehicle as thismay damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor panand fenders.In winter, the underbody must becleaned periodically.For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer.


8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Power Steering Fluid (PSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Variable voltage control system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Daytime Running Light (DRL)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

When performing any inspection or main-tenance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injury toyourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-lowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING

• Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the ve-hicle from moving. Move the shift leverto P (Park)

• Be sure the ignition switch is in theOFF or LOCK position when perform-ing any parts replacement or repairs.

• If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans,belts and any other moving parts.

• It is advisable to secure or removeany loose clothing and remove anyjewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.before working on your vehicle.

• Always wear eye protection when-ever you work on your vehicle.

• The automatic engine cooling fan (ifso equipped) may come on at anytime without warning, even if the ig-nition switch is in the OFF position

and the engine is not running. Toavoid injury, always disconnect thenegative battery cable before work-ing near the fan.

• If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, besure there is proper ventilation forexhaust gases to escape.

• Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle,support it with safety stands.

• Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

• Because the fuel lines are under highpressure even when the engine is off,it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for service of the fuelfilter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

• Do not work under the hood whilethe engine is hot. Turn the engine offand wait until it cools down.

• Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other ve-hicle fluids can damage the environ-

ment. Always conform to local regula-tions for disposal of vehicle fluid.

• Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related componentharnesses disconnected while theignition switch is in the ON position.

• Never connect or disconnect the bat-tery or any transistorized compo-nent while the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

NOTE:

If the battery is completely drained thetransmission will not manually shift toother positions.This “Do-it-yourself ” section gives instruc-tions regarding only those items which arerelatively easy for an owner to perform.A Genuine NISSAN service manual is alsoavailable. For additional information, see“Owner's Manual/Service Manual order in-formation” (P. 10-60).You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in operatingdifficulties or excessive emissions, andcould affect warranty coverage. If in doubtabout any servicing, it is recommendedthat you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)(non-XD model)1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse box

3. Engine oil dipstick4. Power steering fluid reservoir5. Engine oil filler cap6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner8. Fuse/Fusible link box9. Drive belt location10. Radiator cap11. Battery12. Engine coolant reservoir

LDI3292

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)(XD model)1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse box

3. Engine oil dipstick4. Power steering fluid reservoir5. Engine oil filler cap6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner8. Fuse/Fusible link box9. Engine coolant reservoir10. Drive belt location11. Battery12. Radiator cap

LDI3293

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provideyear-round antifreeze and coolant protec-tion. The antifreeze solution contains rustand corrosion inhibitors. Additional enginecooling system additives are notnecessary.

WARNING

• Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiatorcool down. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escap-ing from the radiator. For additionalinformation on precautions, see “Ifyour vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12).

• The radiator and coolant reservoirare equipped with a pressure type ra-diator cap. To prevent engine dam-age, it is recommended that you useonly a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

• Never use any cooling system addi-tives such as radiator sealer. Addi-tives may clog the cooling systemand cause damage to the engine,transmission and/or cooling system.

• When adding or replacing coolant, itis recommended that you use onlyGenuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva-lent. Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protec-tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additionalfreeze protection is needed due toweather where you operate your ve-hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-trate following the directions on thecontainer. If an equivalent coolantother than Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-low the coolant manufacturer’s in-structions to maintain minimum an-tifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C).The use of other types of coolant so-lutions other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)or equivalent may damage the en-gine cooling system.

• The life expectancy of the factory-fillcoolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)or 7 years. Mixing any other type ofcoolant other than Genuine NISSANLong Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)(or equivalent coolant), includingGenuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green), or theuse of non-distilled water may re-duce the life expectancy of thefactory-fill coolant. For additional in-formation, see the "Maintenance andschedules" section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoirwhen the engine is cold. If the coolantlevel is below the MIN level OB , add coolantto the MAX level OA . If the reservoir is empty,check the coolant level in the radiatorwhen the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAXlevel OA .

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixingany other type of coolant or the use ofnon-distilled water may reduce the life ex-pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-ditional information, see the "Maintenanceand schedules" section of this manual.If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

For additional information on the locationof the engine coolant reservoir, see “Enginecompartment check locations” (P. 8-3).

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the enginecoolant. The service procedure can befound in the NISSAN Service Manual.Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engineoverheating.

WARNING

• To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when theengine is hot.

• Never remove the radiator or enginecoolant reservoir cap when the en-gine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escap-ing from the radiator.

• Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or handcleaner as soon as possible.

• Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

LDI32955.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)

(non-XD model)


(XD model)

8-6 Do-it-yourself

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-erly. Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until itreaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be between the H(High) and L (Low) marks OB . This is thenormal operating oil level range. If the oillevel is below the L (Low) mark OA , re-move the oil filler cap and pour recom-mended oil through the opening. Do notoverfill OC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the sever-ity of operating conditions.



ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.Operating the engine with an insuffi-cient amount of oil can damage the en-gine, and such damage is not coveredby warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OILFILTERFor additional information on engine oiland oil filter change, refer to the instruc-tions outlined in this section.

Vehicle set-up1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and


2. Run the engine until it reaches operatingtemperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using asuitable floor jack and safety jackstands.

• Place the safety jack stands under thevehicle jack-up points.

• A suitable adapter should be attached tothe jack stand saddle.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-port points are used to avoid vehicledamage.

LDI3469

O1 Oil filler cap

8-8 Do-it-yourself

LDI3426

O2 Oil drain plugLDI3442

O3 Oil filterLDI3470

O4 Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-9

LDI3536

O5 Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)LDI3533

O6 Skid plate (Type C) (if so equipped)LDI3534

O7 Skid plate (Type D) (if so equipped)

8-10 Do-it-yourself

Removal of under-engineprotectors

LDI3005Skid plate (Type A) (if so equipped)

LDI3537Skid plate (Type B) (if so equipped)

LDI2875Skid plate (Type C) (if so equipped)

Do-it-yourself 8-11

1. Remove bolts OA and skid plate.

Engine oil and filter1. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug and oil filter.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and com-pletely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as theengine oil is hot.

WARNING

• Prolonged and repeated contactwith used engine oil may cause skincancer.

• Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or handcleaner as soon as possible.

• Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise.Remove the oil filter by turning it byhand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur-face with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket ma-terial remaining on the sealing surfaceof the engine. Failure to do so couldlead to an oil leak and engine damage.• The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from thedipstick hole when filling the enginewith oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until aslight resistance is felt, then tighten addi-tionally more than 2/3 turn.Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb (15.0 to 21.0 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with anew washer. Securely tighten the drainplug with a wrench. Do not use exces-sive force.Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m)

9. Refill the engine with the recommendedoil through the oil filler opening, and in-stall the oil filler cap securely.

LDI2876Skid plate (Type D) (if so equipped)

8-12 Do-it-yourself

For additional information about drain andrefill capacity, see “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). Thedrain and refill capacity depends on the oiltemperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Alwaysuse the dipstick to determine the properamount of oil in the engine.10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.Correct as required. Turn the engine offand wait more than 15 minutes. Checkthe oil level with the dipstick. Add en-gine oil if necessary.

After the operation1. Reinstall plate in reverse order of

removal.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to theground.

• Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.• Check your local regulations.

When checking or replacement is required,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

CAUTION

• NISSAN recommends using GenuineNISSAN Matic P ATF. Do not mix withother fluids.

• Do not use CVT fluid or manual trans-mission fluid in this transmission.Damage caused by the use of fluidsother than as recommended is notcovered under NISSAN’s New VehicleLimited Warranty outlined in yourWarranty Information Booklet.

• Using fluids that are not equivalentto Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF mayalso damage the transmission. Dam-age caused by the use of fluids otherthan as recommended is not coveredunder NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty outlined in your WarrantyInformation Booklet.

The specified automatic transmission fluidis also described on caution labels locatedin the engine compartment.

Check the power steering fluid level whenthe engine is stopped.The fluid level should be between the COLDMAX line and the COLD MIN line on thepower steering fluid reservoir at cold fluidtemperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C) or atthe HOT MAX line on the power steeringfluid reservoir at hot fluid temperatures of122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C).

LDI3077

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID(ATF)

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

Do-it-yourself 8-13

If the fluid is cold and is at or below theCOLD MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF-IIor equivalent to the COLD MAX line. If thefluid is hot and below the HOT MAX line, addGenuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent to theHOT MAX line. Remove the cap and fillthrough the opening.

CAUTION

• DO NOT OVERFILL.• Do not reuse power steering fluid.• Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent

WARNING

• Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can dam-age the brake system and affect thevehicle's stopping ability.

• Clean the filler cap before removing.• Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked con-tainers out of reach of children.

LDI3088Brake fluid reservoir (Type A)

(if so equipped)

LDI3532Brake fluid reservoir (Type B)

(if so equipped)

BRAKE FLUID

8-14 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluidis spilled, immediately wash the sur-face with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If thebrake fluid is below the MIN line OB , thebrake warning light will illuminate. Addbrake fluid up to the MAX line OA . For addi-tional information on recommended typeof brake fluid, see “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2).If the brake fluid must be added frequently,the brake system should be thoroughlychecked. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIRFill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir pe-riodically. Add windshield-washer fluid whenthe “Low Washer Fluid” warning messageshows on the vehicle information display.To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,lift the cap off the reservoir and pour thewindshield-washer fluid into the reservoiropening.Add a washer solvent to the washer for bet-ter cleaning. In the winter season, add awindshield washer antifreeze. Follow themanufacturer's instructions for the mixtureratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently whendriving conditions require an increasedamount of windshield-washer fluid.Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSANWindshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

• Do not substitute engine antifreezecoolant for windshield-washer fluid.This may result in damage to thepaint.

• Do not fill the windshield-washerfluid reservoir with washer fluid con-centrates at full strength. Somemethyl alcohol based washer fluidconcentrates may permanently stainthe grille if spilled while filling thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir.

• Pre-mix washer fluid concentrateswith water to the manufacturer'srecommended levels before pouringthe fluid into the windshield-washerfluid reservoir. Do not use thewindshield-washer fluid reservoir tomix the washer fluid concentrate andwater.

LDI2879

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-15

Caution symbols for battery WARNING

O1No smoking, No exposed flames,

No SparksDo not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the

battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

O2 Shield eyes Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion orbattery acid.

O3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

O4 Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

O5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

O6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness orinjury.

BATTERY

8-16 Do-it-yourself

• If the battery is labeled "do not open" it ismaintenance free and battery fluidshould not be checked. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ora qualified specialist workshop to con-firm the battery’s performance.

• Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bak-ing soda and water.

• Make certain the terminal connectionsare clean and securely tightened.

• Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-tion and wait 2 minutes before discon-necting the battery.

• If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 daysor longer, disconnect the negative (-) bat-tery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situationsthat can lead to potential battery dis-charge and potential no-start conditionssuch as:1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is not run-ning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/oronly driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need tobe charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

• Do not expose the battery to flames,an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-drogen gas generated by the batteryis explosive. Explosive gases cancause blindness or injury. Do not al-low battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-furic acid can cause blindness or in-jury. After touching a battery or bat-tery cap, do not touch or rub youreyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. Ifthe acid contacts your eyes, skin orclothing, immediately flush with wa-ter for at least 15 minutes and seekmedical attention.

• Do not operate the vehicle if the fluidin the battery is low. Low battery fluidcan cause a higher load on the bat-tery which can generate heat, reducebattery life, and in some cases lead toan explosion.

• When working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectionand remove all jewelry.

• Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands afterhandling.

• This vehicle uses a special battery. Ifthe 12-volt battery needs to be re-placed, use a 12-volt battery of thesame design.

• Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

• Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

1. Remove the vent cap(s) with a screw-driver as shown. Use a cloth to protectthe battery case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottomof the filler opening. Do not overfill. Re-install the vent cap(s).

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery.The Type B battery is not equipped withremovable vent caps.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jumpstarting” (P. 6-10). If the engine does notstart by jump starting, the battery mayhave to be replaced. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

WDI0224Battery (Type A) (if so equipped)

WDI0529

LDI3302Battery (Type B) (if so equipped)

8-18 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

• Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so willbypass the variable voltage controlsystem and the vehicle battery maynot charge completely.

• Use electrical accessories with theengine running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

NOTE:

If the battery is completely drained thetransmission will not manually shift toother positions.Your vehicle is equipped with a variablevoltage control system. This system mea-sures the amount of electrical dischargefrom the battery and controls voltage gen-erated by the generator.The current sensor is located near the bat-tery along the negative battery cable. If youadd electrical accessories to your vehicle,be sure to ground them to a suitable bodyground such as the frame or engine blockarea.

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley2. Automatic belt tensioner pulley3. Water pump pulley4. Cooling fan pulley5. Air conditioner compressor pulley6. Crankshaft pulley7. Generator pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position before servicing drivebelt. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

LDI2132 WDI06615.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM (if so equipped)

DRIVE BELT

Do-it-yourself 8-19

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. Ifthe belt is in poor condition or is loose,have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerfor this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for con-dition and tension in accordance withthe maintenance schedule. For addi-tional information, see the "Mainte-nance and schedules" section of thismanual.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGSIridium-tipped spark plugsIt is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped spark plugs as frequently as con-ventional type spark plugs because theylast much longer. Follow the maintenancelog shown in the “Maintenance and sched-ules” section of this manual. Do not serviceiridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning orregapping.• Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switchare off and that the parking brake isengaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrectsocket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.LDI2972

SPARK PLUGS

8-20 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

• Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you orothers to be burned. The air cleanernot only cleans the air, it stops theflame if the engine backfires. If it isn'tthere, and the engine backfires, youcould be burned. Do not drive withthe air cleaner removed, and be care-ful when working on the engine withthe air cleaner removed.

• Never pour fuel into the throttle bodyor attempt to start the engine withthe air cleaner removed. Doing socould result in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner,push the tabs and pull the cover upward.The viscous paper type filter elementshould not be cleaned and reused. Replacethe air filter according to the maintenancelog shown in the “Maintenance and sched-ules” section of this manual.When replacing the air filter, wipe the insideof the air cleaner housing and the coverwith a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner filter,make sure the air cleaner cover is seatedin the housing and latch the tabs.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entryof airborne dust and pollen particles andreduces some objectionable outsideodors. The filter is located behind the glovebox. For additional information on changeintervals, see “Maintenance schedules"(P. 9-7).

If replacement is required, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.


AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-21

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after usingthe windshield-washer or if a wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other mate-rial may be on the blade or windshield.Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.Clean each blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild de-tergent. Then rinse the blades with clearwater. If your windshield is still not clearafter cleaning the blades and using thewiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

REPLACINGReplace the wiper blades if they are worn.1. Lift the wiper arm away from the

windshield.

2. Push and hold the release tab OA , andthen move the wiper blade down OB thewiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto thewiper arm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

• After wiper blade replacement, re-turn the wiper arm to its original po-sition; otherwise it may be damagedwhen the hood is opened.

• Make sure the wiper blades contactthe glass; otherwise the arms may bedamaged from wind pressure.

LDI2725

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-22 Do-it-yourself

Be careful not to let anything get into thewasher nozzle OD . This may cause cloggingor improper windshield–washer operation.If something gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin OC .

If the brakes do not operate properly, havethe brakes checked. It is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer for thisservice.

Self-adjusting brakesYour vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal isapplied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if thebrake pedal height does not return tonormal. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicatorsThe disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brake padrequires replacement, a high pitchedscraping or screeching sound will be heardwhen the vehicle is in motion. The noise willbe heard whether or not the brake pedal isdepressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops is nor-mal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information onthe appropriate maintenance schedule re-garding brake inspections, see "Mainte-nance schedules" (P. 9-7).

LDI2710

BRAKES

Do-it-yourself 8-23

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.Fuses are used in the passenger and en-gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro-vided and can be found in the passengercompartment fuse box.When installing a fuse make sure the fuse isinstalled in the fuse box securely.

ENGINE COMPARTMENTWARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified onthe fuse box cover. This could damagethe electrical system or electronic con-trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not comeon, check for an open fuse.1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-

light switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushingthe tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.The fuse puller is located in the center ofthe fuse block in the passengercompartment.

LDI2385 LDI29625.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)


(non-XD model)

FUSES

8-24 Do-it-yourself

5. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with anew fuse OB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-trical system checked and repaired. It isrecommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not oper-ate and fuses are in good condition, checkthe fusible links. If any of these fusible linksare melted, replace with only GenuineNISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTWARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified onthe fuse box cover. This could damagethe electrical system or electronic con-trol units or cause a fire.


(XD model)

LDI0456 LDI2883

Do-it-yourself 8-25

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-

light switch are OFF.

2. Open the glove box.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Locate the fuse that needs to bereplaced.

5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller OA . 6. If the fuse is open OB , replace it with anequivalent good fuse OC .

7. Push the fuse box cover to install.If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

LDI2884 LDI2760

8-26 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-low the battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key asfollows:1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA

into the slit OB of the corner and twist itto separate the upper part from thelower part. Place a cloth over the screw-driver to protect the casing.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-27

3. Replace the battery with a new one.Recommended battery: CR2032 orequivalent.• Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so couldcause a malfunction.

• Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact pointswill seriously deplete the storagecapacity.

• Make sure that the + side faces thebottom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated withOC and OD .

5. Operate the buttons to check theoperation.

If you need assistance with replacement, itis recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

FCC Notice:For USA:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.Note:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s author-ity to operate the equipment.For Canada:This device contains license-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s) that complywith Innovation, Science and EconomicDevelopment Canada’s license-exemptRSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause interference, and (2) Thisdevice must accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

LDI2637

8-28 Do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTSFor additional information on headlightbulb replacement, refer to the instructionsoutlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlightbulb (if so equipped)The headlight is a semi-sealed beam typewhich uses a replaceable headlight (halo-gen) bulb. Because the headlight assemblymust be removed from the vehicle for bulbreplacement, it is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

• Aiming is not necessary after replac-ing the bulb. When aiming adjust-ment is necessary, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

• Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for along period of time. Dust, moisture,smoke, etc. entering the headlightbody may affect bulb performance.Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly just before a replacementbulb is installed.

• Only touch the base when handlingthe bulb. Never touch the glass enve-lope. Touching the glass could sig-nificantly affect bulb life and/orheadlight performance.

• High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulbmay break if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

• Use the same number and wattageas shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lensof the exterior lights in the rain or in a carwash. A temperature difference betweenthe inside and the outside of the lenscauses the fog. This is not a malfunction. Iflarge drops of water collect inside the lens,it is recommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for servicing.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb(if so equipped)If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-quired, it is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)For additional information on fog light bulbreplacement, refer to the instructions out-lined in this section.

LIGHTS

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

• High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulbmay break if the glass envelope isscratched or the bulb is dropped.

• When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

• Use the same number and wattageas originally installed as shown in thechart.

• Do not leave the bulb out of the foglight for a long period of time as dust,moisture and smoke may enter thefog light body and affect the perfor-mance of the fog light.

NOTE:

The fog light is accessible in front of thefront tire and behind the bumper.1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion and wait 2 minutes.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) batterycable.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector.

4. Rotate the bulb OA counterclockwiseand remove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of thefog light assembly. Do not shake or ro-tate the bulb when removing it. Do nottouch the glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL)(if so equipped)For additional information on the DRL bulbreplacement, refer to the instructions out-lined in this section.

LDI2924Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped)

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Replacing the daytime runninglight bulb (Canada only)NOTE:

The daytime running light is accessiblein front of the front tire and behind thebumper.1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion and wait 2 minutes.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) batterycable.

3. Disconnect the daytime running lightbulb connector.

4. Rotate the daytime running light bulbOA counterclockwise and remove.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of thefog light assembly. Do not shake or ro-tate the bulb when removing it. Do nottouch the glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

LDI2925Fog light assembly (Type A)

(if so equipped) (Canada only)

LDI2954Daytime running light (if so equipped)

(Canada only)

Do-it-yourself 8-31

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*Low (Halogen) 55 H11High (Halogen) 60 HB3Turn/Park 28/8 7444NASide marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*Low — —High — —Daytime running/Park — —Turn 28/8 7444NASide marker — —

Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped) (Canada only)Fog 35 H8Daytime running 21 W21W

Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped) — —Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —Puddle light (if so equipped)* — —Rear combination light (Type A) (if so equipped)*

Stop 16 PW16WBackup (reversing) 16 921Turn/Tail 27/7 3057K

Rear combination light (Type B) (if so equipped)*Stop — —Backup (reversing) 16 921Turn/Tail 27/7 3057KCargo (tailgate) (if so equipped) — —

Rear combination light (Type C) (if so equipped)*Stop — —Backup (reversing) 16 W16WTurn/Tail 21 WY21WCargo (tailgate) (if so equipped) 16 921

High-mounted stop light*Stop — —Cargo (roof) — —

Under rail bed light (if so equipped)* — —License plate light* — —Map light (if so equipped)* 8 —Room light* — —Footwell light (if so equipped)* — —Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* — —Glove box light (if so equipped)* 3.4 158

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

1. Headlight assembly2. Map light (if so equipped)3. Room light (if so equipped)

4. Door mirror turn signal light (if soequipped)

5. Puddle light (if so equipped)6. Fog light (if so equipped)

7. High-mount stop light8. Under rail bed light (if so equipped)9. License plate light10. Rear combination light

LDI2890

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D.When replacing a bulb, first remove thelens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installation

NOTE:

Rear combination light (Type B) (if soequipped) bulb replacement procedureis shown. Rear combination light (Type A)(if so equipped) bulb replacement proce-dure is similar.To replace the rear combination light bulbsperform the following procedure:1. Remove the two fasteners OA and pull

the rear combination light away fromthe vehicle.

2. Remove harness connector and rotatestop light bulb OB counterclockwise toremove. Replace bulb if necessary.

3. Rotate reverse light bulb socket OC

counterclockwise to remove. Replacebulb if necessary.

4. Rotate cargo (tailgate) light bulb socketOD (if so equipped) counterclockwise toremove. Replace bulb if necessary.

5. Rotate turn/tail light bulb socket OE

counterclockwise to remove. Replacebulb if necessary.

Reverse steps to install bulbs and rearcombination light.

WDI0263

LDI2951Rear combination light

LDI2952Rear combination light

8-34 Do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire”(P. 6-3).

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely af-fect electric medical equipment.Those who use a pacemakershould contact the electric medi-cal equipment manufacturer forthe possible influences beforeuse.

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS).It monitors tire pressure of all fourtires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit andthe “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”warning appears in the vehicle infor-mation display, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displayspressure of all tires (except the sparetire) on the display screen by send-ing a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel.The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16mph (25 km/h). Also, this systemmay not detect a sudden drop in tirepressure (for example a flat tire whiledriving).For additional information, see“Warning lights, indicator lights andaudible reminders” (P. 2-12), “TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”(P. 5-5), and “Flat tire” (P. 6-3).

Tire inflation pressureCheck the tire pressures (includingthe spare) often and always prior tolong distance trips. The recom-mended tire pressure specificationsare shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tireand Loading Information label is af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.Tire pressures should be checkedregularly because:• Most tires naturally lose air over

time.• Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-jects or if the vehicle strikes a curbwhile parking.

The tire pressures should bechecked when the tires are cold. Thetires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 ormore hours, or driven less than 1 mile(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert pro-vides visual and audible signals out-side the vehicle for inflating tires tothe recommended COLD tire pres-sure. For additional information, see“TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert” (P. 5-8).

WHEELS AND TIRES

Do-it-yourself 8-35

Incorrect tire pressure, including underinflation, may adversely affect tire lifeand vehicle handling.

WARNING

• Improperly inflated tires canfail suddenly and cause anaccident.

• The Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing (GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weightcapacity is indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.Do not load your vehicle be-yond this capacity. Overloadingyour vehicle may result in re-duced tire life, unsafe operatingconditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable han-dling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specifiedcapacity may also result in fail-ure of other vehiclecomponents.

• Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressuregauge to ensure that the tirepressures are at the specifiedlevel.

• For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “Impor-tant Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Tire and Loading Informationlabel�1 Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that canbe seated in the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: For additionalinformation, see “Vehicle loadinginformation” (P. 10-22).

�3 Original tire size: The size of thetires originally installed on the ve-hicle at the factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tiresto this pressure when the tiresare cold. Tires are consideredCOLD after the vehicle has beenparked for 3 or more hours, ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) atmoderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is setby the manufacturer to providethe best balance of tire wear, ve-

hicle handling, driveability, tirenoise, etc., up to the vehicle'sGVWR.

�5 Tire size - see “Tire labeling”(P. 8-39).

�6 Spare tire size.

LDI2926

Do-it-yourself 8-37

Checking tire pressure1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely ontothe valve stem. Do not press too hard orforce the valve stem sideways, or air willescape. If the hissing sound of air escap-ing from the tire is heard while checkingthe pressure, reposition the gauge toeliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specificationshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too muchair is added, press the core of the valvestem briefly with the tip of the gaugestem to release pressure. Recheck thepressure and add or release air asneeded.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, in-cluding the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front OriginalTire:265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psiP265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psiLT245/75R17 450 kPa, 65 psiLT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psiLT265/60R20 450 kPa, 65 psi

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Rear OriginalTire:265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psiP265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psiLT245/75R17 500 kPa, 73 psiLT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psiLT265/60R20 480 kPa, 70 psi

Spare TireSizes:

Cold Tire InflationPressure

265/70R18 270 kPa, 39 psiP265/70R18 250 kPa, 36 psiP275/70R18 240 kPa, 35 psiP275/60R20 250 kPa, 36 psiLT245/75R17 500 kPa, 73 psiLT275/65R18 450 kPa, 65 psiLT265/60R20 480 kPa, 70 psi

LDI0393

8-38 Do-it-yourself

TIRE LABELINGFederal law requires tire manufac-turers to place standardized infor-mation on the sidewall of all tires.This information identifies and de-scribes the fundamental character-istics of the tire and also provides theTire Identification Number (TIN) forsafety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

O1 Tire size (example: LT215/65R1595H)1. LT: The “LT” indicates the tire is de-

signed for light truck vehicles (notall tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): Thisnumber gives the width in milli-meters of the tire from sidewalledge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num-ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

WDI0394Example

LDI2043Example

Do-it-yourself 8-39

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):This number is the tire's load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port. You may not find this infor-mation on all tires because it isnot required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You shouldnot drive the vehicle faster thanthe tire speed rating.

O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number)for a new tire (example: DOT XX XXXXX XXXX)1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. Thesymbol can be placed above, be-low or to the left or right of the TireIdentification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent theweek and year the tire was built.For example, the numbers 3103means the 31st week of 2003. Ifthese numbers are missing thenlook on the other sidewall of thetire.

LDI2786Example

8-40 Do-it-yourself

O3 Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester andothers.

O4 Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure.

O5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maxi-mum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle, al-ways use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

O6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”Indicates whether the tire requiresan inner tube (“tube type”) or not(“tubeless”).

O7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown if the tirehas radial structure.

O8 Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or brand name isshown.

Other Tire-related TerminologyIn addition to the many terms thatare defined throughout this section,Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) thesidewall that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or modelname molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding onthe other sidewall of the tire, or (2)the outward facing sidewall of anasymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

• When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow)and construction. A NISSAN dealermay be able to help you with infor-mation about tire type, size, speedrating and availability.

• Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factoryequipped tires, and may not matchthe potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximumspeed rating of the tire.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-nally specified by NISSAN could af-fect the proper operation of the lowtire pressure warning system.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

• Always use tires of the same type,size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels. Failure todo so may result in a circumferencedifference between tires on the frontand rear axles which can cause theVehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-tem and 4WD system to malfunctionresulting in personal injury or death,excessive tire wear and may damagethe transmission and differentialgears.

• For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety In-formation” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

All season tiresNISSAN specifies All Season tires on somemodels to provide good performance allyear, including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All Season tires are identified by ALLSEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.Snow tires have better snow traction thanAll Season tires and may be more appropri-ate in some areas.

Summer tiresNISSAN specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performance issubstantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowyor icy conditions, NISSAN recommends theuse of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on allfour wheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary toselect tires equivalent in size and load rat-ing to the original equipment tires. If you donot, it can adversely affect the safety andhandling of your vehicle.Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-ings than factory equipped tires and maynot match the potential maximum vehiclespeed. Never exceed the maximum speedrating of the tire.If you install snow tires, they must be thesame size, brand, construction and treadpattern on all four wheels.For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibittheir use. Check local, state and provinciallaws before installing studded tires. Skidand traction capabilities of studded snowtires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorerthan that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When installingtire chains, make sure they are the propersize for the tires on your vehicle and areinstalled according to the chain manufac-turer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chainsare designed to meet the minimum clear-ances between the tire and the closest ve-hicle suspension or body component re-quired to accommodate the use of awinter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are de-termined using the factory equipped tiresize. Other types may damage your vehicle.Use chain tensioners when recommendedby the tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage

8-42 Do-it-yourself

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when usingtire chains. In addition, drive at a reducedspeed. Otherwise, your vehicle may bedamaged and/or vehicle handling andperformance may be adversely affected.Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Drivingwith chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.Use only the 2WD range when driving onclear paved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRESTire rotationNISSAN recommends rotating tires every7,500 miles (12,000 km).For additional information on tire replacingprocedures, see “Flat tire” (P. 6-3).As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.Wheel nut tightening torque:Non-XD models:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

XD models:131 ft-lb (177 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightenedto specifications at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecification at each tire rotationinterval.

WARNING

• Retighten the wheel nuts when thevehicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

• Do not include the spare tire in thetire rotation.


• After rotating the tires, do not use theEasy-Fill Tire Alert to adjust the tirepressure. Instead use a gauge to ad-just the tires to the correct pressurein accordance with Tire and LoadingInformation label.

WDI0258

Do-it-yourself 8-43

CAUTION

To ensure proper operation of the Easy-Fill Tire Alert system after a tire rota-tion, re-set and register the sensor totheir new installed locations. It is rec-ommended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.

Tire wear and damage1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

• Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking,bulging or objects caught inthe tread. If excessive wear,cracks, bulging or deep cutsare found, the tire(s) should bereplaced.

• The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. Whenthe wear indicators are visible,the tire(s) should be replaced.

• Tires degrade with age anduse. Have tires, including thespare, over 6 years old checkedby a qualified technician be-cause some tire damage maynot be obvious. Replace thetires as necessary to preventtire failure and possible per-sonal injury.

WDI0259

8-44 Do-it-yourself

• Improper service of the sparetire may result in serious per-sonal injury. If it is necessary torepair the spare tire, it is rec-ommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

• For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “Impor-tant Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the WarrantyInformation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tiresWhen replacing a tire, use the same size,tread design, speed rating and load carry-ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec-ommended types and sizes are shown in“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-35).

WARNING

• The use of tires other than those rec-ommended or the mixed use of tiresof different brands, construction(bias, bias-belted or radial), or treadpatterns can adversely affect theride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system, 4WD,ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-eter calibration, headlight aim andbumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents andcould result in serious personalinjury.

• If your vehicle was originallyequipped with four tires that werethe same size and you are only re-placing two of the four tires, installthe new tires on the rear axle. Placingnew tires on the front axle may causeloss of vehicle control in some drivingconditions and cause an accidentand personal injury.

• If the wheels are changed for anyreason, always replace with wheelswhich have the same off-set dimen-sion. Wheels of a different off-setcould cause premature tire wear, de-grade vehicle handling characteris-tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-terference with the brake discs. Suchinterference can lead to decreasedbraking efficiency and/or early brakepad/shoe wear. For additional infor-mation on wheel-off set dimensions,see “Wheels and tires” (P. 10-9).

• When using a wheel without theTPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMSwill not function and the low tirepressure warning light will flash forapproximately 1 minute. The light willremain on after 1 minute. Have yourtires replaced and/or TPMS systemreset as soon as possible. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSANdealer for this service.


• The TPMS sensor may be damaged ifit is not handled correctly. Be carefulwhen handling the TPMS sensor.

Do-it-yourself 8-45

• When replacing the TPMS sensor, theID registration may be required. Con-tact a NISSAN dealer for IDregistration.

• Do not use a valve stem cap that isnot specified by NISSAN. The valvestem cap may become stuck.

• Be sure that the valve stem caps arecorrectly fitted. Otherwise the valvemay be clogged up with dirt andcause a malfunction or loss ofpressure.

• Do not install a damaged or de-formed wheel or tire even if it hasbeen repaired. Such wheels or tirescould have structural damage andcould fail without warning.

• The use of retread tires is notrecommended.


Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-beltedor radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and maydamage the transmission, transfercase and differential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-mended that all four tires be replaced withtires of the same size, brand, constructionand tread pattern. The tire pressure andwheel alignment should also be checkedand corrected as necessary. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.

Wheel balanceUnbalanced wheels may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Even with regular use,wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,they should be balanced as required.Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.• For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Care of wheels• Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.• Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside ofthe vehicle is washed.

• Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause lossof pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

• NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in ar-eas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire)When using a wheel without the TPMS suchas the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.Your vehicle may be equipped with a fullsize spare that is a different size or brand

8-46 Do-it-yourself

than the tires originally installed on the ve-hicle. This full size spare tire is intended fortemporary use only and should be re-placed at the first opportunity.Observe the following precautions if theFULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tiremust be used. Otherwise, your vehiclecould be damaged or involved in anaccident:

WARNING

To help reduce the risk of a crash whichmay result in personal injury or death:• The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire

should be used for emergency useonly. It should be replaced with thestandard tire at the first opportunityto avoid possible tire or differentialdamage.

• Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving. The vehicle driving perfor-mance may be affected when drivingon wet or snow covered roads.

• When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare is installed, the following sys-tems may not work correctly:

– Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

– Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)System

• Periodically check the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire inflation pres-sure. Always keep the TEMPORARYFULL SIZE inflated to the pressurespecification shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

• With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE sparetire installed do not drive the vehicleat speeds faster than 50 mph (80km/h).

• When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY FULLSIZE spare tire should be used on thefront wheels and the original tireused on the rear wheels. Use tirechains only on the drive wheels.

• Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire on other vehicles.

• Do not use more than one TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the sametime.

• TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tireLimitations (except for Pro 4X)

– 50mph MAX– Towing allowed

• Customer can identify TEMPORARYFULL SIZE spare tire condition bychecking the Tire and loading infor-mation label located on the B-pillar.

CAUTION

• Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may causedamage to the vehicle.

• Use of the TEMPORARY FULL SIZEspare tire on a vehicle that has tireslarger than were originally equippedcan affect the 4WD system. This mayresult in a circumference differencebetween tires on front and rear axleswhich can cause the 4WD system toautomatically place the vehicle in2WD and flash the 4WD light. Whenthe TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tireis replaces with a tire that matches allother tires on the vehicle, and all tiresare properly inflated the 4WD systemwill operate normally

Do-it-yourself 8-47

MEMO

8-48 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Explanation of general maintenanceitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5Emission control system maintenance: . . . . . . 9-5Chassis and body maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Additional maintenance items forsevere operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model) . . . . . . . 9-7

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your vehi-cle’s good mechanical condition, as well asit’s emissions and engine performance.It is the owner's responsibility to make surethat the scheduled maintenance, as well asgeneral maintenance, is performed.As the vehicle owner, you are the only onewho can ensure that your vehicle receivesproper maintenance. You are a vital link inthe maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCEGeneral maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normalday-to-day operation. They are essentialfor proper vehicle operation. It is your re-sponsibility to perform these maintenanceprocedures regularly as prescribed.Performing general maintenance checksrequires minimal mechanical skill and onlya few general automotive tools.These checks or inspections can be doneby you, a qualified technician or, if you pre-fer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEThe maintenance items listed in this sec-tion are required to be serviced at regularintervals. However under severe drivingconditions, additional or more frequentmaintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICEIf maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and serviced. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-cialists and are kept up-to-date with thelatest service information through techni-cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-grams. They are fully qualified to work onNISSAN vehicles before work begins.If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it isrecommended that you ask your NISSANdealer where the nearest NISSAN CertifiedCollision Center is located, or go tohttp://collision.nissanusa.com.You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-er's service department can perform theservice needed to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance shouldbe performed regularly as prescribed inthis section. If you detect any unusualsounds, vibrations or smells, be sure tocheck for the cause or have it checkedpromptly. In addition, it is recommendedthat you visit a NISSAN dealer if you thinkthat repairs are required.When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-nance precautions” (P. 8-2).

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

WARNING

Failure to follow the procedures listedwithin this section may result in per-sonal injury.

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Doors and engine hood: Check that thedoors and engine hood operate properly.Also ensure that all latches lock securely.Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollersand links if necessary. Make sure that thesecondary latch keeps the hood fromopening when the primary latch isreleased.When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.Check that the gas stays or struts properlyand securely hold the hood, trunk, or rearhatch in a fully open position. If the hood,trunk, or rear hatch is not held open, havethe gas stays or struts replaced.Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights, stoplights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and otherlights are all operating properly and in-stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts aremissing, and check for any loose wheelnuts. Tighten if necessary.Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specifiedinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeoften and always prior to long distancetrips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in alltires, including the spare, to the pressurespecified. Check carefully for damage, cutsor excessive wear.Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components: Replace theTPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve coreand cap when the tires are replaced due towear or age.Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-hicle should pull to either side while drivingon a straight and level road, or if you detectuneven or abnormal tire wear, there maybe a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-way speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.Windshield: Clean the windshield on aregular basis. Check the windshield at leastevery six months for cracks or other dam-age. Have a damaged windshield repairedby a qualified repair facility. It is recom-mended that you have a damaged wind-

shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or aNISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locatea collision center in your area, refer tohttp://collision.nissanusa.com.Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such aswhen performing scheduled maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure thepedal does not bind or require uneven ef-fort. Keep the floor mat away from thepedal.Automatic transmission P (Park) posi-tion mechanism: On a fairly steep hillcheck that your vehicle is held securelywith the shift lever in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smoothoperation. If the brake pedal suddenly goesdown further than normal, the pedal feelsspongy or the vehicle seems to take longerto stop, have your vehicle checked imme-diately. It is recommended that you visit aNISSAN dealer for this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pullthe vehicle to one side when applied.Parking brake: Check the parking brakeoperation regularly. The vehicle should besecurely held on a fairly steep hill with onlythe parking brake applied. If the parkingbrake needs adjustment, it is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forthis service.Seats: Check seat position controls suchas seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., toensure they operate smoothly and alllatches lock securely in every position.Check that the head restraints/headrestsmove up and down smoothly and the locks(if so equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (for example, buckles, anchors,adjusters and retractors) operate properlyand smoothly, and are installed securely.Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,wear or damage.Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering system, such as excessive free-play, hard steering or strange noises.Warning lights and chimes: Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operatingproperly.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Checkthat the wipers and washer operate prop-erly and that the wipers do not streak.Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properlyand in sufficient quantity when operatingthe heater or air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (for example, eachtime you check the engine oil or refuel).Battery* (for maintenance free batter-ies): For vehicles equipped with a sealedmaintenance free battery. It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer forservice.Battery* (for serviceable batteries):Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluidshould be at the bottom of the filler open-ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera-tures or under severe conditions requirefrequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situationsthat can lead to potential battery dis-charge and potential no-start conditionssuch as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-tronic accessories that consume bat-tery power when the engine is not run-ning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/oronly driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need tobe charged to maintain battery health.Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MIN and MAX lineson the reservoir.Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drivebelts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.Engine oil level*: Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level surface withthe engine off. Wait more than 10 minutesfor the oil to drain back into the oil pan.Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,cracks, deterioration and damage. Tightenconnections or replace parts as necessary.For additional information, see “Exhaustgas (carbon monoxide)” (P. 5-4).Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the


vehicle has been parked for a while. Waterdripping from the air conditioner after useis normal. If you should notice any leaks or iffuel fumes are evident, check for the causeand have it corrected immediately.Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level when the fluid is cold, withthe engine off. Check the lines for properattachment, leaks, cracks, etc.Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects,leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-mation, rot or loose connections.Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to control dust. Itis very important to remove these sub-stances from the underbody, otherwiserust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuellines and exhaust system. At the end ofwinter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in thoseareas where mud and dirt may have accu-mulated. For additional information, see“Cleaning exterior” (P. 7-2).Windshield-washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided togive you a better understanding of thescheduled maintenance items that shouldbe regularly checked or replaced. Themaintenance schedule indicates at whichmileage/time intervals each item requiresservice.Items marked with “*” are recommendedby NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.You are not required to perform mainte-nance on these items in order to maintainthe warranties which come with yourNISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-tervals are required.When applicable, additional informationcan be found in the “Do-it-yourself ” sectionof this manual.NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the useof non-OEM approved aftermarketflushing systems and strongly advisesagainst performing these services on aNISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-proved chemicals or solvents, the use ofwhich has not been validated by NISSAN.For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,grease, and refrigerant, see “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”(P. 10-2).

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMMAINTENANCE:Drive Belts*: Check engine drive belts forwear, fraying or cracking and for propertension. Replace any damaged drive belts.Engine Air Filter: Replace at specified in-tervals. When driving for prolonged periodsin dusty conditions, check/replace the filtermore frequently.Engine Coolant*: Replace coolant at thespecified interval. When adding or replac-ing coolant, be sure to use only GenuineNISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)or equivalent with the proper mixture. (Foradditional information on the proper mix-ture for your area, see “Engine cooling sys-tem” (P. 8-6)).NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant orthe use of non-distilled water may reducethe recommended service interval of thecoolant.Engine Oil and Oil Filter: Replace engineoil and oil filter at the specified intervals. Forrecommended oil grade and viscosity see“Recommended fluids/lubricants and ca-pacities” (P. 10-2).

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE ITEMS


Engine Valve Clearance*: Inspect only ifvalve noise increases. Adjust valve clear-ance if necessary.Evaporative Emissions Control VaporLines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-ness. Tighten connections or replace partsas necessary.Fuel Lines*: Check the fuel hoses, pipingand connections for leaks, looseness, ordeterioration. Tighten connections or re-place parts as necessary.

CHASSIS AND BODYMAINTENANCE:Brake Lines and Cables: Visually inspectfor proper installation. Check for chafing,cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.Replace any deteriorated or damagedparts immediately.Brake Pads and Rotors: Check for wear,deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace anydeteriorated or damaged partsimmediately.Exhaust System: Visually inspect the ex-haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tightenconnections or replace parts as necessary.In-Cabin Microfilter: Replace at specifiedintervals. When driving for prolonged peri-

ods in dusty conditions, replace the filtermore frequently.Propeller Shaft(s): Check for damage,looseness, and grease leakage.(4WD/AWD/RWD).Steering Gear and Linkage, Axle and Sus-pension Parts, Drive Shaft Boots: Checkfor damage, looseness, and leakage of oilor grease. Under severe driving conditions,inspect more frequently.Tire Rotation: Rotate tires at the specifiedinterval shown in the maintenance sched-ule. When rotating tires, check for damageand uneven wear. Replace if necessary.Transmission Fluid/Oil, Differential Oil,Transfer Case Oil: Visually inspect for signsof leakage at specified intervals.Replace automatic transmission fluid atspecified intervals.If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-topcarrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads:• Replace the differential oil every 20,000

miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.• Replace the automatic transmission fluid

ever 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24months.

Off-Road Maintenance: Check the follow-ing items frequently whenever you driveoff-road through deep sand, mud or water:• Brake pads and rotors• Brake lines and hoses• Differential, transmission and transfer

case oil• Steering linkage• Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts• Engine air filter• Clutch housing drain (4WD only)


To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-nance schedules that may be used, de-pending upon the conditions in which youusually drive. These schedules containboth distance and time intervals, up to120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. Formost people, the odometer reading will in-dicate when service is needed. However, ifyou drive very little, your vehicle should beserviced at the regular time intervalsshown in the schedule.After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96months, continue maintenance at thesame mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMSFOR SEVERE OPERATINGCONDITIONSAdditional maintenance items for severeoperating conditions should be per-formed on vehicles that are driven underespecially demanding conditions. Addi-tional maintenance items should be per-formed if you primarily operate your vehicleunder the following conditions:• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

in normal temperatures or less than 10miles in freezing temperatures.

• Stop-and-go traffic in hot weather or lowspeed driving for long distances.

• Driving in dusty conditions or on rough,muddy or salt-spread roads.

• Towing a trailer, or using a camper or car-top carrier.

If your vehicle is mainly operated under thesevere conditions, follow the severe main-tenance intervals shown in the mainte-nance schedule.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES


5.6L 8 CYLINDER (VK56VD enginemodel)The following shows the maintenanceschedule.Choose the maintenance scheduleneeded based on your vehicle drivingconditions.After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96months, continue maintenance at thesame mileage/time interval.

5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 monthsPerform at number of miles, kilometers ormonths, whichever comes first.

Standard maintenance:Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval

Severe maintenance:Inspections:• Brake pads & rotors• Steering gear & linkage• Axle & suspension parts• Propeller shaft• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Exhaust system• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/

hood lift supports• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,

power steering, coolant)• Engine drive belt and hose inspections• Engine air filter• Suspension components (shocks, sub-

frame, tie rods)• Differential gear oil• Battery terminals and cables, battery test• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-

els only)



Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/


power steering, coolant)• Engine drive belt and hose inspections• Engine air filter• Propeller shaft• Suspension components (shocks, sub-

frame, tie rods)• Differential gear oil• Battery terminals and cables, battery test• Tire pressure, treadwear and depthEssentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Tire rotation

Severe maintenance:Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval







Essentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace brake fluid• Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-

els only)



Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Automatic transmission fluid (1)• Brake lines and cables• Brake pads and rotors• Differential gear oil• Propeller shaft• Transfer case oil (4WD models)• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/



frame, tie rods)• Battery terminals and cables, battery test• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth

Essentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace in-cabin microfilter• Tire rotation

Severe maintenance:Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluiddeterioration data using a CONSULT. If thedeterioration data is more than 77000, re-place the AT fluid.









els only)







Essentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace brake fluid• Replace differential gear oil• Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-

els only)• Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)



Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Intelligent key battery• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/












els only)



Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Automatic transmission fluid (1)• Brake lines and cables• Brake pads and rotors• Fuel tank vapor vent system *• Fuel lines/connections *• Exhaust system• Steering gear and linkage• Axle and suspension parts• Differential gear oil• Propeller shaft• Transfer case oil (4WD models)• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/


power steering, coolant)• Engine drive belt and hose inspections• Suspension components (shocks, sub-

frame, tie rods)• Battery terminals and cables, battery test

• Tire pressure, treadwear and depthEssentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace engine air filter (2)• Replace brake fluid• Replace In-cabin microfilter• Tire rotation• Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-

els only)

Severe maintenance:Essentials:• Replace automatic transmission fluid(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluiddeterioration data using a CONSULT. If thedeterioration data is more than 77000, re-place the AT fluid.(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,more frequent maintenance may berequired.* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”are recommended by NISSAN for reliablevehicle operation. The owner need not per-form such maintenance in order to main-tain the emission warranty or manufac-turer recall liability. Other maintenanceitems and intervals are required.









els only)








els only)


















Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Automatic transmission fluid (1)• Brake lines and cables• Brake pads and rotors• Propeller shaft• Differential gear oil• Transfer case oil (4WD models)• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/




Essentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace in-cabin microfilter• Replace intelligent key batter• Tire rotation

Severe maintenance:Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluiddeterioration data using a CONSULT. If thedeterioration data is more than 77000, re-place the AT fluid.









els only)








els only)















els only)



Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Automatic transmission fluid (1)• Brake lines and cables• Brake pads and rotors• Engine drive belt *• Fuel tank vapor vent system *• Fuel lines/connections *• Exhaust system• Propeller shaft• Axle & suspension parts• Steering gear & linkage• Differential gear oil• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Transfer case oil (4WD models)• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/


power steering, coolant)• Hose inspection• Suspension components (shocks, sub-

frame, tie rods)

• Battery terminals and cables, battery test• Tire pressure, treadwear and depthEssentials:• Replace engine air filter (2)• Replace brake fluid• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace in-cabin microfilter• Tire rotation• Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-

els only)

Severe maintenance:Essentials:• Replace automatic transmission fluid• Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluiddeterioration data using a CONSULT. If thedeterioration data is more than 77000, re-place the AT fluid.(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,more frequent maintenance may berequired.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”are recommended by NISSAN for reliablevehicle operation. The owner need not per-form such maintenance in order to main-tain the emission warranty or manufac-turer recall liability. Other maintenanceitems and intervals are required.









els only)• Replace differential gear oil• Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)









els only)





frame, tie rods)• Differential gear oil• Battery terminals and cables, battery test• Tire pressure, treadwear and depthEssentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace intelligent key battery• Tire rotation










els only)


Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Automatic transmission fluid (1)• Brake lines and cables• Brake pads and rotors• Engine drive belt *• Propeller shaft• Differential gear oil• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Transfer case oil (4WD models)• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/


power steering, coolant)• Hose inspection• Engine air filter• Suspension components (shocks, sub-


Essentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace in-cabin microfilter• Tire rotation

Severe maintenance:Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluiddeterioration data using a CONSULT. If thedeterioration data is more than 77000, re-place the AT fluid.* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”are recommended by NISSAN for reliablevehicle operation. The owner need not per-form such maintenance in order to main-tain the emission warranty or manufac-turer recall liability. Other maintenanceitems and intervals are required.









els only)
























els only)


Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Automatic transmission fluid (1)• Brake lines and cables• Brake pads and rotors• Engine drive belt *• Fuel tank vapor vent system *• Fuel lines/connections *• Exhaust system• Propeller shaft• Steering gear and linkage• Axle and suspension parts• Differential gear oil• Transfer case oil (4WD models)• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/


power steering, coolant)• Hose inspection• Suspension components (shocks, sub-

frame, tie rods)

• Battery terminals and cables, battery test• Tire pressure, treadwear and depthEssentials:• Replace engine air filter (2)• Replace brake fluid• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace in-cabin microfilter• Replace intelligent key battery• Tire rotation• Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-

els only)

Severe maintenance:Essentials:• Replace automatic transmission fluid(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluiddeterioration data using a CONSULT. If thedeterioration data is more than 77000, re-place the AT fluid.(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,more frequent maintenance may berequired.* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”are recommended by NISSAN for reliable


vehicle operation. The owner need not per-form such maintenance in order to main-tain the emission warranty or manufac-turer recall liability. Other maintenanceitems and intervals are required.








els only)









els only)

















Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Automatic transmission fluid (1)• Brake lines and cables• Brake pads and rotors• Engine drive belt *• Propeller shaft• Differential gear oil• Transfer case oil (4WD models)• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/


power steering, coolant)• Hose inspections• Engine air filter• Suspension components (shocks, sub-



Essentials:• Replace engine coolant * (2)• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace in-cabin microfilter• Replace spark plugs• Tire rotation

Severe maintenance:Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluiddeterioration data using a CONSULT. If thedeterioration data is more than 77000, re-place the AT fluid.(2) First replacement interval is 105,000miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After firstreplacement, replace every 75,000 miles(120,000 km) or 60 months.* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”are recommended by NISSAN for reliablevehicle operation. The owner need not per-form such maintenance in order to main-tain the emission warranty or manufac-turer recall liability. Other maintenanceitems and intervals are required.








els only)









els only)





frame, tie rods)• Differential gear oil• Battery terminals and cables, battery test• Tire pressure, treadwear and depthEssentials:• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace intelligent key battery• Tire rotation










els only)


Standard maintenance:Inspections:• Automatic transmission fluid (1)• Brake lines and cables• Brake pads and rotors• Engine drive belt *• Fuel tank vapor vent system *• Fuel lines/connections *• Exhaust system• Propeller shaft• Steering gear and linkage• Axle and suspension parts• Differential gear oil• Transfer case oil (4WD models)• Drive shaft boots (4WD models)• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/


power steering, coolant)• Hose inspections• Suspension components (shocks, sub-

frame, tie rods)


• Battery terminals and cables, battery test• Tire pressure, treadwear and depthEssentials:• Replace engine air filter (2)• Replace brake fluid• Replace engine oil & filter• Replace in-cabin microfilter• Tire rotation• Lubricate steering stopper cap (XD mod-

els only)

Severe maintenance:Essentials:• Replace automatic transmission fluid• Replace transfer case oil (4WD models)• Replace differential gear oil(1) Request the dealer to inspect the fluiddeterioration data using a CONSULT. If thedeterioration data is more than 77000, re-place the AT fluid.(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,more frequent maintenance may berequired.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”are recommended by NISSAN for reliablevehicle operation. The owner need not per-form such maintenance in order to main-tain the emission warranty or manufac-turer recall liability. Other maintenanceitems and intervals are required.


MEMO


10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine oil and oil filterrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

When traveling or registering in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-18Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-19Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-19Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Securing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Utili-track® channel system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Rear assist step (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Crew cab models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31King Cab® models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Special Body vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Location for center of gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Vehicle load weight capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Flat towing for 2-Wheel Drive (2WD)vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Flat towing for 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Owner's Manual/Service Manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid typeCapacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetricMeasure

USMeasure

ImperialMeasure

Fuel 98.4 L 26 gal 21-5/8 gal • For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” (P. 10-4).

Engine oil *1Drain and refill*1 For additional information, see“Changing engine oil and oil filter ”(P. 8-8).

With oilfilter

change6.5 L 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt

• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recom-mended.• If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damagecaused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recom-mended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited War-ranty. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recom-mendations” (P. 10-7).

Withoutoil filterchange

6.2 L 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt

Engine coolantwith reservoir

Non-XDmodel 13.4 L 3-1/2 gal 3 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalentXD model 13.2 L 3-1/2 gal 2-7/8 gal

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF or equivalent• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic P ATF (orequivalent) ONLY in NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mixwith other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to GenuineNISSAN Matic P ATF may damage the automatic transmission.Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommendedis not covered under the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Differential gear oil

FrontNon-XDmodel 1.25 L 2-5/8 pt 2-1/4 pt • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic GL-5 75W-85.

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Syn-thetic GL-5 75W-85 ONLY in final drive. Do not mix with other fluids.Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN DifferentialOil Synthetic GL-5 75W-85 may damage the differential gear. Dam-age caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is notcovered under the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

XD model 1.51 L 3-1/4 pt 2-5/8 pt

RearNon-XDmodel 2.3 L 4-7/8 pt 4 pt

XD model 2.6 L 5-1/2 pt 4-5/8 pt

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid typeCapacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetricMeasure

USMeasure

ImperialMeasure

Transfer fluid

Non-XD model 1.5 L 1-5/8 qt 1-3/8 qt• Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M or equivalent• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF D3M (or equivalent)may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, andmay damage the transfer. Damage caused by fluids other than asrecommended is not covered by the NISSAN’s New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

XD model 1.8 L 1-7/8 qt 1-5/8 qt

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — • Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent.

Brake fluid — — —• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *2 or equivalentDOT 3.*2 Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) (or equivalent).

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —• HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) (or equivalent).• For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).

Air conditioning system oil — — —• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG (VC100yf oil).• For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).

Windshield-washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze fluid or equivalent.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONNISSAN recommends the use of unleadedpremium gasoline with an octane rating ofat least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number(Research octane number 96). If unleadedpremium gasoline is not available, you mayuse unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Re-search octane number 91), but you maynotice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

• Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

• Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, becausethis will damage the three-waycatalyst.

• Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designedto run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifi-cally designed for E-15 or E-85 fuelcan adversely affect the emissioncontrol devices and systems of thevehicle. Damage caused by such fuelis not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-hicle Limited Warranty.

• Do not use fuel that contains the oc-tane booster methylcyclopentadi-enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).Using fuel containing MMT may ad-versely affect vehicle performanceand vehicle emissions. Not all fueldispensers are labeled to indicateMMT content, so you may have toconsult your gasoline retailer formore details. Note that Federal andCalifornia laws prohibit the use ofMMT in reformulated gasoline.

• U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to beidentified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common ab-breviation or the appropriate per-centage for that region.

Gasoline specificationsNISSAN recommends using gasoline thatmeets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)specifications where it is available. Many ofthe automobile manufacturers developedthis specification to improve emission con-trol system and vehicle performance. Askyour service station manager if the gaso-line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing re-formulated gasolines. These gasolines arespecially designed to reduce vehicle emis-sions. NISSAN supports efforts towardscleaner air and suggests that you use re-formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MethylTert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol withor without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use offuels of which the oxygenate content andthe fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-not be readily determined. If in doubt, askyour service station manager.


If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,please take the following precautions asthe usage of such fuels may cause vehicleperformance problems and/or fuel systemdamage.• The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

• If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

• E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affectthe emission control devices and sys-tems of the vehicle and should not beused. Damage caused by such fuel isnot covered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.

• If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as enginestalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,immediately change to a non-oxygenatefuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.Take care not to spill gasoline during re-fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenatescan cause paint damage.

E–15 fuelE-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.E-15 can only be used in vehicles designedto run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in yourvehicle. U.S. government regulations re-quire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to beidentified with small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbreviationor the appropriate percentage for thatregion.

E–85 fuelE-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.E-85 can only be used in a Flexible FuelVehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-hicle. U.S. government regulations requirefuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-tified by a small, square, orange and blacklabel with the common abbreviation or theappropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMTMMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-ditive. NISSAN does not recommend theuse of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel mayadversely affect vehicle performance, in-cluding the emissions control system. Notethat while some fuel pumps label MMTcontent, not all do, so you may have toconsult your gasoline retailer for moredetails.


Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use ofany aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-ample, fuel injector cleaner, octanebooster, intake valve deposit removers,etc.) which are sold commercially. Many ofthese additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active sol-vents or similar ingredients that can beharmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended cancause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”(“Spark knock” is a metallic rappingnoise.) If severe, this can lead to enginedamage. If you detect a persistent heavyspark knock even when using gasolineof the stated octane rating, or if you hearsteady spark knock while holding asteady speed on level roads, it is recom-mended that you have a NISSAN dealercorrect the condition. Failure to correctthe condition is misuse of the vehicle, forwhich NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result inspark knock, after-run and/or overheating,which may cause excessive fuel consump-tion or engine damage. If any of the abovesymptoms are encountered, have your ve-hicle checked. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is nota cause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oilIt is essential to choose the correct grade,quality and viscosity engine oil to ensuresatisfactory engine life and performance.For additional information, see “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”(P. 10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improvefuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-cation or International Lubricant Standard-ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)certification and SAE viscosity standard.These oils have the API certification markon the front of the container. Oils which donot have the specified quality label shouldnot be used as they could cause enginedamage.

Oil additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is notnecessary when the proper oil type is usedand maintenance intervals are followed.Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because ofthis, it is important to select the engine oilviscosity based on the temperatures atwhich the vehicle will be operated beforethe next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-ity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. Whenreplacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter orits equivalent for the reason described in“Change intervals.”

LTI2051


Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of thespecified quality oils and filters. Using en-gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-fied quality, or exceeding recommended oiland filter change intervals could reduceengine life. Damage to the engine causedby improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity isnot covered by the NISSAN New VehicleLimited Warranty.Your engine was filled with a high-qualityengine oil when it was built. You do not haveto change the oil before the first recom-mended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how youuse your vehicle.Operation under the following conditionsmay require more frequent oil and filterchanges:• repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures• driving in dusty conditions• extensive idling• towing a trailer• stop and go commuting

For additional information, see the “Mainte-nance and schedules” section of thismanual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in yourNISSAN vehicle must be charged with therefrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) andNISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG(VC100yf oil) or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oilmay cause severe damage to the airconditioning system and may requirethe replacement of all air conditionersystem components.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) inyour NISSAN vehicle does not harm theearth's ozone layer. Although this refriger-ant does not affect the earth's atmo-sphere, certain government regulations re-quire the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air condi-tioner system service. Air conditioner sys-tem should only be service by trained andcertified technicians to ensure proper and

safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealerhas the trained technicians and equip-ment needed to recover and recycle yourair conditioner system refrigerant. Onlynew and SAE J2842 certified evaporator(s)shall be used as replacement parts.A damaged or leaking air conditioningevaporator shall never be repaired or re-placed with one removed from a used orsalvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged orleaking evaporator, use only new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recom-mended that you visit a NISSAN dealerwhen servicing your air conditionersystem.


ENGINEModel 5.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHCCylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90°Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92)Displacement cu in (cm 3) 338.78 (5,552)Firing order 1–8–7–3–6–5–4–2Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.A/T (in “N” position)Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)CO % at idleSpark plug DILKAR7B11Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel Type Offset in (mm) Size

Steel1.73 (44) 17 x 7.5 J0.98 (25) 18 x 8.0 J

Alloy

0.98 (25) 18 x 8.0 J0.91 (23) 18 x 8.0 J1.63 (41.5) 18 x 7.5 J0.91 (23) 20 x 8.0 J1.63 (41.5) 20 x 7.5 J

Tire type Performance type Size

Passenger

All season 265/70R18All season P265/70R18All season P275/60R20All terrain P275/70R18

Light truckAll season LT245/75R17All terrain LT275/65R18All season LT265/60R20

Spare wheel type Performance type SizeFull size (Matching)Steel - LT245/75R17

Full size (NonMatching) Steel

- 265/70R18- P265/70R18- P275/70R18- P275/60R20- LT245/75R17

Full size (NonMatching) Alloy

- P275/60R20- LT265/60R20

Full size (Matching)Alloy

- P275/70R18- P275/60R20- LT265/60R20- LT275/65R18


DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSNon-XD crew cab models

Models Units: in (mm)Overall Length:

Without front license plate bracket: S, SV, SL and Platinum 228.0 (5791.5)Pro-4X 228.9 (5812.7)

With license plate bracket: S, SV, SL and Platinum 228.2 (5795.1)Canada: Pro-4X 228.2 (5795.1)

USA: Pro-4X 229.5 (5828.5)Overall width:

Tow mirrors non-extended: 98.2 (2,494)Tow mirrors extended: 103.9 (2,640)

Without overfenders:2WD: S, SV and SL 79.5 (2,018.5)4WD: S, SV, SL and Platinum 79.5 (2,018.5)

Canada Pro-4X 79.5 (2,018.5)With overfenders:

Pro-4X and Platinum 80.7 (2,049.6)Overall height:

2WD: S/SV 75.4 (1,915.1)4WD: S/SV 76.0 (1,930)2WD: SL/Platinum 75.6 (1,920.4)4WD: Pro-4X/SL/Platinum 77.2 (1,961)


Models Units: in (mm)Front Track:

USA: S and SV 67.9 (1,725)USA: SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Canada: S, SV, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,730)Rear Track:

USA: S and SV 67.9 (1,725)USA: SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)

Canada: S, SV, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.1 (1,729)Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certi-

fication label” on the center pillar be-tween the driver's side front and reardoors.

Gross axle weight rating:Front:Rear:


XD crew cab models


Without front license plate bracket:S, SV, SL and Platinum 242.8 (6,168.2)Pro-4X 243.6 (6,187.2)

With front license plate bracket:S, SV, SL and Platinum 243.4 (6,181.8)Pro-4X 244.4 (6,208.5)

Overall width:Tow mirrors non-extended: 98.2 (2,494)

Tow mirrors extended: 103.9 (2,640)Without overfenders: S, SV and SL 79.5 (2,018.5)

With overfenders: Pro-4X and Platinum 80.7 (2,049.6)Overall height:

S 78.0 (1981.6)SV 78.0 (1982.4)Pro-4X 78.4 (1,992.3)SL/Platinum 78.9 (2,002.8)

Front Track:S and SV 68.4 (1,738)SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,743)


Models Units: in (mm)Rear Track:

S and SV 68.4 (1,737)SL, Pro-4X and Platinum 68.6 (1,742)

Wheelbase: 151.6 (3,850)Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certi-




Non-XD King Cab® models


Without front license plate bracket:S and SV 228.0 (5,791.5)Pro-4X 228.9 (5,812.7)

With front license plate bracket:S and SV 228.2 (5,795.1)Pro-4X 229.5 (5,828.5)

Overall width:Without overfenders: S and SV 79.5 (2,018.5)

With overfenders: Pro-4X 80.7 (2,049.6)Overall height:

2WD: S 75.1 (1,908)4WD: S 75.7 (1,923)2WD: SV 75.1 (1,908)4WD: SV 75.7 (1,923)

Pro-4X 76.9 (1,953)Front Track:

S and SV 67.9 (1,725)Pro-4X 68.1 (1,729)


Models Units: in (mm)Rear Track:

S and SV 67.9 (1,725)Pro-4X 68.1 (1,729)

Wheelbase: 139.8 (3,550)Gross vehicle weight rating: Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certi-




When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should firstfind out if the fuel available is suitable foryour vehicle's engine.Using fuel with an octane rating that is toolow may cause engine damage. All gaso-line vehicles must be operated with un-leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid takingyour vehicle to areas where appropriatefuel is not available.When transferring the registration ofyour vehicle to another country, state,province or district, it may be necessaryto modify the vehicle to meet local lawsand regulations.The laws and regulations for motor vehicleemission control and safety standardsvary according to the country, state, prov-ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-tions may differ.When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation and registration are the re-sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-sponsible for any inconvenience thatmay result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN)plate is attached as shown. This number isthe identification for your vehicle and isused in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is lo-cated as shown.

LTI2195 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGIN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe engine serial number is stamped onthe engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATIONLABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-cation label is affixed as shown. This labelcontains valuable vehicle information, suchas: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year ofmanufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

WTI00955.6L 8 cylinder (VK56VD engine model)

LTI0135Type A (if so equipped)

WTI0099Type B (if so equipped)


EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label isattached to the underside of the hood asshown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABEL

LTI2197XD models

LTI2242Except XD models

LTI2480Type A (if so equipped)


The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. The label islocated as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABEL

The air conditioner specification label is af-fixed to the underside of the hood asshown.

LTI2196Type B (if so equipped)

LTI2198XD models

LTI2243Except XD models


Symbol Name Reference Graphic

Caution ISO 7000 0434

Air Conditioning System(MAC) ISO 2575 D01

MAC System Lubricant Type(PAG–POE)

Requires Registered Technician toService MAC System

Flammable Refrigerant

Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols

Use the following steps to mount the frontlicense plate:1. Attach the license plate bracket on the

skid plate at the location marked (smalldimple) using self-tapping screws.

LTI2230Pro-4X

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE


Use the following steps to mount the frontlicense plate:1. Install two grommets OA into the square

holes in the front bumper.

2. Install the license plate bracket to thefront bumper with two tapping screwsOB .

WARNING

• It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area inside a ve-hicle. In a collision, people rid-ing in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled.

• Do not allow people to ride inany area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andseat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your ve-hicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

LTI2225Except Pro-4x

LTI2226Except Pro-4x

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


TERMSIt is important to familiarize yourselfwith the following terms beforeloading your vehicle:• Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment,fluids, emergency tools, and sparetire assembly. This weight doesnot include passengers and cargo.

• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weightof passengers and cargo.

• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other op-tional equipment. This informationis located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limitspecified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

• GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) - The maximum totalweight rating of the vehicle, pas-sengers, cargo, and trailer.

• Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum to-tal weight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum com-bined weight of occupants andcargo that can be loaded into thevehicle. If the vehicle is used to towa trailer, the trailer tongue weightmust be included as part of thecargo load. This information is lo-cated on the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

• Cargo capacity - permissibleweight of cargo, the subtractedweight of occupants from the loadlimit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITYBefore driving a loaded vehicle, con-firm that you do not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both theGVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.For additional information, see “Mea-surement of weights” (P. 10-33).Do not exceed the load limit of yourvehicle shown as “The combinedweight of occupants and cargo” onthe Tire and Loading Information la-bel. Do not exceed the number ofoccupants shown as “Seating Ca-pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label.To get “the combined weight of oc-cupants and cargo”, add the weightof all occupants, then add the totalluggage weight. Examples areshown in the following illustration.


Steps for determining correctload limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXlbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For ex-ample, if the XXX amount equals1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150lbs. passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) or(640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.)

LTI2320Example


5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the avail-able cargo and luggage load ca-pacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Con-sult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-firm that you do not exceed theGVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.For additional information, see “Mea-surement of weights” (P. 10-33).Also check tires for proper inflationpressures. For additional informa-tion, see “Tire and Loading Informa-tion label” (P. 8-37).

SECURING THE LOADFor your convenience, tie down hooks areplaced at each corner of the truck box.These may be used to help secure cargoloaded into the truck box.

WARNING


• Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts ofyour vehicle can break, tire damagecould occur, or it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. This could re-sult in loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

LTI2481


UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (ifso equipped)1. Side channels

2. Header channel

3. Channel sections

4. Floor channels

WARNING

• Properly install and tighten the tie-down cleats into the Utili-track®channel system. Also, do not attachany rope or straps directly to thechannel. Failure to properly installthe tie-down cleats or attachingropes or straps directly to the chan-nel can cause the cargo to becomeunsecured. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropesor straps to help prevent it from slid-ing or shifting. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

NOTE:

If the bed liner storage bins (if soequipped) are installed on the vehicle,use the cleats in the side channel loca-tions. For additional information on bedliner storage bins, see “Storage” (P. 2-70).

The Utili-track® channel system allows youto move tie-down clamps in the bed to thebest location to secure a load.The tie-down cleats must be installed sothe clamp is properly seated in the notchesin the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seatedin the notches, it will not be flush with therail and cannot be properly tightened. Thebolt in the center of the cleat must be tight-ened hand tight (20 – 40 in-lbs.)Check the tightness of the tie-down cleatperiodically during a trip to make sure thecenter bolt has not become loose.Install the tie-down cleat as follows:1. Remove the channel protectors by slid-

ing them out the back of the truck bed.Properly store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

LTI0107


3. Insert the cleat into the channel perpen-dicular to the channel as shown. Thenrotate the cleat clockwise 90° and slide itto the desired location.

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on thebottom fully seat into the channeldetents.

5. There should be no gap between thebottom of the cleat and the top of thechannel. Tighten the center bolt handtight (20-40 in-lbs.).

LTI0103

LTI0104


WTI0124


CAUTION

• Install only one cleat per section ofchannel.

• Applying loads at angles to the cleatsgreater than 45° or loads greaterthan 150 lbs. (header and floor chan-nels) or 200 lbs. (side channels) maycause damage to the channel or bed.

LTI0106


WARNING

Do not install accessories over the gapbetween the front and rear side chan-nels. Doing this could affect the rearstructure in certain rear impacts, whichcould result in serious injury.

REAR ASSIST STEP (if so equipped)

CAUTION

• The rear assist step maximumweight capacity is 300 lbs. (136 kg).Applying more than 300 lbs. (136 kg)may damage the step.

Push the rear assist step to extend step.Pull the rear assist step to retract step.

LTI01231 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation

LTI2520


LOADING TIPS• The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

• Do not load the front and rear axleto the GAWR. Doing so will exceedthe GVWR.

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help preventit from sliding or shifting. Donot place cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargocould cause personal injury.

• Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rearGAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damagecould occur, or it can changethe way your vehicle handles.This could result in loss of con-trol and cause personal injury.

• Overloading not only canshorten the life of your vehicleand the tire, but can also causeunsafe vehicle handling andlonger braking distances. Thismay cause a premature tirefailure which could result in aserious accident and personalinjury. Failures caused by over-loading are not covered by thevehicle’s warranty.

CREW CAB MODELSCrew Cab short wheel base modelsshould not be used to carry a slide-incamper.

KING CAB® MODELSThis information is provided for you toproperly install a slide-in camper and isbased on the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration regulations. It is rec-ommended that, before installing thecamper, you carefully read the following in-formation and ensure that the campermeets the specifications.This information may not apply to someCanada model vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLESSome vehicles are equipped with commer-cial or camper bodies. However, this Own-er's Manual does not cover these options.For additional information, refer to thebody manufacturer's instruction manual.

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADINGINFORMATION


LOCATION FOR CENTER OFGRAVITYThe illustration indicates the recom-mended cargo center of gravity location.Crew Cab Non-XD models:L1 = 33.8 in (858 mm)Crew Cab XD models:L1 = 47.2 in (1,200 mm)King Cab® Non-XD models:L1 = 39.6 in (1,005 mm)

WARNING

Improper loading may be dangerous. Ifa load is too far back, it can affect han-dling characteristics. If a load is too farforward, the front axle may beoverloaded.

When the truck is used to carry a slide-incamper, the total cargo load of the truckconsists of the camper manufacturer'sweight figure,• the weight of installed additional camper

equipment not included in the campermanufacturer's weight figure,

• the weight of camper cargo,• and the weight of passengers in the

camper.The total cargo load should not exceed thetruck's cargo weight rating and the camp-er's center of gravity should fall within the

WTI0195 LTI0129


truck's recommended center of gravityzone when installed.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading canadversely affect vehicle handling, brak-ing and performance and may lead toaccidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITYThe vehicle payload weight capacityshown on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the maximum total weightof passengers, optional equipment (airconditioning, trailer hitch, etc.) and cargothat your vehicle is designed to carry.For additional information, see “Tire andLoading Information label” (P. 8-37).Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the GVWR or theGAWR for your vehicle. For additional infor-mation, see “Vehicle loading information”(P. 10-22).Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. For additional information, see “Tireand Loading Information label” (P. 8-37).

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTSSecure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of your vehicle. When thetruck camper is loaded, drive to ascale and weigh on the front and onthe rear wheels separately to deter-mine axle loads. Individual axle loadsshould not exceed either of thegross axle weight ratings (GAWR).The total of the axle loads should notexceed the gross vehicle weight rat-ing (GVWR). These ratings are givenon the vehicle certification label thatis located on the left side of the ve-hicle, normally the dash, hinge pillar,door latch post, or door edge next tothe driver. If weight ratings are ex-ceeded, move or remove items tobring all weights below the ratings.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely af-fect vehicle handling, braking and per-formance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

• Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavyload for the first 500 miles (805 km).Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

• For the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over 50mph (80 km/h) and do not makestarts at full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of your ve-hicle wear in at the heavier load.

Your new vehicle was designed to be usedprimarily to carry passengers and cargo.Remember that towing a trailer places ad-ditional loads on your vehicle's engine,drive train, steering, braking and othersystems.

TOWING A TRAILER


A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail-able on the website atwww.nissanusa.com. This guide includesinformation on trailer towing capability andthe special equipment required for propertowing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceedthe value specified in the “Towing load/specification” chart (P. 10-37). The totaltrailer load equals trailer weight plus itscargo weight.• When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used.

The maximum GCWR should not exceedthe value specified in the following “Towingload/specification” chart (P. 10-37).

The GCWR equals the combined weight ofthe towing vehicle (including passengersand cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow-ing loads greater than these or using im-proper towing equipment could adverselyaffect vehicle handling, braking andperformance.The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer isnot only related to the maximum trailerloads, but also the places you plan to tow.Tow weights appropriate for level highwaydriving may have to be reduced for lowtraction situations (for example, on slipperyboat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affecttowing. For example, towing a heavy trailerin high outside temperatures on gradedroads can affect engine performance andcause overheating. The engine protectionmode, which helps reduce the chance ofengine damage, could activate and auto-matically decrease engine power. Vehiclespeed may decrease under high load. Planyour trip carefully to account for trailer andvehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-gine power and vehicle speed. The re-duced speed may be lower than othertraffic, which could increase the chanceof a collision. Be especially carefulwhen driving. If the vehicle cannotmaintain a safe driving speed, pull tothe side of the road in a safe area. Allowthe engine to cool and return to normaloperation. For additional information,see “If your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12).

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-proper towing procedures is not cov-ered by NISSAN warranties.

LTI0161


Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weightdistributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or usethe trailer tongue load specified by thetrailer manufacturer. The tongue loadmust be within the maximum tongue loadlimits shown in the following “Towing load/specification” chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allowfor proper tongue load.

King pin loadWhen using a 5th wheel hitch, keep thetongue load between 15 - 25% of the totaltrailer load within the maximum king pinload limits shown in the following “Towingload/specification” chart. If the king pinload becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper king pin load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross AxleWeight (GAW)The GVW of the towing vehicle must notexceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label. The GVW equals thecombined weight of the unloaded vehicle,passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongueload and any other optional equipment. Inaddition, front or rear GAW must not ex-ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label.

WTI0160 CA0036


Towing with Weight Distributing Class 4HitchThe Class 4 towing capacities shown in thetowing load specification charts are calcu-lated per the SAE J2807 standards. Addi-tional passengers, cargo and/or optionalequipment, such as the trailer hitch, willadd weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle's maximum towing capacity andtrailer tongue load.The vehicle and trailer need to be weighedto confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-sured using platform type scales com-monly found at truck stops, highway weighstations, building supply centers or salvageyards.Towing with Gooseneck HitchThe gooseneck towing capacities are cal-culated assuming a base vehicle withdriver and any options required to achievethe rating. Additional passengers, cargoand/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicleand reduce your vehicle's maximum tow-ing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighedto confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-sured using platform type scales com-monly found at truck stops, highway weighstations, building supply centers or salvageyards.To determine the available payload capac-ity for tongue/king pin load, use the follow-ing procedure.1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with allof the passengers and cargo that arenormally in the vehicle when towing atrailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight fromthe GVWR. The remaining amount is theavailable maximum tongue/king pinload.

To determine the available towing capacity,use the following procedure.1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

"Towing load/specification" chart foundin this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight fromthe GCWR. The remaining amount is theavailable maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-ment and cargo, that are normally in thetrailer when it is towed. Make sure theGross trailer weight is not more than theGross Trailer Weight Rating shown on thetrailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.Also weigh the front and rear axles on thescale to make sure the Front Gross AxleWeight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are notmore than Front Gross Axle Weight andRear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo inthe trailer and vehicle may need to bemoved or removed to meet the specifiedratings.Example:• Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargoand hitch - 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg).

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg).


• Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing load/specification" chart -19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg).

• Maximum Trailer towing capacity from“Towing load/specification" chart - 9,200lbs. (4,173 kg).

8,990 lbs. (4,078 kg) GVWR– 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg) GVW

= 1,186 lbs. (538 kg) Available fortongue/king pin

weight

19,450 lbs. (8,822 kg) GCWR– 7,804 lbs. (3,540 kg) GVW

= 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Capacity availablefor towing

1,186 lbs. (538 kg) Available tongueweight

/ 11,644 lbs. (5,282 kg) Available capacity= 10 % tongue

weight

The available towing capacity may be lessthan the maximum towing capacity due tothe passenger and cargo load in thevehicle.Remember to keep trailer tongue weightbetween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight orwithin the trailer tongue weight specifica-tion recommended by the trailer manufac-turer. If the tongue weight becomes exces-sive, rearrange the cargo to obtain theproper tongue weight. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specificationshown in the “Towing load/specification”chart even if the calculated availabletongue weight is greater than 15%. If thecalculated tongue weight is less than 10%,shift the trailer load forward until the trailertongue weight reaches 10% of the trailerweight.Always verify that available capacities arewithin the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATIONWARNING

The towing capacities provided in thismanual are for general reference only.The safe towing capacity of your ve-hicle is affected by dealer and factoryinstalled options and passenger andcargo loads. You must weigh the ve-hicle and trailer as described in thismanual to determine the actual vehicletowing capacity. Do not exceed thepublished maximum towing capacityor the GCWR or the GVWR shown on theFMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-sult in an accident causing serious per-sonal injury or property damage.

NOTE:

The SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class4 Hitch specifications are based on S andSV grade models . The Gooseneck Hitchspecifications are based on SV grademodels.


Non-XD models — Crew cab — Towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Payload 1,590 lbs. (721.2 kg) 1,640 lbs. (743.9 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 9,360 lbs. (4,245.6 kg) 9,220 lbs. (4,182.1 kg)Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 936 lbs. (424.6 kg) 922 lbs. (418.2 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)

Non-XD models — King Cab® — Towing load specification chart — SAE J2807 Weight Distributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 2WD 4WDMaximum Payload 1,610 lbs. (730.3 kg) 1,690 lbs. (766.6 kg)

Maximum Towing Capacity *1, *2, *3 9,380 lbs. (4,254.7 kg) 9,260 lbs. (4,200.3 kg)Maximum Tongue load *2, *3 938 lbs. (425.5 kg) 926 lbs. (420 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg) 15,300 lbs. (6,940 kg)


XD models — Crew cab — Towing loadspecification chart — SAE J2807 WeightDistributing Class 4 Hitch

Axle type 4WDMaximum Payload 2,440 lbs. (1,106.8 kg)

Maximum Towing Ca-pacity *1, *2, *3 10,930 lbs. (4,957.8 kg)

Maximum Tongue load*2, *3 1,093 lbs. (495.8 kg)

Maximum Gross Com-bined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

XD models — Crew cab — Towing loadspecification chart — Gooseneck Hitch

Axle type 4WDMaximum Payload 2,440 lbs. (1,106.8 kg)

Maximum Towing Ca-pacity *1, *2, *3 11,040 lbs. (5,007.7 kg)

Maximum King pin load*2, *3 1,656 lbs. (751.1 kg)

Maximum Gross Com-bined Weight Rating*4 17,700 lbs. (8,029 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated as-suming a base vehicle with driver and any optionsrequired to achieve the rating. Additional passen-gers, cargo and/or optional equipment will addweight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle'smaximum towing capacity.*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system isrecommended when towing over 5,000 lbs. (2,268kg).*3: The maximum towing capacity when using theGenuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg) and 500 lbs. (227 kg) tongueload.*4: The maximum gross combined weight ratingfor XD vehicles equipped with 20 inch wheels is16,900 lbs. (7,666 kg).

TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitchYour vehicle may be equipped with an op-tional trailer tow package. The trailer towpackage includes a receiver-type framemounted hitch. This hitch is rated for themaximum towing capacity of this vehiclewhen the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount andhitch ball that is rated for the trailer to betowed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts andhitch balls are available at a NISSAN dealer.If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-tional trailer tow package, check the tow-ing capacity of your bumper hitch orreceiver-type frame mounted hitch.Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch isavailable at a NISSAN dealer. Make sure thetrailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-hicle to help avoid personal injury or prop-erty damage due to sway caused by cross-winds, rough road surfaces or passingtrucks.


A hitch used for towing 5th wheel andgooseneck trailers can also be installed onyour vehicle. Contact a professional sup-plier of towing equipment to purchase andhave a 5th wheel or gooseneck hitchinstalled.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier thanthe weight rating of the hitch compo-nents. Never exceed the weight ratingof the hitch components. Doing so cancause serious personal injury or prop-erty damage.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size andweight rating for your trailer:• The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch ballsalso have the size printed on the top ofthe ball.

• Choose the proper class hitch ball basedon the trailer weight.

• The diameter of the threaded shank ofthe hitch ball must be matched to the ballmount hole diameter. The hitch ballshank should be no more than 1/16”smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

• The threaded shank of the hitch ball mustbe long enough to be properly secured tothe ball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mountThe hitch ball is attached to the ball mountand the ball mount is inserted into thehitch receiver. Choose a proper class ballmount based on the trailer weight. Addi-tionally, the ball mount should be chosen tokeep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Bumper towingThe Genuine NISSAN step bumper has pro-visions to install a trailer hitch ball and isdesigned to tow trailers of a maximumweight of 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

NOTE:

The trailer hitch ball cannot be installedon the step bumper if the receiver-typeframe mounted hitch is installed on thevehicle.To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circlein the center of the step bumper OA , thenremove it to install the trailer hitch ball.

LTI2227


Weight carrying hitchesA weight carrying or “dead weight” ballmount is one that is designed to carry thewhole amount of tongue weight and grossweight directly on the ball mount and onthe receiver.

Weight distribution hitchThis type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of barsattach to the ball mount and to the trailerto distribute the tongue weight (hitchweight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can'tcarry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongueweight transferred through the frame andpushing down on the front wheels. Thisgives stability to the tow vehicle.A weight-distributing hitch system (ClassIV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towingequipment manufacturers to determine ifthey recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system mayaffect the operation of trailer surgebrakes. If you are considering use of aweight-distributing hitch system with asurge brake-equipped trailer, check withthe surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-turer to determine if and how this can bedone.Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using theweight-distributing hitch system.General set-up instructions are as follows:1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion and the doors closed, allow the ve-hicle to stand for several minutes so thatit can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference pointon the front and rear bumpers at thecenter of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-just the hitch equalizers so that the frontbumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 –13 mm) of the reference height mea-sured in step 2. The rear bumper shouldbe no higher than the reference heightmeasured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. Ifthe rear bumper is higher than themeasured reference height whenloaded, the vehicle may handle unpre-dictably which could cause a loss of ve-hicle control and cause serious per-sonal injury or property damage.

Sway control deviceSudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-feting caused by other vehicles can affecttrailer handling. Sway control devices maybe used to help control these affects. If youchoose to use one, contact a reputabletrailer hitch supplier to make sure the swaycontrol device will work with the vehicle,hitch, trailer and the trailer's brake system.Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using thesway control device.


Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to towtrailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.(907 kg).

Class II hitchClass II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500lbs. (1,587 kg).

Class III hitchClass III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,ball mount and hitch ball) can be used totow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000lbs. (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitchClass IV hitches are weight carrying (WC)and weight distributing (WD) hitches de-pending on the vehicle and hitch specifica-tions. Not all Class IV hitches are rated to beboth. See the specific hitch for that infor-mation. Class IV trailer hitch equipment (re-ceiver, ball mount and hitch ball) used asweight carrying are rated up to 10,000 lbs.(4,535 kg) gross trailer weight (GTW) with amaximum trailer tongue weight (TW) of

1,000 lbs. (453 kg). Class IV hitches used forweight distributing are rated up to 14,000lbs. (6,350 kg) gross trailer weight (GTW)with a maximum trailer tongue weight (TW)of 1,400 lbs. (635 kg). A Class IV hitch usuallyhas a 2" square receiver opening. A higherclass drawbar does not increase the tow-ing capacity of the hitch. To use this class ofhitch for weight distribution requires aweight distribution system. Class IV hitchesattach to the vehicle frame only. A weightdistributing hitch should be used to towtrailers that weigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IVweigh distributing trailer hitch that has a14,000 lbs. (6,350 kg) maximum weight rat-ing, but your vehicle is only capable of tow-ing the maximum trailer weights shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart in thissection.

5th wheel/gooseneckA 5th wheel or gooseneck trailer can betowed by installing a 5th wheel or goose-neck trailer hitch. These types of hitchesare mounted in the bed of the pick-up. Aprofessional trailer equipment suppliershould install these hitches as it is very im-portant to mount the hitch correctly to dis-

tribute the king pin weight for the properload carrying and sway controlperformance.The king pin weight should be 15% of thefully loaded trailer. Make sure the king pinweight does not cause the gross vehicleweight to exceed the Gross MaximumWeight Rating or the rear axle weight toexceed the Rear Gross Axle Weight rating.For additional information, see “Maximumload limits” (P. 10-34).The weight of the trailer should not exceedthe maximum towing capacity for the ve-hicle. For additional information, see “Tow-ing load/specification” chart (P. 10-37).Make sure the trailer design allows for thecorrect vehicle to trailer clearances beforepurchasing a 5th wheel trailer.

WARNING

• The hitch should not be attached toor affect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

• Do not use axle-mounted hitches.• Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.


• To reduce the possibility of addi-tional damage if your vehicle isstruck from the rear, where practical,remove the receiver when not in use.

• Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securelymounted.

• When towing with the hitch ballmounted to the rear bumper, do notmake sharp turns. The trailer maycontact the bumper and cause dam-age to the bumper or trailer.

• When towing a 5th wheel trailer, donot make sharp turns while driving orbacking. The trailer may contact thevehicle and cause damage to boththe trailer and vehicle. CAUTION

• A 5th wheel hitch adapter is neces-sary to use an aftermarket 5th wheelhitch. A Genuine NISSAN 5th wheelhitch adapter (as shown) may beavailable at a NISSAN dealer.

• Ensure kit components are properlystored when not in use. Improperlystowed components could result inserious personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden stop.

Gooseneck hitch ball and safety chainanchor attachment installation1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and


2. Remove the gooseneck hitch ball andsafety chain anchor attachments fromthe storage pouch.

LTI2305


3. Remove the center and both of the rearcaps from the puck plugs.

• Once removed, place the pucks in thestorage pouch for future use.

4. Lift the handle from the center of thehitch ball and rotate 90° from the restingposition.

5. Position the ball bearings to the sides ofthe truck bed and Insert the gooseneckhitch ball into the center receiver tube ofthe truck bed.

LTI2209 LTI2160 LTI2210


6. Rotate the handle 90° seat the handleback to the original resting position. Ifthe handle does not seat fully, rotate thehitch ball until the handle drops into theoriginal resting position.

7. Place the safety chain anchor attach-ments into the q-turn pucks.

8. Rotate the safety chain anchor attach-ments 90° until the center of the anchorseats into place.

LTI2164 LTI2211 LTI2212


NOTE:

Removal of the gooseneck hitch ball andsafety chain anchor attachments are inthe reverse order of installation. To re-move safety chain anchor attachment,lift the centerO1 , rotate 90°, and liftsafety chain anchor attachment away.

Tire pressures• When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recommendedcold tire pressure indicated on theTire and Loading Information label.

• Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-ing and proper inflation pressureshould be in accordance with thetrailer and tire manufacturer'sspecifications.

Safety chainsAlways use suitable safety chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. The safetychains should be crossed and should beattached to the hitch, not to the vehiclebumper or axle. The safety chains can beattached to the bumper if the hitch ball ismounted to the bumper. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turn-ing corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially availablepower-type module/converter mustbe used to provide power for all trailerlighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-tery as a direct power source for alltrailer lights while using the vehicle taillight, stop light and turn signal circuits

as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more than 15milliamps from the stop and tail lampcircuits. Using a module/converter thatexceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle's electricalsystem. See a reputable trailer retailerto obtain the proper equipment and tohave it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federaland/or local regulations. For assistance inhooking up trailer lights, it is recommendedthat you contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped withthe optional trailer tow package areequipped with a 7-pin trailer harness con-nector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat4-pin connector, an adapter will be neededto connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.Adapters are available at auto parts storesand hitch retailers.

Trailer brakes (if so equipped)If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it is prop-erly installed.

LTI2192


Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer har-ness connector are pre-wired for a trailerbrake controller. It is recommended thatyou visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brakeadapter harness.When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, moststates require a separate braking systemon trailers with a loaded weight above aspecific amount. Make sure the trailermeets the local regulations and the regu-lations where you plan to tow.

WARNING

The Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR) must never exceed the vehiclemanufacturers recommendation.

Several types of braking systems areavailable.Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator ismounted on the trailer tongue with a hy-draulic line running to each trailer wheel.Surge brakes are activated by the trailerpushing against the hitch ball when thetow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surgebrakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system,there is no hydraulic or electric connection

for brake operation between the tow ve-hicle and the trailer.

CAUTION

Your factory trailer brake control unitwill not activate surge-style trailerbrakes

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric brakingsystems are activated by an electronic sig-nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe-cial brake-sensing module). If electric trailerbrakes are used, see “Electric trailer brakecontroller" (P. 10-49).Have a professional supplier of towingequipment make sure the trailer brakes areproperly installed and demonstrate properbrake function testing.

WARNING

The NISSAN trailer brake controller hasbeen verified to be compatible withtrailers having electric actuated drumbrakes (one to four axles) and electric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will not acti-vate hydraulic surge-style trailerbrakes

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake systemdirectly to the vehicle brake system.


Electric trailer brake controller (ifso equipped)Trailers equipped with electric brakes mayrequire the installation of an aftermarkettrailer brake controller.Your vehicle may be equipped with a con-nector and jumper harness that is specifi-cally designed to be used when installingan aftermarket brake controller.To install the electric trailer brake controllerjumper harness, perform the followingprocedure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat tothe rearmost position.

2. Apply the parking brake to access thejumper harness connector.

3. Locate the jumper harness connectorunder the lower portion of the instru-ment panel. The connector is taped tothe wiring harness OA as indicated.

Wire color designation for electric trailerbrake controller jumper harness.

LTI0117example

LTI0122


WIRE COLOR NOTERED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp

switch to trailer brakecontroller.

BLACK Brake controller ground(-).

BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controllerswitched output.

RED/BLUE Trailer brake controllerillumination.

RED Fused trailer brake con-troller battery feed (B+).

4. Peel off the tape and connect thejumper harness to the connector OB .

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Install the aftermarket electric trailerbrake controller according to the manu-facturer's instructions.

�1 Gain –

�2 Gain +

�3 Manual control lever

�4 Boost

Trailer brake controller unit (if soequipped)The Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU), lo-cated on the lower instrument panel, is adevice that assists the vehicle in havingeffective and smooth braking while towinga trailer.

LTI2228 LTI2229 LTI2157


Operating modes:• Automatic mode: This is the normal op-

eration of the TBCU depending on thegain and boost settings adjusted by thecustomer. This mode will activate whenvehicle brake pedal is pressed.

• Manual mode: This mode is initiated byadjusting the manual control lever fromresting position. This mode will provideoutput power to trailer brakes withoutapplying the vehicle brake pedal.

To determine the output operation of thesystem:

• Gain + and Gain - : Used to increase ordecrease the braking force supplied tothe trailer brakes. To adjust the gain, pressGain + or Gain - to the desired point (0-10).For example: gain setting 6.0 is a typicalstarting point for heavy loads.

• Boost: Used to adjust the feel of the au-tomatic brake event that occurs whenthe vehicle brake pedal is applied. To setup boost, press Boost button once to dis-play for current boost setting (display for3 seconds). Keep pressing to increaseboost level until the desired level (0-3) isachieved.

• Manual Control Lever: Provides brakeoutput power to trailer brakes withoutapplying the vehicle brake pedal. Theamount of brake output supplied corre-sponds to the amount of pinch pressureapplied to the manual control lever.

Prodigy® P2 initial screen at start up (15 seconds*) Boost off

Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature notengaged

Boost level 1

Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature notengaged

Boost level 2

Power to Prodigy® P2, trailer not connected Boost level 3

Gain feature is adjustable from to by increments of

*If sustained for longer, check trailer connections or visit a dealer for service


WARNING

Do not exceed Gross Combined WeightRating (GVWR). For additional informa-tion about GVWR, see “Towing load/specification” (P. 10-37).

Pre-towing tips• Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle ifit has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes of eithercondition.

• Always secure items in the trailer to pre-vent load shift while driving.

• Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center ofgravity low.

• Load the trailer so approximately 60% ofthe trailer load is in the front half and 40%is in the back half. Also make sure the loadis balanced side to side.

• Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation,and trailer wheel lug nuts every time youattach a trailer to the vehicle.

LTI2156This graphic shows the suggested boost levels for different trailer sizes relative to

the vehicle size.


• Be certain your rearview mirrors conformto all federal, state or local regulations. Ifnot, install any mirrors required for towingbefore driving the vehicle.

• Determine the overall height of the ve-hicle and trailer so the required clearanceis known.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understandingof the vehicle's behavior, you should prac-tice turning, stopping and backing up in anarea which is free from traffic. Steering sta-bility and braking performance will besomewhat different than under normaldriving conditions.• Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.• Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-tently becoming unlatched.

• Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.• Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

• When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you wantthe trailer to go. Make small correctionsand back up slowly. If possible, havesomeone guide you when you are back-ing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicleand trailer when parking. Parking on aslope is not recommended; however, if youmust do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on thedownhill side of the vehicle and trailerwheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,slowly release the brake pedal until theblocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if soequipped) indicates the transfer case isin 4H, 4LO, or 2H and that the ATP light isoff. If the indicator light is flashing,or the ATP light is ON, make sure thetransmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and turnthe 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. For addi-tional information, see “Automatictransmission park warning light” (P. 2-13)and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” (P. 5-107).

7. Turn off the engine.To drive away:1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailerare clear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store theblocks.


• While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle maydecrease overall stability. Therefore, tomaintain adequate control, reduce yourspeed and shift to a lower gear. Avoidlong or repeated use of the brakes whendescending a hill, as this reduces theireffectiveness and could cause overheat-ing. Shifting to a lower gear instead pro-vides “engine braking” and reduces theneed to brake as frequently.

• If the engine coolant temperature rises toa high temperature, see “If your vehicleoverheats” (P. 6-12).

• Trailer towing requires more fuel thannormal circumstances.

• Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle'sfirst 500 miles (805 km).

• For the first 500 miles (805 km) that youdo tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80km/h).

• Have your vehicle serviced more oftenthan at intervals specified. For additionalinformation, see the “Maintenance andschedules” section of this manual.

• When making a turn, your trailer wheelswill be closer to the inside of the turn thanyour vehicle wheels. To compensate forthis, make a larger than normal turningradius during the turn.

• Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,possibly causing vehicle sway. When be-ing passed by larger vehicles, be pre-pared for possible changes in crosswindsthat could affect vehicle handling.

Trailer Sway Assist:To minimize trailer sway, your vehicle mayapply braking to individual wheels basedon input from your vehicle sensors and ve-hicle speed. Trailer sway control is a func-tion of the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system and is active when the VDC func-tion is enabled.

CAUTION

If the VDC-OFF switch is on (meaningVDC system OFF), the Trailer Sway As-sist is also disabled

When Trailer Sway Assist is in operation, theVDC warning light blinks. When vehicle con-trol is regained, VDC warning light will turnOFF.For additional information about the VDCsystem, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)OFF switch” (P. 2-59) and “Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) system” (P. 5-120).

If Trailer Sway Assist activates, do thefollowing:1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

to allow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditionsallow. This combination will help stabilizethe vehicle

CAUTIONDo not try to correct trailer sway bysteering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently applythe brakes and pull to the side of theroad in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it isbalanced. For additional information,see “Pre-towing tips” (P. 10-51).

NOTE:

Trailer Sway Assist cannot reduce trailersway in all situations.• Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requiresconsiderably more distance than normalpassing. Remember, the length of thetrailer must also pass the other vehiclebefore you can safely change lanes.


• Use the Tow Mode or downshift thetransmission to a lower gear for enginebraking when driving down steep or longhills. This will help slow the vehicle withoutapplying the brakes.

• Avoid holding the brake pedal down toolong or too frequently. This could causethe brakes to overheat, resulting in re-duced braking efficiency.

• Increase your following distance to allowfor greater stopping distances while tow-ing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brakegradually.

• NISSAN recommends that the cruisecontrol (if so equipped) not be used whiletowing a trailer.

• While towing a trailer, do not use the fol-lowing systems (if so equipped):–– the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

system–– the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system–– the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system–– the Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) system–– the Intelligent Forward Collision Warn-

ing (I-FCW) system–– the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)

system

–– the Moving Object Detection (MOD)system

–– the Cross Traffic Alert system–– the Rear Sonar system

• Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehiclesthat are towing trailers. Obey the localspeed limits.

• Check your hitch, trailer wiring harnessconnections, and trailer wheel lug nutsafter 50 miles (80 km) of travel and atevery break.

• When launching a boat, don't allow thewater level to go over the exhaust tailpipe or rear bumper.

• Make sure you disconnect the trailerlights before backing the trailer into thewater or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, seethe “Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

Tow modeUsing tow mode is recommended whenpulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavyload. Press the TOW MODE switch to acti-vate tow mode. The indicator light on theTOW MODE switch illuminates when towmode is selected. Press the TOW MODEswitch again to turn tow mode off. Towmode is automatically canceled when theignition switch is turned off.Tow mode includes the following features:• Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shifts

when pulling a trailer or hauling a load upa grade.

• Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — auto-matically downshifts when driving downa grade with a trailer or heavy load to helpcontrol vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with notrailer/load or light trailer/light load will notcause any damage. However, fueleconomy may be reduced and thetransmission/engine driving characteris-tics may feel unusual.


When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, seethe “Do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

FLAT TOWING FOR 2-WHEEL DRIVE(2WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)Towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground is sometimes called flat towing.This method is sometimes used whentowing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

• Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmissiondamage.

• Never flat tow your 2WD vehicle.• Never tow your 2WD vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground. Doing somay cause serious and expensivedamage to the powertrain.

• DO NOT tow your 2WD vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground (flat tow-ing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internaltransmission parts due to lack oftransmission lubrication.

• For emergency towing proceduressee “Towing recommended byNISSAN” (P. 6-13).

FLAT TOWING FOR 4-WHEEL DRIVE(4WD) VEHICLE (if so equipped)Towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground is sometimes called flat towing.This method is sometimes used whentowing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

• Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmissiondamage.

• Never flat tow your 4WD vehicle.• DO NOT tow your 4WD vehicle with

any wheels on the ground. Doing somay cause serious and expensivedamage to the powertrain.

• For emergency towing proceduressee “Towing recommended byNISSAN” (P. 6-13).

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate vehicledolly MUST be placed under the towed ve-hicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dollymanufacturer's recommendations whenusing their product.

NOTE:

If the battery is completely drained thetransmission will not manually shift toother positions.


NISSAN does not make a snowplow for TI-TAN and has not evaluated the suitability ofits trucks for use as snowplow platforms.Instead, the snowplow manufacturers es-tablish minimum vehicle requirements fortheir various plow products and they makethe determination as to which vehicle plat-forms are suitable, based on their indi-vidual product specifications. Consult thesnowplow manufacturers and sellers con-cerning the fitness of the TITAN for use withtheir products. NISSAN advises cautionwhenever installing aftermarket parts andaccessories because these products havenot been tested or certified by NISSAN.Please reference the NISSAN Body Builder’sguide for the appropriate upfit capacitiesand requirements of the TITAN XD ‘Snow-plow Prep’ package (if so equipped) or ‘HDFront GAWR’ Package (if so equipped).

WARNING

• Installing a snowplow may affect ve-hicle handling. This may cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicleand could result in vehicle damage,serious injury, or death.

• A snowplow attached may affect theoperation of the air bags. Use ex-treme caution while driving andplowing to avoid vehicle damage, se-rious injury, or death.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-ity Grades: All passenger car tires mustconform to federal safety requirements inaddition to these grades.Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature ATreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rat-ing based on the wear rate of the tire whentested under controlled conditions on aspecified government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wear oneand one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

SNOW PLOW UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


Traction AA, A, B and CThe traction grades, from highest to low-est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include ac-celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and CThe temperature grades are A (the high-est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat, and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-perature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-cessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passengercar tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than the mini-mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, under-inflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or in combi-nation, can cause heat build-up andpossible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-lowing emission warranties:For USA1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance WarrantyDetails of this warranty may be found withother vehicle warranties in your WarrantyInformation Booklet which comes withyour NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,you may obtain a replacement by writingto:• Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For CanadaEmission Control System WarrantyDetails of this warranty may be found withother vehicle warranties in your WarrantyInformation Booklet which comes withyour NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive aWarranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,you may obtain a replacement by writingto:• Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY


For USAIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-fying NISSAN.If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a re-call and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or NISSAN.To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safetyfrom http://www.safercar.gov.You may notify NISSAN by contact-ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.For CanadaIf you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform Trans-port Canada in addition to notifyingNISSAN.If Transport Canada receives com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayrequest that NISSAN conduct a recallcampaign. However, TransportCanada cannot become involved inindividual problems between you,your dealer, or NISSAN.You may contact Transport Cana-da's Defect Investigations and Re-

calls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safetydefects online at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm(English speakers) or http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/menu.htm(French speakers)Or contact Transport Canada bymail at:Transport Canada Motor VehicleSafety Investigations Laboratory80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1Additional information concerningmotor vehicle safety may be ob-tained from Transport Canada'sRoad Safety Information Centre at1-800-333-0371 or online atwww.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (Englishspeakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers).

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS


To notify NISSAN of any safety con-cerns please contact our ConsumerInformation Centre toll free at1-800-387-0122.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with 4-Wheel Drive(4WD) should never be tested using atwo wheel dynamometer (such as thedynamometers used by some statesfor emissions testing), or similar equip-ment. Make sure you inform the testfacility personnel that your vehicle isequipped with 4WD before it is placedon a dynamometer. Using the wrongtest equipment may result in transmis-sion damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in seri-ous vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some statesand Canadian Provinces, your vehicle maybe required to be in what is called the“ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emissioncontrol system.The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the ready condition canbe obtained by ordinary usage of thevehicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-tion. Before taking the I/M test, check thevehicle's inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Place the ignitionswitch in the ON position without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) comes on steady for 20 secondsand then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M testcondition is “not ready”. If the MIL does notblink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-tion is “ready”. It is recommended that youvisit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST


This vehicle is equipped with an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purpose of anEDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, datathat will assist in understanding how a ve-hicle's systems performed. The EDR is de-signed to record data related to vehicle dy-namics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-cord such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;• Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;• How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.• Sounds are not recorded.These data can help provide a better un-derstanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR dataare recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normal drivingconditions and no personal data (e.g.,name, gender, age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDRdata with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer and NISSANdealer, other parties, such as law enforce-ment, that have the special equipment, canread the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only beaccessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for thismodel year and prior can be purchased. AGenuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information foryour vehicle. This manual is the same oneused by the factory-trained techniciansworking at NISSAN dealerships. GenuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also bepurchased.For USAFor current pricing and availability of Genu-ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:www.nissan-techinfo.comFor current pricing and availability of Genu-ine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:1-800-247-5321For CanadaTo purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSANService Manual or Owner’s Manual, for thismodel year and prior, please contact yournearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in yourarea, call the NISSAN Information Center at1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-resentative will assist you.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


11 IndexA

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS)system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-119Aiming control, headlights . . . . . . . . .2-50Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact airbag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61, 1-76

Air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . .1-83Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-83, 2-16Air bag warning light,supplemental. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-83, 2-16Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-21Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . .4-32, 4-38Air conditioner specification label . .10-20Air conditioner system refrigerantrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Heater and air conditionercontrols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-42

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33Alarm system (See vehicle securitysystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-32Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-118Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . .2-84Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-30Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) withPedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . .5-81Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129, 8-16Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-27

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-16Belt (See drive belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Blind Spot Warning (BSW). . . . . . . . . .5-32Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49

BrakeAnti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-118Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-32Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Brake wear indicators. . . . . . .2-22, 8-23Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-24Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-119Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-106Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-13Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32

C

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .10-18Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-86Cargo (See vehicle loadinginformation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22Cargo light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 2-35Child restraints . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 1-30

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30Precautions on childrestraints . . . . . . . .1-34, 1-40, 1-45, 1-50Top tether strap anchor pointlocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-9Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4Climate control seat switch. . . . . . . . .2-54Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-129Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89Controls

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-38Heater and air conditioner controls(manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-8

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50, 5-51Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77Curtain side-impact and rollover airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79

D

Daytime Running LightSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50, 2-51, 8-30Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-51Display

Information display . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Driving

Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . .5-129Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11

Driving the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Dual power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86

E

Eco Drive Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-115Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-107Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-114Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61Emergency call (SOS) button . . . . . . . .2-64Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-15, 6-2Emission control information label . . . .10-19Emission control system warranty . . . .10-57Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine compartment checklocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-8Engine cooling system. . . . . . . . . . .8-5Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-10Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-15Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-18Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-8Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-10Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-60Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-4Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2Explanation of scheduled maintenanceitems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-69Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76

F

Flashers (See hazard warning flasherswitch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

11-2

FluidBrake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-15

Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Forward Driving Aids

System TemporarilyUnavailable . . . . . .2-37, 5-68, 5-87, 5-99

Front air bag system (See supplementalrestraint system). . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61, 1-76Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . .5-124Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-6Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . .2-70, 2-71Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-107Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-33

Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) SystemTire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-106Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . .2-90, 2-91, 2-93, 2-94Gauge

Automatic transmission fluid temperaturegauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-8Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . .2-10Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80

H

Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11Headlight aiming control . . . . . . . . . .2-50Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-44Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-44Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Headlights, aiming control . . . . . . . . .2-50Heated rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-57

HeaterHeater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-38Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-39

Heater and air conditioner (automatic). .4-37Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-59Hill descent control system . . . . . . . .5-123Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-124HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . .2-90, 2-91, 2-93, 2-94Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53

I

Ignition switchPush-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-13

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-16In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-107Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . .3-30Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-51Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-4Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-51Intelligent Around View Monitor. . . . . . .4-11Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) . . . . . . .5-52Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . .5-102Intelligent Forward Collision Warning(I-FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-91

11-3

Intelligent Key systemKey operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-15Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-20Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-18

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-27Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-15

KeysNISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-9NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Systemkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . .10-20C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-18Emission control information label . .10-19

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-18Tire and Loading Information label . .10-19Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-17Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-83

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . .5-27LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30License plate

Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-21Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-83, 2-16Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-32Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-13Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-32Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-44Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-44Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-64Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-90Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-90

LockChild safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-9Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Low fuel warning light. . . . . .2-16, 2-21, 2-33Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-18Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Luggage (See vehicle loadinginformation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-22Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-24Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Malfunction indicator light . . . . . .2-15, 2-20Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-90Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70, 2-71Memory seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39, 3-41Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-10

Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-51Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-30

11-4

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Rearview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86, 7-5Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-23

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-9NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-16NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil and oil filterrecommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-76Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-12Owner's manual order form. . . . . . . .10-60

Owner's manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-60

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-24Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-116

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Personal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-90Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66, 2-67Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-83Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-117Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-83

Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66, 2-67Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-117Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Precautions

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8Precautions on boosterseats . . . . . . . . . . .1-34, 1-40, 1-45, 1-50Precautions on childrestraints . . . . . . . .1-34, 1-40, 1-45, 1-50Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-16

Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 1-69Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-86

Rain sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-59Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . .5-76Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-42Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34, 2-65Rear power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) System . . .4-43Rear sliding window . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85Rear sonar system OFF switch. . . . . . .2-63Rear window and/or outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Recorders

Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-60Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . .10-8Registering a vehicle in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-21, 5-18

11-5

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-58

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . .3-9Child seat belts. .1-28, 1-34, 1-40, 1-45, 1-50Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-58

SeatMemory seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39, 3-41

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-6

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-26Injured person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-16Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16, 7-7Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-24Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-19

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55

Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Security system (NISSAN Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-16Security systems

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-38Self-adjusting brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Service manual order form . . . . . . . .10-60Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-42Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . .5-20Shoulder belt height adjustment. . . . . .1-24Side air bag system (See supplemental sideair bag, curtain and rollover air bagsystems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-79Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-56Spark plug replacement. . . . . . . . . . .8-20Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-6SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-83Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-120Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 8-18Precautions when starting anddriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

SteeringPower steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-117

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-70Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-74Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86, 7-5Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-83Supplemental air bag warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-83, 2-16Supplemental front impact air bagsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61, 1-76Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . .1-83Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 1-69

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-53Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Automatic power window switch . . .2-84Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2Headlight aiming control. . . . . . . . .2-50Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-44Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-44Hill descent control switch. . . . . . . .2-59Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-51

11-6

Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-6Power inverter switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-62Rear sonar system OFF switch . . . . .2-63Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-8Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-16Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-46Tire and Loading Information label . .10-19Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . .8-46Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-56Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-35, 10-10

Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5, 6-3Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63

Towing2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-15Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-55Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-37Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-33Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) . . . . . . . .5-24Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) . . . .2-64Transceiver

HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver. . . . . . .2-90, 2-91, 2-93, 2-94

Transfer case shifting procedures . . . .5-108Transmission

Driving with automatictransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Travel (See registering a vehicle in anothercountry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Truck - camper loading . . . . . . . . . . .10-31Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

U

Under seat storage bin . . . . .2-72, 2-75, 2-76Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-56USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-42Using 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-107

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-19Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-11Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-120Vehicle identification. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-17Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . .2-39, 5-16Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . .2-23Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-22Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15, 6-16Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Vehicle security system(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 5-16Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-83, 2-16Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-15Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-15Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-33

11-7

Low fuel warning light . . . .2-16, 2-21, 2-33Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Passenger air bag and status light . . .1-64Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-16Supplemental air bag warninglight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-83, 2-16Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-38Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-83

Warning lights, indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Warning systems switch . . . . . . . . . .2-58Weights(See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-11Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . .8-35, 10-10When traveling or registering in anothercountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82

Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-83Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-83Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-82Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-83Rear sliding window. . . . . . . . . . . .2-85

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Wiper

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-41

11-8

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:NISSAN recommends the use of unleadedpremium gasoline with an octane rating ofat least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number(Research octane number 96). If unleadedpremium gasoline is not available, you mayuse unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Re-search octane number 91), but you maynotice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

• Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affectthe warranty coverage.

• Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, becausethis will damage the three-waycatalyst.

• Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in yourvehicle. Your vehicle is not designedto run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifi-cally designed for E-15 or E-85 fuelcan adversely affect the emissioncontrol devices and systems of thevehicle. Damage caused by such fuelis not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-hicle Limited Warranty.

• Do not use fuel that contains the oc-tane booster methylcyclopentadi-enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).Using fuel containing MMT may ad-versely affect vehicle performanceand vehicle emissions. Not all fueldispensers are labeled to indicateMMT content, so you may have toconsult your gasoline retailer formore details. Note that Federal andCalifornia laws prohibit the use ofMMT in reformulated gasoline.

• U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to beidentified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common ab-breviation or the appropriate per-centage for that region.

For additional information, see “Recom-mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”(P. 10-2).

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:See “Recommended fluids/lubricants andcapacities” (P. 10-2)

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:Refer to the Tire and Loading Informationlabel.The label is typically located on the driverside center pillar or on the driver's door. Foradditional information, see “Wheels andtires” (P. 8-35).

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ofvehicle use, follow the break-in procedurerecommendations for the future reliabilityand economy of your new vehicle. For ad-ditional information, see “Break-in sched-ule” (P. 5-106). Failure to follow these recom-mendations may result in vehicle damageor shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

A61-D

Printing : November 2020Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.OM21EA 0A61U1

Date post:	24-Jan-2021
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION · Nissan North America,Inc. Consumer Affairs Department...

Documents